I 



1 












- 



>%. 













''«&. 












V 



v ^ 



"% ^ 
X ^. 






c*- 



fe X X "■> V> s 










C> V . . ' -J 















7 oo S 












"^ 



%** 



o 



















^ 



'^ 



-> 



V* 



v. 



.0 









N ' 






*< - 

; 

* '.V v, ^ 









X < 



^% 




%/! 



I* i 



°^*v 






THE STUDENT'S 



GUJARAT! GRAMMAR 



WITH EXERCtSES AND VOCABULARY 



BY 






GEO: P. TAYLOR > m. a., d. b Sj 

» » 

(irish presbyterian mission, gujarat) 

Honorary Fellow of the 

University of Bombay* 



Second Edition. 



WHACKER & Co., Ltd., BOMBAY. 
1908. 




Registered under Act XXV of 1867. 



40*416 
• '31 







[ Dedication to the Rev. William Wallace Brown, M.A, J 



G. W, B., 

AMICO DILECTISSIMO DESIDERATISSIMO, 

EXIMIA MORUM SUAVITATE PRAEDITO, 

LITTERARUM ORIENTALIUM PERITO, 

HOC OPUSCULUM 

DEDICAT 



PREFACE, 

Whek on leave in Ireland two years ago, I was occasionally asked by young 
friends looking forward to mission-work in this country whether there was any 
Gujarat! Gararurnar which they might with advantage read before coming out to. 
India. Although possessing at that time some eighteen different Gujarat! 
Grammars, not one could I recommend as of real service to an Englishman 
beginning his study of the language without a teacher. Even those of us who, 
have striven to leai-n Gujarat! in Gujarat itself and with the assistance of a 
Gujarat! Pandit have frequently found occasion to deplore the lack of an accurate 
and scholarly Grammar of the language. That of the Rev. Wm. Clarkson, 
published in 1847, was most helpful in its day, but it fails to supply the present 
need, if for no other reason because the modern spelling of Gujarat! words differs, 
widely from that which seems to have been in vogue half a century ago. My 
father's Gujarat! Grammar, composed in 1867 for Gujarat! readers, was written in- 
Gujarat!, and hence, though still the standard work on the subject, obviously can. 
be of but little service to the English student until he has made considerable 
progress in the language. It is in the hope of providing a manual that will 
exhibit the main facts and principles of Gujarat! Grammar in a form intelligible to. 
any one of average English education that I have ventured upon the publication of 
the present work, consisting largely of selections from grammatical notes gathered 
during the last sixteen years. Should this grammar prove of use to my 
fellow-countrymen in Gujarat, whether in civil or military employ, very especially 
should it be helpful to my brethren in the Mission field and in any way serve to 
aid them in the discharge of the duties of their holy office, I shall feel myself 
amply rewarded. 

Though my constant endeavour has been to secure accuracy and simplicity, 
not novelty, there are none the less certain features in which the present Gujarat! 
Grammar differs from those that have preceded it. 

1. The declension of the noun has been so far simplified by the introductioa 
of the base-^form that a single rule suffices for the declension of any noun 
in the language. See § 24. 

2. The chapter on the numerals contains what is, I believe, the first exposition 
of the "Multiplicational Forms" and Fractional. See §§ 46, 47. 

3. In the Paradigms for the conjugation of the verb the Tense-scheme is 
very much simpler and clearer than that which has hitherto obtained. 
The arrangement adopted may be stated briefly as follows: Action, 
whether Indefinite, Continuous, Intentional, or Perfect, may apply either 
to Present, Past, or Future time, whence naturally arise twelve different 
tense-forms, each of which accordingly finds a place in the Paradigms, 
See pages 176-183. 

it. Compound verbs, which constitute so marked a feature of Gujaratl in 
common with the other North-Indian languages, and which present so 
serious an obstacle to beginners, have been explained in considerable 
detail. See §§ 80-89. 



VI 

f>. A very full list of prepositions has been given, accompanied by the 

meaning and govsrnnient of each. See § 97. 

6. The syntax of the two cases called, in accordance with the nomenclature 

proposed by the late lamented Prof. E. H. Palmer, ' Subjective * and 

'Objective,' has received especial attention in §§131-135, The crux of 

GujaratJ Grammar is the presence or absence of the -n form for the object 

of a transitive verb. Whether or not the views expressed in this grammar 

will commend themselves for final adoption, I am confident that the solution 

of the problem lies on the lines herein indicated." 

Subjects more or less connected with, yet not essential to, Gujarat! Grammar 

have been relegated to the appendices. The Tables in Appendix III., in which the 

sounds represented by the letters of the GujaratI alphabet have been somewhat 

minutely classified, are respectfully submitted for the consideration of students of 

phonetics. In Appendix VI. genealogical tables have been drawn up so as to- 

exhibit most of the numerous terms employed in GujaratI to express family 

relationships; and, in the hope of assisting the memory to retain these names, 

groups of what I have ventured to designate ' inverse terms' have been added. 

In the preparation of this grammar I am indebted first and foremost to my 
father's ^w^lcft 9tlHl^ «*U&^, and next to the small but excellent grammars by 
my esteemed friends, Mr. Manchershaw Pallonji Kaikobad and Mr. Bhagvan 
S'ivs'ahkar Bhatt, both of the Mission High School at Surat. 

It remains to express my grateful obligations to the late Rev. R. Gillespie, B. A. 
who was one of the most accurate and fluent of Gujarati speakers, for his kindness in 
reading through and correcting the work while yet in manuscript,. My thanks are 
also due to the Rev. W. Beatty, D. D., and the Uev. J. Shillidy, D. D., for revisiug 
the proofs and for many valuable suggestions. Nor can I omit to mention the 
very great assistance rendered by my wife, who, by writing out with her own 
hand the entire manuscript, has contributed largely to ensuring accuracy of 
statement and simplicity of arrangement. Indeed but for the help and 
encouragement she so readily gave, this grammar would never have been pblished. 

G. P. T. 

Ahmadabad, 

June 1893. 

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 



The following are the more important additions or changes introduced into 
the Second Edition of this Grammar. 

1. The short chapter on Transliteration has been entirely rewritten, Since 
the First Edition appeared (in 1893), a Transliteration-Scheme, originally 
prepared for submission to the Tenth Oriental Congress, has received the 
approval not only of that Congress but also of the Council of the Royal 
Asiatic Society. Accordingly in this Second Edition we have adopted for 
the transliteration of Gujarati characters the equivalents shown in that 
scheme. 



YTt 

2. The Accent, or "Word-stress, in Gujarati and— a closely allied subject— the 
Omission of 'inherent a' are now given more than the passing notice they 
previously received* In the treatment of these themes Dr. G. A. Grierson's 
article on "The Phonology of the Modern Indb*Aryan Vernaculars," 
reprinted from the ''Zeitsnhrift der Deutsehen Morgenlandischeo 
Gesellschnft," proved of special service. In his " Linguistic Survey of 
India " and in his contribution to the Census Report of 1901, the same 
scholar has supplied material, which I have freely utilised in rewriting 
Appendix A. on the Ancestry of the Gujarati Language and in preparing the 
new Appendix 3 B. on the Dialects of Gujarati, 

3. To Dr. J, J. Ghose I am indebted for the Table of Classification of the 
Gujarati Consonants which appears for the first time in this edition. Similar 
Tables relating to the consonantal sounds in Arabic, Persian, Hindustani, 
and Hindi are given in his article on " The Phonetics of Hindustani" 
contributed to "Indian Education *' for June, 1907. 

4. A list of some fifty Gujardtl Proverbs has been added. As furnishing 
material for translation into English, they have been assigned a place 
beside the Exercises, 

These and the minor changes made, while responsible for more than forty 
added pages, have not necessitated any alteration in the plan of the book or the 
arrangement of its parts, The numbering too of the paragraphs is the same as in 
the former edition. It has been necessary, however, to raise the original price of 
the book by one rupee. 

In 1904 the Educational Department, after ascertaining the opinions of several 
Gujarati scholars, issued certain Rules of spelling for the guidance of the Vernacular 
Text-Books Revision Committee, at that time engaged in the preparation of a 
new Gujarati Reading Series. These rules and their observance in the Reading 
Books now prescribed for the Vernacular Schools throughout Gujarat will 
undoubtedly exercise a powerful and beneficial influence in promoting uniformity 
in the spelling of Gujarati words. The time was indeed ripe for some authoritative 
action in the matter, inasmuch as on the part of a few Gujarati litterateurs an 
aggressive policy was being adopted with a view to the 'reformation ' of Gujarati 
spelling. This action evoked opposition, and as a consequence there was a distinct 
danger of different 'schools' arising, each eager to champion its own peculiar 
system of orthography. Ere long the natural result would have been a 
bewildering confusion, every man spelling according to his own fancy. Under 
these circumstances the authorities in the Educational Department very wisely 
decided that in the books to be issued by them one and one only system of 
spelling should be adopted, and this decision they have carried into effect. For 
this second edition of my Grammar I have accepted in their entirety the rules 
approved by the Department, and have conformed to them the spelling of every 
Gujarati word occurring in the book. After all, however, the application of these 
rules has occasioned surprisingly few changes. As it is every way desirable that 
students of the Gujarati Language should be familiar with these rules, they are 
here entered in extenso. 



Rules of spelling 

for the Gujarati Reading Series adopted by tiid 

Vernacular Text-Books Revision Committee. 



I. The spellings of pure Sanskrit words are to be retained in Gujarat! 
subject to the following changes : — 

(a) In place of nasal letters the anusvara should be used ; t. g. ;yo{y , 
aHH,, *>ih, &c. 
*HH, ^«-*i(ci, @»HIS, and similar other words are exceptions. 

(b) Proper names of females involving Sanskrit words ending in ' short y ' 
should be written with 'long g': e.g. $£\ t M<3fl,,*licfl, &,c. 

(c). Words like aH^Hlrt ending in a cousouant and capable of taking 
Gujarati terminations should be written as ending in &{. 

II. The pronunciations of English words not already established in Gujaiatl 
are to be reproduced in Gujarati spelling as accurately as possible, care 
being taken that no new orthographic sign is adopted in doing so. The 
English ' short i ' is to be represented by ' short y.' 

III. All words whether Sanskrit, English, or foreign, are upon the slightest 
variation of any part of them from the original to be treated as Gujarati 
corruptions of the original. Persian and Arabic words, whether accurately 
represented or modified in Gujarati pronunciation, must be treated as 
Gujarati corruptions of the original. Accordingly m^, j^&rt, y«-%u$, HVMi% 
H«H, vfcK, tf*li, tW3*, *>&*/ &c. are to be considered as Gujarati or 
Apabhrasta words. 

N. J?.— -The following are the rules for Gujarati or Apabhrasta words of 
controversial spelling. 

Where different districts pronounce differently, but one of these 
pronunciations has been adopted by long established literary usage as 
the basis of spelling, that spelling should be exclusively retained .' 

e. g. »iK att, y, MslU, $*, Bfcfl, ( not BtfQ ), ifl^ ifo^y / not w^t) 

■flWtt ( not VlWQ ), 3&1, $|*Q ( not ^^Q ), <fc c . 

Words having the $ sound in their pronunciation should continue to be 
written as at present. 

(c) &i& siij, wf. 

('0 *tftl, 5liJl, Hl\ »Pi&|, 5tf ( face., mouth), oflj, (uflg). 

In place of nasal letters occurring as the first element of a conjunct, 
anusvara should be used in all wordy ; 



IV. 



VI. 



Rales about y or y and § or @l with or without anusvara ( viz, Rules VII 
VIII, and IX). 

Yll. (1) The y sound in the final or penultimate syllable or both is long 
and should be expressed by ' long y* ' ; 

e. g. ett, *K> &il, 00% Wh, 5/lit, »nff, <ff4, ««fl&l, gflSll &o. 
(2) The y sound in any other syllable except the final or the penultimate 
is long or short according as the following syllable is short or long, and 
should be expressed in writing by y (long) or y (short) : 
e.g. pH€Hil> •ufl'Hil, ""{lylU-ft, «tlPa5l^ Hfc'Wl &c. 
But before a conjunct consonant the y sound should be always short : 
e. 9- (&{%> Pli1> Pl&'-Q, and in such words as [&£, RaU &c 

O 

VIII. (1) Except in monosyllabic words like ^, ««£., (louse), ^, 3, &c„ and 
except in dissyllabic words like £U, =*&, *t?j, ^d &c, the (3 sound 
wherever it occurs is short in all words, and should be expressed by 
@ (short)- 

e - 9* i, g, €«t, ai$, &\, °& ^, «&j, «4i, «& a^fl, a**, ^S^ 

^&t, ^-lici, ^iteiM &c. 
^2) of such optional forms as 
«j5ll f «£%, *^i (see) ; 
H*t, ^ ^; 

Y?U, fc*U, ^U; &>., 

the second, namely c&Stt, ^H, ^*Hi, should be adopted. 

IX. The y or y and @ or §1 of words containing them remain unchanged 

a) before all inflexional terminations and conjugational terminations 

excepting thuse of the passive and the causal ; and 
I) before such other terminations as do nut merge into the fina 
syllable of those words. 
Before the passive and the causal terminations, and before such other 
terminations as do merge into the final syllable, 

rule Vll. 2 (above) applies to words containing the y sound, and 
rule VIII. 1 to those containing the (3 sound : 

e. g. Hi Si, &ilHl «J5U (lice), ?&, &Jfti (plur. of yH), A.{&{\, iflSl, ^ \^ f 

*iH> &, <v-i, r&> *fhi3u, ^'jflsi^, ^i^fl^ti, ^-iw, intifti, &c., 

but J rMttW » Rmi<S > ^> 

RMlHt^, fallal, S,Ul«U, ^Al^l. 

X. Words like oll«l (molasses) oU«l (round), £fl, goi, are to be written as at 

presen t. 
XI. In compounds the words retain their original forms : 

e.g. euoity, CM=imi£L 

XII. Words like the following which are differently pronounced and often 
written in different ways should be written as given below. 

<&, wi, $i»u, °twii, c-u, c-iiiy, ^ (but $k). %|, aftc-Q, am^p. 



XIII. (a) In compound verbs the members should be written separate: 

e. g. $$[ \1 $. 
(6) Compound nouns shoald be written together, but in earlier books 
for children the elements should be separated : 
e. g. k*fti "ffi, «iWi3l #am, *ll <HIM, 

(c) Prepositions should be written separate from the words with which 
they are used. 

(d) Particles like Si (not preceded by the Instrumental in 5} ) &, § 
( in 1h$ ), and Ml^l (in cllHiaj), should be written with the words 
with which they are used. 

XIV. When a conjunct consonant is a doubled mute the first element shall be 
unaspirated and the second aspirated : 

e. g. Mc»K, «jj£l, foil. 

o -o 

XV. Words of Persian or Arabic origin and Gujarat! words which are 
differently pronounced and written, should, subject to the above rules, 
be for the present written as given in the Narmakos', in default of a later 
standard authority ; 

e. g. aHWHRl and not anwHlSUl nor aHWHty^l ; |&>i and not §kH nor j|$*|. 

G. P. T. 

Ahmadabad, 

8th June. 1908. 



— ii 'i 



LIST OF GUJARATI GRAMMARS. 



JU Written in English : 

1808 : Drummond (R.), Illustrations of the Grammatical Parts of the: 

Guzarattee, Mahrattee, and English Languages. 
1829 : Forbes ( W..), A Grammar of the Goozrattee Language. 
1842 : Ramsay ( H. N.. )., The Principles of Gujarati Grammar. 
1847 : Clarkson ( W. ),. A Grammar of the Gujarati Language. 
1853: Faulkner ( A. ), The Orientalist's Grammatical Vade-mecum* 

( Hindustani, Persian, and Gujarati Languages ). 

1857 : Leckey (E.), Principles of Goojuratee Grammar. 

cij d i86i' Y° un g (R.), Gujarati Exercises, or a new mode of learning to 
read, write or speak the Gujarati Language on the Ollendorffian 
system. 
1 867 : Edalji (Shapurjl), A Grammar of the Gujarati Language. 
1877 : Wells (T. L.),. English Companion to Taylor's Larger Gujarati 

Grammar. 
1889 : Bhatt (Purnanand M.), A Hand-book of Gujarati Grammar. 
1889 : Dalai (D. D.), A Manual of Gujarati Grammar. 
1890: Kaikobad (Manchershaw P.),Tbe Principles of GujaratiGrammar. 
1892 : Tisdall (W. St. C. ), A Simplified Grammar of the Gujarati 

Language. 
1900 : Khansaheb (I. P. ) and Sheth (T. J. .), Hints on the Study of 
Gujarati 
jj. Written in Gujarati r 

1858 : Hope ( T. C. \ ^icfl <mHld «>HW$. 

1866 : Lals'ankar (Narmadas'ankar), -fA^t*^, Parts 1 and 2. 

1867 : Taylor (J. v. S.), 3Jtf}ldl <HlHld ^15^. 

1869 : Dwarkadas(H.)and Umiashankar (L.), 43 %tf\[<ft <Hl^ *Hti V^ 

1870 : Taylor (J. v. S.), ytfRlcfl ««Hl<d ^HtH^. 
1880 : Rupram (Mahlpatram), y^lcfl <HlHl4 <ii *Hl&% 
1886 : Barodia (D. P.), ^c/^lcft <*II&V3%IR. 

1889 : Bhatt (Bhagvan S'.), 3J*rtl<fl oHli^Hl ^cltf.. 



XII 

To students desirous of a scholarly acquaintance with Gujarat!, more 
especially in its philologic hearings, the following works are strongly 
recommended : 

Taylor ( J. v. S.), 3J<r^Kft QilHl«i =<HIH% 
Kellogg ( S. H.), Grammar of the Hindi language. 
Palmer (E. H.),Simplified Grammar of Hindustani, Persian, and Arabic. 
Beames (J.), Comparative Grammar of the Modern Aryan Languages 
of India, 3 vols. 

Hoernle (A. F. R.), Comparative Grammar of the Gaudian Languages.. 

Co well (E. B.), The Prakrta-Prakas'a of Vararuci. 

Kalidasa ( Vrajalala), ^s^ldl <HIH&1 WfclfeRt, 

Taylor ( J. v. S. ) and Kalidasa ( Vrajalala ), ^l^^iilfe. 

Rainachandra ( Prabhakar ), ^"H^ *l«*£ Mikl. 

Bharxdarkar ( Ramakrishna G. ), Wilson Philological Lectures, in the- 
Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society,. 
Nos. 43, 46, and 47. 

Grierson ( G. A. ), On the Phonology of the Modern Indo- Aryan 
Vernaculars, in the Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlilndischen 
Gesellschaft for 1895-96. 

Grierson ( G. A. ), On the Mugdhavabodhamauktika and its evidence- 
as to Old Gujaratl, in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society 
for July, 1902. 

Grierson ( G. A. ), Linguistic Survey of India, Vol. IX, Part IL, 
Rajasthan! and Gujarat!. 



CONTENT'S. 



PART I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY, OR THE GRAMMAR OF LETTERS. 

Page, 

§ 1. Name of characters ••■ ••• ••• *" ••• * 

§ 2. The alphabet 2 

§ 3. The inherent vowel (*H ^4^(1.) .... ••• 4 

§ 4. Coalescent vowels- • ••• ••• •••■ ••• ••• * 

§ 5. Gonjunct letters ... ... ... ... ••• ••• ^ 

S 6. Omission of inherent *H ... ... ... ••• ••• ? 

§ 7. Anusvara--- ... ... •■• ••• ... ••• 8 

Note : — On the pronunciation of Anusvara in Sanskrit ... 8 

§ 8. ' Visarga ... ... ... ••• ... ... ••• 9 

§ 9. Accent ... ... ••• ... ••• ••• • •• 9 

Supplemental Note :■ — On Omission of inherent =*H. ••• 11 



PART IK 

ETYMOLOGY, OR THE GRAMMAR OF WORDS. 

CHAPTER I. Nouns, 

§10. Gender ... ... 12 

§11. Words ending in 3U, yet not masculine ... ... ... 12 

§12. Words ending in W, yet not feminine ••• ... ... 13 

Note : — On the gender of fcld masc., wheat ... ••• 14 

§13. 2HI m. 4 f . and §' n. as gendral terminations ••• ••• 14 

§14. Feminines formed from masculines by means of suffixes : ... 15 
a) if the masculine end in W^l. 

C) <3. 

d) a consonant. 

§15. Irregular feminines ••• ... ... ... ,.T 16 

§16. Masculine and Feminine indicated by different words ••• 16 

§17. Gender as indicated by terminations ... ... ••• 16 

§18. Words spelt alike, but differing in gender and meaning ... 17 



xivr 

Page;. 

|T9.. Words of variable gender ••- .... ... ... 20 l 

§20.. Number ... ... ... 21 

Note 1 : — On the plural in *>i\ for neuter nouns ending 

in a consonant •••- ... ... ... ... 21 

Note 2 : — On the, plural of nouns ending in radical £}[. 2 2 

5 21.. Words noteworthy as to number : ... ... .... 22: 

a) Words singular in form, yet treated as plurals. 

b) Words almost invariably found in the plural form.. 

c) The plurals of %and <tf^„. 

§ 22. Case ... ... ... ... ... 23 

Note : — On the names given to the cases by Hindu Grammarians. 23 

§ 23. Base ... ••■ ... 2:4 

§ 24.. Declension of Nouns ... ... ... ... ... 24 

CHAPTER II. Adjectives. 

§25. Gender... ••• ... ... ... .... ... 26. 

§ 26. Number ••• ••- ••• ... 26 

§ 27. Declension of Adjectives ... ... ... ... 2:6 

§28. Degrees of Comparison .. . ... ... ••• ••• 28, 

A. The Comparative Degree. 
B.. The Superlative Degree. 

CHAPTER IIL Pronouns. 

§29.. The First Personal Pronoun. ... ... ... ... 29' 

§30. The Second Personal Pronoun ... ... ... ... 3.0 

§ 31. The Exclusive and the Inclusive Personal Pronouns ... 30 

§ 32. The Honorific Pronoun ... ... ... ... ... 30. 

§ 33. The Reflexive Pronouns ... ... ••• ... 31 

§34. Table of Allied Pronominal Forms ... .„, ... 31 

§ 35. Declension of *>{[ ... ... ... ... ... 32 

§ 36. Declension of Si, <£>, and cl ... ... .„ ... 33 

§ 37. Declension of Interrogatives : %[<Q t and ^ll m. #1 /. ^ n. 34 

§ 38. Declension of "Sit/ m. and /.,.. and k\J n. ... ••• ... 35 

§39. Additional Pronominal Adjectives ... ... ... 35, 

CHAPTER IV. Numerals. 

§ 40. The Figures, or Numerical Symbols 37 

§ 41. Cardinals ... ••• ••• ... ... ... 37 

§ 42. Ordinals 39 



XV 

Page. 

Note : — On the Lunar Months and their Days ••• 40 

§ 43. Distributives ... ••• ... ••• ... ••• 41 

§ 44. Collectives ... ... ■•• ... .„. ••• 41 

§45. Multiplicatives ••• ... .... ... ... ... 42 

.§46. Multiplicational Forms • -• ... ... 42 

.§ 47. Fractional ... ... ... ... ... ... 44 

Note : — On the derivation of \[i, *H{[, and (§£ .... 48 

CHAPTER V* Verbs. 

[,§ 48. Infinitives ... ... ... ... ... ... 49 

§ 49. Participles ... ... ••• ... ••• ... 50 

§50. Table of Infinitival and Participial Forms ... ... 50 

§ 51. The Present Indefinite and Future Indefinite Tenses (Simple) 52 

§52.. The Past Indefinite Tense ( Simple ) ••• ... ... 54 

a) cf Transitive Verbs. 
6) of Intransitive Verbs. 
§53. Rule as to Gender and Number of Past Indefinite Tenso 

of Transitive Verbs .... ... ... ... ... 55 

§54. The Present Continuous Tense ( Compound ) ••• ... 56 

§ 55. The Past Continuous Tense (Compound) ... ... 57 

§ 56. The Present Intentional and Past Intentional Tense (Compound) 57 
§ 5 7. The Pres. Perf. and Past Perf. Tenses (Compound) of Intrans. 

Verbs ... ... ,.. ... 58 

§ 5 8. The Pres. Perf and Past Perf. Tenses (Compound) of Trans. 

Verbs 59 

§ 59. The Subjunctive Mood (Simple Tenses) ••• ... 60 

§ 60. The Subjunctive Mood (Compound Tenses) ... ... 61 

§ 61. Table of the Subj. Comp. Tenses of Intransitive Verbs ... 62 

§ 62. Table of the Subj. Perfects of Transitive Verbs 63 

§63. The Imperative Mood ... 63 

§ 64. Irregular Verbs--- ... ... ... ... ... 64 

§ 65. ^ and otfcj as Irregular Verbs ... ••• ••• ••• 66 

§66. The Impersonal and Defective Verb <JvtWx>l ... ... 66 

§67. The construction employed with ovjy5\ ... ••• ... 67 

§68. Transitive construed as though Intransitives -• ... 67 

§ 69. Transitives optionally and construed as though Intransitives 68 

§ 70. The Verb used Interrogatively ... ... ... .-• 69 



XVI 

Page, 

The Verb used Negatively ... ••• •■•• lt » 70 

Formation of the Passive Voice ... ••• ••• 71 

Conjugation of the Passive Voice ... ••• ••• 71 

Idiomatic Substitutes for Passival Forms ... ... 72 

Potential-Passives ... ■•• ... ... ••• 73 

Conjugation of Potential-Passives ... ... ... 74 

Transitives derived from Intransitives ... ... ... 74 

Formation of Causative Verbs „ . . ... ... t>. 75 

Double Causatives ... ... ... ••» ... 76 

Compound Verbs classified as to their Forms ••• ... 77 

Intensive Compound Verbs ... .•• •■• • •• 77 

Completive Compound Verbs ... ... ... ... 79 

Potential Compound Verbs ... ... ... ... 79 

Frequentative Compound Verbs ... ... ... 80 

Continuative Compound Verbs... ... ... *.. 81 

Verbs compounded with the Infinitive ... ... ... 82 

Obligative Compound Verbs ... „.. ... ... 82 

Permissive Compound Verbs ... ... ... ... 83 

Inceptive Compound Verbs ... ... ... ... 83 

Compound Verbal Phrases ... ... .... ... 84 

Infinitival Expressions ... ... ... ... ... 85 

CHAPTER VI. Adverbs. 

Adverbs derived from words now obsolete ... ... 88 

Adverb? derived from words still current ... ... 88 

Adverbial Phrases ... ... ... ... ... 89 

CHAPTER VII. Prepositions. 

Government by Prepositions ... ... ... ... 92 

Prepositions classified according to their government ... 92 

Alphabetical List of Prepositions ... ... ... 93 

Notes on a few of the Prepositions ... ... ... 97 

§ 99. Case-endings attached to Prepositions .., ... ... 100 

CHAPTER VIII. Conjunctions. 

§ 100. Co-ordinative Conjunctions ... ... ... ... ]01 

§ 101. Subordinate Conjunctions ••• ... ... ... 102 

§ 102. Doubled Conjunctions ... „.-. ... ... ... 102 



§ 


71, 


§ 


72. 


§ 


73. 


s 


74. 


§ 


75. 


§ 


7G. 


§ 


77. 


§ 


78. 


§ 


79. 


§ 


SO. 


§ 


81. 


§ 


82. 


§ 


83. 


§ 


84. 


§ 


85. 


§ 


86. 


§ 


87. 


§ 


88. 


§ 


89. 


§ 


90. 


§ 


91. 


§ 


92. 


§ 


93. 


§ 


94. 


§ 


95. 


§ 


96. 


§ 


97. 


§ 


98. 



XVII 

Page. 

CHAPTER IX* Interjections. 

| 103. Interjections classified according to their meaning ... 104 

CHAPTER X. Word-Formation. 

§ 104. Prefixes *. 100 

§ 105. Suffixes added to the simple verbal stem ... ... 108 

§ 106. Substantival Suffixes added to a complete word ••• 109 

| 107. Adjectival Suffixes added to a complete word ... ... 110 

^108. Compound Words : Samasa ... ... ... ... Ill 

1. Copulative Compounds, Dvandva ... 
S 109. 2. Determinative Compounds : ... ... ... 112 

a) Dependent, Tatpurusa, 

b) Appositional, Karmadharaya, 

c) Numeral, Dvigu, 

d) Elliptic, Madhyamapadalopl. 

§ 110. 3. Attributive compounds, Bahuvrihi ... ... 113 

§111. 4. Adverbial Compounds, Avyaylbhava ••• ••• 114 

§ 112. Other Compound Words ... ... ... ... 114 

CHAPTER XL Transliteration. 

§ 113. Transliterated Passages ... ... ... ... 116 



PART III. 



SYNTAX, OR THE GRAMMAR OF SENTENCES. 

CHAPTER I* The Order of the Words 
in a Sentence. 

§ 114. General Rules 

§115. Position of Adjective ... 

§116. Position of Adverb 

§ 117. Position of Infinitive of Purpose 

§ 1 1 8. Position of Subordinate Sentences 



119 
120 
120 
120 
121 



CHAPTER IX. Concord. 

| 119. Agreement between an Adjective and a single Noun ••• 122 

| 120. Adjectival Plural (masc. or neut. ) of Respect ... ... 122 

§ 121. Agreement between an Adjective and two or more Nouns. 123 



XVIII 



Page. 
124 
124 
124 
124 
125 
125 
126 
126 
127 



122. Agreement between an Adjective and Appositional an 

123. Agreement between Correlated Pronouns- •• 

124. Agreement of Adjectival Adverbs ... ... .,. 

125. Agreement between Verb and a single Subject ... 
12G. Verbal Plural ( masc. or neut.) of Respect 

127. Agreement between Verb and two or more Subjects 

128. Agreement between Verb and Subjects of different Persons. 

129. Infinitival Forms as affected by Agreement 

130. Participles as affected by Agreement 

CHAPTER III. On the Sig :n i f ieation of the Cases* 

I 31. The Subjective Case as subject or as object of a verb ... 128 

132. The Subjective Case as object of a transitive verb ... 129 

133. Other uses of the Subjective Case ... ... ... 131 

134. The Objective Case as object of a transitive verb. ... 131 

135. Other uses of the Objective Case ... ... ... 133 

136. The Agential Case ... ... ... ... ... 134 

137. The Ablative Case ... ... ... 135 

138. The Locative Case ... ... ... ... ... 136 

139. The Genitive Case ... ... ... ... ... 140 

On the Signification of the Tenses* 



CHAPTER IV. 

140. The Present Indefinite Tense 
The Future Indefini e Tense 
The Past Indefinite Tense 
The Present Continuous Tense 
The Past Continuous Tense 
Other Tenses 



141. 
142. 
143. 
144. 
145. 



143 
144 
144 
145 
146 
146 



On the Signification of the Infinitives* 



147 
14 6 
148 
150 



CHAPTER V* 

140. The Indefinite Infinitive... 

147. The Continuous Infinitives 

148. The Intentional Infinitive 

149. The Perfect Infinitive ... 

CHAPTER VI. On the Signification of the Participles* 

150. The Continuous Participle ... ... ... ... 151 

151. The Intentional Participles ... ,.. ... ... 152 

152. The Perfect Participles- •• ... ... 152 

153. The Connective Participle ... ... ... ... 153 



XIX 

APPENDIX I. 

Page. 
On the Ancestry of the Gujarati Language ... ... ... 154 

APPENDIX II. 

The Language-Area of Gujarati ••• ... ... ... ... 159 

APPENDIX III. 

The Grammar of Gujarati Sounds 

A. On the Difference between Sonants and Surds ... 

B. On the Difference between Consonants, Vowels, and Semi- 

vowels 

C. On the Difference between Nasals and Non-nasals. 
Table A. Surds and Sonants 
Table B. 1. Consonants (including Semi-vowels) 

2. Vowels ... 
Table C. 1. Non-nasals 

2. Nasals ... 
Remarks on the Table of Nasals and Non-nasals 

APPENDIX III B. 

The Dialects of Gujarati ... 
I. Surati Dialect ... 
II. Charotari Dialect 

III. Pattani Dialect ••• 

IV. Kathiawadi 

APPENDIX IV. 

Gunaand Vrddhi.,. .... ... ... ... ... ... 194 

APPENDIX V* 

Sandhi ••• ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 195 

I. Rules for the Combination of Vowels ... ... ... 195 

II. Rules for the Combination of Consonants ... ... 19G 

A. Visarga Sandhi, or Sandhi when the first element is a sibilant. 

B. Sandhi when the first element is a non-sibilant surd. 

C. Anusvara Sandhi, or Sandhi when the first element is m. 

D. Sandhi when the first element is a sonant other than m. 



160 


160 


161 


162 


164 


166 


168 


170a 


170& 


171 


177 


178 


183 


187 


191 



XX 

APPENDIX VI. 

Name of Relations by Blood or Marriage- •- 

APPENDIX VII* 

GujaratI Equivalents for some of the more common Grammatical Terms 206 



Page. 
200 



Paradigms 
Exercises 
Proverbs ... 
Vocabulary 
Index 



208 
221 
247 
253 
265 



XVII 

Page. 

CHAPTER IX* Interjections. 

§ 103. Interjections classified according to their moaning ... 10-4 

CHAPTER X, Word-Formation, 

§ 104. Prefixes ; 106 

§105. Suffixes added to the simple verbal stem ... ... 108 

§ 106. Substantival Suffixes added to a complete word ••• 109 

§ 107. Adjectival Suffixes added to a complete word ... ... 110 

| 108. Compound Words : Samasa ... ... ... ... Ill 

1. Copulative Compounds, Dvandva ... 
§109. 2. Determinative Compounds : ... ... ... 112 

a) Dependent, Tatpurusa, 

b) Appositional, Karmadharaya, 

c) Numeral, Dvigu, 

d) Elliptic, Madhyamapadalopl. 

§ 110. 3. Attributive compounds, Bahuvrlhi ... ... 113 

§111. 4. Adverbial Compounds, Avyaylbhava ••• ••• 114 

§ 112. Other Compound Words ... ... ... ... 114 

CHAPTER XI. Transliteration. 

§113. Transliterated Passages ... ... ... ... 116 



PART III, 

SYNTAX, OR THE GRAMMAR OF SENTENCES. 

CHAPTER I. The Order of the Words 
in a Sentence, 

§ 114. General Rules 

§115. Position of Adjective ... 

| 116. Position of Adverb 

| 117. Position of Infinitive of Purpose 

8 118, Position of Subordinate Sentences 



119 
120 
120 
120 
121 



CHAPTER II, Concord, 

| 119. Agreement between an Adjective and a single Noun ••• 122 

| 120. Adjectival Plural (masc. or neut. ) of Respect ... ... 122 

§ 121. Agreement between an Adjective and two or more Nouns. 123 



XVIII 

Page. 
§ 122. Agreement between an Adjective and Appositional £} ... 124 
§ 123. Agreement between Correlated Pronouns--- ••• •■• 124 

§124. Agreement of Adjectival Adverbs ... ... ... 124 

£ 125. Agreement between Verb and a single Subject ... ... 124 

§ 120. Verbal Plural ( masc. or neut.) of Respect ... ... 125 

!$ 127. Agreement between Verb and two or more Subjects ... 125 
§128. Agreement between Verb and Subjects of different Persons. 126 
§ 129. Infinitival Forms as affected by Agreement ... ... 12 6 

§130. Participles as affected by Agreement ... ... ... 127 

CHAPTER III* On the Signification of the Cases* 

§ i 31. The Subjective Case as subject or as object of a verb ... 128 
§ 132. The Subjective Case as object of a transitive verb ... 129 

§133. Other uses of the Subjective Case ... ... ... 131 

§ 134. The Objective Case as object of a transitive verb. ... 131 

§ 135. Other uses of the Objective Case ... ... ... 133 

§ 136. The Agential Case ... ... ... ... ... 134 

§137. The Ablative Case 135 

§ 138. The Locatire Case ... ... ... ... ... 13G 

§ 139. The Genitive Case ... 140 

CHAPTER IV. On the Signification of the Tenses, 

§ 140. The Present Indefinite Tense ... ... ... ... 143 

§141. The Future Indefini e Tense .. ... ... ... 144 

§ 142. The Past Indefinite Tense ... ... ... ... 144 

§143. The Present Continuous Tense ... ... ... ... 145 

§ 144. The Past Continuous Tense ... ... ... ... 146 

§ 145. Other Tenses ... ... ... ... I4g 

CHAPTER V* On the Signification of the Infinitives. 

§ 140. The Indefinite Infinitive... ... ... ... ... 147 

§ 147. The Continuous Infinitives ... ... ... ... 14g 

§148. The Intentional Infinitive ... ... ... ... 14S 

§ 149. The Perfect Infinitive ... --- ... ... ... 150 

CHAPTER VI. On the Signification of the Participles, 

§ 150. The Continuous Participle ... ... ... ... 151 

I 151. The Intentional Participles ... ... ... ... 152 

§ 152. The Perfect Participles- •• ... ... 152 

§153. The Connective Participle ... ... ... ... 153 



XIX 



APPENDIX I. 

On the Ancestry of the Gujarat! Language 

APPENDIX II. 

The Language-Area of Gujarati ■ •• 

APPENDIX III* 

The Grammar of Gujarati Sounds 

A. On the Difference between Sonants and Surds ... 

B. On the Difference between Consonants, Vowels, and Semi- 

vowels 

C. On the Difference between Nasals and Non-nasals. 
Table A. Surds and Sonants 

Table B. 1. Consonants (including Semi-vowels) 

2. Vowels ... 
Table C. 1. Non-nasals ... 

2. Nasals ... ... ... .., 

Remarks on the Table of Nasals and Non-nasals 



154 



159 



160 
160 

161 

162 
164 
166 
168 
170a 
170& 
171 



APPENDIX 1MB. 

The Dialects of Gujarat! ... 
I. Surat! Dialect ... 
II. Charotar! Dialect 

III. Pattanl Dialect ••• 

IV. Kathlawadl 



177 
17S 
183 
187 
191 



Guna and Vrddhi . , . 



APPENDIX IV. 



194 



APPENDIX V* 

Sandhi ••• ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 195 

I. Rules for the Combination of Vowels ... ... ... 19 5 

II. Rules for the Combination of Consonants ... ... 196 

A. Visarga Sandhi, or Sandhi when the first element is a sibilant, 

B. Sandhi when the first element is a non-sibilant surd. 

C. Anusvara Sandhi, or Sandhi when the first element is m, 

D. Sandhi when the first element is a sonant other than m. 



APPENDIX VI. 

Name of Relations by Blood or Marriage- •- 

APPENDIX VII* 

Gujarat! Equivalents for some of the more common Grammatical Terms 206 



Page. 
200 



Paradigms 
Exercises 
Proverbs ... 
Vocabulary 
Index 



208 
221 
247 
253 

265 



SOME OPINIONS OF THE PRESS. 



" Parnii les langues apparentees au Sanskrit, nous avons remarque le guzerati, a cause 
des ressemblances marqu.es qu'il a maintenant encore avec ]a grande langue classique. 
C'est qu'il a ete, plus que les autres idiomes neo-hindous, preserve d'une contamination avec 
les autres dialectes 6trangers. Dans tous les cas, les livres consaerees au guzerati, sont 
assez rares en Europe. A ceux qui voudraient se faire une juste idee de cette langue, nous 
recommanderons The Student's Gujarati Grammar, par le Rev. G. P. Taylor (1 vol. gr. 
in-8 de XVI-228 p., Sural, Irish Presbyterian Mission.) L'auteur s'est efl'orc^, avant tout, de 
donner un livre pratique facile a e"tudier et propre a enseigner rapidement le guzerati aux 
etudiants de langue anglaise. Et de fait, il y a reussi. Son livre est bien ordonne, les 
chapitres sagement distribues.. la redaction nette et lucide. 

" D'autre part, le Rev. Taylor a beaucoup de lecture, et il connait la grammaire 
comparte. Aussi trouvons-nous dans son exposition des remarques qui satisfont les esprits 
curieux : elles montrent que l'auteur ne s'est pas contents declasser des faits, mais quil a 6te 
assez ingenieux pour en trouver la raison. Pour ne pas trop compliquer sa gr&mmaire, il a 
renvoy6 a des appendices des explications dont il ne voulait pas priver le lecteur. C'est la 
qu'il traite de la phonetique du guzerati ; qu'il donne les lois du guna et de la vrddhi, 
ainsi que du sandhi pour les formes que cette langue a recues du Sanskrit ; qu'il determine 
enfin la place qu'elle occupe panni les idiomes Gaudian de l'lnde. Des exercices et un 
vocabulaire terminent ce manuel, dont la lecture presente un vif interet." — Prof. A. Lepitre 
in V Annie Linguistique. 

" Mr. Taylor has produced an accurate and scholarly grammar of the Gujarati 
language. His work is divided into three parts. The first treats of orthography, the 
second of etymology, and the third of syntax. There are also seven appendices, which 
treat of subjects more or less connected with, though not essential to, Gujarati grammar. 
The addition of a few exercises for translation into English, with valuable hints, a 
vocabulary, and an index, makes the book very useful to persons beginning the study of 

Gujarati The subjects discussed in the appendices are not intimately connected with 

grammar proper. It ought to be said, however, that the scholarly way in which they are 
treated increases the usefulness of the work to advanced students of the Gujarati language. 
Altogether Mr. Taylor's Grammar is a very valuable addition to Gujarati literature." — The 
Madias Christian Colhge Magazine. 

" This is a book specially written for English students of the Gujarati language. It is 
not too much to say that the path of such students will in future be far clearer than it has 
been in the past, and that Mr. Taylor has produced a work which will not only greatly 
facilitate study of the language, but which is in itself complete, comprehensive, scholarly 
and lucid. Perhaps the greatest difficulty which an Englishman experiences when commencing 
the study of a language like Gujarati, is that he is unable to obtain anything like a clear 
explanation of its difficulties from the native instructor whom he employs. Nor has he, till 
now, been able to instruct himself in those difficulties by the aid of a good English Gujarati 
Grammar. Mr. Taylor's book with its clear explanations and numerous examples is exactly 
what an intelligent student requires, and the book undoubtedly supplies a long-felt want. 
Mr. Taylor acknowledges in his preface a debt of gratitude to his father's labours in the 
language, and the public owe a deep debt to Mr. Taylor himself for re-editing his father's 
Vernacular Grammar, and for the production of the present very complete and learned 
volume." — The Bombay Educational Record. 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY, OR THE GRAMMAR OF LETTERS 



1. Names of Characters ( RiCm ). 



The letters of the Gujarat! Alphabet are represented by two 
sets of characters, one called the Devanagar!,* Nagari or Balbodh, 
and the other the common Gujarat!. 

The terms Nagari ( urban ) and Devanagarl (belonging to the 
divine city ) suggest the calligraphic improvement evidenced in 
the square-set and regular appearance of the characters thus 
named. Balbodh ( instruction for children ) probably owes its 
name to the fact that, at the time when this term originated, 
the writing of Balbodh characters was the first lesson set to 
children at school. 

Of old the Nagari letters alone Were used in nearly all Gujarat! 
books, but comparatively few are now printed in that character. 
In the large majority of the Gujarat! publications of the present 
day, in the newspapers and periodicals and all the lighter litera- 
ture, and in general correspondence, both private and official, 
the common Gujaratrcharacters are employed. 

Regarding the mode of writing styled Varna! or Sarraf! or Bod!a 
see S 4, Note. 



* The purely Sanskritic form Devanagarl is often in Gujarat! both spelt 
and pronounced « Devanagarl, ' i<wi<l. 



PART I. 



Nagari, 

Devanagarl, 

Balbodh. 



Gujaratl.' 



GUJARAT1 GRAMMAR. 

% The Alphabet ( wi$rt*u'Ai ). 



PART I. 



Vowels (14). 



No. 



Deva- 
nagari. 



Gujarat!. 



Trans- \ 
literation I 
equivalent! 



Remarks on Pronunciation. 



Nasal sign, 
Spirant sign, 

Motes (25). 

a. Gutturals 
(5). 



©. Palatals 
(5). 



9 
10 

11 
12 
13 
14 

15 
16 

17 

18 

19 
20 

21 

22 
23 

24 
25 

26 



3T 
? 



an 

y 
4 

<§ 



wanting 
wanting 



IT 



^ 



a 

a 

i 

I 

u 

u 

r 

r 

i 
i 

e 
ai 
o 
au 



a as in organ, or u in but. 
a in father. 

in fill 

in machine, or ee in feel. 

in full. 

in rural, or oo in fool. 



in rill, or often as ru in run. 



# 


m 


■ 


h 


h 


ka 


•ut 


kha 




ga 

gha 


V) 


na 




c 
ch 




jha 


1) 


na 



e in where, or ai in air. 

ai in aisle. 

o in cold. 

au in German hau,s, or ou in 

English house, 
variable nasal power (see §7). 
nearly as final ha in Minnehafta (se8 

§ 8). 
cu as in cut. 

nearly as ckhe in black herd, when 

pronounced as though bla-cMerd. 
gu as in gun, 
nearly as ghu in log-hut or lo- 

ghut. 
n'ge as in singer (not as in finger), 
chu in church. 
nearly as chhu in rich husband or 

I'i-cMusband. 
ju in judge, 
nearly as dgehe in judge her or ju- 

dgeher. 
nia as in Britanma. 



* The transliteration equivalents given in this column are those accepted 
by the Tenth (Geneva) Oriental Congress of 1894 aud recommended by the 
Council of the Royal Asiatic Society for general adoption. 



THE ALPHABET. 



x , Deva- r , . ... 

r\o.\ - - Guiarati 

nagf.ri. J 



Trans- 
literation 
equivalent 



Remarks on Pronunciation. 



27 Z 

28 z 

29| v 

30 5 

81! q 



32 
33 
34 
35 



36 
37 
38 
39 
40 
41 
42 
43 
44 
45 

46 
47 

48 
49 
50 

51 
52 



cT 
ST 



^ 

sr 

*T 
*T 

ST 

*T 

(0 






"4 
H 

5i 



ta 

tha 

4a 

dha 

na 

ta 
tha 
da 

dha 



na 
pa 
pha 
ba 
bha 
ma 

y a 

ra 
la 
va 

s'a 
sa 

sa 
ha 
la 

ksa 
jfia 



PART I. 



«> These sounds differ from tbe Eng- 
j lish dental-mutes. In order to their 
>utterance the tip of the tongue, while 
I curled backwards, strikes against ihe 
' front-portion of the palatal dome.* 
nearly as the nasal sound heard in 
Colonel. 

1 These sounds also differ from the 
English dental-mutes. In order to 
their utterance the tip of the tongue 
strikes against the front teeth or the 
edge of the gums. (Cf. the Irish pro- 
nunciation of "water," "trlah.")f 
nearly as nu in nun. 
pu in pun. 
nearly as phe in shepherd. 
bu in but. 
nearly as bha in Cobham, 
mu in mug. 
you in young. 
ru in rub (trilled), 
lu in lull. 
a sound intermediate between ve in 

cover and we in Qoiver. 
nearly as ssio in session. 
nearly as shu in shut, or as rschau in 

meerschaum. 
su in sun. 
hu in hut. 
an 1-sound uttered with the tip of the 

tongue curled backwards, 
ctio in fraction, 
nearly as gneou in igneous. 



* & tha and & dha are widely removed phonetically from the English th and 
dh spirants, heard in " thin " and " thine." The Gujarat! tha and dha are 
momentary sounds (mutes), differing from i ta and 4 da respectively by 
requiring for their utterance greater force of breath. 

+ «* tha and H dha are also momentary' sounds (mutes), requiring for their 
utterance greater force, of breath than is needed for d ta and t da respectively, 



c. Cerebrals 
(5). 



d. Dentals 
(5). 



e. Labials 
(5). 



Semi-vowels 



(*)• 



Sibilants 
(3). 



Aspirate. 

Added Semi- 
vowel. 

Conjuncts 
(2). 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART I. 



a anushangi 



Virama, hal, 
or khodo 



Symbols for 
non-initial 
vowels. 



Note : — 4-, na, and ^, na, never occur alone or as independent 
letters. 

Neither *?J, na, nor <A, la, occurs as the initial letter of a Gujarat! 
word. 

X is pronounced fa, and so transliterated, -when representing 
an f-sound in a word adopted from a foreign language : e. g. \<.m<i 
farman. 

3. The Inherent Vowel ( »h ^i^W ), 

The thirty-six letters from 4 to 3 ( Nos. 17-52 ), both inclu- 
sive, represent as many syllables, each of which consists of its own 
distinctive consonantal element combined with the one vowel- 
sound of the English ' short u ' in ' but' — the Gujarat! ' short a,' *H. 
This vowel is accordingly termed the ' attached ^ ' or ' inherent 
^ ' ( ^HlH^fl, ct anusangi, ) 

The omission of ' inherent a' can be indicated by a subscribed 
grave accent ( „ ), called PlRlM, virama (pause), or &it, hal 
( consonant ), or ^Ull, khodo ( lame ). Thus 4 = ka, but k_ = k ; 
*l = s'a, but ^=s'. 

4. Coalescent Vowels ( ^wi *i*£*rt &•*<& ). 

The vowel-signs from *H to =^1 (Nos. 1-14), both inclusive, 
are employed to represent vowel-sounds when initial in a word 
or syllable. "When not thus isolate, i. e. when immediately 
following the consonantal element of a syllable, all the vowel- 
sounds except *>i are represented by ' coalescent vowel-signs.' 
These are exhibited in the following table : — 

Isolate. Example. Coalescent. Example.1 Name of coalescent symbol. 

'H a ^HJf ak wanting. 4 ka 

^l a v\\^ ak t h[ ka 4ldl, kano. 

W i W4 ik f (j ki && ^ov^, hrasva ajju. 

4 i tk ik 1 j/1 ki &H *Hox»a, dirgha ajju. 

(§ u @4 uk -o ^ ku #W ^ hrasva varadu. 

§1 u §14 uk ^ i ku €iH <«$, dirgha varadu. 

^ r 5ft{ rk « \ kr ( 5K4R, rkara ). 

Si e 5^ ek * i ke *tl% matra. 

^ ai Ab aik * 1 kai ^ "Hl^tt, be matra. 

a>U o a>Uk ok ! $1 ko 4$l ^1% kano matra. 

=^l au ^14 auk 1 41 kau 41^1 ^ "Hl"=il, kano be matra. 

— , h kam ^M^R, anusvara. 

— : 4: kah pRpl, visarga. 



CONJUNCT LETTERS. 



Similarly 

12345 678 9 10 1112 

f M »il f4 "41 ^ "^ ^ ^ v<l At "«i ^H: 
\ kha kha khi khi khu khiu khe khai kho khau kham khah 

f 3[ 3U Pi 5(| ^ ^ 5| Jj Sit OH Oi 01 . 

I g a ga gi gi gu gu ge gai go gau gam gah 
f H Hi (k ~ HI % H k t( k\ H\ HH: 

\ gha gha ghi ghi gbu ghu ghe ghai gho ghau gharii ghah 

and in likejnanner for all consonants. 

This grouping of syllables in rows of twelve is known in 
Gujaratl schools as the ^Rl^fl, barakhadi (twelve letters or 
syllables). 

The following syllables require special attention since written 
in a slightly abbreviated, or irregular, form : 

& J 1 "; ^ ju; °lju; 1 dr; ^ s'r (but also It); d hr; 
^ ru or ru. Other signs for ru are ^ or 3 , and for ru ^ or 5. 

Note 1. — In much of the mercantile correspondence of even 
the present day vowels when coalescent are entirely omitted, 
with the result that the reading of an invoice or bill of exchange 
is for most persons a task of considerable difficulty. This 
abbreviated method of writing is called the Vaniai or Sarrafi 
( ' mercantile,' from Vanlo, the merchant-caste, or Sarraf, a ban- 
ker), or Bodla ('clipped/ from BodI, shaven, shorn). 

Note 2. — On the pronunciation of words in which the letter & 
stands between two vowels see Note 2 at the end of Appendix III. 

5» Conjunct Letters («*Ui$t*)» 

If two or more consonantal elements come together without 
any vowel intervening, each of the consonants may be written 
in full, but in that case each, except the last member of the 
conjunct, takes virama ; e. g. OWHSpQcll Bhagavad Gita ; y.l%\iQ 
satkon. 

More frequently, however, a conjunct letter is employed to 
represent the combined consonants. In most cases the form of 
the conjunct letter bears sufficient resemblance to that of its 
constituent consonants to occasion no difficulty in reading. 
Thus n s tna ; i$ = gda ; W = stha ; K = ghna. 



part L 

Barakhadi. 

(omi^i). 



Vaniai, 
SarrafI, 
Bodla 
writing. 



or 



Compound, 

orconjunct, 

consonants. 



QUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART I. 



Rule. 



Triple con- 
sonants. 



Some consonants, when occurring in a conjunct letter, revert 
more nearly to the Devanagari character; while others assume 
a form that lends itself more readily to cursive writing. 

Thus {, when preceding * or «t, appears as f % . 
*l, when the initial member of a conjunct letter, as *. 
* >t » i, » ». „ „ ,,*(reph) above the line. 

R „ „ final „ „ „ „ „ t below the line. 

™ " » I) »> H »1 >• l( ""* 

The Rule for the reading of conjunct letters is as follows : — 

The part written above precedes in utterance all written below 
it, and in one and the some level the part written to the left 
precedes all to its right. Hence the top position has precedence 
over the left, the left over the right, and the right over the bottom. 

Thus 4 rra ; -»t rtra ; "»■«* mbra ; ^H tsya ; &£ stra ; 3?l stra. 

A few of the less obvious conjuncts are given below : — 

& or & kha ; in or tt> kta ; & kra ; a? jra ; tI tta ; -=t tra ; 
& ddha ; 'U dma ; ?1 dya ; U. dra ; ^ dva ; "H pta ; fc. phra ; y* bra ; 
4 rka ; H rsa ; Q s'ca ; **i s ya ; %l s'ra ; ^t s'va ; \k\ s's'a ; *4 ska ; 
<>£ sbha ; K3J sna ; M sra ; St hma ; <§l hya ; crH lya. 

In Devanagari jj stands quite regularly for hna, J fcr hla, and 
| for hva. In ordinary Gujarat! writing, however, the position 
of the final letter in each of these conjuncts has been shifted 
upwards and a litle to the left, whence have arisen the seemingly 
irregular forms — ■ 

c& for hna ( not nha ), (-& for hla ( not lha ), and && for hva 
( not vha ). 

$1 and ^ are in reality conjunct letters, in which, however, 
their constituent consonants assume a form now disguised bej'ond 
recognition. It is probably on this account that these two con- 
junct letters have been allowed a place in the Gujaratl alphabet. 

$1 is ksa ( k+*{ ), and ad jna ( <^+ ^). 

Note : — In Gujarat! $J is pronounced not as jna but as gfia. 

Euch of the conjuncts in the following list contains three 
consonantal elements, 

$^l ksna; £H k?y a ; cW tsva ; r Vt nsta; 
r^t nsva ; i-tti mbra ; "w«i mbla ; ^ rtra ; 
| rddha; H s$ra; *£ s#hra; *& stra. 



INHERENT a WHEN OMITTED. 



6» Omission of 'inherent a.' 

( See also Note at end of paragraph 9 ). 
1 Inherent a ' is, as we have already remarked ( § 3 ), omitted 
from any consonant under which the virama sign is subscribed, 
also from any consonant associated with a coalescent vowel. Thus 
^f^ = sadgun ; 6(l = gbl. 
' Inherent a ' is also omitted in pronunciation, even though 
its omission be not indicated by virama, 

1) From any single consonant, when the final letter of its 
word ; Ml^JH= manas ; 1H1 = manav. Occasionally inherent a 
is heard after a final H or &, thus =H"HH will then be samaya and 
>U& moha. 

2) From the non-final members of any conjunct letter. 
Thus ^H} aksar ; *HW>i as'ram ; ^fl stri. 

3) From all the members of a conjunct letter, provided 

(a) that its last member be neither a nasal (n, fit, n, n, m) 

nor a semi-vowel, (y, r, 1, v, 1), and also 
(6) that the conjunct letter be the final of its word. 

Thus y-fc s'abd ; ^"HlK samapt ; *fH§i samaks ; but 
|^ Krisna ; ^ ratna ; %M surya ; «iM namra, 

4) From any consonant followed in the same word by 

(a) an inflexion, (6) a suffix, or (c) the second element of a 
compound word, always provided that this added portion 
begins with a consonant. 

Thus (a) MVHSdj kton&cthi ; iSTH^lj kalanmo; 
i^l 5 karfo ; H^U^ karna?' ; 
(6) «Hai>4^j bacpan; VftHHj dbantun ; 

JlMSl^j kamcZar ; 
(c) *>\W?it&, tudalbadal ; HVH\% ghnvkhara'c ; 
WPPM, r&msLtgamat; *t«RM*R, sathar- 
pathar. 

Exception : — Between two letters, the same or similar in sound, 
'inherent a' may be very slightly retained. Thus 
&t*i*fl, hathathi; MM^l, panano ; iktcll, kantato ; 
*>U^, avavum; also (§il^l, undanano; ^licll, 
ca^ato. 



PART I. 



Inherent a 
when not 
sounded. 



ObMAlUTl OUAMMAR 



PART t. 

The nasal 
sign Anu- 
svara as 



a) m. 



6) n 
fi 

u 
tu 



Anusviira 
«) in Sans- 
krit reci- 
tation. 



7, Anusvara ( an^^u* )♦ 

The symbol ■ (No. 1 5 in the Alphabet), a superscribed point, is 
a mere nasalbsm, neither purely vocalic nor purely consonantal, 
It is called ^M^R anusvara, after-sound, or fii^ bindu (or mindu), 
a point, dot. It must be preceded by a vowel-sound, but may 
itself be either final or medial. 

1) Anusvara when final represents a sound resembling the 
' ring ' of a metal plate, this ringing quality being imparted to 
the preceding vowel ; e. g. ^ hum ; feg chum. 

2) Anusvara, followed by any vowel, or by any non-mute 
consonant (those from H to <A, Nos. 42 — 50 of Alphabet), 
represents the same ringing sound that it has when final ; e. g t 
4W kaml ; ^t&R samhar ; "=ii^t vams ; ^t<Hlfc samvad. 

3) Anusvara followed by any mute consonant ( those from 
b — "H, Nos. 17 — 41 of Alphabet) has variable nasal power. 

1) Followed by a guttural ( £, ^H f *\ f n ) auusvara becomes 



equivalent to the guttural nasal 



^ n. 



2) by a palatal ( *i, to, <W, aJ ) to the palatal nasal =m fi. 

3) by a cerebral (<>, S, i, d ) to the cerebral nasal <$J n. 

4) by a dental (cl, «i, i, «l) to the dental nasal H^n. 

5) by a labial (M, \, °i, <h) to the labial nasal H m. 

Thus 55 = kanku ; i=*M = kafican ; j£ = kanth ; hi - kand ; 
jM = kamp. 

Anusvara being in no sense a syllable, only a mere nasalism, 
it is transliterated as m or m, or as one of the various n's (nnn n), 
but never as syllabic ma or na. 

Note on the pronunciation of Anusvara in Sanskrit : — 
"What struck me most in her recitation was the vibration of 
the voice when reproducing the nasal sound called 'anusvara.' 
On hearing it pronounced, or rather sung, in India, I under- 
stood perfectly at last the grammatical name of the anusvara, or 
after-sound, successive protracted sound. The final m or n y which 
we European scholars almost drown in the vowel preceding it, is 
in India not only duplicated but triplicated in an almost plaintive 
tremolo, in a low mysterious voice, like the moan of a victim 
under torture, or of a patient undergoing an operation, or like 



VISARQA* 



the sound sent forth by the bow, after the arrow has been darted. 
One would say that the nasal sound wanders about, looking out 
in vain for an exit, and sinks at last and disappears in a mysterious 
manner." Letter from Count Angelo de Gubernatis, quoted in 
the "Bombay Guardian" of Oct. 30th, 1886. 

The reader should however be cautioned that while the above 
is affirmed regarding the pronunciation of anusvara in Sanskrit, it 
■does not apply equally to Gujarat!, in which, as in other Indian 
vernaculars, the anusvara utterance is comparatively faint and 
indistinct. Indeed, in his "Comparative Grammar of the 
Gaudian* Languages," (page 31), Hoernle states "Gaudian 
possesses no anusvara." 

8. Visarga ((h^I), 

The symbol : (No. 1 6 in the Alphabet)) called (H^\ visarga, 
rejection^ is not a pure consonant but a mere spirant consonantism. 
As to origin, it is a faint substitute for an s or r that has been 
rejected and lost to sound after a preceding vowel. Accordingly 
visarga can come only immediately after a vowel, of which vowel 
it may be regarded as the " gradual ending," a " vowel-finish " 
uttered with a slight stress of voice. An approximation to the 
visarga sound is heard in the last ' ha ' of Minneha/hS, : 

" Listless, longing, hoping, fearing, 
Dreaming still of Minnehaha, 
Of the lovely Laughing Water 
In the land of the Dacotahs." 

Longfellow: Song of Hiawatha, x : 9-12. 

The visarga, so far from being itself a syllable, does not admit 
of any vowel following it immediately, and accordingly its equiva- 
lent in transliteration is not ' ha ' but ' h.' Thus %y*\ = duhkh. 

0. Accent (*i*iti). 

The stress accent of a word originating at a much earlier date 

than the loss of the inherent vowel a, it becomes necessary when 

applying the following rules relating to accent to replace the 

inherent vowel wherever it may be lost to pronunciation in 

"Gaudian designates collectively all the North-Indian vernaculars of 
^Sanskrit affinity, 
2 



PART I. 



b) in ordi- 
nary Guja» 
rati speech* 



Vowel* 
finish. 



Stress. 



10 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART I. 



a) primary. 



I) secon- 
dary. 



c) in com- 
pound 
words. 



modern Gujarat! speech. For example iW-Hl, now pronounced 
Kac-bo, must in determining its accent be treated as though 
the older form Kacabo were still in vogue. 

A. Rule 1. — In dissyllabic words the accent fahs on the first 
syllable, 

e. g. 4l"H kam[a]; jafl kali- *U'=J sadhu. 
Rule 2. — In trisyllabic words the accent falls on the first 
syllable provided the penult be short. 
e. g. -^m maran[a] ; oiVti ga'rabi ; 4W>U 

ka/c[a]bo. 
But should the penult contain a vowel long either 
by nature or by position, then that syllable 
takes the accent. 
e. g. h\[\ kara'r[a] ; £$igv£ kale jum ; ^l^^l ajarl. 
lY. B. — The vowels a I u e ai o au are long " by nature.*' 
The short vowels a i u if followed immediately 
a) either by two or more consonants, 
6) or by an anusvara and one consonant 
are long " by position." 
Rule 3. — In polysyllabic words the accent falls on the 
last syllable but three provided both penult and 
antepenult be short. 

e. g. hVV\ ka'r[a]vat[a] ; JtflRi^l ka'l[a]s'iyo. 
If, however, either the penult or the antepenult 
be long, then treat the last three syllables as 
though a trisyllabic word, and accent according 
to Rule 2. 

e. g. cftytfl tar[a]phal[a] ; cUSti^ tar[a]ch6d[a]- 
vurh ; cRil^l tar[a]kari; clHl^ tal<[a]ra'rl. 

B. The first syllable of a word, if not having the stress 
accent, takes a secondary accent that is often scarcely 
less strong than the primary. Thus i&flvj kale jum ; 
CttkM ta r[a]pha l[a]. 

C. In compound words the stress accent of the last member 
becomes the primary accent of the compound, while 
the stress accent of the first member is reduced to a 
secondary accent. 



ACCENT. 

Thus kalp[a] + t'aru = ka'lpfajtaru ; sva' + da man[a] = 
sva l da'rnan[a]. 
D. The accented syllable of an uninfected word retains the 
accent even after the addition of an inflexional suffix, 
and the suffix itself takes a secondary accent. 
Thus feli^i gho'do, *tui*fl gho'datln ; 

d^i^ u'n.cak[a]vum, (l^ift'l u'ncakrne, or u'fic[a]krne. 



Note : — We are now in a position to supplement the rules 
given in paragraph 6 regarding the omission of inherent a. 

A conjunct letter whose last member is either a nasal (n, n, n, 
m) or a semivowel (y, r, 1, v) can never lose its inherent a ; 
e. g. \*><Q krsna ; ^ ratna ; y$ surya ; "Mq parva ; 

?sct4ctl krtajiiata; MtV^ctl paripfimata. 
But with this sole proviso, 
Rule 1. — Inherent a, when the final of its word, is lost. 

Thus m kam[a] ; hW kam[a] ; tft ghar[a] ; vtH=l 
manav[a] ; ^ s'abdfa] ; ^Ui samapt[a] ; 
^M samp[a]. 

Rule 2. — A non-accented inherent a coming between two 
consonants is lost, provided that the resulting 
quasi-conjunct be followed 

a) either by any vowel not inherent a, 

b) or by inherent a and another syllable. 
Thus a) h\i ka / r[a]vum ; £<& ka'r^s'e ; 

il"H^fl ka p[a]m ; icnfctHl ka'l[a]s'iyo ; 
£R«U kac[a]bo ; §\h\\ cho'k[a]ro ; 
<l W tar[a]phal[a] ; cttilfl tar[a]ka n ; 
Also hP\<W kalp[a]na ; M*r-UHM par^svadhinfa]. 
^M^dl sama'ksfajta ; M^fHtcl paks[a]pa t[a]. 
b) i^cl ka'r[a]vat[a] ; ^ic/lM^ ba l[a]pan[a], 
K-lCR kal[a]tar[a] • *R%<\ ga'rfajdanfa]. 
Forms such as ^h^i, <to£i, 'di^Wlti might, according to 
the rules, become either nfk[a]lavum or nfkalOjvum, m kjajlas'e 
or mka^ajs'e, and nik[a]lava num or nikal[a]vanum. In such 
instances the latter of the two inherent as is the one to be 
omitted. 



11 

PART I. 



d)in inflect- 
ed words 



Inherent 
a 

a) when not 
lost. 



b) when lost. 



PART IK 



ETYMOLOGY, OR THE GRAMMAR OF WORDS. 



PART II. 



Rule. 



Non-mascu 
lines in Sji. 



CHAPTER r. 
THE NOUN. (-li>i) 



oi»lo 



10. Gender ( «nfo )» 

The gender, masculine, feminine, or neuter, of many Gujaratl 
nouns can be learned only through constant practice. 

As a general rule, words ending in non-radical 3U, 4, or § 
are respectively masculine, feminine, or neuter. Thus §tll a 
horse ; ?h£l a mare ; Ifo^ a horse without reference to its sex. 

11» Words ending in 5U yet not masculine. 

^U fern, a cave ; from Skr. gfi fern. 

^U fern, a custom ; from Persian ^ fern. 

*$[\ fern, a creeper ; for aioUW, from Skr. gf 3r /. a medicinal 

plant, 
^ll fern, a cow ; used as the first member of a compound 

word, e. g, Sliii^i a cow's ear. Cf. Skr. 

aft m. or /. an ox, a cow. 
§1 fern, a lizard (whence at€«i&ll /. and Mli<itl^l /., names 

of different kinds of lizards) ; for 5ll&, 

from Skr. 'Ttor/. the iguana. 
&l fern, or 6ia>U fern, mortar ; probably from Skr. §srr f„ 

plaster, mortar, 
ff/crjl fern, a leech ; from Skr, y^hi /. a leech. 
t\[ fern, young grass also H^l ; from Skr. ^fr /. panic grass. 
*»U fern, odour, whence "wj^t/. fragrance, and "ti^l/. a bad 

odour ; from Persian ^1 fern. 
^l^l fern, clamour; this word is a reduplication of the vocative 
particle & Ho ! Hallo ! Also &<&l fern. 
>U or $Vi or % neuter, the mouth, face ; for >U&, from Skr, 

g^ neut., the mouth, face. 



WORDS ENDING IN 



S 4 



YET NOT FEMININE.. 



r35 



^l the ace ( of dice ), is either masculine or feminine, or 

occasionally neuter. 

It will be noticed that the majority of these words are mono- 
syllabic, and that the final a>U has arisen "from some phonetic 
corruption of the root-syllable." See Beanies s Comparative 
Grammar, vol. II. page 151. 

12. Words ending in 4 yet not feminine* 

1) y as a masculine termination frequently occurs in nouns 
indicating male members of castes, trades, or professions, also in 
some nouns expressing nationality. 

Thus h^\ a man of the Kanbi ( cultivator ) caste. 

Slltf a man of the Bhoi ( palanquin-bearer ) caste. 

QlWl a washerman. 

«tacfl a grocer. 

vU^fl a shoe-maker. 

ftl^l a goldsmith. 

•MM or o^^d an astrologer. 

"Hl^fl a Pars!. 

^^fl an Abyssinian, a negro. 

2) Gujarat! words ending in 4 are masculine, if derived from 
Skr. words ( denoting agents ) ending in ' in/ 

Thus &l?ft an elephant, Skr. fi^TT m. 
RrHlMl a lord, Skr. m ft^ ro. 

=ttl$fl a witness, Skr. m'fej^ m. 

3 ) A few Gujarat! words in 4 are masculine, though of non- 
Sanskritic origin. 

&MI<£1 a soldier, sepoy; Persian ^L^> sipah! from at,-, 

sipah, soldiery, an army. 
(ottcft a water-carrier; Persian ^*~tf bihishti, a person of 

«s^ — $.) Bihisht, or Paradise. 

4) The following nouns ending in 4 are neuter, since 
retaining the gender of their Sanskrit originals : 

tft clarified butter, Skr. stf n. 

aStorwl* curds, Skr. ^i% n. 

Misfit water, Skr. qpflpf n. 

»{l = uflg w. = wfltf n. seed, Skr. qfa or sfffi n. 



* Also M&1 neuter, curds. 

t Note also Hi^»l^ nmer, a wwawris houaghold. duties, 



CHAP. I. 



Non-femi- 
nines in y. 



a. mascu- 
lines in $. 



b. neuters 
in 4- 



14 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



Mainline 
in (f . 



Correspi n- 

dent nouns 

in Sil, ^, 

and §. 



*rfcg or JTfN' -». 



M^l black pepper, Skr. 

>Uc{l a pearl, Skr. 

«ll& blood, Skr. 

ffAtlW the Brahmanical cord, Skr. 

?ilMl# areca-nut. 

The last two words, otvllfel and ftl'Mltf, are also sometimes 
feminine. 

Note : — The word H§, wheat, is masculine, from Sanskrit 
Tfr=nT: or atr^TTT : masc. The final (3 of $4(3 is thus part 
of the original root. 

13. 5U m, *J f, and @* in as gendral terminations* 

Names of human beings, if ending in a>U, frequently have a 
feminine in y, and a few have a common gender in @. 
illsl = an uncle ; h\}fl = an aunt, wife of illsl ; 
£li^l = a son ; CUft = a daughter ; 
$[h\l = a boy ; &Ur# = a girl ; &Us\ = a child, boy or girl. 
The names of some animals admit of all three gendral termina- 
tions. 

3<1^l = a dog ; ^ct^l = a bitch ; j$ct^=a dog, male or female. 
Hb\[ = a he-goat; «tifl=a she-goat; <t$f=a goat, „ „ 

Similarly ^i^l or «PiC-fl or aptgj, a stork, ^$$1 or ^ii^fl or 
^i^j, a sparrow. 

In analogy with this principle, should an inanimate object 
have a name ending in SU ( or @ ), and an object of the like 
kind a name ending in y, the former is generally the larger, 
stronger, coarser of the two, and the latter, the smaller, weaker, 
finer. 

= a hill ; ^i^l /. = a small hill, hillock. 

= fa^fl of inferior (Vh{\/. = a savoury dish of 

quality; rice and pulse. 

= a cart. au£l /. = a carriage. 

Note, however, that the masculines mil, a yard, and Mill, a 
pit, indicate objects, coarser indeed, yet smaller than their corres- 
ponding feminines, <Hl£\, a garden aud "^Hl^l, a creek. 

In like manner t\%[ m. a thread ; but "^l^/. a string, cord. 

11i m. a berry (of the banyan tree) ; but 2<fl /. 

a musk melon. 
^§£11 m. a copper coin ( half-pice ) ; but 
^c-fl /, a silver coin ( half-rupee ). 



1h\\ m. 1 
f>H*lll m. 

^lli n. 



FEMIXIXES FORMED FROM MASC. BY FEM. SUFFIXES. 



15 



CHAP. I. 



Feminines 
in 






14. Feminiaes formed from masculines 
by feminine suffixes. 

a) If a masc end in WHl* ( for y*a>U ), its fem. is formed by 
substituting for the final a»U either 5*% ^H^ or «Hl^Q. 

Thus QilftlMl to. a partner ; fem. <HlP>lM^. 

SlfdMl to. a leper ; fem. l[Q>H% orJSlfo^. 
eilO^Ml m. a Vanio, a \ 

man of the - ^^^ or c^^ or *HU?n. 
merchant > r n 

caste; a ^«* 

Banya. ] 

b) If the masc. end in 4, the fem. is sometimes formed by 
the addition of ^il^fl, or by substituting for the final *J either 
<$fl or a>l<3£ or 3M<^. 

Thus H^fl to. a master ; fem. H^fNl^l. 

&l*(l to. an elephant ; fem. ^l^^fl. 

Ql»{l to. a washerman ; /ero. Ql'^ or Sh'-tQJ. 

Siofl m. Koll; fem. \v\% 

fl^l<-(l "i. a seller of betel ; /em. d^Ul^. 

Note also "4[cl to. a husband ; fem. "Mcdl a wife. 

c) If the masc. end in (§, this (§ changes to <H ( v ) before a 
suffixed fem. termination. 

=HI'=J m. a saint ; fem. ^uWl, also W%£[. 

(4| to. a Hindu man. fem. fesfll^fl. 
e?) If the masc. end in a consonant, the fem. is formed by 
adding one or other of the terminations ^Mi, y, £], <^fi, SHi^fJ, 

Thus "4 del m. a teacher ; 
1 r -i m. a god ; 
eflU m. a Bhil man ; 
(m^W to. a fiend ; 
>l&cR m. a sweeper ; 
^<sv\cl m. Rajput man ; 
"HIH m. a tiger ; 
pk& to. a lion • 
*U to an acrobat ; 



fem. M&ctl. 
/em. 1^. 

/em. <Kl€l(l; also oflsi^. 
/em. fMflW^jl. 
/em. $kcRl<${l. • 
/em. ^oy^cll^fl. 
/em. 11^ or =UHm. 
/cm. (*l<^. 
/em. <il$[; also r^ 



I5fl. 



Kl. 



A. 



Long i, when followed by a long vowel, frequently changes to short 
i with compensatory y ( j=iy ). 






16 



GTttARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART IT. 



•Gender ex- 
pressed 
otherwise 
than by 
grammati- 
cal change, 



{Jendral 
termina- 
tions. 



15, Irregular Femmines, 

The following feminines are noteworthy — 
Ills 13 w. a chief, a title of honour ; ftm. IHMi or ££3i^fli 
M'2'H m. a village officer ; fern. Mieil<$fl. 

3U«{1 m. a goldsmith ; fern. WMl^ or ^HR<31. 

\kM m. a native land-official ; fern. °ik\[% 
J^S\1 m. a husband of *^lW ; fern, \[\i = an aunt, father's 

sister, also \\J and ^feMl, 

16* Different words for the Masculine and the 
Feminine* 

To indicate the feminine a word distinct from the masc. is 
often employed. 

^fl a female, 
♦lift or MISl a female. 

»HRct a woman, a wife. 



M^ 1 * a male. 

*R a male. 
M3S a man. 
ftctl father. 
"UM father. 
<HtfcJ brother. 

<H3 a husband. 

<H3 a bridegroom. 
*ftt^l a father-in-law. 
«icn.g an ox. 
>U3 a peacock. 
Milt a male buffalo 



Midi mother. 

Ml mother. 

^•i sister. 

ei§ a wife ( or son's wife ). 

h^m a bride. 

^tl^i a mother-in-law* 

oilM a cow. 

^<H a peahen. 

<H^t a female buffalo ; also 

Ml£\, but this latter term 

is generally applied to a 

young she-buffalo. 

IT, €ender as indicated by Terminations, 

As a general rule, admitting however of several exceptions, 

a) Those nouns are masculine which end in 

non-radical =>U ; Sl^ill an illustration ; 
cl preceded by anusvara ( — nt ) ; sicl a tooth ; 
»Hl, if derived from Skr. nouns ending in ' an ' or ' tr ' 

(Guj. ta) ; Rlavi a King ; i& a doer, agent. 

b) Those are feminine which end in 

non-radical 4 ( or W|«/, 3 (1, >W, <$[i, «U^, V$L ) ; %tl a 
mango. 



•) 



WORDS SPELT ALIKE, BUT DIFFERING IN GENDER AND MEANING. 17 

*U if not derived from Skr. nouns endiDg in ' an ' or 

• tr ' ; 

a»{Uii hope ; Ml mercy 5 
*HUl or i or ell, if signifying abstract qualities ; 

*4<tt%l bitterness ] ili coldness, tranquillity ; t§SRCtl 
generosity ; 

a^^J or <$J as fern, terminations to masc. nouns ; see para. 1 4 ; 
9/ or Ct or S, if borrowed from Hindustani or Persian ; 

ado/ a thing ; «fHl<tf prayer ; cWhcl health, disposition ; 

fll^U injunction. 

Those nouns &re neuter which end in 
non-radical (3 ( or =»iU2J or \i?j ) ; &IQJ a hole ; 
& f signifying abstract quality ; ^^ manliness ; 
MQJ, signifying abstract condition ; "iMMQl infancy ; 
m suffixed to verbal roots ; ^^l conduct ; 
*MI<$J suffixed to adjectives ; dil^ depth. 

18. Words spelt alike, but differing in 
gender and meaning* 



^xl^ m. or n. an answer. 

/. the North (scilicet foil /. = region). 
&S m. a crab. 

f. the zodiacal sign Cancer (scilicet \[Qt\ /. = a s ign ) 
m m. touch ( in assaying ) ; strength, ' pith ' ( o 
land &c). 
/. the breast-string of a coat (*H3R^l). 
$t<a m. time (generally written 4M). 

/. day (cf. aiW il€l yesterday, »iK<{l Sl<H to-morrow) 
%U m. a wall of a fort. 

/. the neck. 
lUl m. a collection, store. 

/. a pointed bar of iron. 
^HlcR/. regard, consideration, 

n. manure. 
3iH<H m. a cheek, 

/. a row of persons sitting down at a meal. 
3 



Homonyms 
distinguish- 
ed by 
gender. 



IS 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



p ART j ^ll<A m. refuse, mud. 

/. abusive language. 
y^J m, a quality, attribute. 

/. sackcloth. 
^li m. chalk. 

/. an ornament for the hair. 
n. a wheel, 
ajtt m. a secret messenger. 
/. youDg green grass. 
ail<H m. habit, custom. 

/. conduct, behaviour; also a line of houses, a 
chawl. 
<£i<ii /, a blow (but this is more frequently written £|l<Jt). 

n. a large drum. 
H*i f. the zodiacal sign Sagittarius ( scilicet Rlfy /. = a 
sign.). 
n. wealth. 
fcllSj m. a root (in grammar). 

/. a metal. 
^M m. incense. 
m. or /. sunshine. 
«il«l m. a master, lord. 

/. a nose-rope for cattle. 
M'H m. or w. an epistle. 
n. a leaf. 
<Hld m. cooked rice. 
/. a kind, sort. 
n. rice in its husk. 
>l% m. spirituous liquor. 
*i& or ^ n. honey. 
MlQJ^t m> a man (male), vir. 

n. man ( collectively ) ; a human being, homo. 
*fM m. a fish. 

/. the zodiacal sign Pisces ( scilicet ^lftl/.=a sign ) 
<HR m. a yard. 
/. time. 
n. water, 
m^l m. residence, abode. 
/. smell, odour. 



WORDS SPELT ALIKE, BUT DIFFERING IN GENDER AND MEANING. 19 



IllJr m. sorrow, grief. 

/. a co- wife. 
&R w. a garland, necklace. 

/. a line, row ; also a defeat. 
Also the following nouns, which are less commonly heard, 
a>icR m. or n. an interval, 
ft. the heart. 
h$[ m. an elephant. 

/, diet, regimen. 
"$14 m. leprosy. 

/. a byre ; also a smithy, a carpenter's shop. 
~»i\9f m. the lowest note of the octave in Hindu music. 
/. the itch, 
fetid m. a blow, stripe. 
m. or/, murder, 
te^ m. frenzied speech. 
/. a bamboo chip, 
ff/cd m. an ascetic : a Jain priest. 

/. a pause in reading ; the ccesura (in prosody), 
2M in. goblin. 

ft. a saddle. 
ll<sl in. a mast of a ship. 

/. a bucket. 
1\(S\ m. split peas. 

n. fashion, cut, also hypocrisy. 
CU /. a crack, 
n. a faction. 
cMi /. a salver ( for betel-leaf, etc. ). 

ft. an upper story. 
cll<H m. amusement, fun. 
/. a bald crown. 
7ft. or /. a beat (in music). 
Mli m. a breadth of cloth. 

/. a bench. 
«Ht<y/ m. a hawk. 

/. a leaf-plate. 
Mil /. the earth, 
ft. curds. 



CHAP. i. 



Earer 

homonyms 
distinguish- 
ed by 
gender. 



20 
PART IL 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 

\W m. a king. 

/. humble supplication ; tale-bearing-, 
^tt^l m. the teak tree ( Tectona grandis ), or it* 
wood. 
/. a splinter. 
^U i /. understanding, sense. 

n. a mortgage. 
\\i m. a kind of snake. 

n. the wood-apple ( Feronia elephantum ). 
^l«l m. oil-cake. 
/. a search. 
tWQ f. the port-side ('nautical). 

n. a hobble ( for horses, &c. ) Also[spelt aR«^. 
HR^i /. correct adjustment of a balance when 
weighing. 
n. the taking, assumption of. 

19. Words of Variable Gender. 



Nouns 


Masc. and Fem. «h^ a scale, fresh skin over a boi» 


a. maso. 
and fem. 


n°i[$ tobacco. 




CtUt>Ut display, finery. 




"£& flesh, ,the body. 




<H>Hct time. 




epi influence, interest. 




frfa fashion, way, a ceremony. 




q[cl a span. 




Also, as in § 1 8/ met murder. 




cll<H a beat ( in music ). 




*£H sunshine. 


1. maso. and 


Masc. and Neut. QrR^J a ray, beam. 


neut. 


Mftmi"H a result, consequence. 




M^H a question. 




Met an opinion. 




Hvi an effort. 




Also, as in § 1 8, anctt an interval. 




<§tR an answer. 



STTOIB-ER. 



21 



H^ an epistle.. 
Fern. andNeut. =*MW£l life, age. 

SUtfPHt^ acquaintance-. 
Hfl^HKH or H&HM a watch. 

*U<H a ship.. [ --tt^l m. a husband J. 
<H*1 time of life, age. 
^R morning. 
and, as in § 12, <taUW the Brahmanical cord, 

^llMl^l areca-nut. 
Masc. Fem.&Neut. o^i^ a person (see § 21 )„ 
a*£>t* a flint. 
^l«l fun, joking and jesting. 
U^(lMcl respectful entreaties. 

^U the ace of dice ( see § 1 1 ). 

2<h Number (h*m). 

The noun in Gujarat! has two ' numbers,' the SIrjgular ( a>U- 
<**M) and the Plural (^WW). 

Rule : — If a noun end in non-radical 5U, its plural is formed 
by substituting for this v\\ either *Ht or *Mla>U„ 

If a noun end in non-radical (f , its plural is formed by sub- 
stituting for this (3 either *>U or a^ia^l. 

If a noun do not end in either non-radical a>U or non-radical 
6, its plural is formed by simply adding a>U to the singular. 

Thus *Ull a horse ; plur. llui or *lui5U. 

«=&!$[ an ornament ; plur. H^i or H^mi^ll. 
JJCHW a slave ; plur. 3J<£U>U. 

Note 1 : — In some districts of Gujarat neuter nouns ending 
in a consonant can form their plural by adding ^Hi. 

Thus H\ a house, pi. tfti. 
vlcR a field, pi. ^cfti. 
«U* the'fruit of the • bore ' tree, pi. ^Ri. 

Such forms, however, are mere provincialisms, heard especially 
in the Charotar, the district comprising " Talukas Borsad and 
Anand and parts of Nadiad, Mahmudabad, and Matar of the 



CMAV. I. 



c. fem. aiicl 
neut. 



d. m. f. k Bi 



Rule, 



22 



GUJARAT! GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



Singulars 
as though 
plurals. 



Plurals for 
the most 
part with- 
out a singu. 
lar. 



H<3 m. wheat. 
ctet m. sesamum seed. 
>Pl m. a kind of pulse 
^iWR m. news. 



■ an oath. 



Kheda collectorate, Pitlad in GaekwadI territory, and part of 
Cambay." 

Note 2 : — The few nouns ending in radical 3U ( § 1 1 ) do not 
take an additional SU for their plurals. Thus ^t/. a cave or caves. 

21 Words noteworthy as to Number* 

a) The following words, though singular in form, are 
generally treated as" plurals :— 

oilH m. fortune ( generally bad.) 
SlMtt m. 
Wi m. 

?lPW in. 

b) The following words are seldom heard in the singular : — 
SU^l m. pi. 1 hard grain, that resists boiling or 
iltfWl m. pi. ) grinding. 

h\l n. pi. hailstones. 
hWHi n. pi. weights ( of a balance ). 
ilSilllSU wi. pi. urgent entreaties. 
*UtfU m. pi. tricks, pranks. 
Ctt\(iMi w. pi. ineffectual strugglings. 
cl^i n. pi. a vow to fast three days. 

• t'lRlMl w. pl< grimaces, 
tyl^l m pi. coriander-seed. 
*toi n. pi. eaves, drops falling from the eaves. 

M&lil m. pi. vain efforts. 
\[\\ w. pi. vain efforts. 
\\\i n. pi. spray. 

"ttlHi n. pi. a special form of blessing (amongst women). 
"H^ii n. pi. the flowers of the Mahuda tree ( Bassia 

latifolia). 
^*Hl n. pi. short hair, fur ( of animals ). 
SlMil m. pi. taunts. 
<Hlm m. pi. fastings, a long fast. 
SU&i n. pi. benefit, gains. 
^•H^i n. pi. vain efforts, 
^^i n. pi. vain efforts. 
=ttt<Hlcll<ctl m. pi. supplications, humble entreaties. 



CASE. 



23 



«) ?U, a hundred takes as its plural $', from Sanskrit STcrrft c 
and Prakrt *T3Tfc. 
oy^t, a person, is used only after an adjective expressing 
number. In the singular it may appear as <r/i£l or cy§)l m., 
(r/^n /., or atfi^ com., and in the plural as oV<^ or <r/<$tl ra., 
^fl^Hl /., or oyi^i com. 



22. Case (CnoiGn). 



The Cases in the declension of a Gujarat! noun are seven : 
1. Subjective. 2. Objective. 3. Agential. 4. Ablative. 
5. Genitive. 6. Locative. 7. Vocative. 

The following particles serve as case-endings in the declension 
of a noun : — 



Subjective 




- ... 




.. 


. 





Objective 


* 


• • • 




.. 


. 


to, for. 


Agential 


51 


• • • 




.. 


... 


by. 


Ablative 


*u 


... 




.. 


■ • • • 


from, by. 


Genitive 


}l(' 


n); 


*n 


(/): 


i (■».)■ 


of. 


Locative 1. 


31 


... 




... 


... 


on, at. 


2. 


Hi 


• ■ • 




• • ■ 


• • • 


in. 



Vocative : See § 24. 
In poetry cl^l ( m f ) ct<^l (/. ) ct^ ( n.) and %\{ ( m.) Sfl (/.) 
1s| ( n. ) frequently occur as Genitival case-endings ; also ^., 
though rarely, as Ablatival. 

ai40l$Vl •fU tlMl cM *W <Hl^l Thirst is not quenched by drops 
of dew. 

^i °flct^ cicl^ £U ^?ll With many songs sit in His house. 
In some districts the Ablatival Case-ending is declined for 
gender, thus — «li m., -2ft /., -Q n. 

Note ; Hindu grammarians have from of old reckoned seven 
cases, which they name as follows : — 

the 1st ' division ' = M^Ml 9i<H.Qsn = Nominative. 
„ 2nd 
„ 3rd 
„ 4th 
„ 5th 
„ 6th 
„ 7th 



n 


= GtflMl 


i> 


= Accusative. 


>> 


= <1cQmi 


>> 


= Instrumental. 


}} 


= *l<J«tf 


}> 


= Dative. 


)} 


= toMl 


»> 


= Ablative. 


}> 


= <**# 


» 


= Genitive. 


)> 


= ttHHl 


j> 


= Locative. 



The Cases 
(7) 



The Case 
endings. 



Hindu 
nomencla- 
ture of 
Cases. 



24 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



The Base 
or Stem. 



Rule. 



The Voca- 
tive how 
formed. 



*Hi5»l con- 
tracting to 
81. 



" The object sought in the arrangement is simply to set next 
to one another those cases which are to a greater or less extent, 
in one or other number, identical in form ; and, putting the 
Nominative first, as leading case, there is no other order by which 
that object could be attained. The vocative is not considered 
and named by the native grammarians as a case like the rest. " 
(Whitney: Sanskrit Grammar, page 81). In the vernacular 
schools of Gujarat the cases are called simply "H^sft 1st, «{l25 2nd, 
^25 3rd, aU«(l 4th, MRHl 5th, tejl 6th, and fciflHl 7th. This 
mechanical numbering of the cases regardless of their several 
functions is open to grave objection. 

23. Base* 

The ' base ' of nouns ending in non-radical »U or (3 is obtained 
by changing this a»U or § to a>tl. 

Thus sing. subj. ^lll, base fclut. 
„ HH ,i H^l. 
The ' base ' of all other nouns is identical with the Subjective. 
Thus sing. subj. $QX% base yc-tl>t. 

24. Declension of Nouns ( nind ^u»*un ). 

(SEE PARADIGM I.) 

Rule :— Nouns are declined in the singular by adding the case* 
endings to the base : 

Nouns are declined in the plural by adding the case- 
endings to the subjective plural. 

The Vocative Case has no case-ending, and accordingly it is 
in the singular identical with the base, and 
in the plural identical with the subjective plural. 

It is often preceded by the interjections % *ft, ^, »U, 
•ill. 
Forms such as ?ltita>l ( Agential and 5l - Locative, both sing, 
and plur.) contract to fell^. 

For the Locative H\ ' in the house,' ' at home,' the form Sfc 
is nearly always used. 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 



25 



The base-ending in *Hl and the case-ending in 5} ( Agent, and 
Loc.) are the only traces still retained in the Gujarat! declension 
of the old Sanskrit inflexions. The-Ml (Loc.) and-«(l (Abl.) are 
definitely postpositions or added felp-words. The Genitival-^ll 
is derived from an old word ct<^<3, still preserved in the poetic 
Genitive — cl^l, but this derivation took place subsequent to the 
time when the ^^<1 had developed from a postposition into a 
true termination. The-^1 of the Objective ( including Dative) 
represents an earlier cl^^J or flisj, and is in fact merely the Locative 
ef the Genitive. 

The Genitive may by regarded as an adjective of three termi- 
nations. 

Thus >Pl m. the foot, and fcluuU "*R the horse's foot. 
*MN /. the eye, „ ^luMl ^m the horse's eye. 
*U?j n. the head „ ht,ii >tt?£ the horse's head. 



CHAP. II. 

Original 
case-end- 
ings. 



PAKT II. 



Adjectival 
and (3 n. 



aHl to. pi. 



Rule. 



CHAPTER II. 

ADJECTIVES (Ch^i). 

Adjectives agree with the noun they qualify in gender, number 
and case. 

25. Gender ( wifa ). 

All adjectives are of common gender (and are consequently 
indeclinable for gender ), except those having as gendral termina- 
tions =Hl masc, y fern., (3 newt. 

Thus clean = ^U^ masc. fern, or neut. 

good = ^l^l masc, ^tl^l fern., ^l| neut. 

The distinctively fern, adjectives in y are not the only adjectives 
with that termination, there being many adjectives also ending 
in y of common gender. 

Thus "^HK-fl empty ; masc. fern, or neut. 
^Ueft covetous ; masc. fern, or neut, 

26. Number (H^«i). 

Rule: — Masculine adjectives in v\\form their 'plural by changing 
»U to a>U. 
Neuter adjectives in (3 form their plural by changing (3 

to =M*l. 
All other adjectives are indeclinable for number. 
Thus masc. sing, ^l^l, pi. ^Rl ; 
neut. sing. *u|, pi. h.\\l; 
fern. sing. ^1$, pi. ^1$ ; 
co??z. si-na. H[\ t pi. U\\. 

27. Declension of Adjectives. 

( SEE PARADIGM II.) 

Adjectives when employed in the place of nouns are declined 
precisely as nouns. Thus : — 

°l : (l t H = poor ; ^i^l'^H = to the poor (plural ). 
Rule : — Adjectives when employed qualificatively or predicatively 

do not take any case-endings. 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



27 



But masc. adjectives in 3U and neut. adjectives in <3 change 
this Su or (3 to basal »tl /or aM cases ( except subjective ) 
0/ the singular ; 

w&i£e /or aM cases 0/ ifte plural 

a form identical with the subjective plural is employed. 
Adjectives other than those ending in Su (m.) or (3 (n.) are 
indeclinable. 
The following Table shows the inflexional changes in the declen- 
sion of an adjective in Su m., y /., and (3 n. 



Case. 


Singular. 


Plural. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


i? 7 . 


xV. 


Subjective 

Other than Subjec. 


-Sll 


-4 

-4 


-4 


-*Hl 







The Genitive of Nouns is similarly declined ; thus : — 



Case. 


Singular. 




Plural. 






M. F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


iV. 


Subjective 

Other than Subjec. 


-41 -Hi 
-41 -41 


-i 

-41 


-41 
-41 


-41 
-41 


-4i 
-4i 



The Genitive, being thus adjectival in form, agrees in gender, 
number, and case with the noun that the genitival word qualifies. 
Thus:— 

The horse's foot, ^lliHl M^l. 

In the horse's foot, §LU4l M^Mi. 

The stables for the horse, §U141 ct^t ( Si I ). 

In the stables for the horse, §l.U4l cl^<Ht ( Su ) vfi. 

The horse's eye, §1414*1 *tbH. 

In the horse's eye, §1414*1 ^Hi^i. 

The eyes of the horse, §l4l«il ^tfnl. 

In the eyes of the horse, §1414*1 ^Hi^RL 



CHAP. II. 



Adjectives 
how declin- 
ed. 



Genitives 
how declin- 
ed. 



Examples 
of genitival 
agreement. 



28 



GU.TARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



Attraction 
of *Hl to 5l 
in declen- 
sion of Ad- 
jective. 



The Com- 
parative 
Degree. 



TheSuperla 
tive Degree, 



The horse's head, ?Jui«j »u?i. 

In the horse's head, tiUHl "Hl^lMU 

The saddles of the horse, §Ul«ii &\{. 

In the saddles of the horse, *lUHi SS^UlL 
Note :~If a declinable adjective qualify a noun in the AgentiaB 
Case or in the Si-Locative case, then the adjective, 
instead of its regular basal termination in »U, takes by; 
attraction a termination in 3}. 
Thus «*(]<£ s&ll for »KN $&tilv\, on the second day. 
ff/^Sj &t*4 for oVH^l &[\ on the right hand. 
When, however, the noun in the Agential Case is the logical 
subject of a Transitive Verb ( § § 1 3 1, 1 3 6 ), a declinable adjective 
( or genitive ) qualifying this noun may, and often does, retain 
its 2HI termination. 

Thus »Hi <Hfa<£ Sj-ft HRl |W %&\ "Hmi His nephew- 
asked some money from him ( or 5$ <Hpt<^ ). 

28# Degrees of Comparison ( sjc-mu ) 

A» The Comparative Degree ( aH-'WR^Ur g<H«il ) is expressed 
in Gujaratl by the simple adjective preceded by the ablative of 
the noun with which the comparison is made. 

Thus mm*ft >U^, larger than the head. 

Another way of expressing comparison is by the word h\Q& 
' than ' preceded either by the genitive in- «il ( for personal 
pronouns - \[ ) or by the ' base' of the noun. 

Thus tt=U«vHt Hfli (gfsj, higher than the door, 

<PiRl 4Vti §t=i taller than you. 

B. The Superlative Degree ( *l4*tP}§ti Q^Ml ) is expressed 
by the simple adjective preceded by any of the Gujaratl equiva- 
lents for " than all," such as 

*§% *§ 4W*l; *$% ^4 4Vti; WW% WU 4Vli; 

Thus K0{ ty or a§ iWi $ll£, largest of all, largest. 
The Superlative Degree may be idiomatically expressed by the 
simple adjective preceded by the same adjective used as si 
noun in the »ti - Locative Singular Neuter. 

Thus >lUl"Hi >ll£ largest (lit. large among the large). 
SUtoMi =>U^1 fi'^-'Hcl the least price, the lowest price. 
<ftft»U iHlX HM the highest price. 



chapter nr. 

PRONOUNS (*Wi)* 

The declension of many of the pronouns is irregular, but the CHAP. UlL 
irregularities can, for the most part, be explained by the fact that 
different forms are assumed as ' bases ' for declension. 

29. The First Personal Pronoun. 
(win av*HM& %viro). 

The First Personal Pronoun <|, I, may be regarded as declined 
in the singular from four different bases, namely 

1. § from which comes <|*fl. 

2. H „ „ come >M and >l. 

3. 1RI „ „ ., m\ mi% "*i&l-il-\, tRWf. 

4. "H<rt „ „ „ M<*3,M^,M<tf(com.gen.),"»i<*>ti. 
In its plural the base-forms are three : ^"H, aH'HRt, and 3H>U. 
The full declension is as follows : — 



Bate. 



Subj. 
Obj. 

% 

Ab. 

Gen. 
Loo. 



Singular 






MRl 



IRPii 



"HoV 



1^ 

MW (com) 



Plural. 



»W 



( »m ) «h>i 



5H>t>ii 



"WRl 






*Hva 



(*t>u*n) 



^rni 



The 'Ho^-forms are found ohiefly, though not solely, in poetry. 

Occasionally are heard still longer forms from the base 

*j<s* (compare 3<r/ of Second Person). Thus %<*«}, ^oV^fl, ?ioy, and 

H<* atfh'U "* 6W <^H 3HIM SHl«} «*«# *W 4<l €l^g 
I a poor man clasping both hands ( in prayer ) write a petition 
to your honour, the compassionate lord. 



Bases in de- 
clension of 

i 



Declension 
of «. 



30 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



Declension 
of i. 



Declension 
of »HIM^. 



Declension 
of a^iti 2 pi. 



The forms in brackets are seldom used. 
The a^-Locative case does not occur in the declension of 
Pronouns. 

30. The Second Personal Pronoun* 

The Second Personal Pronoun is cj, Thou. 
For its declension it takes as 'bases' 
in the singular <j, d, ClRl and 3<tf ; 
and in the plural cl"H, cfHRl and cmi.. 
Except for the changes consequent upon these changed ' bases' 
the declension of cj is identical with that of <|. 

31. The Personal Pronouns Exclusive and Inclusive* 

The plural 2>{>l ' we' has a connotation that excludes the person 
spoken to ; it means thus ' we as distinct from you/ ' we but 
not you.' To express ' I and you/ or ' we and you/ another 
plural form, namely ^1*4^, must be employed. It is declined 
as follows : — 

Subj. ( =»ilM^ ) »UM§|. 

Obj. ^HlM^ or amM^f. 

Ag. *>i\\% 

AM. ZHl^tft or aMlM^l^. 

Gen. ^iM^tl-^fl-iaL 

Loo.] aHlM^fHi. 

32. The Honorific Pronoun. 

The ' honorific pronoun ' ^HtH, your honour, as carrying- 
with it more respect than cl>l, you, is employed when addressing 
a superior. It is declined in precisely the same way as a regular 
noun ; a*UM, ^IM^, ^IM, *>\n% ^iM^l-'fH, and ^["HHl 

Since ^MlM does duty for ci>l, the plural of the second pers. 
pronoun, it is itself regarded as a plural of the second person. 
E. g. in the sentence *HtM Will ell hV*i «i?l, ' If your honour will 
come, the matter will succeed,' the verb ^Mll^U is in the second 
person plural by reason of its subject ^IM. Similarly ci M^^l 
SHIM M^R c ll«{l £Ml h\?\\, ' Your honour will do (us) the favour of 
coming on that occasion.' 



THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 



31 



33. The Reflexive Pronouns 

The most common of the ' reflexive pronouns ' is Mia ' self.' 
Its Agential Case is also Ml<n, but the remaining cases are con- 
structed from MICll as 'base.' Hence Obj. MKU4 ; Ab. Mlctl ? -(l ; 
Gen. MWl^ll,-'fl,-<d J Loc - ^ctRl. 

Mlci has no plural forms, but the cases of its singular do service 
throughout for the plural. 

Other reflexive pronouns are <r*tcl, Ml, MIS, ^IM, oneself. 

Thus, I myself <| Mlcl or <| «tcl or j| Ml or y\\[ Mi. 
Thou thyself jj Mlct or cj <*[([ or 3 Ml or cll^l Mi. 
He himself cl Mlcl or cl <Mcl or cl Ml or cldl Mi. 

<| Mlcl and cl Mlcl are declined as follows : — 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Snbj. 


<£ MUl 


&*U<1 


^ ^ 


ct=ni ^ul 


Obj. 


*3 ^idl^l 


<ft ^ictl^ 


ZHM^ fycthi 


cl>^ ^iciin 


Ag. 


H^U* 


cl^ *hcl 


*H>1 ^Icl 


clSiiSi ^icl 


Abl. 


>U*l ^IctM 


Hm ^wi«a 


*HHHt ^lCtl«fl 


H>Mt ^ktlSfl 


Gen. m. 


mi^i ^ictuii 


ctel *Udl3l 


aHMl^l ^Icltil 


^H^t ^icitii 


/• 


MiQ MlctKl 


<wi ^ictt-a 


5HMl<\ llcllHl 


cinKl MlctlKl 


n. 


>u!* %\dl& 


rid ^wtd 


5HHl|-^lrtld 


^Ind ^wid 


Loc. 


»U*l ^IcUHl 


cUl iUclWl 


*HHl*l ^tctl>U 


HH'il ^wwi 



CHx\P. III. 



Declension 

of ^. 



The reduplicated form MlflMld* is a distributive reflexive, ' each 
himself,' and is declined precisely as Mlcl. 

34» Table of Allied Pronominal forms. 

Of the allied pronominal forms in the following Table 
the near demonstratives begin with *>{[ or an, 
the remote demonstratives „ „ cl, 
relatives ,, „ <r/, 

correlatives „ „ ct, 

interrogatives „ ,, &. 



KSOJAIUTI UilAMMAlU 



PART It, 



Pronouns 
(1). 

Pronominal 
adjectives 
(3). 



Pronominal 
adverbs 
(3). 



i m ■ i >■• i ii 



Near 
Demonstra- 
tive. 



5\nmary, 
Quality. 

•Size. 
Quantity. 

Manner. 

Place. 

Time. 



»Ht,Sl» this 



Remote 
Demonstra- Relative* 
tive. 



like this, 
so, euch. 

this large, 
so large. 

this (so) 

many or 

much. 

thus 
*([g«U here 4 

5Hc«tl^ at 

this time, 

now. 



ci that. 



fl^likethat, 
so, such. 



Correlative. 



Inter- 

rogative» 



cN<| that 

large, so 

iarge. 

<U& that 
(so) many 
or much. 



clH so. 

t«li there. 

t«4l% at that 
time, then 



& who, 
which, 

&$ like 
which, as. 



a*^ as 

large as. 



StlQ as 
many, or 
much, as w 



&H as. 
*»*U where. 

sWft at 

which time, 
when. 



cl that 



same 



ll® 1 who? 



clg.lik'e that 

same, so, 
such. 

^4 so large 

cU& so 

many or 
much. 

^H 80. 
t*U there. 

c«ll"% at 

that same 
time, then. 



la? Hke 

what ? 
how { 

i^i? 

how 
large? 

lA&f 

How 

many or 

much ? 

iHlhow? 
(why?) 

Ml? 

where?' 

Hft ? at 

whattime? 
when ] 



* aHf^MJ contracts to a^^f. 

Number 1 contains only true pronouns, all of which are 
declined, more^or less regularly, as nouns. 

Numbers 2, 3 and 4 of the Table contain only pronominal 
adjectives, which are accordingly declined as regular adjectives in 
— 5U m., — tJ /., and — (f n. 

Number 5, 6 and 7 contain only pronominal adverbs, which 
are accordingly indeclinable. 

The following are the Gujarat! names of these classes of 
Pronouns : — 

Demonstrative Pronoun ?|ii *t<l«il>l; Eelative Pronoun 
ciO-Ul^ii ( or ^o{fc(l ) . : £t3«il'H ; Interrogative Pronoun H$u4 
^•iM. The correlative Pronoun is identical with the remote 
Demonstrative. 

35» Declension of ant, 

ant, ' this,' ' this close at hand,' is declined from ditferont 
bases, as follows :— • 




DECLENSION OF »Hl AND OF 51* 



33 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Base. 


*tt 


^Hl 


: Wfi3U 


a^ivt 


a HtM'it 


jSubj. 
Obj. 
Ag. 
Ab. 

Gen. 
Log. 




*IHI*U 
"UHRi 


*il»U5l 


( ^l^) 
... ... 


•IPMlli 



36. Declension of 5i ? £, an<l <*♦ 

The declension of Si, ' this,' is formed from bases precisely 
analagous to those employed in the declension of ^L 













Declension 




Sing 


ular. 


Plural. 




of 51. 


Base. 


si 


5l«U 


5t% 


S*h 


SiH«tt 




Subj. 


^ 




Sl5U ( 5* ) 








Obj, 


Sfl 




5H%} 


5l>i^ 






Ag. 


i$ 




a*5a5l 


SlH^ 






Ab. 


swi 


5Ml*lt 


$&m 




5iHm«n 




Gen, 


Sfll-CH 




Si%^i-^1-^ 


siH^ii-'a-d 






Loc. 


Stoi 


5l«tl>U 


SiSUHi 




5Vh*u>u 





NotE 1, — The forms 5{\(&, 5^(151, 3l^l,-«- ft ,-d may be 
employed as the Obj., Ag. } and Gen., Sing. Feminine. 

Note 2.— In the Surat districts SH^J, declined regularly, is 
sometimes used, more especially by Parsis, as a plural of respect. 

The remote demonstrative cl, 'that,' the relative <£, 'who, 
which,' and the correlative ^ " that same " are declined in exactly 
the same way as 3l, ' this.' 

The demonstrative pronoun cl is also used as the third Personal 
Pronoun ( <icflq ^"WW* %i4-itM ) ' he, she, it, and they/ 



CHAP. ill. 
Declension 
of 8HI. 



34 



QUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



Declension 
of 5u$. 



The plural forms of cl are freely employed with reference to 
human beings, but seldom with reference to the lower animals 
or to inanimate objects. 

The reduplicated form <£> ay ^ ^ corresponds to the 

English compound relatives, 'whoso,' 'whosoever,' 'whatsoever,' 

'whichsoever.' See also § 38. Similarly ovHi vtHi &[ cVl 

is 'wheresoever,' and o**{[\ c*H[\ ^ &[\ 'whensoever.' 

31. Declension of li^i and of Sli, *Q, ^J. 

The interrogative ll^J, ' who ? ' takes as bases for its declension 
%\% %\, 3l«il, % and Ml 



Base. 



Subj. 

Obj. 

Ag. 

Ab. 

Gen. 

Loc. 



h% 


%i 




3l«fl (poet.) 

^1,-dVd- 
% [HI (poet.) 





JsHl. 









^1,-0,-d 



Ml. 






The above forms do duty for Singular and Plural alike. 

The interrogative adjectival pronoun $U m. $fl f.Qn.' who ? 
which \ what ] ' is defective, rather than irregular, in its 
declension. 







Singular. 


Plural. 


Declension 
of$U,SQ,g. 


M. F. N. 


M. F. N. 




Subj. 

Obj. 

Ag. 

Ab. 

Gen. 

Log. 


«itii,-dVd--- *itii,-dVd 


ati ... «ft 

«i«a ... «i«a 

«u3i,-<{Vd ••• yidi-dl-d 



Another form of the Gen., sing, and plur., is tol, IlKl, *ld> 
and of the Loc. $l>ii. The Gen. admits of idiomatic use in the 
sense of why ?, What sort of ? When thus used, it generally 



DECLENSION OF llfy J5j, 



35 



stands last in its sentence. h[\\ fiL|5U H?U <M 3l ^ ^ C 
i-SlW £ld"l ? TF% be greatly concerned at the death of some infidel 
Hindus ? Literally, Infidel Hindus died, in that indeed ivhat 
great concern may there be ? 

The defective parts of this declension are supplied by the 
corresponding parts in the declension of lil^i. As a general rule 
$l<£l refers to human beings, but $U, 9j\ t ^i to irrational creatures 
or to things without life. 

38. Declension of %i$ m. &/. £ti or iUJ n. 

The ' indefinite pronoun' ( anf-ifed or ^RM *1<MR ) of most 
common occurrence is "§lvJ m. &/. ' someone, somebody,' iW or 
i'lW n. ' something.' It is declined throughout the singular as a 
regular noun, save that the Ag. Case of jy is wanting. The 
singular forms of this declension serve for the Plural also. 

From %[\J f jW or hi'J as original other allied indefinite pronouns 
are derived. 

Persons. 



some one 



sty 

h\&& „ „ 
&VSIW any one 




SW 

isWSli iiW^li 



some thing. 



any thing. 

The compounds i^slW, «^iW, also ^i and i\h, ' each one,' 
' each thing/ have as their first element &} or £}, ' each.' 

The suffixed 5}$, or in its shortened form h, present in StW^Ur, 
'Sli, &c., is a particle implying approximation, 'about.' It is 
frequently found with numerals; thus ^[^ twenty, but eQ^U 
about twenty, some twenty ; MRi some five. 

Forms compounded with IslW or iW are <rj> §lW-.'...cl ' whoso/ 

'whosoever/ and <rj> iy cl or <£> k\\J cl 'whatsoever,' 

'whichsoever/ also "SIW *>{[n\ %[\J 'some others.' 

39* Possessive Pronouns and other 



Indefinite 
pronouns, 
original & 
derived. 



aqj<* 



The Possessive Pronouns are simply Pronouns in the genitive 

case, thus my is Ml^t, *ttfl, 11$, % clftl, cttfl, <tl$, &c. They 

are declined in precisely the same way as the genitives of nouns 

or as other adjectives. See § 27. The emphatic possessive, oivn, 



S\h as 
suffix. 



Possessive 
pronouns. 



36 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



Other 

pronominal 

adjectives. 



is formed by adding to the simple possessive pronoun either 
^tcll^l,-«{l r tj, or some equivalent word such as Mlcfti, <Mct^ 
Miti ; Tiiu s *tl| ^Wtd my own, cl^ Mlcfl£ Ms own. 

The emphatic possessive (W ( poet. ) one's own, Us, hers, its 
own, their own, is indeclinable e. g. *t$ ci fa<w ij^Sft ^i>fl & 

who confesses is by his oivn mouth pronounced guilty. 

^Hu4i, 'that/ 'that yonder,' and SU&Mft-g, or 5U$l-. 
<Hl-^ ' yonder/ are remote demonstratives. 

*llHfl-fi, or *&-&-& or (i^i, $fel, (*£, or i\ kM, b% 'which ? 
what ? ' is an interrogative. 

£§ll-*(K|„, 'some one, something/ and V2Jl§[M^l-t^ 'some 
one,' 'such and such/ are indefinite pronominal adjectives^ 
MlcftlsH/l-^, ' one's own,' is a reflexive pronominal adjective. 

These all are declined regularly as adjectives. 



CHAPTER IV. 

NUMERALS. 

40. The Figures, or Numerical Symbols* 

( *hU*i5u ), 

The numbers in Gujarat! are written as below, 

1 * 3 Y "M S v» £ fc o 
1234567890 

and they are combined in the same way as in English notation. 
Thus 1892 is written %{<**.. 
The figures bear the following names : — 

1 2}ill the figure 1. 

* "Pill 2. 

3 cUili 3. 

V 3jl?L&l 4. 

M MWSl 5. 

\ Will 6. 

vs *Ucl^l 7. 

c *hi&i ••• s. 

fc «i<*ll 9. 

q (% or (% ... 0. 

41. Cardiuals (=fci-o-*u$). 

The names of the Gujarat! cardinals have so far departed 
from their original, and comparatively regular, forms, that each 
number up to a hundred should be learnt by heart. 

5& 
Si 

^ 

MR 

to 

*UCl 



CHAP. ITI. 



Names of 
the figures. 



1 


1 


2 


* 


3 


3 


4 


V 


5 


"H 


6 


H 


7 


\3 


8 


C 


9 


1 fe 



10 | 


\° 1 


*H 


19 


\k 


11 


11 


^HOMR 


20 


K° 


12 


U 


°IR 


21 


\\ 


13 


13 


to 


22 


« 


14 


IV 


§116 


23 


*3 


15 


1M 


Ht\ 


24 


*Y 


16 


tt 


*U<n 


25 


*M 


17 


1V9 


%kr 


26 


*H 


18 


V 


*HRU 


27 


R.O 



SllM^ 


The Gajs- 


«l* 


ratl Num 


sJli^ly 


hers from 


«Hl«Cl*t 


1-99. 


3<fl%l 




*M*t 




Mattel 




to^fl* 




^nMfc 





38 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 


28 
29 




atol'ftfc 

3u»ujj5iUt 


52 
53 


M* 
M3 




76 
77 




%fo\ 




tflcllfa 




30 


3o 


'fly 


54 


MY 


SU^M 


78 


\3{ 


v&lto 




31 


31 


^i^fly 


55 


"MM 


*i*u<M 


79 


\»U 


5U3|ioiiSVtfl 




32 


3* 


«H*(tel 


56 


MS 


a^M 


80 


Co 


sm 




33 


33 


fcfl* 


57 


Mv5 


HTll«W 


81 


t\ 


SlWttfl 




34 


3Y 


3U*ltei 


58 


M^ 


*Ul<W 


82 


£\ 


*Hl*(l 




35 


3M 


MWtei 


59 


Mfe 


»Hl»llSJ%ili 


83 


is 


rtRfl 




36 


3S 


to^to 


60 


\o 


%Uo 


84 


tv 


SlRRfl 




37 


3VS 


«U'ft*t 


61 


\\ 


5\4Ho 


85 


^M 


M a 1W{l 




38 


3^ 


a Mli' ! ft%l 


62 


\\ 


°tWo 


86 


C\ 


WMltfl 




39 


Zk 


53it 1 H8j : »U'-A'l*t 


63 


\3 


fas 


87 


<?tf 


*tcMltfl 




40 


Vo 


3iltf(l%r 


64 


SY 


=ta 


88 


a. 


*MtaRft. 




41 


VI 


a»U<U«flll 


65 


SM 


MWo 


89 


tu 


^<U*{1 




42 


V* 


^ctltffl^t 


66 


<<A 


telHo 


90 


fco 


H 




43 


V3 


ciclicrR^i 


67 


\V9 


*U%t 


91 


fct 


£uu4 




44 


VV 


^ltffl« 


68 


\C 


*ti*ti 


92 


k\ 


"ti^ 




45 


VM 


fMVtltffllt 


69 


\b 


wpifglri^ 


93 


fc3 


cm4 




46 


vs 


Scti^n 


70 


Wo 


*flfo 


94 


kY 


=4t<ll4 




47 


Ytf 


L&ictitffUi 


71 


15\ 




95 


&M 


■4^114 




48 


v<: 


diclitflto 


72 


\s\ 


96 


t£\ 


to^ 




49 


Yfc 


aMIIiapW.^l 


73 


V53 


cUcU 


97 


k\9 


%Ml<4 




50 


Mo 


M^W 


74 


V9Y 


*j»ttfo 


98 


kC 


»icll4 




51 


Ml 


S^l^H 


75 


V3M 


Mallei* 


99 


tete 


*wu4 




The following are common variants for some of the numbers 




given in the above Table : — 






10 S*l; 11 *((oi»tK; 18 aHdRorWflU; 23fWl*t; 


53 ^Md; 




79 SJU^MWfl ; 96 to^. The final anusvara in each of the 




numbers from 90 to 99 is often lost. 






Also from 61 — 68 ^U may be substituted for ^£. 






A hundred and the higher figures are given below": - 






100 


su3u I 


1,000 =103 


SiS &«tt oi-5H!,y^ 


lion 


Sis faH$ 


Names of 


200 


«hS 


10,000 =10* 


tli. &<hI\ or 5HJ, an^f 


1 1012 


^b M^tM-U 


multiples of 
10 in Hindu 
notation. 


300 
400 




L00,000 =10» 
1,000,000 =10" 


t?X €tl»t or 5ljj il$4<; 


IOI 3 

t 10w 


*0> <is 




500 


mNB 


10,000,000 = 10 7 


Sli %li or 5li t >^l, 


I 1015 


feU an t «l 




600 


»5 


100,000,000 =108 


iH. kli or 51j, a>iyi 


• 1018 


Sii M^l 




700 


yidS 


[,000,000,000 =109 


Slk *»Mo/ 


10i» 


Sib MM. 




800 


'Hl&S 


L 0,000,000,000 =10io 


3Hi "HA 








900 


•wS 













ORDINALS. 



Yn expressing a number consisting of more than two digits ( 
the " and " emplo)'ed in English is not required in Gujarat!. 

e.g. V3^, 439, is in English 'four hundred and thirty-nine,' 
but in Gujarat! =HK& ^R^*U«{Ut. 

To indicate "about" a certain number the particle a>& is 
suffixed to the cardinal, thus 1§}£ about three, eQ&i about twenty, 
H^\.i about two contracts to Hh. See § 38. 



Note : The Secret or ' Deceitful ' numbers occasionally 
employed by brokers, shopkeepers, &c, are different in different 
trades. Amongst many others the following numbers are used as 
cardinals 1. S«; 2. .*« ; 3. <§HH; 4. ^ll*l ; 5. \«1; 6. toC-fl ; 
7. *W; 8. >tR; 9, &<{&; and 10. ^HROl. The numbers 
11-19 are formed by adding m£1 to the corresponding units. 
20 is ^{\ or %[£[. Sometimes 4^11^ ( 99 ) is employed instead 
of one, and a>teli3£ ( 98 ) instead of two, also Slisr-tfl for twelve. 

42. Ordinals ( ^M-iiafrHwi )• 

The ordinals are adjectives of three terminations, 3U m. 

4 f. <s w. 

M^t - «Q - g, first, 

wd^vi — 55 -ov^ second. 

^l«vt -05 -a*^ third. 

3ll«U — «Q — «|, fourth. 

Mi^l-Ml - % fifth, 

■te^t - toiVtoi, or toli-£l-|, sixth. 

%UcUU-*fl -»j, seventh. 

and for each of the higher ordinals ^l-Ml-^ is added to the 
corresponding cardinal. 

The apparently irregular forms for 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 6th 
are retained in the ordinals formed from such higher Gujaratl 
cardinals as end in 5}£, H, ^% ^R, or to. Thus 5te?U "4^1- 
<-{l-^ 101st; atRMM-2?-^ 402nd; ^Icl^-^-SS-mj 703rd; 
»l46«K2ll*h-*ft-«i 1004th; #te«RtoM-,| 1006th. 



Secret 
numbers. 



Ordinals. 



40 



GtfjAltATl GUAl&MAfc. 



PART II. 



Fortnights. 



Lunar daj's 

(Gift). 



Lunar 
Months. 



Dates 
iu full. 



Note ■: On the Lunar Months and their days, 

The Indian month — synodical lunar — is the interval between 
one new moon and the next. Hence the first fortnight is from 
new moon to full moon, embracing thus the period during which 
the evenings are bright with moonlight. This half of the month 
is accordingly called Ql or Q{\ ( from Q&. pure ) or ^SiM$t 
(the bright half), the fortnight of the waxing moon. 

The second fortnight of the month is from full moon to new 
moon, embracing thus the period during which the evenings are 
moonless or dark. This half of the month is accordingly called 
<{% or <\{\ ( from H*l ) or £M$M$l ( the dark half ), the fortnight 
of the waning moon. 

The fourteen days ( [ctf 8 ! ) in each of these fortnights have 
names closely allied to the ordinals. They are as follow :- — 

1st Mi^l ; 2nd wfle* ; 3rd ^{W ; 4th afoai ; 5th Miafa or VMI 
6th tei ; 7th %Uchl or ^icfH ; 8th a>il>i or wti^i ; 9th 3fH 
10th €«lH or «m ; 11th aHpi»ll^ ; 12th «HlVi ; 13th cfctt 
and 14th atf^W. Before any of these names ^1£ or 1£ is inserted 
according as the day in question belongs to the bright or to the 
dark half of the month. The 15 th day of Qt, the day of full 
moon, is called ^M or ^"H or ^"Hl ; and the 15 th day of IS, 
the day of new moon, is called =y l"Hl%i or ^HMWUMl. 

The names of the months are as follow : — 

iRcli October-November ; "HPftR November-December ; MIH 
December-January; "»U& January-February; ^RQJ February- 
March ; Si^t March- April ; qyi^H April-May ; <fj>£ May-June ; 
^HlHld June-July ; ^l^ July- August ; <Hl£}Hl August-Septem- 
ber ; ^Hl^ll September-October. 

When writing a date in full one begins with the year and 
descends to the lower denominations, thus adopting an order 
inverse to the English. For example, 

CK(ct WW \t£\\*H at VI* &&■ *UCTH Qkm\ Dated Friday, the 
7th day of the bright half of Kartalc of the year 1962 of the 
Samvat ( era ). 

*U6 <=IS %llcl*£l <HR *lM \[rt On Saturday, the 7th day of the 

dark half of the month Mali. 



DISTRIBUTIVES AXD COLLECTIVES. 

Dates according to the English] reckoning of time are 
"expressed thus : — 

cltfl>H (cllo) *Y*u Aliiim ^ W*Vl ^r«w«^ \W «W«ll 
Vl*{ IRcl'l ort 5 _p. m. on Saturday, the 24th of October, 1896. 

43. JHstributives. (&*itiftttL4 Q^ufoSlH^). 

The Distributives are formed by reduplication of the corres- 
ponding cardinals. 

Thus 3}£ Ste one by one, one at a time, one each. 

H^\ (for »$), two by two, two at a time, two each, 
•^m "%% three by three, three at a time, three each. 
^R ^ (or at=atR) four by four. 
«fec, &c, &c. 

44. Collectives. ( =H»<u*Ui4 «im )♦ 

The Collectives are as follow : — 

a group of two, a couple "l^. 

three tig. 

four alt4|. 

five W;|- 

sis toii. 

ten ttlSl or a*&. 

„ twenty, a score ^£1 or more commonly t\£[. 

„ a hundred, a century iki^l or ^Isl, 

Something akin to the idea of collectivity is also expressed by 
affixing 2>l to a cardinal ; 

e. g. ^ all three, the three. 
*U^ all four. 
<ttf all twelve. 
50s, 'just one,' is used for the most part with negatives. 
«H^ or »& or «1§ or ^ or <Hs|3}, is ' both/ ' the two.' 
' A married couple' is cvt^ n. 

*Twins' is svu f. or more commonly vi\u\ f. 
The word <^Ai is also applied to a pair of things, as M^V^M 
w-ti a pair of shoes ; but, when articles of dress are referred to, 
' a pair' or 'a couple' is generally rendered by vt[1[ or ovftl, as 
^icft^ftt <Mlt a couple of loin-cloths. 



41 

CHAP. IV. 



>> 



Distribu- 
tives how 
formed. 



List of 
Collectives, 



42 



GUJAEATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 

Multiplica- 
tives how 
formed. 



Special 
forms for 
' Tables/ 



Special 
forms for 
' squares/ 



45, The Multiplicatives. (wu^fittiauy 

The Multiplicatives are as follow :— 
twice as many "tM^, or two-fold "hi. 

three times as many clMi^, ^l^, l^l^, or three-fold ^4. 
four times as many ^Pll^, ^IVli^, or four-fold, ^V-li. 

five times as many or five-fold VWli^. 
six times as many or six-fold toMiSJ. 

and for each of the higher multiplicatives ^ is added to the 
corresponding cardinal. All the multiplicatives are declined 
regularly as adjectives of three terminations, aHl m, vJ /, <§ n. 

46. Multiplicational Forms. 

In repeating the Multiplication-tables certain peculiar * Multi- 
plicational forms' are employed, some of which resemble the 
collectives of § 44. 
They are as follow : — 

Sv^ ones; | twos; ct^l threes; alii fours; M^i fives ; toi sixes; 
ftdi sevens ; ^Ji eights ; 4«li nines ; t\ tens. 

The multiplicational forms from 11-19 are made by suffixing 
*Hi to the corresponding!;cardinals. * 

In the ordinary multiplication table these forms are preceded 
by a simple cardinal. 

Thus MR I five twos, or twice five. 

^icl clft seven threes, or seven times three. 
MR •i c li four nines, or four times nine. 
to *Hl[ dicUtffltt six eights (are) forty-eight. 
In the squares of the numbers still other multiplicational 
forms are commonly heard. 

Thus 1x1= l f »U »13 »l* . 

2x2= 4, £»l £»l MR, or «1 J MR. 
3x3= 9, ctfl»l ctfl^l -W, or ^ ctfl <M. 

4 x 4 = 16, ali$ a}i$ m% ar MR ^14 Wt. 

5 x 5 = 25, M& "41^ M^U, or MR \M[ M=fi%(. 

6 x 6 = 36, tolM totM te'flU, or to tei to'ftet. 

7 x 7 = 49, aicli %1<M *U 3 l<$pRR, or *Uct ^cti 

* Regarding the multiplicational forms $v\t I, wi^l -J, and @$ 3£, see 
under " Fractional, " § 47, 2) and 7). 



MULTIFLICATIONAL FORMS. 



43 



8x8= 64, aHlll *HftSl =talS, or »tU *Ui SlWI. 

9x9= 81, ^ ^ ^itfl or rw r^i S^KQ. 
10 x 10 = 100, £& t& *U H^l ( a ful1 hundred). 
20 x 20 = 400, k <£U <&l SIK3, or <fl$ <l$ =HR?l. 

Other forms of 10 x 10 are €& s$, or tft, t\, or €% €l, 

thus $fr l\k Si «i<Ml (a hundred finished !) 

In repeating the multiplication-tables, the following variants 
are commonly used for the cardinal numbers [between 100 and 
130* 

101 5146KR3U. 

102 pHMCt^l. 

103 GuicroU. 

104 (frc-tcR*il or 

105 MaitoSl. 
106 

107 *Klto*U or 

108 *Uc-icR*ll or 

109 *WWtt*U or 
110 
111 
112 
113 
114 
115 

116 *UuicR*il (or 
117 



CHAP. IV. 



or 



or 



118 

119 
120 
121 
122 
123 
124 



) aiftM&l. 

te^iiciwi. 
^cllclWl. 
*tifclcft?U. 

Sl^tcRttl or St^lct^l. 

«HftlcR?ll 

^llici^l 
H^UttStl 
SltflMttll ). 
ttfticttSU. 

( wfcftlcttSll. 

wlPl^Wl. 
•HrffeiKlL 

swuiku. 



Multiplica- 
tional com- 
pound forma 
above 100. 



"tflckSl. 

cftlcUSl. 
or ii&cU^l. 
or ^iclWt. 



or 



wU«fl$l?ll. 



* The pronunciation of these and the still higher numbers does not 
seem to be at all definitely settled, forms more or less varied being 
beard in even neighbouring districts. 



44 




GUJARATI GRAMMAR; 




PART II. 


125 
126 


MaflUlSU or 
to<fl%U?U or 


M*Kl&St; 




te«Qa*il. 




127 


fcctrflaiSl or 


aartlaSi.. 




128 


*Ul<fl%tl?ll or 


^l^ttl. 




129 


SlW^fllHlSlL 






130 


#il^l. 





Fractional. 



a. popular. 



I. Sanskri- 
tic. 



Ml «}. 



For example 17x 6 = 102, fcctt \si fettttL 

13 x 8 = 104, fa *H£i *U^cR*{l (or aillltct^t\. 

1 5 x 7 = 1 5 , Mtt %ldi M^cRttl. 
12 x 9 = 108, «iR "ill *iieicl^l (or aH&cBftU*. 
11x10 = 110, SH^^R SI ttitom (or S$lcR?Ll). 

16 x 7= 112, %n acli «Hl^WWi (or ^t^ici^O. 
1 9 x 6 = 114, 3Uai«$%i &* $focR?U (or 4^lcU*U). 
24 x 5 = 120, aUffta M*ti <fl%U%ll. 

47. Fractionals ( aH3i*b-*u£ )♦ 

The following are the terms commonly current to designate 
fractional and mixed numbers. 

Ml i ; =H$ ( or *H§1, a^ f *t§ ) 1 ; Hl^t,-^,-^ f ; mi 1$ ; 

1l4 ( or lid ) 11 ; anil 2| ; <§,$ 3^ ; and *m ( or %U&) a. half of 
unity added ( to three or any higher integer ). 

Besides the above the following more Sanskritic forms are also, 
employed, more especially in arithmetical exercises* 

»l4 M*l*tUl i, 514- -IcrUi i. 
The still smaller fractions are formed by suffixing ^{^ to the- 
corresponding Gujarat! cardinals, 

e.g. $\& $m\ f , »u msVwi-^-. 

The commoner Gujaratl forms given above merit more detailed; 
explanation. 

1) Ml ( from Prakrt trtI, Sanskrit TI^ : ) when used as a noun 
means ' a fourth part of unity/ but as an indeclinable adjective, 
qualifying a noun, it means a quarter of whatever is indicated! 
by the noun. 






FEACTIONAES: 

2) »t^ or aHHl-^Hfefl-^ ( from Skr. ^ or 3?^ : T means, ih 
like manner, either (substantively) a half of unity, or (adjectively) 
a half of whatever is indicated by the noun it qualifies. 

Two other names for ' a half ' are $»il and *H&il Though 
now scarcely ever heard, they were formerly used in the table 
for multiplying by one-half : 

thus 1 x \ ■ ^, Si* tf*K ^$1- 
2x |=1, ^ $»K ^4. 

3) Ml^l-^l-l^ (from Prakrt <TT3TFrr, Sanskrit <nfrc: compound- 
ed of qr^, a quarter, and tt, less) means ' a quarter less ' than 
unity, thus three-quarters. It is never used independently as a 
noun. 

a) When followed by a simple cardinal such as "}, y.% *tR 
&C, MlQJl lessens that number by a fourth part of unity. 

Thus MlQlt ^ If ; Ml^ll to 5f ; Ml^t 4=1 8|. 

When followed by a simple cardinal higher than eighteen "Hl^fj 
is generally substituted for ^l^l.* 

Thus^t *H4R 17| ; but ^l^fl SlR^H (or ^i SU^a) 
18| ; Ml^fl M*U* 49f ; Ml^fl %US 59|; ^ $1 = 99f. 

But MI<${1 is occasionally heard even when the following cardinal 
is lower than eighteen. 

6) When followed by a compound number such as °i^ f *}<$$ 
&c., Ml^Jt unites with the first member of the compound, with 
the effect of reducing its value by a fourth part of unity : this 
reduced value should next be multiplied by the number indicated 
by the second member of the compound. 

Thus Ml^l »l being If, Ml^t ^ is 175 (i. e. If x 100). 
Ml^t T.% being 2f, ^rt^ is 275 (i. e. 2f x 100). 
Ml^l to being fif, \tQil to &«l* is 5,750 (i.e. 5f x 1000). 

But Note \1<^1 »& = 199| and ^fl ^y = 299f. 

* The Rev. J. F. Steele, B. D., has indicated what is, I feel sure, the 
true explanation of this seemingly anomalous change at nineteen from (the 
plural form) %t?il to (the feminine form) ^iigft. It is due, he shows, to the 
simple fact that in Sanskrit the numerals below nineteen are construed as 
plural adjectives, but those above that number as feminine nouns. Note also 
the similar change from *um to flitf in 8 a), 



45 
CHAP: TV. 



wiH = $.. 



Also •}»{£, 
and aH&*U. 



Powers oi 



n-i. 



(n-*K 



why ^iigii r 

RAUl, and 
why >iit|fl,- 



46 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



(HH 



Powers of 



n + b 



(n + i)c. 



(l + i)c. 



Power of 
hi. 



c) When followed by a quasi-collective such as St m. 100, 
6«Wm. 1000, <Hl"«t m. 100,000, &c, ^1% agrees in gender 
with the quasi-collective, and lessens that number by a fourth 
part of itself. 

Thus ^RU is 75 (i. e. 100— ™) 

\[$[ C-IPH is 75,000 (i. e. 100,000 — 1 ^°). 

Ml^l i^R, however, for 750 is very seldom heard. 
But Note Ml^fl Si is 99|. 

4) *Hl (from Prakrt wi\$\, Sanskrit ^ + <TT^: 'with a 
quarter') means unity 'with a quarter' of unity, thus one and 
a quarter. ^t=ll, like "41, can be used either as a noun or as an 
indeclinable adjective. 

a) When followed by a simple cardinal such as *H, ^QJ, au^ 
&c., W[ increases that number by a fourth part of unity. 
Thus %Wl^ H; WU to 6|; ^l W 9|. 

Wft* 20^; *«U i^^ 50i; %fll *ui 60^ 
6) When followed by a compound number such as "1&, 
^[0$, &c, %l<U unites with the first member of the compound, 
with the effect of heightening its value by a fourth part of 
unity ; this heightened value should next be multiplied by the 
number indicated by the second member of the compound. 

Thus Wl «t being 2£, %Wl «*$ is 225 (i.e. 2^ x 100). 

=H<Hl -snaj being 3£, fc«U ^y is 325 (i.e. B±x 100).. 

*Wl to being 6^, W[ to 6«tt is 6,250(*.e. 6^x 1,000). 

c) When followed by a quasi-collective number, such as St, 

$M^ 31"^ & c «> ^ ^creases that number by a fourth part of 

itself. 

Thus 

) 
) 

5) ^14 meaning f one and a half can be used either as a 
noun or as an adjective. 

When followed by a quasi-collective number, such as Si, 
6«K, «l^, &c., "Sli increases that number by a half of itself . 



*Ul Si is 125 


(i.e. 


100+ f 


Wtt &A\ is 1,250 


(i.e. 


1,000+ « 


WttflPH is 125,000 


(i.e. 


100 000+ 100 ' 00<K 



FRACTIONALS. 



47 



Power of 



S4=% 



Thus ^1*150 (i.e. 100+f). 

Sid 6«« is 1,500 (i.e. 1,000 + ^), 
1l4 is never followed by any number except these quasi- 
collectives. 

6) ^H^l meaning 'two and a half can be used either as a 
noun or as an adjective. 

When followed by a quasi-collective such as at, &«*R, €il>M, 
&c, SH-A multiplies that number two-and-a-half times. 

Thus aH<fl5ll is 250 ( i. e. 100x21) 

*H{{ <k*A\ is 2,500 {i.e. 1,000x21.) 

*>{{[ is never followed by any number except these quasi- 
collectives. 

7) (§i means ' three and a half.' It is never used, however, 
except in the ' three-and-a-half-times' table. 

Thus 1 x 31 = 31 Sni §4 (§| or 5*3 <§\| <§U. 

2 x 3-1 = 7, «i <3| fclCU 

3 x 3-1 = 101 ^<3J (34 *IUI &JL 

8) aiil ( from Prakrt 3|| sjt, Sanskrit W<fei : compound of 
*T+3T% ' with a half ' ) means ' an added half of unity. It is never 
used independently as a noun, but can be prefixed to any simple 
cardinal except a>l£ and H. 

a ) When followed by ^i£l or any higher simple cardinal, 
^Uil increases that number by a half of unity. 

Thus am "=tm is 31 ; atil *U*, 41; %tUl MR, 5l; 

When followed by a simple cardinal higher than eighteen 
ai£\ is generally substituted for aiil. 

Thus aiil *H\\& 1 81 ; but =Ul£l wU*l«a{Ul ( or aiit »lPl^{fel ) 
191; w fl ^^ 501. ^ %li 601 

But ai£l is occasionally heard even when the following 
cardinal is lower than eighteen. 

b) When followed by a compound number such as 1i£$, 
^Ra, &c., aui unites with the first member of the 
compound, with the effect of heightening its value by 
a half of unity : this heightened value should next be 
multiplied by the number indicated by the second 
member of the compound. 



Powers of 
=HUt. 



n+£- 



( n + i)«. 



*3 



PART II. 



■Not 



Origin of 



Origin of 

ana 



Origin of 

•4- 



CUiAllATl GRAMMAR, 

Thtis W41 1^ being '3l,[lfl4t 1^ is 350$.e.3|* 1'0'OX 
Uti'l *IR being 41, ^m ajRy is 450(i.e.4lx 100). 
*tUl to being 6i, ; ^Ul^^wt^ is 6, 500(i.e.6lx 1,000). 

c) ^llil is never followed by a quasi-collective number, such 
as %h, &<*[?., <tll"% &c. Tbe reason doubtless is that 
such numbers imply a preceding aJlJ, and inasmuch 
as ^HUt »li is an impossible collocation, ^ilil §M\ (i.e. 
•^tUl =>li <k<*A\ ) and such like are also impossible. 

Note : On thz4erivation of\[& (or 1[£) 11, *h£1 21 and <§| 31. 

Hoernle in his "Comparative Grammar of the Gaudian 
Languages," (pages 269,270) states that "the forms 1\& f 
*H{[, &c., are made by compounding 3^ half, with the next 
highest ordinal." 

1). "£u would then be from ' half-second,' which is in San- 
skrit, 3^-r-fl^l : and in Magadhi 3Tf^rr ( or 3jff^tr ). 
By transposition of 3f| and ^f ( or f^ ) we arrive at the 
Bhojpuri form $&%, from which by vocalisation of cf and 
subsequent contraction results the Gujarat! \[& ( or less 
correctly %{<& ). 

2). In like manner *>{<£{ is from 'half-third,' which is in 
Sanskrit ai^r-f-gcften", whence through the intermediate 
forms STf-M^ir and 3f|-f-3F^jrr comes the Prakrt 
a^3^5T, or contracted 3r|^j3rr, and by further contrac- 
tion and curtailment the Gujarat! ^(ol. 

3). Finally ^ is from 'half-fourth,' which is in Sanskrit 
3{q-- r -^^ whence 3jg - -f- : 33§ and 3^+3^, \ and Fthus 
3T3T§ and Magadh! 3^§|. The initial syllable of this form 
may have been lost by reason'of ^3$ being accented on 
its final syllable ( caturthd*), and|3^f| would accordingly 
shorten to 3f with accent on final ( utthd ), whence 
would arise the Gujarat! @U or (§1^ or (3 J. 



Infinitives ; 
a. declin- 
able. 



Declined 
as nouns, 



CHAPTER V> 
THE VERS. (CimMs). 

48, Infinitives. ( fct>u«^M )♦ 

The declinable Infinitives, or verbal Nouns, are formed by 1 ( 
adding to the simple verbal stem. 

— HI m. -^ f.,-^n. to express Indefinite verbal action. 

— HHl m.j-Ht'fl /.-Hid n ' t0 express Intentional action. 

— *tl w?.,tf /.,-*i n. to express Complete, or Perfect action. 

Thus Indefinite, *{<£-Hl m., ^(Hl/., ^4-^ w. to rise, the rising. 

Intentional, 2U-H$l ra., at£-Hl«{l /., ^-Hld n. to be about to 
rise , to rise ( in the future ). 

Perfect, ^4^1 m., *{{[/., ^"M w., tfie having-risen. 

Being nouns, these infinitives admit of declension as nouns. 

•a. The Indef. Inf. is frequently met with both in the sub- 
jective case and in any of the other cases, except the agential. 

b. The Inten. Inf., being as to form a genitive of the Indef. 
Inf., does not itself assume other case-endings. 

c. The Perf. Inf., when used as a tense-form of aTransitive verb, 
stands in the subjective, but otherwise it is always either with a 
case-ending of the neut. sing., or in the subjective neut. plural, 

Being verbal nouns, these infinitives, when Transitive, can 
govern an object. With this object the Indef. Inf. always 
agrees in gender and number, but the Inten. Inf. only very 
seldom, as this latter generally takes the neut. sing, termination 
in -Hid. Thus S{Im£1 HW^l to read a booh, with HRHl in the 
Inde£ Infin. but ^l^ MSiHld the catching (of) thieves, with 
! MiiHld in the Inten. Infin. 

The Perfect Inf., when used as a tense-form, [takes the 
I gender and number of its direct object ; but when not a tense- 
form, it occurs only in the oblique cases of the neut. sing, or 
( in Frequentative Compound verbs ) in the subjective case of 
the neuter plural ( *i&n\ ). 
7 



but with 

verbal 

government. 



50 



GUJARAT! GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



b. indeclin- 
able. 



Farticiples 
a. declin- 
able. 



b. indeclin- 
able. 



}to express action as Completed 
( or Perfect ). 



The following indeclinable Infinitives, formed by adding cti to 
the verbal stem, express Continuous action. 

"rf^-fli to write, the writing ( neut. subj. plur ) 
ef^H-dl a— writing t in turiting ( an old fern. loc. sing. ) 

49. Participles ( ki<\ ). 

The declinable Participles, or Verbal Adjectives, are formed 
by adding to the simple verbal stems 

— ell m.,-cft/., $j n. to express action as Continuing; 

-** m * ■ -* jj f --* [ i n - 1 to express action as Intended . 

—m m. r i f.,-% n. 

or — S\5llm. > -5lC-{l/.,-Sl^ n 

Thus Continuous *U-cll tn., *ldcfl/., *{&-<& n. rising; 

Intentional 1 ) *U- r -U^l m. t Zii-'M'ftf., *U-*tld «• ) ^"'^ ) 

2 ) aid-rlfti m., atd-H^l /., *U-^ «• j r *w j 

Perfect. 1)^4^1 m.. *1<£1/., *t<^i n. ■» . . 

^.-s -v n , >.?. > having risen. 

The forms *t<MR and ^<H, both of common gender, may be 
substituted for ^cMl^l m.,-^1 /.,-| ?i. and a^&l m.,-<*{l/. -g w . 
respectively. 

^UHR is also used, and declined, as a noun with agential 
meaning ; thus h V-*iR, a do-er. 

Only one participle, — ' the connective ' — is indeclinable. It 
is formed by adding U or IM to the simple verbal stem, 
Thus *\{[ or at^Ul, having risen. 

Note : — If the verbal stem end in 5\ f this vowel coalesces 
with the 5} of Still, 5te{l, m{Q, and is lost before suffixed *}|, 
W, *i ( participial or infinitival ), also before suffixed 4 or vft ( of 
connective participle ). 

Thus from 
b&&, to speak come b$\ t -C-fl,-^ ; 4^1, idl, h% ; idl, or b{& ; 
$&§, to remain „ ^1,-C-u", g ; ^l, \&, \Q ; *<£!, or v£ft ; 
&3, tstake „ «itWor€lW^; 
\% to give „ SW or €W^i. 

50. Table of Infinitival and Participial Forms. 

The following Tables exhibit the different Infinitival and 
Participial forms of the verbs m-^ to rise, and \\^ to be. 



I 



TABLE OF INFINITIVAL AND PARTICIPIAL FORMS. 



51 



=H>»1 



to rise. 



CHAP. V. 



1 . 1 


Action Complete 


I Action ! 


Action 
Contin- 
uous. 


Action Intentional. 


( Perfect ) 




inae- \ 
finite. 


1. 


2. 1 


1. 


2. 


Infini- =Hd-Hl, 


^4-cti 


=H6-«U- 


(*14-*IR 


au^l,A 




tives, or! -^,-1. 


(loc.) \- r M4\, 


a riser, one 


■*3i 




Verbal to rise, 


a-ris' 


-nii 


ivho rises). 


the having 




Nouns, the ris- 


ing, in 


to he 




risen. 






ing. 


rising. 

*R-Cti 

(n.pl.) 
to rise t 
the ris- 


about to 

rise, to 

rise(Jut) 




*ip\\(n.pl.) 

the leaving 
risen 
(fre- 








ing. 






quently ) . 




Parti- 




*R-cll, 


=H4-m- 


H6-A\% 


atSll, 


ei pies, or 




-<fl,-i 


fy-ii'R, 


■*w(\,-*i\\ t 


£M having 


-€,-& 


Verbal 




rising. 


-<u& 


or au-«ift ?'isew. 


or ^C-t 


Adjec- 






(being) 


(com.) (be-*{{[o?*l{[4 


(com.) 


tives, i 

i 




about to 


ing) about having 


having 




1 




rise. 


to rise. 


risen. 


risen. 



Infinitives 

and 
Participles 

of mi. 



(41^ to be. 



Being; 
Inde- 
finite. 



Infini- 
tives, or 
Verbal 
Nouns. 



-i, 

to be, the 
being. 



Beins; 
Contin- 
uous. 



to-dl or 
§KU (loc) 
in being 



Being Intentional. 



Par- 
ticiples, 

or 
Verbal 
Adjec- 
tives. 



to be 
about to 
be, to be 

(fut.) 



^t-cll, 
being. 



2. 



one who is), 



Being Complete 
( Perfect ). 



1. 



- r -ui> . 

(being) 

about to 

be. 



or |HR, 
( com. ) 
( being ) 

about to be. 



luf or t£l'<ft 

having 

been. 



having 
been. 



Infinitives 

and 

Participles 

of &l-i 



52 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR.. 



PART II. 



Termina- 
tions for 
Pres. Ind. 
and Fut. 
Ind. tenses. 



Euphonic 
changes. 



Caution : From the mere fact that identical infinitival' and 
participial forms are inserted separately in these Tables, it is not 
to be assumed that those forms were originally distinct. The- 
original form for both was probably participial, but the participle' 
being frequently used absolutely, that is to say without any 
noun for it to qualify, itself acquired in process of time the 
character of a noun, and accordingly,, when so used, the participle 
( or verbal adjective ) for all practical purposes passed over into 
an infinitive ( or verbal noun ). It is by leason of this actual 
difference of usus, or function, that the infinitival forms as well 
as the participial have been allowed a place in the above Tables 

51. The Present Indefinite and Future 

Indefinite Tenses (anPifftM <*cmw £t«i 

and anCn&n oifa^i 4M ). 

( SEE PARADIGMS III. AND IV. ) 

The Simple Tenses ( ^£^H 5IPI ) are three : the Present 
Indefinite, the Future Indefinite, and the Past Indefinite. Of 
these, the Pres. and the Fut. are inflected for number and persoia 
by suffixing to the verbal stem the following terminations :. 






Future Indefinite. 
Sing, Plur. 

41 41. 



Present Indefinite. 
Sing. Plur. 

1st -3 4»\. 

2nd -S\ -SU. 

3rd -Si -St 

But note that 

a). If the verbal stem end in a long vowel other than S} or 
SU the personal suffix Si changes to H. This however is a mere 
orthographic change, affecting in no way the pronunciation. 
e. g, «i-^ ( for «ll-=| ) to become ; H\H ( for *ttS{ ) he becomes. 
b). If the verbal stem ends in Si, this vowel coalesces with 
suffixed Si, and is lost before suffixed SU, or 4. Similarly 
U* coalesces with suffixed y. 
e. g. &-=| to take ; & ( for &-Sl ) he takes ; h for ( &-SU ) 
you taJce. 
t-$ to give ; &fcl ( for "S-U^l ) I shall give. 
V[-$ to drink ; MIS* ( for ^Sj ) we drink ; Xl^ ( for 
Ml-'iij, ) we s ^°^ drink. 






THE PRESENT INDEFINITE AND FUTURE' INDEFINITE TENSES. 



«•}. If the verbal' stem end in 5U, this vowel in some verbs 
ehanges to (§ before suffixed Si or ant ; 

e. g. vA-Qy to see, cr^^l ( for <M-*>1 ) he sees. 
«*J-5U ( for ovt-ant) you see. 
Hl-^y to loash, %5l (for H\-*>\) he ivashes. 
Q3\\ (for Hl-SU} you ivash. 

But mark tbo coalescence of the two 5U's in ^l ( for ^t-^t ) 
you may be. 

d). Tn the Future, and occasionally even in the Present, the 
inflexional form of the 1st sing, can be used for the 2nd sing., also. 

^^ is conjugated as follows in the Pres. Ind. and Fut. Ind. 
tenses. 



Present Indefinite. 



Sing. 

2 £ zfejThou 
risest 

3 & a& Be 

rises. 



Plur. 
*&*&»[ We 

rise, 
ct*l *{£l You rise 

cl^U nl They 
rise. 



Future Indefinite. 



CHAP. -^: 






Sing. 
| H{[k\ 1 shall 

rise. 
3 **&$l Thou wilt 

rise. 
d auSl He will 

rise. 



Plur. 
^HvL^^I We 

shall rise. 
cl>l =*ld$ll You 

will rise. 
cl^l =Hd?l They 

will rise. 



In actual practice this Present Indefinite is employed more 
frequently for the subjunctive than for the indicative mood. 

Thus ^ *i& I rise, or / may rise ( see § 140 a ). 

The Future Indefinite Tense of h\-% to do, or make, as inflected 
below, exhibits some of the peculiarities of Pars! Gujaratl. 

<| i\?A I shall make. ^Sl h\% We shall make. 

<2 £^H Thou ivilt make. cl>l £^U You will make. 
cl i^ He will make. cl^U 4^ They will make. 

See also § 54. 

Th9 auxiliary verb t&l^, to be, is conjugated in the Present 
Indefinite from the stem ©, but in the Fut. (and in the Pres. 
Subjunctive) from the stem <§l or &. Thus 



1st sing.. 

also used 

for 2nd sing- 



Pres. Ind. 

and Fut. 

Ind. 

of m-i.. 



Fut. Ind, 
tense in 

Pars! 
Gujarat^ 



GUJAUATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 

Pres. Ind. 

and Put. 

Ind. of 



Past Ind. 

of *&-i. 

(Intrans.) 



Present Indefinile. 

Sing. 
1 I ^ I am. 



2 tjd Thou 
art. 

3 cl S #e is. 



Plur. 
*>{>{ tf\5{ We are. 



ctn &l You are. 
cla>lL & They are. 



Future Indefinite. 

Sing. Plnr. 

i &4k.i or &tfci ^ 1\4q or i^Q 



I shall be. 
i l\h or &$l 
Thou wilt be. 
cl &$l or &$ 

He will be. 



We shall be. 
1>l t|l$lt or &&1 
You will be. 
c)-5H ^i^l or && 
They ivill be. 



Past. Ind. 
of&l-i 
(Auxy.) 



As to form {fcl&l, or &vkt, is a Future Indefinite Indicative, 
but it is almost invariably employed as a Subjunctive, either 
Present or Future. Thus tfcufcl, or <i^l, means ' (if) I may be,' 
'( if ) I should be,' rather than * I shall be.' 

5$, The Past Indefinite Tense ( anftC^ci <Hctii<n), 

(SEE PARADIGMS 1Y. AND VI.) 

The Past Indefinite diners from the Pres. and Fut. in not 
being itself a formal tense, and accordingly other parts of the 
verb are substituted for this tense-form. 

«) In Intransitive verbs, the Perf. Participle in ■%., m.,^/., 
-Q n., does duty for the Past Indefinite Tense, the Participle 
agreeing in gender and number with the sid>ject of the verb. 



Thus 



Sing. 



Plur. 



1 !| *Utflt, a i , al, ^ZH, I r °s G , lit. I one-having-risen ( was ) 

2 rj „ „ Thou rosest, lit. Thou ,, (wast) 

3 cl „ ,, He rose, lit. He „ „ (zuas) 

l^H^ 2 l«i'Ht, : H^l, : H'i^iIl 7 e rose,lit. We ones-having -risen(ivere) 

2 <& „ „ FoM ' rose > ut - Fou » » 

3 clSU „ „ They rose, \h. TJtey „ „ 






The Past Indefinite of the auxiliary verb ^1-3, to be, is not 
lftl,4/,-g but &U,-cfl,-<£. Thus 



Sing. 


Plur. 


1 § 6cU,-cfl,-g I was. 


*H>1 6tl,-cfl f -rti TFe were. 


2 3 ,» »i » Thou ivast. 


^ » » n Y° u were. 


3 cl „ „ „ He was. 


^l „ m ;, ^ ie 2/ were. 



RULE AS TO GEN T DEU AND XUMIJEU OF PAST INDEF. TEXSE. 



oa 



Sing. 



{■ 



4) In Transitive Verbs, the Port' Inf. in -Ml m.,4f.,-^>n. does 
duty for the Past Indefinite Tense, the Infinitive agree- 
ing in gender and number with the direct object of the 
verb, and the ( logical) subject standing in the Agential 
Case. Thus 

'«t <*$l (-W-Ji)or cvtHl (-W-*U) I saw, lit. By me the having- 

seen (tvas) 
„ ,, ,, Thou saivest, lit. by thee <£c. 

„ ,, ,, He saw, lit. by him &c. 

Plur. < ct^ „ M f) M Fow saiu, lit. fcy i/ou etc. 

V claniaJl „ ,, ,, T/iey sato, lit. by them &c. 

*t ^UM^l «vifcJ i" s^y £/ie froo/o, lit. by me ( was ) the hav- 

ing-seen the book. 
O °irH ^Ji T/ioit sawest the village, lit. &?/ £/tee (aras) 

the having -seen the village. 
aQl <*al ^4^1 He saw the road, lit. by him ( was ) i/te 

having -seen the road. 
^M^l RVtl "M^l T) r e sa?y i/te roads, lit. fcy ws ( auas ) i/te 

having-seen the roads. 
cl>l ^llnl fr^lli Pent saw iAe villages, lit. % 2/ ow ( mts ) 

£/te having-seen the villages. 
cl^U^l ^HlMilSU 5viW r/«e?/ saw the boohs, lit. £>?/ </iem ( was ) 
i/te having-seen the boohs. 

53» Kule as to Gender and Number of Past 
indefinite Tense of Transitive verbs. 

According to Gujarat! Syntax (see § § 132, 134) a Transitive 
Verb may govern. 

a) its ( logical ) object in the Subjective Case : 
h) its ( logical ) object in the Objective Case : 
c) two objects, direct and indirect, the former in the 
Subjective, and the latter in the Objective Case. 
Now it can be laid down as a Rule, admitting of scarcely a 
single exception, that in the Past Indefinite Tense ( and also in 
the Pres. Perf. and Past Perf. Tenses ) the Transitive Verb agrees 
in gender and number with its Subjective, and in the absence of 
a Subjective with its Objective. See § 125,2 ). 



CHAP. V. 



Past Tnd. 

Of ff4^. 

(Trails.) 



Construc- 
tion with 
the Past. 
Ind., Pres. 
Perf., and 
Past. Perf. 
Tenses of a 
Trans, verb. 



5<6 



•£»■ 



GUJARXtl GRAMMAR. 



PART H. | 



Pres. Cont. 
of =H4-a. 



Pres. Cont. 

tense in 

Pars! 

Gujaratl. 



e. g. &l£l3{ ^dt cvlMl. The girl saio the road, lit. by the girl 
( teas ) the having -seen the road. 

&lf\5} §t£^ cvimi. 27k; ^irf socio i/ts boy, lit. % # ie fl^ 
( was ) #ie having -seen the boy. 

&£l=*l fc&l^Ul ^Vti ^Hl"^. The girl gave the boy a booh, lit. 
by the girl ( ivas ) the having-given a book to the boy. 

54. The Present Continuous Tense 

(*u^ «l$>U«t iltfl). 

The Gujarat! verb has six Compound Tenses ( pt^M £1<A ), 
three Present according as the verbal action is continuous (Pies. 
Cont. ), intentional ( Pres. Inten. ), or perfect ( Pres. Perf. ) ; and 
in like manner three Past ( Past Cont., Past Inten., and Past 
Perf. ) 

Compound Tenses of the Future are wanting in Gujaratl : but 
see § 60 d). 

In the Pres. Cont. Tense the simple present of the auxiliary 
' to be ' combines with the simple present of the principal verb. 

Thus 



Sing. 

2 s]^§ Thou art rising 

3 cl =H^ & He is rising. 



PRESENT CONTINUOUS. 

Plur. 
^iH ^{[^H ^15l We are rising. 
d>l *{^l &l You are rising' 

cla>U *i£ & They are rising. 



In actual practice, this Present Continuous Tense nearly 
always does duty for the Pres. Indef. 

Thus 4 ^4 ^ ' I am rising* or ' I rise ' ( See § 143 ). 

Some of the 'clipped' forms of Pars! Gujarat! are well illus- 
trated in the inflexion given below of the Present Continuous 
Tense of the verb 4R-^, to do. 






^ i|ai I am making. 
3 i^=H Thou art making. 
cl h^Q He is making. 

See also § 51. 



^^l i^St^l We are making. 
clH i^R You are making. 
cl«U k\*i They are making \ 



PAST CONTIN., PRES. INTEN., AND PAST INTEN. TENSES. 

In the auxiliary verb, the Pres. Cont. Tense is inflected as 
follows : 

Sing. ! Plur. 

2 i lm d. I ctfi & di. 

3 cl &H d. ! cl»U |w d. 

This tense is for the most part used when expressing a general 
truth, and not a mere isolated fact. Thus ^m & has much the 
force of ' is ( are ) by nature,' ' universally is ( are ).' 

55* The Past Continuous Tense 

In the Past Continuous the past tense of the auxiliary verb 
^ ( &dl, &cfl, &3 ) combines with the Cont. Participle of the 
principal verb ( ^6-d.l-cfl-d, ), both of which members agree in 
gender and number with the subject of the verb. Thus 

PAST CONTINUOUS. 







Sing. 




Plur. 


1. 


i=H4dt(-cn,-3)^di(-ca r a) 


*H*l «id<ll 


(-dl,-cti) *cu (cfl,-cii) 






i" was rising 




TTe ^uere rising. 


2. 
3. 


i » 
d 


>> >> j> >> )» 

Thou wast rising 


dS\i „ 


>» i> >» »> >> 

Fow were rising. 




m » 


>> >> >> >> >> 

He was rising 




>> J> >> >> » 

y^ei/ wwe rising. 



This tense is wanting in the verb ^i=|. 

56* The Present Intentional and Past 
Intentional Tenses* 

( fcUfeM* «ttfal«i hl<h and JfciUfens <H<\ ittfl )» 

In the Pres. Int. the * ^ ' auxiliary forms, and in the 
Past Int. the ' &cll ' auxiliary forms, combine with the Int. 
Participle of the principal verb (2{<£«Udl m. f -eildl /., -41-} n. V 
both this participle and the ' &clt ' forms agreeing in gender 
and number with the subject of the verb. Thus 



57 
CHAP. V. 



Pres. Cont. 
of &I-3. 



Past Cont. 
Tense iDflec* 
ted. 



58 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PAET II. 

Inflexion of 

a, Pres. 
Inten. Tense 



PRESENT INTENTIONAL. 



b. Past 
Inten.Tense 



Sing. 

1. 4 a^ldl (-dVd) $ J « m 

about to rise 

2. i „ „ „ d 2%ou 

ar£ a&owi to rise 
3. cl „ „ „ $ ife is 

a6owi to rise 



Plur. 
^ WHl (-Kl,-4'l ) tfl»\ IT* 

are about to rise. 

At 

are about to rise. 
a7'e about to rise. 



PAST INTENTIONAL. 



Sing. 

4 ^fli H,-d) &u (-cn,-d) 

7 was a&owi to rise 



3. a 



T7iow wast about to rise 
He was about to rise 



Plur. 
*H>1 141HI C— tt,— ii)^rtl (-cu,-ctl) 

We were about to rise. 

Fow were about to rise. 
They were about to rise. 



Note. The second Intentional Participle, ^IcMl^l (-ft,-^), may 
be substituted throughout these two tenses for ^umdl (-dl,-d ). 

The auxiliary verb ^l^ is defective in these tenses. 



Inflexion of 



a. Pres. 
Perf.Intrans 



57* Toe Present Perfect and Past Perfect 
Tenses of Intransitive Verbs* 

(=K>U}t *ii§ hW\ and =H>u}l (Hct $l</l). 

In Intransitive Verbs ( ^Hi'Ai (HIMs) the Pres. Perf. Tense 
takes the auxiliary ' ^ ' forms, and the Past Perf. the auxiliary 
' &dl ' forms, in each case combined with the Perf. Part. (jUi^l m., 
*{<£[£, WA n-), k° fc k this Participle and the f &cU' forms agreeing 
in gender and number with the subject of the verb. Thus 

PRESENT PERFECT. 

Plur. 
*H>1 stdHl (4[,-&i\) ^l»l We 

have risen. 






Sing. 

i. 4 *k&\ (A-<^) $ J 1uMie 

risen. 

2- i „ 1 „ $ Thou 
hast risen. 

3. a „ „ „ SHehas 

risen. 



ml „ 



St You 

have risen. 

d r% 

Zjave risen. 



PAST PERF. OF INTEANS. AND PRES. PERF. OF TRANS. 

PAST PERFECT. 



Sing. 



2. i 

3. cl 



/ had risen. 

}> >> j> n )> j> 
IVtow ^acfei risen. 

11 >> )> M J» >> 

He had risen. 



Plur. 

*>& *h,h\ (il, -*«il) &u (-cR,-cii ) 

We had risen, 

Sl ^ ii >} J; >) ii )> 

Fow &ad risen. 

Ci^Hl ,, ,, ,, ,, ,, ,, 

They had risen.. 



Note. The Second Perfect Participle, at^&i (-<Hl,-£i), may be 
substituted throughout these two tenses for H&Hl ( -{[,-&>£ ). 

The auxiliary Verb i|le| is defective in these tenses. 



58. The Present Perfect and Past Perfect 

Tenses of Transitive Verbs. 

(SEE PARADIGM VI) 

In Transitive Verbs, ( Ws~Ak GstlMS ) the Pres. Perf. takes the 
invariable auxiliary & (is, or are), and the Past. Perf. the auxiliary 
" &cU " forms, in each case combined with the Perf. Infin. 
in -*U m., -U /., -Q n., this Infinitive and the &cli forms agreeing 
in gender and number with the (direct) object of the verb, and the 
(logical) subject of the verb standing in the Agential case. Thus 

PRESENT PERFECT. 

1. *t °M*U (W,-H) $ or ^l (-W,-Ml) & I have seen, lit. by me 

is the having-seen. 



Sing. 



Plur. 



i. 


<l „ 


11 


or 


n 


3. 


^„ 


If 


,, or „ 


n 


1. 


^ „ 


11 


„ or „ 


ii 


2. 


<x\ „ 


>> 


„ or „ 


ii 


3. 


cl»U»l 


>J 


:, or „ 


)> 



„ Thou hast seen, lit. 

by thee is the having seen. 

„ He has seen } lit. by 

him is the having-seen. 

„ We have seen,lit. by us 
is the having-seen. 

„ You have seen f lit. 
by you is the having-seen. 

„ They have seen, lit. 
by them is the having-seen. 



59 
CHAP. V. 



h. Past. Perf. 
Iu trans. 



Inflexion of 

a Pres. 
Perf. Trans. 



60 
PART II. 



b. Past Perf. 
Trans. 



Sing. 



gujaratI grammar. 

PAST PERFECT. 

1. ^ «Vll(-y,-*i) (fecll (-dl,-sj)or £ht (-W,-*u) &u (<fl,-cll 
J had seen, lit. by me was the having -seen 

' " ft }> >> » 0r »> M » M 

Thou hadst seen, lit. &?/ ^ iee was $& having-seen* 

3 - ^ » » » „ or ,i „ „ „ 

Z7e A ad see%, lit. &?/ him was the having-seen. 






1. »fc„ 

Plur. i 2 * ^ » 



or 



1. Pre3. 
Indef. Subj. 



TPe Aaa" seen, lit. fo/ ws was the having-seen, 
or 
Fow ftacZ seen, lit. by you was the having-seen. 
3. clSUSl „ „ „ or „ „ „ „ 

They had seen, lit. by them was the having-seen. 

e. g. *l J lli <^*i d, I have seen the cart, lit. by me is th© 
having-seen the cart. cl^U^l ^llMH^U <^W &cft, They had seen 
the books, lit. by them was the having-seen the books. 

Note. The Perf. Infinitive in -*lt,-tf,-*i, which enters as 
the primary member in these two Compound Perfect Tenses, 
being identical in form with the Perf. Participle in -*U,-vJ,-*|,. 
the second Perfect Participle in -3$l,-5te{l,-:5l|i may in Transitive 
Verbs, just as in Intransitive, be substituted throughout these 
two tenses for the Perf. Infinitive. 

59, Subjunctive Mood ( Simple Tenses )♦, 

(SEE PARADIGM V.) 

A subjunctival meaning can attach to the tenses of the Indica- 
tive Mood if these are preceded by any conditional conjunction, 
such as &[ if, ^ lest, &c. 

On the other hand, in order to express formally the hypo- 
thetical predication implied in the Subjunctive Mood, GujaratI 
employs certain tense-forms differing more or less from those of 
the Indicative. 

Of the three Simple Tenses. 

1) The Pres. Indef. Subj. is identical with the Pres. Indief. 
Indicative. 



PRES. INDEF. AND PJST INDEF. SUBJUNCTIVE. 



CI 



Thus | =*{£ = I rise, or I may rise. ( See §§ 51,140 ). 

In the auxiliary verb ^l=J to be, the Pres. Indef. Subj. tales, 
however, the following special subjunctival forms. 

PRESENT INDEFINITE SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Sing. 

1. fclll, or fcttffl, or 6W«, 

/ may be. 

2. i llM, or&$, or <4$, Thou 

mayst be. 

3. cl &H, or &$, or &$, He 

may be. 



Plur.. 

»& 1&H, or &W4 or 1W& 

We may be. 

cl>l ll, or &$U, or &*h, You 

may be. 

cl»H li% or ii|J; or 6$, 

They may be. 



2) The Future Indef. Subj. is identical with the Pres. Indef. 
Subj. 

Thus <r*l £ 3{<i, If I may rise, or If I should rise. 

3) The Past Indef. Subj. whether of Transitive or Intransi- 
tive verbs, is formed by adding — ct ( or less frequently — cl ) to 
the simple verbal stem. This tense admits of no further inflexion 
for gender, number or person. 

PAST INDEFINITE SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Plur. 
Gvt a^ m<A f If we had risen. 
<Jn ct>l ^tict, If you had risen. 
*a cl^l aj<»cl, If they had risen. 



Sing. 
<M § *l<»fl» If I had risen. 
<M cj ^(jcl, If thou had risen. 
«n cl ^Ud, If he had risen. 

Similarly for the auxiliary verb : 

^ ( it 4> ^ ) &<t- If (I, thou, he ) had been. 
<*t (*>&, d>l, cl^U) &cl. If ( we, you, they ) had been. 

Forms such as ^Uci, (fclci, are in common use amongst Parsls, 
but not amongst them alone. 

60* The Subjunctive Mood (Compound Tenses)* 

(SEE PARADIGM Y.) 

The Compound tenses of the Subjunctive Mood differ from 
those of the Indicative only in the following points t 

a) The auxiliary ' ^ ' forms change to the corresponding |i@ 
(llWSl or4V*l) forms. 



CHAP. "vT. 



Inflexion of 

Pres. Indef. 

Subjunctive 

of Auxy.. 

Ver.b. 



2.Fut.IndeC 
Subj. 



3. Past 
Indef. Subj, 



Inflexion of 
Past Indef. 
Subjunctive- 



Sublunc- 

tival and 

Indicatival 

Tense-forms 

contrasted. 



62 
PART II. 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 

b) The auxiliary ' &cli ' forms change to ^td (or <£cl, or tltcf, 
or &a ), none of which undergo any inflexion for gender, 
number, or person. 

c) The Pres. Cont. Subj. is at$cU |i@ instead of the corres- 
ponding Indicatival ^ ^. 

d) The Subjunctive may be regarded as having three Com- 
pound Future tenses ( Fut. Cont, Fut. Int., Fut. Perf. ) ; 
but these are in form identical with the corresponding 
Compound Present Tenses of the subjunctive. 



61* Table of the Subj. Compound Tenses of 
Intransitive Verbs. 






The following Table exhibits the Compound Tenses of the 
Subjunctive Mood of the Intransitive Verb H&Q, to rise. 



Subjunctive 
Comp. 
Tenses, 
lutrans. 



Present 
or 

Future 



(If) I be rising. 



Past 



Subjunctive ( Intransitive ). 



Continuous. 



aucll (-41,-3) &§' 



Intentional. 



a^kll ( -rfl-i ) 



or &W*l or &W$l,(|l(=f or t§lW*l or 



or 



(If) I be about to 
rise, or 



Perfect. 



(If) I should be (If) I should be 



rising. 



about to rise. 



at^l(-<n,-d)licl^4=ll^l («{l,-i) 



(7/) I were ris- 
ing. 



(If) I were about 
to rise. 



*U*U ( -&,-&£ ) 
&<3t, rr ^IW« or 

(//) I may have 

risen, or 
(If) I should have 

risen. 






H&i (A-*£) 

(//) I had risen. 



In this Table the m<\[\i forms may ba substituted for the 
*{<m3t, and the *&&l for the *U*lt. 



THE IMFEUATIVE MOOD. 

€2. Table of the Subjunctive Perfects of 
Transitive Verbs* 

(SEE PARADIGM VI.) 

The conjugation of Transitive verbs in the Subjunctive Mood 
differs from that of Intrausitives only in the Perfect Tenses. 

The perfect Tenses of the Transitive sv^, to see, are given in 
the following Table : — 



63 

CHAP. V. 



Subjunctive (Transitive). 



Present 
or 

Future. 



Perfect. 



Subjunctive 
Perf.Tenses; 
Trans. 



Past. 



^ *t ffVU (-W,-*i) llM or &?l or &$l, or <MMl (-W,-Mt) 
&H or <§l$l or 6$, 

If I may have seen, lit. if by me may be the having-seen } 

or 
If I should have seen, lit. if by me there should be the 
having-seen. 



<M >1 <*ftl (-W,-*i) &Ct, or <*Ml( -W,-*U) &c1, 

If I had seen, lit. If by me had been the having-seen. 



In The Compound Tenses of the^Subjunctive, just as in those 
of the Indicative, the o>i«il^l forms may be substituted for the 
ff^teuU, and the <M2H4U forms for the <w\[. 

In the Auxiliary verb the Pres. Cont. Subj. ^icil t|l<§ may be 
occasionally heard, but much more frequently the simple Pres. 
Subj. (£l(§'. In fact ^l^ has practically no Compound Tense in 
the Subjunctive. 

63. The Imperative Mood. ( aniens? ). 

The Imperative with its short sharp utterance of command is 
appropriately expressed in Gujarat! by the mere verbal stem to 
■which, however, a>U is added for the plural. 

Thus *i& Rise thou ; ^l Rise ye. 



Imperative 
a. Simple. 



*6i 



X&'UJAiUTI GRAMMAR, 



PART U. 
*b. Familiar. 



<C Courteous. 



<£.Precative. 



Irregular 
Pasts and 
Perfects. 



To express an order more familiarly ^ or »{1 is frequently added 
to these simple imperatives. 

Thus $>$ or i^trfl Do do ( it ). 

<^Kl, =^1 itfl Mm{\ StW^ 4lMl nt^ft S See Tiere, somebody has 
cut this turban of mine. 

A less instantaneous imperative is formed by adding to the 
verbal stem <£ for the singular, and «vi for the plural. 

Thus au<J4> Rise thou ; *{&**[ Rise ye. 

The second person Sing, and Plur. of the Future Indefinite is 
also used by way of a polite imperative. To this form the 
particle of respect 23 (Sir, Madam), is occasionally added. 

Thus =H4^l thou wilt (kindly) rise ; 2{<j$ll you will (kindly) 
rise. 

d $IW ?in *U€ 4^ clvl »ttfl neiR *lto Kindly give my 
salaams to any who may remember me. 

The Precative (2nd and 3rd Persons) is formed by adding 
5U to the verbal stem.* 

Thus dl| ^lovM ^$1, Thy Kingdom come. 

3 SllPlct *u3U, Jfa2/ si ^°' M ' & e accursed ! 
The " exclamatory precative " suffixes ovl instead of 5U to the 
verbal stem. 

Thus 3 (or c$) H«-q ^sv^ Blessed be thou ! 

cll| <H^j ^i^, Good luck to you ! ( often ironical. ) 

64* Irregular Verbs. ( =»:ft«ifoct (i*uMs ). 



Owing to euphonic changes certain verbs have become " irregu- 



lar 1 



in the following forms : 



* If verbal stem end in 5m, this vowel is lost before the suffixed £h| 
of the simple Imperative (Plural) and of the Precative (See § 51). 
Thus ^J|^, to remain, a^'l *£l Remain ye here ; 

dlV *lwt Vtl *£l -May th V kingdom last for ever. 
G^, to take, but a^i §1 take ye this. 
If the verbal stem end in 3*1, this vowel in some verbs changes to 
<§ before suffixed 3U (See § 51). 

Thus ai[i, to see, but <ni <&SU Look there ! 
Note however the coalescence of the two aRi's in |i (for Jl-SJi), 
be ye. Also in the sub, junctival rt>1 & (If) you may be ( See § 59 ). 



ifc&EGULAR VERBS. 



65 



\) the two declinable Perf. Participles (in -%,-W,-H> and -3&l CHAP. v - 

2) the declinable Perf. Infinitive (in -*ll,-W,-*i) and all tenses 
formed from this Infinitive (namely, the Past Indef* Indie, 
and all Perfects whether Indie, or Subj.) 

These so-called Irregular Verbs are 



to do, &Q 



to say 4(§t 
to eat, ~»i\$ 
to go, <*3 
to see, t^Q 

to 9 ive , ^i 
to flee, 41^ 
to drink, "4l«[ 
to enter, M*t<j 
to fear, ^ 

to sit, ^% 
to die, H^[ 
to take, €l=j 
to sleep, Ui 
to be (£l^ 



Past Indefinite &c. Second Perf. Part. 



or i% 2tfl) *S (reg.) 
£% -%*$ 

or »{ftt, -*fl, -d 

Sfo, -£l, -4 

4ftl, -%-% 



h\h, -41, -g (reg.) 

*$u, -€, -& 

&1\ -41, -^. 

*n^i, -41, ■& 
HlQ«U, -41, -& 

mIHi, -41, -^. 

wflS&t, -41, -g. 

or wi^Hi, -41, -& 
^«u, -41, -& 
h^i, -4, -&. 
4i§«ti, -41, -a. 

&c&i, -41, -& 
l&h, -41, -4. 



Ll3t of 

Irregular 

VerbB. 



The frequentative Perfect Infinitive (in-*u) of the above verbs 
admits, however of being formed quite regularly (See § 84 Note). 
Thus cl "^ilMi h\Qt, He frequently eats, is ever eating. 
cl \»-h[ !s\&, He frequently looks, keeps looking. 
The following irregular Past Indefinite tense-forms are also 
met with 

a. §H«-i£, PlM^ instead of the regular (§M^ and PlM^, from 
the verbs dMatf^, GlMfr/-^, both meaning to be produced, 

b. Occasionally in North Gujarat and Kathiawad §il, <^fl, l^ are 

substituted for $h, 4, ^ in the Past Indefinite Passive. Thus 
9 



Verbs 

occasionally 

irregular. 



66 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR, 



PART II. 



Forms in 

Conjugation 

of *l4 and 



Conjuga- 
tion of 



teHli^ for &Ml*i (from toMl-^) teas printed; 
and even £Uti^ forlMl*£ (from^l-^) was seen. 
Note also SU<HI§$1 for ^UcuSteit, he who was lost. 

65* «i$j and <v§ as Irregular Verbs, 

The true verbal stem of «i^, to be, to become, is not *l ( tha ) 
but 211 ( tha ). This 8ii stem is, however, shortened to *l before 
any inflexion that begins with either W or a consonant. Further, 
in accordance with §51 a), the personal suffix 5} when added to 
the stem ?U changes in writing to H, Hence occur not only full 
form such as S{[<3, auSU, *{[% but also the shortened «i^, «lW^, 
«iW*l, «i$l, *$l, &c. The Second Perf. Part, differs from the 
First only by changing -\ -W, -*i to -anitl, -»Ufl, -^^, hence 
corresponding to Si^l, 8tW, *i*i we have the forms Sian&l, *l5VKl, 

Similarly the verbal stem of cy^, to (70, is not <tf (ja) but <M (ja), 
and the rule given above for «l^ applies equally to this verb also. 
Plence along with such forms as <M<§, "A^i, ^H, we also have 
the shortened <tv^, <wWa^, <rv*$U, &c. 

The verb <r/c| has, moreover, the irregular forms ^iMl, ^IVJ, o^ 
and ^iSteil,-^,-^ mentioned in § 64. 



66, The Verb fttf»i. 






The Verb <MW=>1, ' ought,' ' need,' ' *s cfote/ is both Impersonal 
( ^Hh^b ) and Defective ( ^H^ ). Its only existing forms are 
Continuous Participle <MWcil-c(l-cj, and 



Present 



Future. 
Past. 



Indicative. 



Indefinite. 



Wanting. 



Continuous. 



<MW^1 &. 



Wanting. 
<MWcll(-ca,-ci,) 

&cli,(-<M.) 



Subjunctive. 



Indefinite. 



ffJtySl. 



Same as 
Present. 



Continuous. 



<MWcU (-eft, 

-d)iiMor^ui 

or &*l. 

Same as 
Present. 

<MWcll (-<fl,-<£) 

iw. 



TRANS1TIVES CONSTRUED AS THOUGH INTRANSITIVES. 



67 



6T. The Construction employed with w&M, 

<Mfc)5l, being passival in its origin, means ' is desired,' ' is 
needed, is due' 

a) When an Infinitive (verbal noun) is the subject of ^W^l, 
duty, or obligation, regarding the action indicated by the 
infinitive is thereby implied. This verbal noun stands 
then in the Subjective case ( Sing, or Plur.), and 
immediately precedes ffvtfcJ^, while the agent by whom 
the duty ought to be discharged is put in the Agential 
case. Thus 

cl§j $y^ (MfcjSl, He ought to go, lit. by him the going is 

due. 
"*i[\ "Mil Mt^Hl <MW?l, I shall have to wear shoes, lit. by 
me the wearing shoes voill be due. 

b) frflW^, however, can be used independently of any infini- 
tive. Its meaning then passes over from that of duty or 
obligation to that of want, or standing in need of. ' The 
thing needed ' will accordingly be put in the Subjective 
case, and ' the person to whom there is the need ' in the 
Objective. Thus 

cl«H <Mil ^IW^I, He needi shoes, lit. to him shoes are 

needed ; 
"H^. M^l <MW§t, / shall be in need of money, lit. to me 

vioney will be needed ■ 
SlW MQl &[${ M3$| =Wf ^fcl^H, Every effect necessarily 

requires a cause, 

68. Transitives construed as though 
Intransitives* 

We have already seen in § § 52, 57, 58, 62, that the conju- 
gation of Transitive Verbs differs from that of Intransitives in the 
Past Indef. Indie, and in all Perfects, whether Indicative or Sub- 
junctive. In these tenses Transitive Verbs take what may be 
termed the "Agential Construction" ( hA[% M^Pl), inasmuch as 
their ( logical ) subject stands in the Agential case. Intransitive 
verbs, on the other hand, take the " Subjectival Construction " 
( iaft M*U 3 l ), their ( logical ) subject always standing in the 
Subjective case. 



CHAP. V. 

Construc- 
tion of 

a. with 
Infinitive. 



b, without 
Infinitive. 



6S 
PART II. 



List of 
Transitive 
Verbs hav- 
ing Subjec- 
tival Con- 
struct Lon. 



List of 
Transitive 
Verbs hav- 
ing some- 
times Agen- 
tial, and 
sometimes 
Subjeotival, 
Construc- 
tion. 



QUJARATI GRAMMAR. 

Thus $1 H\ "ii^* ? built a house, lit* by; me (was] the havings 
built a house. 
and § ^d^il, i" rose, Et. / (was) one-having-risen. 

Now it is of the utmost importance to bear in mind that the 
verbs in the following list, notwithstanding that they are distinctly 
transitive in meaning, are conjugated throughout all their tenses 
as though they were intransitives, and hence are construed not. 
with the agential but with the. subjectival construction, 

1. ^i&i,, to touch j 

2. *U*i t to touch ; 

3. *£§, to lose ( a game ) • also Intrans, to be mistaken j 

4. «tfM<j> to eat ; 

5. "HPt^ to receive, to get ; 

6. ^A.% to tell; also Intrans. to, speak ; 

7. W^j, to learn; 

8. W to forget; 

9. C-tt^ r to bring ; 

10. <Wl=|, to clasp ; 

11. SJX^i, to learn; 

1 2 . *lH<tf<i, to understand ; 

Thus not *{ ailM{\ <Ht*Q, but g ^llHfl Sll<>*h, I brought a booh 
cl hi^i <H<$t *\1&W\ c$l "ilM H*m ViAt T As soon as 
he had learnt just a little,, his fatJier died. 

69» Transitives optionally construed as 
though Intransitives. 

In the Past. Indef. Indie, and in all Perfects, whether Indie, 
or Subj., the following transitive verbs are 

1) sometimes regarded as true transitives, and employed 

accordingly with the Agential Construction, and 

2) sometimes regarded as though they were intransitives, and 

employed accordingly with the Subjectival Construction. 
# S\W^, to utter; 

* ill^, to earn, acquire ; 
&i>i, to bite ; 

* «"^i, to bear, bring forth ; 
«3rt^, to conquer; also Intrans, to be victor ; 



THE VERB USED INTERROGATIVELY. 



69> 



* <imi, 
t *ti^i 

Thus either 
or 



to- flay ,- 



He married the woman. 



to bite [of a snake) ;. 

to abandon ; 

to such (the breast), 

to wed ; 

to tell ; 

to embrace ; 

to play at ; also Infcrans, 

to worship, adore ; 

to marry. ; 

to forget ; 

to envelop ; 

to bear, suffer ; 

to remember ; 

to lose ( a game) ; also Intrans. to be defeated* 

*>(>l cil MHt gH'ft *l«l 3»/*ldl WHld 4M Ht^Mt, 
We indeed imbibed with (our) mother's milk 
a knowledge of the Gujardtl languge. 

70, The Verb used Interrogatively, 

The Interrogative does not differ as to form from the Indicative 
or Subjunctive. Thus cl>l «vl3U Si, you are going; but, if 
uttered with the heightened tone characteristic of interrogation, 
the same words would mean ' are you going ? ' 

Gnerally, however, some interrogatival particle or word is 
present to indicate the asking of a question. 

For example ^ ct>t «t»U Si ? ' 
4 ct>l "tSU Si % ? 
cl>l "t^U Si 4 ? }- (What,) are you going ? 

cni <*i5n Si % q ? 
ci>i «i»u Si 1 ? 

Cl*l «l»U Si % 'ife ? -4re you going or not ? 
These particles are, of course, omitted whenever the question 
is expressly indicated by some such interrogatival word as 



CHAP V. 



The Verb in 
Interroga- 
tive senten- 
ces. 



• These nine verbs are usually employed with the Subjectival Construction. 
+ These two verbs are usually employed, with the Agential Construction. 



70 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



Verbal 

forma in 

Negative 

sentences. 



Negative 
Imperatives 



rf«U ? Where ?, J<\[\ When ?, Snaj ? Who ? 
3H[ ^3^1 &l ? Where are you going ? 
Wl^ ^^U &l ? When are you going \ 
%\%, iyu § ? Who is going ? 

71. The Verb used Negatively* 

( £&ttl$ or GftH^M ). 

In Verbs negation is expressed by adding to the corresponding 
affirmative form one or other of the negative particles 4, 4t, 
4(& and 41 ( Imperatival ), these particles being written as- 
independent words. 
In the auxiliary verb 

«) 4*ft ( from jt + 3TftcI, non est, is not ) does duty as the- 
negative for all persons and genders of the Pres. Indef, 
Indie. For sake of emphasis, however, 4{& may be used 
after any of the ' ^ ' forms. 
b) the Past Indef. Indie. &cll (-<ft,-d)> when employed negative- 
ly, is generally modified to 4titdl (-cfl,-d) or *i^clt (-cfl,; 
-cj\ though the unmodified 4 &cll (-cfl,-jj) is often heard. 
In all verbs the Negative of the Pres. Cont. Tense consists of 
the Continuous Participle (in-cU-cft-g) either followed or preceded 
by 4«fl. Thus 

£aUcU (-cu,-c3) 4*fl, lam not ris- 
ing. 

i „ „ » Thow art » » 

cl .. .. „ He is 



*>& *Rctl (cn,-cti) <i% We are 

not rising. 

& » » » You » „ 

d^i „ >, ,, The v „ „ 



For the Negative of the Imperative the particles 4, 41, and 4t 
may be used, 4 always before, 41 either before or after, and 4t 
nearly always after, the affirmative Imperative. Thus 

4 a&l ] 

41 *\&\ or ^l 41 \rise not ye, do not rise. 

*&\ 41 ) 
Another way of expressing the Negative Imperative is by plac- 
ing 41 or 41 after the Continuous Participle — Thus 



*UCU (-cfl,-cU) 41 

*ucu (-cuycti) 4t 



r 



ise not ye. 



^ [ W-i) *] rise not thou , 
*Udl (-cfl,-d) 41 j 

^dcll (-dl,-d) 4t (or 4l) is literally ' one-rising (be) notj 
and ^Uctl (-dl,-cU) 41 (or 4l), ' ones-rising (be) not.' 



FORMATION OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. 



71 



72. Formation of the Passive Voice (%i§i$U). 

If the stern of the Active Voice ( ^Mi ) end in a consonant, 
the stem of the Passive is formed from it by simply adding *Hl ; 
but should the active stem contain medial s>ii ( or ^i ) this is 
shortened to ^( or *>{ ) before the passival 5^1. 



Thus 



Active. 

H-i 
^-i 

If the stem of the Active Voice end in a vowel, euphonic 1 is 
inserted before adding the passival s*U, but, should the final 
vowel of the Active Stem be itself ^H\ f this is shortened to *H 
before adding the euphonic H and passival ^\. 



to write 
to do 
to drag 
to see 
to sew 
to use 
to read 
to hear 



Passive. 



Thus 



Active. 



Also 



to see 


**■% 


to give 
to drink 
to eat 


Ml-i 


to sing 
to bathe 





Passive. 



73. Conjugation of the Passive Voice. 

Gujarat! evinces a marked reluctance to employ the Passive 
Voice in a purely passival sense, but, so far as verbs are conjugated 
at all in this voice, their inflexional changes are identical -with 
those in the active voice. 
Thus we have 

Infinitive Indefinite "^l^, to be dragged, thebeing-dragged. 

fJ Perfect "ufal^, the having-been-dragged. 

Participle Continuous "^Rlcll,-Cu,-3. being dragged. 
„ Intentional (wanting). 

Perfect 1) *«M*. ) having bm 

„ Connective A*i\)J, or ^itM. ) 



CHAP. Y. 

Stem of 
Passive 
Voice for- 
med from 
a. consonan- 
tal Active 
stem. 



b. vocalic 
Activestem. 



The Passive 

expressed 

by means of 

Passival 

forms. 



72 



GUJAKATI GRAMMAR. 



FART II. 


Present. 




i NDTOATTVE. 










Indefinite. 


Continuous. 


Perfect. 


Intentional 




4 >H=Htf3, 


t ^l§ g, 


4 >H^l & 


( Wanting ). 






7" am dragged 


/ am being 


J have been 










dragged 


dragged. 






Future. 


I shall be drag- 
ged. 


( Wanting. ) 


( Wanting ). 


( Wanting ) k 




Past. 


t >H=Hl*il, 


& >H*UcU 6<U, 4 vfaflt 6cll, 


( Wanting )» 






I was dragged. 


I was being 


/ had been 










dragged. 


dragged. 





Passival 

idea expres- 
sed without 
Passival 
forms. 

<s t Infinitive 
in-HL 



In the Perfect Tenses "»H*U5&1 forms are frequently substitute 
ed for ^$1 forms. 

74. Idiomatic Substitutes for Passival Forms. 

With a view to avoiding passival forms as far as possible, 
various idiomatic circumlocutions are used in their stead. 

1) The-Ml Locative of the Infinitive of the principal verb is 
followed by a tense form of the auxiliary verb *Hl<H«j, to 
come, used impersonally. 

e. g. ^Hl H\ %MlV=lPtt ^HlH^l, this house will be repaired, lit. it 

will come into the repairing this 
house. 

dl&%l»l& tfl^Wl'Hi fctttft, the boys will be taught, lit. it 

will come into the teaching boys. 

^IvA Sliaa JtflxWRl "IW^, the Christian Scriptures will 
be taught, lit. it will come into 
the teaching the Christian Scrip- 
tures. 

dl$Rl»U3 ^flvfl StWa tfl^WtPii *HW?l, the boys will be 
taught the Christian Scriptures, 
lit. it tvill come into the teaching 
the Christian Scriptures to tlie 
boys. 



POTENTIAL PASSIVES, 



73 



In these sentences neither H\ nor *U2?l is the subject of *HW&. 
Since the house is the 'subject matter' of the action of repairing, 
*tt is governed in the Subj. Case by the verb Wi\\§ ; and for a 
like reason ^itfst is in the Subj. Case after tfl"^^ (See 
Syntax, § 132). 

Compare with this passival construction our English idiom 
*' It will come to the breaking of heads " as equivalent to "Heads 
will be broken." 

When the auxiliary ^tH^j occurs in this construction in the 
Past Indef., or Pres. Perf. or Past Perf. tense, then by a loose 
attraction it is made to agree in gender and number with the 
Subjective, or in the absence of a Subjective with the Objective, 
of the associated transitive Infinitive in ->li. Compare § 53. 

Thus # <£ £U§}1 W^WWi ant^t & cM«ii ^j, Three of the 
reasons that have been made known ; 
cl M"Hl§t "tHHlSlti @1<HI iVUli ^HMt, Accordingly the 
prisoners were brought forward. 
2) The Perfect Participle (-^l,-W,-^) of the principal verb is 
followed by a tense-form of the ancillary verb <r/^, to go. 
*Hl Hl^ "HlMl °$l, this man was beaten, lit, this man 
went beaten, got beaten ( so as to 
be nearly, or quite, hilled ). 
The sentence may be so altered as to evade altogether 
the necessity for any passival construction, 
cl £&IQ(1 rt'H'Ci ^=0 «iW, that story was soon finished, lit. 
that story soon became complete. 
3HI H?. «iUl MR^l, this house will be destroyed, lit. this 
house %vill meet with destruction. 
&£ -il«ii "tl^li*} M^l ^, Children are married when 
quite young, lit. (People) give in marriage 
quite little infants, 

75. Potential Passives. (Si5«i$U). 

Though the Passive voice is seldom used in Gujarat! in its 
purely passival sense, it is frequently employed with a potential 
force so as to carry with it the idea of possibility. 

It is noteworthy that these Potential Passives can be formed 
oven from Intransitive verbs ; thus 
10 



«.£. 



3) 



«•£. 



CHAP. V. 



b. the an- 
cillary 0/C|. 



c. new 
moulding of 
the sen- 
tence. 



Verbs Pas- 
sival in 

form but 
Potential in 

meaniDg. 



74 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



Verbal 
forms of 
Potential 
3ive. 



Intransi- 

tives and 

derived 

Transitives. 



Intransitive. Potential Passive. 

to rise, ^d-^, ^liL t° & e able to be risen, can be risen 

to sleep, Q-Q, ^i'Hl-^, to be able to be slept, can be slept 

to go t ff/-^ (for vA-Q), c^l-^, to be able to be gone, can be gone 

76* Conjugation of Potential Passives. 

As to conjugation a Potential Passive is not only defective but 
impersonal, the doer (or logical subject) being always put in the 
Ablative case. 

The following are the only Indicatival forms in common use. 





Indefinite. 


Continuous. 


Perfect. 


Intentional. 


Present. 


ChrM) &q\% 


(*tRl*(l) v*m 




(Wanting). 




(/) can go. 


(I) am able to 

go. 


(I) have been 
able to go. 




Future. 


(I)shallbeable 
to go. 


(Wanting) 


(Wanting.) 


(Wanting), 


Past. 


OhrM) <xwi. 


(*u*i*(l) <*=u<3 


Chri*(1) *m 


(Wanting), 




(J) could go. 


(/) was able to 


(I) had been 








go. J able to go. 





77. Transitives derived from Intransitives, 

Several verbs, neuter or intransitive, become active or transitive 
(differing not at all in meaning from causative) by insertion of "It, 
or less often a^, in the original root. Thus 



Intransitive. 


Transitive. 


to fall 


Mi-i 


^-i 


to fell ; 


to be on fire 


"M-^. 


"IM-S, 


to set on fire ; 


to be saved 


<^lV3. 


&ni, 


to save ; 


to be frozen 


ft-i 


&H, 


to freeze (a thing). 


to be pressed down 


w-§. 


m-t, 


to press down ; 


to be improved 


%*H- 


mH, 


to improve ; 


to open, bloom 


<§H4-i 


e^, 


to unlock, open; 


to be plucked up 


e-wu-g; 


s^M, 


to pluck up ; 



FORMATION OF CAUSATIVES. 



75. 



to grow up 


§\*\-i. 


&H, 


to train top, rear ; 


to be blended 


<m-i. 


&<s\-i, 


to mingle, blend with - } 


to be scattered 


fty&i. 


fofa-i, 


to scatter ; 


Note also to drink 


%i 


*H, 


to give to drink ; 


to die 


ivi 


m-i, 


to strike. 



CHAP. V. 



to write 
to do 
to drag 
to see 
to use 
to hear 
to rise 
Note also to be entrapped 



78. Formation of Causatives. pft*$U)» 

If the stem of a primary verb end in a consonant, the stem of 
the causative derived from it is formed by simply adding* *>\\% 
or 3HU ; but should the active stem contain medial *>\[ (or ^i) 
this is shortened to ^M ( or a>i ) before adding the causative ^HK 
or 2HU (Compare § 72), Thus 

Primary. Causative.. 

**& «w-d. 

mi, *m-i. 

tlf the stem of the primary verb end in a vowel, euphonic <H is 
serted before adding the causatival (^l^ or) ^Hli ; but should 
the final vowel of the primary verb be itself *>\\ this is shortened 
to 5H before adding the euphonic <H and causatival (*>\\ r \ or) s^U 
(Compare § 72). Thus 

Primary. Causative. 

also ifel'H-^ to send a message. 



Causatives 
formed from 
a: consonan- 
tal stem. 



to see 
to give 
to speak 

to drink 
to eat 
to sing 
to bathe 
to go 
to sleep 



h: vocalic 
stem. 



*ll&-£ ( for r &H) *i6 c iiA-d. 
<t/~i (for <rvl-^), aittli-^. 



•"Extensive, or Causative, means what' is increased 'without,' and to 
express the causative a syllable is attached to the outside.*' Davidson's 
Heb. Gram. (2nd Ed.) Page 63. 






76 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR, 



PART II. 

Less usual 

causatives. 



Causatives 

with double 

causatival 

termination 



2*cW-^ 



Some Causatives are formed by adding q (not s»M) to the- 
stem of the Primary verb, which latter further receives a medial 
5}. Should, however, the stem already contain the vowel 5} of 
W or =Hl or (§, then the medial v{, is not added. 

Primary. Causative. 

^t^l-^ to shed. 

tW-i (or &tt-f ) to settle. 
\Vi-Q ( or X^ij) to cause to turn 

round. 
SW-S (or eRl"H-«|) to cause to fill. 
^Ml-^ to mix, mingle. 

^cfici-^ to malce familiar r to tame. 
( to caution 
\ to set on fire. 
2£<=t-<| (or ^SH-^),. to give support, 
to cause to lean. 
MUW-^ to cause to bloom, to foster. 
^■i^-^ to anger, provoke. 

^•Hij to charm. 

^■^"H-^ to teach. 

Sli 5 !-^ to cause to let loose, to release, 
^i !-^ to mislead. 

Note also to go aside "^-^ "°i*L-!i to push aside. 

79. Double Causatives* 

From causatives themselves double causatives are sometimes 
derived quite regularly, the former being regarded as primary to 
the latter. As to meaning Double Causatives are scarcely to be 
distinguished from Simple Causatives. Thus 

Primary. Causative. Causative. 
(Primary.) (Double.) 
•"U-3, ^Hti-i, and -winil^, 



to fall off 


*iH 


to be fixed 


&i 


to go round 


\H 


to fill 


n\-i 


to meet 


w-d 


to become familia' 


r m-i 


to beware 1 
to catch fire) 


»ta-i 


to have a support 1b-$ 


to bloom 


"»il€t-3 


to be angry 


=fl4-d 


to be pleased 


fa-i 


to learn 


stty\-i 


to let loose 


du-^ 


to err 


\H 



to eat 



to see ovl-3, ^^"d, an d •faiM-S, 

to suck (the breast) HlH-g, HlU-i and -^WiW-^, 



to give to 

eat, feed ; 

to cause to 

see, show; 

to mclile; 



INTENSIVE COMPOUND VERBS. 



77 



to he afraid ofl-^, °{hU-3, and ^ftHM-^, to frighten; 

to sew ^I'-l-i, fer-Ui-i,. md?£l r -{$m-§ F to cause to seiv; 

to take £1-3, has the Double Causative ^Hil^-^, to cause to take. 

80* Compound Verbs classified as to their Forms, 

In Gujarat! a simple verb is not unfrequently modified in 
meaning by its combination with a second, or ' ancillary/ verb, 
the two together constituting what is termed a Compound Verb. 

Of the compound the latter or subordinate element is liable to 
verbal inflexion. The earlier or principal element, on the other 
hand, is not conjugated, but assumes one of the following forms, 
I. the short Connective Participle in y (never -M ) ; 

II. the neuter plural (in -*u) of the Perfect Infinitive ; 

III. the declinable Continuous Participle in -cU,-cfl, -<j, or 
the declinable Perfect Participle in -Ml,-W, -^ ; 

IV. the Indefinite Infinitive Absolute in -=U,-«fl, -3 ; 
V. the Indefinite Infinitive Oblique in — «U. 

Each of these five classes merits detailed consideration. 

81. Intensive Compound Verbs. 

I, Of compound verbs whose primary element appears in 

the form of the Connective Participle in -y, there are 

three sub-classes, which may be roughly characterized as 

A. Intensives, B, Completives, and C* Potentials. 

At Of the Intensive Compound Verbs, the second, or 

modifying ancillary, element is usually one or other of 

the following verbs. 

1. «/^, to go, imparting to the principal verb the added 
idea of throughness, finality. 

e. g. "*i'h% to meet, 
"H^D «*!J, to meet so as to mingle with, to merge in. 
S" ^, to be 'plucked up, 
^il W=j, to go to rack and ruin. 

2. ^HIH^, to come, implying approach or development. 

e. g. <W&i, to flee. 
<\\^\ ^HIH^, to reach after flight, to effect one's escape. 



CffAP. in. 



Five classes- 
of Com- 
pound. 
Verbs.. 



Intensive 

Compounds 

with 



1.W& 



2. *nm£ f 



78 
PART II. 
3. *&, 



4. IMi, 



5.^, 



*M, 



7. <i\y\i, 



8. \ki, or 



9. M4i 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 

3. <i^> to remain implying continuity or permanence. 

e. g. 3 lt9/^, to resound, 
3 U25 ^|> to keep resounding, to resound on. 

^^i, to bear, 
""{Ml Rt^ f to bear on, to endure. 

4. ^l"^^, to keep, implying continuity, but with more of an 
active meaning than is suggested by ^ej. 

«• 0. 9W&, to fill, 
W^ W\"i, to store up. 

Mii^, to take hold of, 
\hS\ IWi, to keep hold of. 

5. \§, to give, implying emphasis or intensity. 

e > 9- X^d> to throiv, 
\}f\ \§, to throw away. 

>U£Si^, to send, 
>UK-u" 1i, to send off. 

6. &^, to take, implying acquisition, appropriation. 

e. g. ^ii, to lift, 
St^ii/l &3, to lift up ( so as to have ). 

MP13, to ask, 
■HPd <H3, to ask and get, to obtain by asking. 

7. "i^ci, to cast, implying vigour, resoluteness, completeness. 

e. g. "HR^, to strilce f 
Ml^ r tl' v H3, to strike down, to kill. 

C#s>3, to tuipe, 
C-£f[ «il" u i^, to wipe aivay. 

8. 'i.icL or ^^d> io P u t> 1VD l^y' m o finality or absoluteness. 

e. g. h[&i, to take out. 
b\{[ "H^i, or &[{[ >lSt^, to remove finally, to dismiss. 

§U<|, to loosen, 
6l£l H^i, or &i£l ^Q, to loosen (absolutely), to set free. 

9. Mi^, to fall, implying suddenness, unpreparedness. 

e. g. &&$, to laugh, 
&fc(l Mi^, to burst out laughing, 

<3i3> to fly* 

$£l\ii, to fly off. 
^l^, to come, 






POTENTIAL COMPOUND VERBS. 

^Ml^l "Hi^, to come upon, to befall. 
[ Note also M$£l Mli^, to catch up, to overtake ]. 
10. §£3^ to rise, implying suddenness, intensity. 

^Uet^, to speak, 
^K-{1 §i^, to spea/c out, to cry out, 

=(1*1 MUfl, to scream, 
3(1*1 Mill (§£3, to scream out. 

82. Completive Compound Verbs. 

B. Completives. To indicate that a given action is completed, 
is finished, is over and done with, the short Connective 
Participle in y of the verb expressive of that action is 
compounded with either ^i^, to effect a settlement, or 
^3, to remain. 

Thus &\§, to do. 
h$[ ^jr^, or £# ^j, to complete doing , to finish up, to end. 

*t^ to be, to become. 
tyy 2££cj or 2jy ^^, to 6e at an end, to be over. 

Completive Compounds may be often used to express the full 
force of an English verb modified by the adverb ' already.' The 
late Rev. Robert Montgomery in his Cujarati-English Dictionary 
writes sub verbo ' already ' " best rendered by the past tense of the 
verbs 5^ and ^3, 

as, I have told you already, § cl*H«} h&( ^fMl ^, 
Have you done already ? cl>l 4^1 RM\ &l ? " 

83. Potential Compound Verbs. 

C. Potentials. To indicate ability to perform a certain action 
the short Connective Participle in y of the verb expres- 
sive of that action is compounded with the verb ^li^, 
to be able. 

Thus <M^, to see, 

<^tW ?14^, to be able to see, can see. 
*IR<|, to strike. 

"*{[([ Qhi,, to be able to strike, can strike. 
and similarly for all verbs. 



79 
CHAP. v. 

10. 8S3, 



Completive 
Compounds 
with \bi, 
or *£$. 



The English 
' already.' 



Potential 

Compounde 

with V&i, 



80 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 
or <*t(^. 



Passive of 
Potential 
Compounds. 



Frequenta- 
tive Com- 
pounds in 
-Ml Hi 



In these Potential Compound Verbs M^, to know, occasionally 
takes the place of *14^, to be able. 

Thus £ 3l«| iiH 4# *lidl *\% I cannot do such work* 
or ^ 2H^ 4R 4=0 <™lQldt -\V\, I do not know how to do 

such tvork, and thus, 7" cannot do such work. 
"KofQW^&A £i£l MQJ fr^dl, Rajput women kneio even how 
to fight, could even fight. 
As has been already stated in §§ 75, 76, the Passive Voice 
in Gujarat! is frequently employed to express potentiality, and., 
when so used, the verb is regarded as impersonal, its ( logical ) 
subject being placed in the Ablative Case. 

Thus cl 41H *IRI*(1 h\\% I can do that work, 

lit. by me that work can be done. 
Now a Potential Compound Verb becomes passival in meaning 
by changing not the principal verb but its ancillary, %\h% to the 
passival form 314llj. 

Thus i£l K\h% to be able to do, can do. 

4$ '<\h\% to be able to be done } can be done. 
Hence cl 4fH 4 4$ * l £ & I can do that ivork. 

ct 41H ^IRlSfl h$[ *141M S, That work can be done by me. 

ff/'HH fcy kiblH, An ansiver can be given. 

ff/^R £y *l4l£i, It will be possible to give an answer. 

84. Frequentative Compound Verbs. 

II, The frequent repetition of the action indicated by the 
principal verb is expressed by compounding its Perfect 
Infinitive neut. pi. ( in -Mi, or, often with loss of 
anusvara, in -Ml ) with the verb i^. 
The former element of the compound remains indeclinable, 
but the latter admits of complete verbal inflexion. 
Thus "ll<ct^ to speak, 

^UMi 4^j, to keep speaking. 
'MIM^, to give, 

*HlMi H3, to keep giving. 
^i, to cry, 

?.iM b?Q, to keep on crying. 
5RI PtfltfM ^Ml^ cMl^U Wl 4^ &, Ganga leas kept on crying 
ever since she came back from school. 



CONTINUATIVE COMPOUND VERBS. 



This Frequentative Compound is often of use for translating 
the English adverb 'always ' in the sense of ' time after time/ 
with the implied force that the action is habitual or customary. 

Thus ci \{<n& <k[H i^i Hell &dt, He Was alivays instruct- 
ing the king ( kept instructing ). 

Note* In these Frequentative Compounds the irregular 
forms, 01^, <-{l^, 4l|, &c., are seldom employed, but in 
their stead ottcur forms built Up according to the 
regular type, such as <*[*{[, *°itMi, dteH't, &c. (See § 64). 

Thus au^i 3 <?fl>i aJla^Hl <*>Wlt *HH>id »J%l«l>lt^ll'fl 
^H"Hl i&\ ictni 4Vfl Micft, 7w <7te time of Chdmund 
and Bhim the army tvas obliged to come into frequent 
conflict with the Musalmdns. 

85. Continual! ve Compound Verbs* 

III. When the Continuous Participle in -cll,-^,-^, is 
compounded 

a. with <t/c[, the action of the verb is regarded as continued 

indefinitely ; 

b. with ^Ml^, as continuing from an indefinite past 

until the present, 

c. with ^^ as continuing, it may be with intermissions, 

from the present into the indefinite future. 

Thus a. <*$—■ Rl«l §\\ dM* tf ell ^IHI, M>^ MI<${1 M^ foe/ =H<^ 
oi^, the king Jcept going up and up, but so also 
the water kept rising. 

°M &l&Vl ^icl i^cli "IM d "^ilcli «1M, Ml the children 

keep talking and eating. 

cl>L <H^cU "l^U, Go on studying. 
f, t »l^-_ aniM^ itl^d iWU H'WlcU ^Kl^l tfR, JrVom 

undent times we have always heard. 

4 €4 *^ 1 ^Hl^l, I have done evil up to the present. 
c. ^fc<j— 3>l <H%<\\ R^l, Be always studying. 

The compound verb cy<j ^^ sometimes means " to go and 
Stay away" but more frequently "to pass away" " to be ended." 
11 



CHAP. V. 



The English 
' always.' 



Continua- 
tive Com- 
pounds with 

a. rt§. 



b. SHiq^. 



C *&$• 



82 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



Continua- 
tive Com- 
pounds in 

■*a, -4, -i- 



Infinitival 

Compound 

Verbs. 



Obligative 
Compounds 
a. with \&Qi 



the English 
' have to.' 



Thus cl»U MlclMlcll^l iU o/cll Rill, 7% dispersed to their 
several homes; 

cl'i.l 22^ aval R^U &, -ffis Zi/e has passed away. 

Frequently, when ov^ is the ancillary verb, the principal verb 
appears in the form of the Perfect Participle in -Hl,-iJ-*i instead of 
in that of the Continuous Participle. The difference of mean- 
ing is scarcely appreciable, though perhaps with the Perfect 
Participle the idea may be more prominent of action completed 
but immediately taken in hand again. 

Thus cl MiaWl oVM hHl HH[. He kept on going over his charms. 

88# Verbs compounded with Infinitives. 

The remaining two classes ( IV and V of § 80 ) should not 
perhaps be included in the category of true Compound Verbs. 
In both these Classes the primary verb appears as an Infinitive 
( or verbal noun ), which in Class IV. is the subject, and in 
Class V. the object, of the following (ancillary) simple verb. Still 
the idiom represented by these two classes resembles that of the 
true Compound Verb, inasmuch as the primary infinitive and 
the ancillary verb are so closely associated together that no words 
are allowed to intervene between them. 

87* Obligative Compound Verbs* 

IV* a) When an infinitive in -"Hl,-^,-^, stands as the 
subject of, and immediately precedes, the verb 
Mi^, to fall, the action denoted by that infinitive 
is thereby indicated as being necessary. The 
person (or thing) to whom (or which) the necessity 
" falls " is put in the Objective Case. 
This idiom, with its distinctive meaning of 
" necessity," corresponds closely to the English 
"have to." 
Thus ftiMli£l5lUl ^ "H^ MiSl, The sepoys tvill have to die 
of hunger, lit. the dying by hunger will fall to the 
sipdhis. 
clSU*} |:"*H Rl^ M4§1, They will have to bear pain, lit. 
the bearing pain will fall to them. 



INCEPTIVE COMPOUND VERBS. 



83 



b) Duty, or obligation, is implied when an Infinitive occurs 
as the subject of, and immediately precedes, the 
defective verb <^WSh. As has been already stated 
( § 67 ), this latter verb is passival in origin, and the 
person by whom the duty ought to be discharged is 
put in the Agential case. 

Thus ^WAl^l ^iy Mli^'l <MW^, All ought to shed tears, 

^^\ Mld^lcU^ §.\ Wcj, <^iySl, All ought to go to their 

several homes. 

Sometimes the <MWa>l is itself omitted, but the construction 
of the sentence is not thereby changed. Thus the last sentence 
might read simply *§5l MlcVHlcU^ k\ <*i (See § 91, sent.l ). 

88. Permissive Compound Verbs. 

V. Compound Verbs, whose primary element is the oblique 
infinitive in -<Hl ( a contraction for the Datival -^il^t ). 
are either Permissive or Inceptive. 

1. Permissive. 

When the verb \§ immediately follows an oblique infini- 
tive in -oil, the action indicated by this infinitive is 
thereby represented as being -permitted. The significa- 
tion of " permission " inherent in this idiom is, as a 
rule, sufficiently expressed by the English "let." 

Thus oy^U 1^, To allow to go } let go. 

*H«i ov^ll 1l, Let me go, lit. give to me to go. 
cl$j Mictl'ft €[k$A S\k ymp(\ =JHl {\% He let his 
daughter remain in a corner , lit. gave to remain. 

89. Inceptive Compound Verbs. 

2. Inceptive. 

To indicate that an action begins, the oblique infinitive 
in -<Hl of the verb expressing that action must be 
immediately followed by GlR^'or "*U^ or ^4. 

Of these three ancillaries CIR^ and "H*><§ are construed regularly 
as Intransitive verbs. 

%^ r -\X <HR3, To begin to tremble ; 

&l1sl ^oVHt <HUHl, People began to tremble. 



CRAP. V. 
b. with. 



Permissive 
Compounds 
with ^. 



Inceptive 

Compounds 

with 

1. <aR^, 

2. mi, 



84 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



3. HUi 



4. »ltt£. 



4VU 'Hi^, ^o &e</in to ma/ce ; 

&A\i SMt^l ^m^ll 4V=U M®\, All began to make thousands: 

of devices. 
The construction with *iU<| is worthy of special note. 
A» When not in the past tense, the construction is regular. 

<*i 4 "t$ it^l "Hil, // 1 begin to tell all. 
15, When in the past tense ( i([S\l, -£l, -.i*[ ), 

1. The Subjective Construction is used, 

if the infinitive be that of an intransitive verb and 
the subject of the sentence be impersonal. >li$Hl,-$,-i*i* 
then naturally agrees in gender and number with this* 
impersonal subject. 

ct»U«{l &ft sji^t "*&£{> TJteir line began to break; 

I I I 

Fern. Sing. Intran. Fern. Sing. 

2. The Agential Construction is used, 

if the infinitive be that of an intransitive verb and 
the subject of the sentence be personal. In this> 
case the neut. sing. *lU^ is alone employed. 

6aMI<£1»U»1 -IKttt "hU^, The sepoys began to flee. 

3. The Agential Construction is used, 

whenever the infinitive be that of a transitive verb. 
a). If the object of the transitive verb be expressed, 
*li£U, -£[, -i*L agrees with that object in gender 
and number. 

cRl^l "Mttei \m\ i^t *tt«t, They begun to make 

| | \ steps backwards. 

Neut. Plur. Trans. Neut. Plur. 

b) If the object of the transitive verb be not expressed, 
the neut. sing. ViiQ is alone employed. 
"tHl &tH't^ MHl 'H[&% AU the children began to eat. 

Note : ^Ml^ also is sometimes used as an * inceptive " 

ancillary. Thus 

\VX Mill SHl'ft feed, Night had begun to fall. 

90. Compound Verbal Phrases. 

We may here mention that there exists a large class of words 
in which more especially either i\i, to do, or %<$, to be, become? 



INFINITIVAL EXPRESSIONS. 



8» 



so inlimately associated with an immediately preceding and 
indeclinable word as to form with it a compound expressing a 
single idea. The members of this class cannot indeed claim the 
name of compound verbs as only the latter element of the com- 
pound is a verb, yet, owing to the close association between the 
verb and its immediately preceding word, the two constitute a 
distinctly compound verbal phrase. 



<3cM?l Hi, 


to arise, come into existence. 


§cM?l Hi 


to bring into existence, to create. 


*<jj« Hi 


to agree to. 


m Hi 


to lose, to miss. 


m ti 


to be lost, to vanish. 


«*i<l *PHi 


to continue, go on with. 


Msi Hi 


to create, produce, also to earn, get 


*Ui **i 


to be born t to arise. 


^ awi 


to persecute. 


>il-M Hi 


to accept, admit, allow. 


H«lcl«fl *l"«d 


, to postpone. 


^ Hi 


to bring before, present before. 


WWl Hi 


to send away, despatch. 


wki «ii 


to be despatched. 




to await, expect. 


61134 Hi 


to make applicable to. 


eiia «ii 


to be applicable to. 


«€l Hi 


to give leave (to depart). 


<ia ^i 


to take leave (to depart). 


«* Hi 


to begin (trans.). 


»* *i 


to begin (intrans.). 


%K *5d,I 


to subdue. 



cbap. v. 



91* Infinitival Expressions, 

The following infinitival verbal expressions illustrate construc- 
tions that are common in Gujarat!. They will occasion the 
student no difficulty, if only he will bear in mind that Infinitives 
admit of treatment as nouns that have the governing power of 
verbs. 



Compound 

verbal 
phrase a. 



Construc- 
tions in 
which an 
Infinitive 
enters. 



86 



GUJAIUTI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 

Construc- 
tions in 
which an 
Infinitive 
enters. 



1. cl§{ *Hl allMil q*R<l <MW^, He ought to read tins boob, 
lit. by him the reading this look is due 
(See § 67 ): or 
Q§} ^l =4lM£l ^R^, in which sentence svtfcjaw, or some 
other part of that verb, is understood 
(See § 87b). 

3. eft *H\ awM^l ^M &, ile ?yanfe to read this book, lit. to 
Aim is ifte reading this book : or 

eft ^Hl ^IfH^l ^Rcfl, — &, or some other part of the verb 
(§1^, being understood, 

3. eft *Hl 5\\\£[ <ti*M[<{\ &, #e is to read this book, lit. to 

fiim is ^e ( future ) reading this book : or 
eft =»U *Um£1 <WM,— d, or some other part of the 
verb ^l^, being understood. 

4. eft £1^1 S^i fitW oV^l &, 5e is to remove ^e grraiw 

into a hole ) lit. to him is the ( future ) 
removing the grain into a hole. 

5. c^j *ft SllM^l <Rqi(j iWl<^, #e 6ade we read a book, 

lit. % him was the having-bidden me the 
(future) reading a book. 

6. ci$j "H4 cli <*"-Ud &%, He told me to go there, lit. by him 

was the having-told me the (future ) 
going there. 

7. =Hl afoMfl €P«U*(1 el ^l^ci^i ^Ml, fie came into frowWe 

for having written this book, lit. he ( was ) 
one-having -come into trouble by the 
having -%oritten this book. 

8. a*ft*cpM ^M $«h \W m\1 m& ? What is the termina- 

tion for forming the plural ? lit. by the 

having -added what termination does the 

plural form arise ? ( &.*[[1 = epUSH or 
€Ml£*fl ). 

9. eft %^\ ") c^ nn\ § ; J^ i s ^ yo years since lie died, 

lit. huo years have been from his having— 
died (eft ?j5l by attraction for eftl $a>\*(l). 



INFINITIVAL EXPRESSIONS, 



87 



10. eft **& *il r -«ift \\*i W *l*U S, It is five years since 
lie came here, \i\.five years hate been [from 
the time) of his having-come here ( cM 
^Ml^ft by attraction for cMl ^Ml^Kl 

lit. in the coming here by him ( ivas ) Me 
having-heard all. 

12. ci <H*°icU ^fl^ &, #e learns writing, lit. 7te is learning 

the writing ( n. pi. ). 

13. ci <sl Ui U i^ &. -Se is frequently writing, lit. /te ■mafces the 

having '-written ( 71. pi. ) 



CHAP. V. 

Construc- 
tions in 

which an 

Infinitive 

enters. 



PART It. 



Adverba not 

traceable to 

any earlier 

Gujarati 

form. 



Adverbs 
built up 
from other 
parts of 
speech, 



CHAPTER VI. 
ADVERBS. ( fru&&*3 ). 

Adverbs are for the most part case-forms of still current 
Gujarat! words, though a considerable number are derived from 
words now lost to Gujarati, except in this their adverbial 
signification. 

92. Adverbs derived from words now obsolete* 

The following are some of the more common adverbs, derived 
from words now obsolete in Gujarati. 

SU^l tJiis year : ^U last year, or next year ; 

6^1, &K-i, &KRi now, at present ; "H^ there; 

cUd immediately • til instantly • 

h€[ ever ; &2? still, up to the present ; 

&l yes ; «ii no ; «i(& not. 

l[\ quite, outright; 5£R, or ifclfoct, or ££l^, or h$\fii perhaps ; 

<H3WR almost; ""i^t, or "^^M especially; *fl$, or *Q^l why ? 

The particle ell, though written as a separate word, is in reality 
little more than an enclitic, corresponding in a measure to our 
English ' at least ' or 'then' (non-temporal). 

The particle <r/, having either adjectival or adverbial force, can 
be suffixed to any word to indicate emphasis or precision. 
cl>lff/ a>il=U Come you. 
*>) two ; but "l<r/ just two. 

93. Adverbs derived from words still current. 

Many words still existing in Gujarati are, especially in their 
oblique cases, employed adverbially. 
Nouns : 

Agential Case, >{{& by word of mouth, orally. 

Regarding W\ pRtf thoughtlessly and fa«il $Rts$ 
causelessly, See § 136. 
Ablative Case, *$[&*& wisely ; Qctl'VASft quickly. 
Genitive Case, ^Irtdl, -*fl, -d °f nights. 



ADVERBIAL PHRASES. 



89 



Adverbs of this genitival class are declinable for 

gender and number. 
Locative in 5}, \[c[, or ^n at night ; 

^ti^ at even ; M^l on foot ; (Hi* at last ; 

<3Cim.ot in haste ; %"H\\ about, by reclconing ; 

^lay to-day ; ilil to-morrow ( or yesterday ). 
Adjectives : 

Subjective, ^i% -f[ -\ truly ; H[\ -fl -| slowly ; 

§H\l\, -£\, -|, or "^> "^» -& openly ; <H§ much ; 

WW clearly. 
Locative in aH, m\ or m>{ sloivly ; ty& well, capitally ; 

<^i<?j at a distance. 

Pronouns : 

Ablative, cl^ft thereby ; an^U hereby ; k\\tf\ whence ? (reason); 

JHi^ whence ? ( direction ). %% or Js*Q ivhere? 

somewhere. 

(see § 34 for allied pronominal adverbs). 
Verbs : *$.£$, or \$\ } or \$W\ again. 



94. 



Adverbial Phrases* 



Adverbial Phrases are frequently formed by reduplication of 

Nouns : M^ \<h, every moment ; (~£«i "H^ fs<H, day upon 
day, day after day ; q.[\ ^, or "HR^R, time 
upon time, often; ^V\% year by year, annually ; ; 
l^ll^y, ov1$\$.VL,from country to country ■ ^U^H^t, 
from town to town ■ £Rq^, or H^H?., from house 
to house ; ^H^lt^pl, in every limb. 

Adjectives : M^"^, truly (or vtf^l, -0, -{)■ <*Hlclqi, so so, 
a*$l «} ^"HloV, just the same ; ^"HWlMl, vis-a-vis 
opposite ; ^Hhi^Hb, all at once, suddenly. 

Pronouns : Is 50$, here and there. 

Infinitives: =Hl<HCll =m<Hcll, while walking ; ^l<cKli '^t^cti, while 
speaking. 

Adverbs : ^M cl"H, so so ; aH?t ^ aiVH, just the same ; Hfo 
Hfo, or ^Kcl »tKcl, or R\ci \\^ f or ^(A^ 6<nq, 
slowly, by degrees. 

12 



CHAP. VI. 

Adverbs 
built up 
from other 
parts of 
speech. 



Reduplica- 
ted Adverb- 
ial phrases. 



90 



GUJARATl grammar. 



Elements 

1. of similar 
meaning. 

2. of oppos- 
ite meaning. 



3.. rhyming. 



4. correlated 



Connective Participles of similar meaning are sometimes 
united to form adverbial phrases. 

•^fl^vA or «vi<^lwj25^, willingly, lit. having known 
and understood ; Ctl*$ch*(l3, with great difficulty. 
Other adverbial phrases are formed by the union of two 
elements of opposite meaning : 

Rict t<k\X or *i<£lPttl, by day and by night. 
^MRtfl Mltofll, before and behind. 
"H^ >U^, sooner or toter„ 
Others again are formed from rhyming elements. 
<HtfRl<n, higgledy-piggledy, mixed up. 

$%& £«£, or &-WMISU, or mi^l, or §*WMWI, 
topsy-turvy. 

sii^i, slap-dash, in a trice ; CliiUr, finely, suitably. 
Correlated adverbs are. 

<rJ»i...ctH, as...so\ 

«?*i<»?*l...cl*l clH, the more ... the more ; 

«yMi...cMi, where... there; 

cvMl 5*Hl...cMi c*it, wherever... there ; 

Ml*(l...cMi*(l, whence.., thence ; 

<*Ml^ . . . cMfy when... then ; 

«*Hl^ ^Hl^.-.t^l^ <*U^. whenever... then ; 

o»1R*tt...cMR ? ft, /rom w/ja£ time... from that time. 

In these correlated adverbs the former ( ir/ ) member is fre- 
quently omitted, being implied in the second ( cl ) member. 

cll^, ' $ew/ is often used inferentially, with implied reference 
not to time but to some contingent conclusion. 
<t& ^A ? what then ( loill result ) ? 
Regarding adverbial superlatives such as 

H^pti *K% at the most ; 5U&l>ti =ull^, at the least ; 
^CtRl ^cj, a£ ^Ae cheapest ; etc. see § 28. 

Other common adverbial phrases are, 
*llfl Ml ( or ^ ), well • 

H^i^, generally - "ui&H i^^, especially, positively ; 
(q.^l'H 4^, a fortiori, especially ; >JM<3 itf^, cfae/fo/ • 
y*i $$[<{, how ; ^ bV^ } by any means; 






i 



ADVERBIAL PHRASER 



91 



"»M <cPtt££l, attentively ; ~»\\[ M<i$ft, heartily ;- 
svi^<H^, with one's might • 
H<Al*R, or c l*«HCt^l^, in time ; ^e^}, politely. 
^R^tH, in a row, in rows ; ^ui^H^ link by link. 

The adverbial Compounds in which the first element is *i«i^ 
according to, are worthy of note, such as *l«M$l&t,. to the utmost 
of one's poiver t ^l^fe, according to one's capacity ; HHWlHy 
equitably* 



CHAP. VII. 



95, 



CHAPTER VI r. 
PREPOSITIONS (riwUaQ)* 
Government by Prepositions, 



PART II. 

Geiiitival 
government 
of most pre- 

positions. 



Prepositions 

postposi- 
tional with 
reference to 
the govern- 
ed word. 



Most of the Gujarat! prepositions are, as to their origin, nouns 
in one or other of the oblique cases. The words which these 
prepositions are commonly said to " govern " are in reality words 
in genitival agreement with them, and accordingly the governed 
words will end in -«il if the prepositional governing nouns be- 
masculine or neuter, and in -«{1 if the governing nouns be feminine. 

Thus H^<{\ <3.?%, in the direction ( fern. ) of the house, and 
hence toiuards the house. 

It thus comes to pass that many prepositions may be said to 
govern the noun preczding them in the oblique genitive -41 or-<ft a 

Some of the prepositions were originally nouns (masc. or neut.) 
in the 5\ - locative cass, and accordingly a noun in ( genitival ) 
agreement with them, instead of ending in 41^ was attracted 
to the locatival-genitive -«it=H, whence -4 ( See § 27. Note ). 

Thus ttfsi u i$. } in the change of a house, and hence, instead 
of a house, in place of a house. 

Such prepositions may be said to govern the noun preceding 
them in the loc-gen. -«i. 

It very frequently happens, however, that a noun under pre- 
positional government dispenses entirely with this genitival sign, 
whether -41 or -«{l, or -4\ The governed noun will then appear 
in its basal form ; thus near the boy, &IHIH"1 "4RI or &[b\[ Mitt. 
A few prepositions govern the preceding noun in the Agential 
Case and a few in the Locative. 

96. Prepositions classified according to their 
government. 

With reference to the cases they govern prepositions may be 
divided into the following classes. 



PR IMPOSITION AL GOVERNMENT;. 



9 ft' 



Preposition- 
al govern- 
ment in 
1. a. -il 
6. -ft 

c. -n 



-=H 



3. -'HI 01-2HL 



1. a. -HI Prepositions, or those which govern the preced- c 

ing noun or pronoun in the genitive oblique, 
masc. or neut. 

b. -«{l Prepositions, or those which govern the preced- 
ing noun or pronoun in the genitive oblique fern.. 

c. -H" Prepositions, or those which govern the preced- 
ing noun or pronoun in the locatival-genitive, 
masc. or neut., -H for -Hl^A. 

2. -5} Prepositions, or those which govern the preceding 
noun or pronoun in the agential case. 

3. -'HI or -aA Prepositions, or those which govern the 
preceding noun or pronoun in the locative case. 

It should be borne in mind that these classes are not very 
strictly defined, -HI prepositions occasionally assuming the -*{[ or 
even the -H^ government, and vice versa. 

When the personal pronouns §, 3, ^^ ^ are under prepo- 
sitional government, they take the forms 

HRl, "Htfl, Hi}, or in poetry HoV or | ; 
ClRl, cttfl, Cttf, „ „ „ <J<* or i; 
*HHKl, *HHlfl, "mS, „ » „ *W ; 
. clHRl, clHl^l, clHli „ „ „ ctH. 
Though, as we have already seen, § 95, the distinctive -HI, -Hi, 
and -H of nouns under prepositional government are frequently 
dropped, the above pronominal forms do not admit of any 
corresponding curtailment. 

Should, however, a pronoun of the first or second person be 
accompanied by a noun, or by an adjective used as a noun, in 
apposition to it and also stand under the government of a prepo- 
sition, the pronoun takes one of the following forms. 

First sing. | or H<W; First plur. »HH ( or ^MIM^ ) ; 
Second „ 3 or 35/; Second „ ctH. 

4 MOfl M* 6*U &?., Be merciful to me a sinner ; 

^HH MlMlSU M} SHI H, Be merciful to us sinners. 

97 ♦ Alphabetical List of Prepositions* 

The following list contains nearly all the prepositions of the 
Gujarat! language, and shews the government of each. 



Forms as- 
sumed by 
personal 
pronouns 
under pre- 
positional 
government 



94 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PAUT II. 






Before t in front of.. 
Before, in front of. 










•n 


*Ut?i 


At the side of, near. 






-a 


«H« 


In, within. 






a 


=*H«t 


With a view to. 






-a 


atliRae 


Before, prior to, 






4 


^Mtiltfl 


Before, in comparison with. 






-ft 


«Hl5| 


Before, in front of. 






«fl 


»IRMR 


Across , from one side through to the other; 




•a 


*HIWUH 


Around, in the vicinity of, on all sides of. 




-It 


§M* 


Above, on, ago, in excess of. 






•tt 


GMRlct 


Besides, over and above. 






•a 


*3 


By, near, at the side of. 






*ii 


** 


Wanting of deficient in, less by- 






-ti 


Hcti 


Than. 






si 


4*ft 


By means of, with. 






3 


zi& 


For the sake of, in order to, for. 






3 


hR^ 


By reason of, on account of, for. 






-a 


n 


After {time, or place). 






-a 


%& 


In the direction of, towards, to. 






-a 


""iUtt 


For the sake of. 






•a 


*n 


In the direction of y toiuards, to*. 






-a 


sia 


Like, like unto. 






•u 


£%(-<i, 


-^ ) Like, similar to. 




•a 


«u 


Paired with, together with. 






a 


<m^ 


By virtue of, on account of. 






* 


3il§} 


In place of. 






4i 


&l 


Near, close by. 






-a 


cR* 


Totvards, in the direction of. 






•fi 


am 


In the character of, as. 






a 


ci5| 


Below, underneath. 






ti 


3«m 


Equal to, analogous to, alike. 






510 










or 
■Hi 


► «iti^,or«lW 


,or 2(1 By way of, vid. 






-It 


SIJA 


By, with. 1 . ■ 






Subj. 


«wi 


Since {time), ago. 






rft 


Ota 


In emulation of, in equality with. 





ALPHABETICAL LIST OF rBETOSITK>NS. 



95 



* 


r<(^MH, 


4i 


si^ 


3 


itf or W\5\, 


4i 


<t£>£ or | 
<\rt€[S J 


-a 


-a 


4ft 


-a 


Mto<U^ or 




M^lA or M&t^ 


4i 


M^l or M& 


41 


Ml or Ml 


a 


M^ 


*u 


M* 


^rare) 


M^ 


•U 


MH« 


41 


Ml 


*u 


Ml^H 


*& 


%titiL 


4i 


MR 


3 


MR*UCl 


41 


MRl 


41 


W 


<n 


tf 


4i 


M* 


<n 


M* 


. <n 


Mtk-ii 


*ti 


mjA 


*u 


M(cl or 3fc*l 


«tt 


U"*tl<^ 


3 


wcii (<M) 




<h*& 


«tt 


•WHor^l" 


41 


«H4R 


41 


'Hit 


41 


°U«Kl 


41 


Rick 


*ii 


^a 



In i/te course of, during. 

hi the character of, as, 

By ivay of, by the instrumentality of. 

Near, close to (space, time). 

Below, under. 



CHAP. VII. 



1 



After, subsequently to. 

Like, similar to. 

By tlce side of, near. 

Above, on, ago. 

By reason of, enving to. 

To, up to, (place) ; till, until {time). 

Towards, 

Without, except. 

After, behind. 

Across, right through. 

From, ( received ) from ( used in legal 

documents ). 
At the side of, near, by. 
In the absence of, behind the lack of. 
Behind, following after. 
Before (jplace or lime). 
In tfie fashion of, like. 
Before, sooner than. 
From amongst, from tlte number of. 
In front of, facing ; to, unto, towards, 

loith reference to. 
By the standard of, according to, like. 
Surrounding, round. 
In exchange for, instead of. 
[ Equal to. 
Outside of. 
After. 

Concerning. 
Inside, within. 
In the direction of, towards. 



90 



oUJA&ATl GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



HI m (cf, 3W) 

•HI ^ 

4~ "Hl^ 

HI *iUt* 

HI ^R^orMl^cl 

HI 41<S or *ilM 
HI Ol^iil or (WH 

4 34l»t«l 
HI >J<rv"4 

HI >l* 

HI Sfl 

3 511^ 

HI $iUR 

HI Sit* 

} 3h3t 

41 *&ct 

HI ^ 

HI \ ,J i\ 

41 6tai^ 

3 elicit (-c(l, -cj) 

4t C-PR 

4 a* 

HI qal or cisf^i 

hi <a 

(rare) Ict^Pi 

HI qcQ 

Si qcn 

HI Hci 

(rare) qt 

HI irt 

HI qfetfl or nm 

41 fa4l or <=Qm 

HI P^£ 

41 ft<* 



Zn £/ie direction of, tcnOards^ to. 

In the middle of into, amongst. 

For the sake of, in order to. 

Like, similar to. 

By the medium of t through. 

In, inside, among. 

As, in the character of. 

In comparison with. 

In conformity with, like, as. 

In direction of, towards, to. 

Of- • - self ( in phrases such as ' of himself* 

' of his own accord ' ), 
In front of. 
In, inside. 
Before ( time ), 
By means of. 

Without, not accompanied with, free from. 
By means of, by the agency of. 
Before, in the presence of. 
Up to, as far as, until , as long as. 
Pertaining to, concerning. 
So long as, up to, as far as, until. 
Because of, oiving to, for the sake of. 
At the rate of, @, per. 
Without, besides, except. 
In the middle of, between. 
By, uith, by means of. 
Exclusive of, except. 
Instead of. 

By means of, by the instrumentality of. 
By means of, by. 
Equal to, as much as. 
To the help of, on the side of. 
Behind, after, in the absence of. 
For the sake of, in order to. 
Without, except. 
Opposite to, against. 
In the matter of, respecting, about. 



ALPHABETICAL LIST 0¥ PREPOSITIONS. 



97 



{rare) & Up to, unto. 

3 c^ With, to ( as in ivedlock, married to ). 

«ft ^im«i or ^fatcl With, in company with, along with. 
•ft ^(kH In the presence of, in the sight of, before. 

^^•v^ or W^yi Fronting, facing, opposite to. 
^fefl or ^.^ About, respecting. 
WH Equal to. 

ttH$i Before the eye of, in the presence of. 

^>U«i Like, similar to. 

^HlM Near, close to. 

^ct Together, along xvith. 

*R^U (-Ml, -"Vi) Like, similar to. 
*ft*ll (-*ft, -&) Close to, against, beside, 

With, accompanied with, possessed of. 
In excliange for, in return for* 
With, together with. 



CHAP. VII. 



•ft 
•ll 

•ft 

•U 

•ft 
•ll 
•11 
*tl 
'll 

•a 
*& 
•a 
•a 

*ii 



•ii 
•ii 

41 
•ft 
•ll 

•s 

•I 
•ll 

•a 
-ft 
•a 



i. 



*u»l^ 
*u>ii 

*U>1 or *u«l 
*l5ll (->Mi) 



. In front of, opposite to, opposed to. 



For, for the sake of, in order to. 

yi^tfl Before the eyes of, in the sight of, in pre- 
sence of, before. 

\w\y\ Except, besides, over and above. 

J^'l Together ivith, inclusive of 

Qtfl So long as, until, tilL 

^\1 By the side of, near. 

ftlct With, including. 

^at In place of, instead of. 

^l^ In place of, instead of. 

^j>li Concerning, in the interest of. 

<k?j By the hand of. 

&Ktj Through the agency of, by the hand of. 

<&\\ Together with. 

&, ilX ^&'l> ^^ Beneath, underneath, below. 

98» Notes on a few of the Prepositions. 

In the preceding list of Prepositions, no f government ' is 
indicated for the five prepositions HH\, "M^, "Hcl^Pi, % and <H^. 
13 



Notes on 
a. *Wl, 



98 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



h. kH, 



c. H&, or 



hy means of. 



by name, 



Of these, 3{*u is really an infinitive, meaning ' the baving-been * 
and thus ' since,' and the word governed by it stands accordingly 
not in the Genitive, but in the Subjective case. 

The remaining four prepositions are of rare occurrence. 

2. m, governing the locative, differs from the other pre- 
positions in not immediately following the noun it governs. 

It is indeed adjectival quite as much as prepositional, 
?lRi "HW b'H, Five wanting in % hundred* 

*4R>ti 1^ fkPu i"H, Three minutes to five ( 4-57 ). 

3. The preposition SiiM and its variant ^<£1«1, governing the 
Locative in -"HI or -5}, are purely local in meaning. E. g. (Hl^ 
Wli «lt£l, or Qliwft 1&, or <HIWR *lvPl, <tffcj*l, I shall go 
vid Bhdvnagar. In this construction c*U ^wd is used instead of 
cM *i£L Similarly tfi *ML% S Wi\, d'l &HI for cl C-t^, cl 
C-Pfl, cl %m. See § 138 C. 

A locatival ( or strictly locatival-genitive ) government is also 
exercised by the Avords ^^T and tf\ when these are used as 
prepositions. For example ?\[\ *>{£[ (for MRt-^ ^£1* ) = at 
my [ home ] here, Similarly "Hl^ <^i = at my [ home ] there ; 
^MIM^ ^M&T = at our [ home ] here ; eld cHt ( for cMl-5} cHl ) = 
at his [ /iome ] there. 

4. The preposition £#4 is a corrupt form of the Agential 
i^^J by the instrumentality of, by means of, and correct speakers 
place the word governed by £#4 also in the Agential Case. 
Not unfrequently, however, it is, though less correctly, construed 
with the ablative, cl^fl i^H being heard at least as often as cl§| 
4<ft See I 99, Note. 

Note also the use of S#d as equivalent to 41*1, by name. 
When so used, h'dA is plainly not a true preposition, but may 
best be explained as a variant of £t£ld, the Connective Participle 
of i^, to say, and hence this i^]4 governs its noun in the 
Subjective case (see Syntax §§ 132, 134). Being in the Subj. case, 
the governed noun has not, of course, any -«-U, -<{[, or -^1 suffix. 

Thus y^lrt "Ml 5R<3J £?R 5& ^W &ch, There terns a king, 
named Koran, of the country of Gujarat. 



NOTES OF A, FEW OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

Another instance of the use of the verb hlQ instead of k!&% 
occurs in the colloquial s/l'^ for h% said. 

5. The prepositions %[\ t *[\ "H\ and >U, indicating direction, 
when governing the pronouns =^1, £}, cl, x$i, Sulll, convert 
these to the forms ^l^j], 5\^i, cl^fl, MC-fl, and aJUc-ft respectively. 

6. The following adjectives are used prepositionally : — 
$i, Ki, C-Wrj, %W& %ft& and %ug. 

They agree in gender and number with the noun or pronoun 
which they, as adjectives, qualify. 

3MI 8t& cl 8lHHl <v«fl £,. T/iis gwZ is Kfa that boy. 
°ll"H4 5^al ^ii Isli &cll, -4 waK iwas round the village. 

7. ^fect is generally used as a suffix of privative force, its 
opposite being ^tfecl, which also frequently occurs as a suffix. 

"Midfeet, without sin, sinless. 
jji'-t^f&l, ivith a family. 

Similarly g(-H equal to, like, and ^ according to, may be 
suffixed to the governed word. 

Thus (Mctlc^H like one's own father, <f*Hcl%U according to time, 
up to time, in time ; 
il^lR according to law, legally. 

8. Many prepositional phrases can be formed after the type 
of &£>li ; for example, 

— «{l ^R&toV^l'Hi in the absence of. 

-«il "H^THl on the side of, in favour of. 

— «il U'Hl^l'Ht in the proportion of. 

-«{l "i^R^'ii on equality ivith, equal to. 

— «il ^t'-Hfy'Hi in the connexion of, connected with. 

9. In order to express 'from. ..till' or 'from... to,' the ablative 
termination -2(1 and the preposition ^Hl are used, but not unfre- 
quently after the -?fl an enclitic cl is inserted. 

Thus cHl^fl cl a*tlff/ ^,% from then till to-day ; 

^ilcl i<Hli^Q cl *i t4 Rlfl %H\ /rom seven o' cfoc& till midnight. 

10. Regarding <H3R and pHl when prefixed to a noun see 
S 136. 





99 


CHAP. 


VII. 


e. &R, 


*IH, 




aud 


/. adjecti- 
val pre- 


posil 


ions, 



g. suffixed 
preposi- 
tions, 



h. preposi- 
tional 
phrases, 






100 
PART II. 

Compound- 
ed preposi- 
tioos^ 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 

99* Case-endings attached to Prepositions. 

Occasionally a case-ending is suffixed to a preposition, making 
thus an enlarged, or compound, preposition. These exercise the- 
same government over the preceding word, that their first member,, 
if alone, would exercise. See § 137". 

Thus cl«il \\ on that ; cl«il "4^(1,. /row. on that, from that. 

cl M^d or cl (§M^ft, by reason of that.. [wards ; 

<Ml *lll, in that j cMl ^lll^/rom in that ; ^\\^\from to- 
^•"H^Kl °l"H, toivards the Lord. 

w'UVtl ^IH^, from towards the Lord, from the Lord. 
Mt^fl-i 4M*(l cl ^Hl** &fe(t>ii,, from ancient times up till 
the present. 

Note : In the full compounds HQ. bi\\ ^ftcl 4 : (R therefore, 
( and rarely UVl &${<{ ),. the second member,. 4 : 0«},, 
serves as a mere enclitic, while the first member has 
the force of a conjunction rather than that of a preposi- 
tion. Probably the cl^Cl 4^$ mentioned in § 98, 4) 
is best explained as belonging to this class of com- 
pounds, the 4^, here too being an enclitic* 



CHAPTER VIII. 
CONJUNCTIONS; ( HiM^ft ).. 

Conjunctions are called co-ordinative when they serve to> CHAP. VI] 



connect together two or more co-ordinated sentences or words, and 
subordinative when they serve to connect, subordinate sentences. 
with the principal sentence. 

100» Co-ordinative Conjunctions. 

J. Conjunctive : 

a) initial in a paragraph or sentence. 

&<^ noio ■ <W& moreover ■ wflff^,. M&% again h further. 

b) joining independent propositions in the same 

sentence, a»$,. *i and. 

c) joining independent words in the same sentence 

^M*} or ^ and ; ct*U and'. 

%. Disjunctive : 

a) between either independent sentences or independent 

words, ^H^eil or ; *{{& ell othemvise, or else ; (i<Hl or„ 

b) between independent words, <Hr, H\ y W<it or ; ^ or. 

3. Adversative : 

a) initial, 

M^ but ; *tt?j on the contrary, 

b) between independent propositions. 

M^ but ; ^tiy on the contrary ; 
M^3, cISIiCh however, nevertlieless ; 
2\M tecti MQJ, S\"H tocti 2/e£, nevertheless ; 

SU^<* *i{k M^ wotf only,.. but also, lit. ratf jws* so 
mitc/i but. 

4. Illative : 

between co-ordinate sentences^ 



Co-ord.. 
Conj. 
1. Conjunc-- 
tive, 



2. Disjunc- 
tive, 



3. Advers- 
ative, 



4. Illative. 



102 

PART II. 

Suborrl, 
Conj. 



Renderings 

for 
loth.. .and, 
either... or, 
neither... nor 
whether... or. 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 

10U Subor<tii!sitive Conjunctions'*. 

1. Introducing a noun sentence; 
\, <??, that, esprcially before- words in direct narration ~ 

thus cl^i if % Airily He said (that) ' I shall come.' 

2. Closing an adverbial sentence : 

a) of time, 
^U^Rl, 3U«t, "?; cRct immediately on ; atopiii just then^ 
"MIH& 6l*Pti C-flfefl £U?1 M&l 4iM £$l, Immediately on 

taking the turban in his hand he saw the cut. 

ItiSt *f£, *t5l Siw iw *n^di *t*fl, S^qRi c-te^ fayM 

^Hl^MI, They all said, ' None of us knows anything 
(about it)/ just then Lallu came lack from- school. 

b) of purpose, or cause, 
^H, ^H*} in order that not, lest. 
"*i(i, Iftcl, 4l<^ lecause after a verb in the Indie. Mood,. 

but in order that after a verb in the Sub]. Mood,, 
Thus cfH^l H[§ $ "Hl2 =^l^t, I came bemuse I love you ; 
but ct>M <M(3 "Ml^ ^Hl^Ml ^> / /«aue cemze m order that 

I may see you. 

3. Introducing correlated sentences : 

<M ... ell, i/ ... then; svt"-j ... <ilM^l although ... yet;, 
<M 4£lfH ... cllM^t (or cW* or clw* or ctsilfM ) i/ 
'perchance ... i/ei siiZ?. 

In these- correlated conjunctions the former ( "M ) element is 
frequently omitted, being implied in the second ( ell ) element 
Thus ell alone is equivalent to svt . . . cU ; and cllM^J to o*t $ . 
cllM^l Compare the correlated adverbs, § 94. 

102* Doubled Conjunctions* 

Doubled or paired conjunctions such as both ... and, either ... 
or, neither ... nor, whether ... or, are generally rendered in 
Gujarat! by some such circumlocutions as the following — 






s 

: 



* 3< or (Hindustani) oQ is occasionally suffixed to a word, so as to give it. 
the added meaning of also, too, even ; 

thus i?>*3h, / also, I too, even I; t|'tnl, / also, I too. Compare the particle 
«, §92. 

^l^i »H#SMt ani feit?i|5>i rtsfl, He has no sense; lit. There is not in him 
even one grain of sense. 



DOUBLED CONJUNCTIONS, 



103 



* f ci fa* cftl ,J ilM M^t ft^H 5, 

| 5oi//, 7te and his father are i 



or ?l *H ctit *UM "Ui fow-1 & CHAP.VHL 



f cl «lfe, ell cUU "UM Ptyt &> 

I Either he or his father is learned, 

r ft clW cftl «HlM M^ RU'l ^ or 

-I d 5 cftt «tlM SlW fa^H -i ? -fl, 

! Neither he nor his father is learned, 

| d $ cftl "llM ft^H ItM, ^ | <M^dl 4?tt, 

") Whether he or his father is learned I know not. 

( 331*1 aHlc^l & 3U$i«/ d& "4^ cftl <HlW ^l &, or 
B. ■{ Wl "Hl^l &> ^d cftl WW °IHI M^J $, 

[_ 5oi/i Gulab has come and his brother has gone. 

rg«u»t »il^l &*l, dfe ell cftl <Hlfcl ai»h &$l, 

^ Either Gulab has come or his brother has gone. 

( g«l«H »ilc5ll d'fl <ksv ddl «HIM MMl M^ <\% 

\ Neither has Gulab come, nor has his father gone. 

( geu»t *Hl4l &§ § ci^ll "UM ^iMl &$l, 51 4 avl^cll d«(L 
^ Whether Gulab has come or his father has gone I know not 

4lcU...$icll is occasionally employed as equivalent to either.., or. 

Thus i'lcll 4lfl 3<HR«l, fcicll *r8t o^R, 

Either the wife is a scold, or the husband is stupid. 

The idiomatic rendering of whether... or by M&Q...$ is worthy 
of note. 

Thus Mlctldl ZH^m d hi ciov h\i, M#l cKl |:M «u5ll § 

One ought to do just what ones own experience dictates, 
whether the work be painful or pleasant, lit. after- 
wards in it let there be pain or let there be pleasure. 



sUll...%icU 



>ttfl...$ 



PART II. 



CHAPTER IX. 

'INTERJECTIONS, (VwitfUaft). 

103> Interjections classified according to 
their meaning, 

| Ifce interjections in Gujaratl may be roughly classified as 
1 follows. 

1. Pain- 



my i 



®:,Ah ! 
<kl% 611 6l«l, Mas ! 

*i\ »i\\ W\ <HlW*, Oh ho ! 5ft& Oh my I 
*HHH\ Ah dear ! dear me ! 
"116161, »£}, Oh ! Oh ! 
2. Joy : en : f cu : m :> Excellent ! 

H-H, H'H k<-% Blessed ! 
ftH-q, Thrice blessed ! 
11$, Well! 

«l«Hl«j 5w / TO done ,' 
QlH, Good / 
RH\ t Good ! Capital ! 
Hi, All right / 
"WW, «£t««, First-rate ! 

3. Surprise : ov^i, ^ io / .Befarfd / See ! 

=^161, ffa / 
Vi^Wi, Dear me ! 
6i, g, What ! 

4. Aversion : Pi*, ftft, ftiPu, /Sf/iame > £/tcwne / 

*s^, Psfta/i / 

tfl, ^M, Pie / Fie ! 

&t, d$, §1 \%, A fig for I 

Q, Ach ! 

6ct, C/^^ / also get off ! 

6i6-i, Get away ! 

<^\, fAvW, Go ! Begone t 



INTERJECTIONS. 



105 



Mlfefel, To one side ! Give room ! 
*R, "H^, m \%, A fig for ! 
$. Protestation : "ttt, <HH»W, Enough ! Enough ! 
UK\ 61*1 61*1 6tfl, Abundance ! 
6l<3i, Enough ! Plenty ! 
M^}, >H^M, >»£, %ll5l, 2Vue / 
^"i^R, Beware ! 

^ M IfifiZence / JTttsfc / 
toMl ^l, Keep silence ! 

6. Calling ; 5U, (1, 

X, ^X, ( generally to inferiors )» 
»l, »U, fe, fel, *, *tf, ^l, Ho ! 

*&) Isa y> 

SllW fcl&H, #o, Sir ! 

V. Salutation : j$*McU, Peace ! ( frequently used by Native 
Christians on meeting or parting ). 
^•JtPi, Peace ! (when Muhammadans or others 

meet or part), 
^i^ll, Your Worship ( respectful salutation 

amongst Muhammadans ). 
WW, Ram Ram ! (amongst Hindus ). 
oVM sfoPt, Victory to Ram j 

v/H ^[^[WH.jVictory to Ram & #iM. J 

to, and by, Hindu ascetics,, 
•WiR Your Worship ! (respectful salutation 
to a Brahman). 

$U22 ^"i V ^ am > Sir ' (chiefly amongst 
M^W %U&H j HindiiS and P ^ rsIs )- 

<H& MHl^l, Welcome ! 

5HIHM ") Good bye ! Come again ! (at close of 
MHR5vi j a visit). 
At the end of a clause <i is occasionally added as a mere 
expletive, much in the same way as the " don't you know ? " or 
** you see " of colloquial English. 

" a* &l$l«ii MMitf VQ &W*l & 4 ! The headjS of those people have 
yoac turned, you see, 
14 



Salutation 



CHAP. IX. 



PART ii; 



CHAPTER X. 

WORD-FORMATION. (*i*«uHci). 
104. Prefixes, ( (§^1 or v^i ). 






The following list contains most of the prefixes emp'o- 
the formation of GujaratI words. 



^H privative 
^MQl privative 
^[cl excessive 
^[H over 
^^ privative 
*H<X after 

^•-cP ivithin 



a>iH contradiction >M honour 
deterioration Qo-t a word 



H^ charity *n\& irreligion. 

%W3 wise ^*fH<M, unwise. 

%H wicked ^(ct|t><j very wicked. 

*H($l the eye *>te%, an overseer, 

5}£ one ^£ not one only, some. 

cllM heat =M<1lM after-heat, re- 

pentance, 
y* a town, abode ^d:^} inner apart- 
ments, the zanana. 
*HM*iH dishonour. 
^HMW-S abusive lancr. 
uage, a barbarism. 
shGwH pride, 

^-i^ disadvantage. 



^{H excessive Ml«i respect 

24=1 contradiction JJ^ advantage 

„ deterioration tm state, condition ^sw declining state 

misfortune. 
2^1 inversion 3i"»M going 

(3M subordination 3J& a planet 



4 

La 



badness >lld death 

„ i"^ an action 

inferiority, or <>\<s\ strength 
badness, or h'A. an action 




difficulty 

r\ privative 
•ilHl variety 

privative 



ClV^ to cross 

£Pi work, use 
H&R sort, kind 

»U4ft form 
hHb a spot 
ciov lustre 



^PM-i coming. 
§ W a ( planet's ) 
satellite, 
i^llct an unnatural death. 
^vA an evil action. 
£°t<n feeble. 
l^i'A an evil action. 
£VR difficult to be 
crossed. 
4^1^ useless. 
"IHlMiR^ of various 
kinds. 
pRliR formless. 

(Vi'^'i spotless. 
Pr<W lustreless. 






PREFIXES. 



107 



H<= 3>t) half &/VH a physician rQ^^ a quack doctor, 
other, foreign 1q a country. "4^*1 a foreign country. 



.1 


inversion 


ov"i victory 


MRtoVM defeat. 


tft 


excessive 


\i£J full 


M(V*i>4 °l mte fu ^- 


\%M after 


dlM heat 


"H^litlH repentance. 


Hi 


repetition 


Pl^l^ marriage 


^•it^U^ re-marriage. 




excessive 


*ic«i effort 


MMc4 great effort. 


.a 


counter 


^-Ipt sound 


^(ctm^l an echo. 




>> 


Hi a stroke 


"H^m a counter-beat, 
echo. 




separation 


MR junction 


(<HMR separation. 


»f 


inversion 


^^remembrance (hW^ oblivion. 


>> 


division 


<HR a part 


Pl<Hl°l a sub-division. 


>> 


intensive 


4UI destruction 


pMUl complete de- 
struction. 




with 


^(A fruit 


^\a\ fruitful. 


>> 


<HIS discourse 


^Ifc a dialogue. 


1*16 


}> 


<Ht^l abode 


^Ife^W d welling to ge ther 


S 


excellence 


«liy an odour 


^<Hiy fragrance. 


£1^ 


inferiority 


£"Hl§ earning 


(H^i'MlS earning nought 



Also the following of Persian ( or Arabic ) origin 
i"H privative <?*\\ strength J'H'vR infirm. 

^1 'pleasantness °il an odour 
"upt excellence Q\<\. the face 



3fc 


privative 


cu<jyu{l just 


HI 


>> 


M^tfc agreeable 




excellence 


«il*i name 


"it 


badness 


^ct the face 


\h*i 


privative 


"Hcr^^l labour 


% 


j) 


kXb doubt 


<Hl 


y> 


WStlotf a remedy 


** 


head 


$R£<i a clerk 



"^y^l.1 fragrance. 
■^"i&Vt good-looking. 
SlWltfOfl unjust. 
dlM^tS unacceptable. 
«i&«il*i of good name, 

virtuous. 
oitf&ia bad-looking. 
Pi-R^ft out of work. 
SUl* doubtless. 
^tlW^HoV remediless, 

helpless. 
^R£U$d a head-clerk. 



108 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR, 



PART II. 



105. Suffixes added to the simple verba! 

Stem. ( HcH«t or aH«JH )♦ 

The suffixes employed in the formation of Gujarat! words 
may be added. 

A« to the simple verbal stem, or 

B» to a word itself complete without the suffix. 

Suffixes added to the simple verbal stem : 

«U-$ to fight £UlW a fight. 

§*>-§ to fly (3il(§ extravagant, prodigal* 

H«\h-i to shine *i<i\hU glitter. 

"k^-Q to sell q^iQi a sale. 

(fa<H =) >M-^ to meet (>tCHlM concord. 

^y\~i to learn ftl^R^ advice. 

"HlSiR-^ to spread M^lA a bed. 

Ql[\\ a robber. 

"t'iHi a pretense. 

^tlKlcj favourite. 

^Hl^fl a language. 

(3CI13 a passenger. 

rf-iHi a singer. 

ZHMh income. 



A, 



&-§ to rob 

"M-cl to be made 

^it«i-^ to esteem 

^K-t-^ to speak 

§<1R-$i to descend 

*[[-§ to sing 

b, ^b ZHW-i to come 

il^ °U-^ . to quarrel 

Srt, ^HiA 4'-H-^ to drown 

<r/ "»Hl-^ to eat 

<$t, »t<$J W-i to turn 

"£-<! to give 

<$, ^ tt-^ to do 

l|, ^ HH-i to suck (the Ht<Hi^ a suckling, 
breast) 

1^4 °la-^ to behave ^cit^i conduct. 

Cl, ^Hct ^ to play 

<tt, *>lcR <H^ to learn 

«il R*t-:j to arrange 

<[\ ^l<H-3 to speak 

<\\ ""U-^ to eat 

<HU ( "H£ sick ) 






^£14 quarrelsome. 

d^M a dive. 

"^Ictf eatables. 

«W$i inclination, bent. 

^ a debt. 

i^fi a deed. 



^HCl a game. 

Oi^icU learning. 

VMt arrangement, composition. 

^1<HHR a speaker. 

■"tl^l gluttonous. 

MS^U sickness. 



SUBSTANTIVAL SUFFIXES ADDED TO A COMPLETE WORD. 



109; 





108* Substantival suffixes added to a 




Complete Word, 


> 




B» Of suffixes added to a complete word 




I. The following are substantival: 


»tiy 


abstract 


*[•([»{ mild 


atfl'-HlW mildness. 


»u<$j 


>> 


§t=H high 


§H[<Q height. 


aHlMcl 


collective (?) 


Mi*t five 


M^tHCt (or M=HlCt) an as- 
sembly of about five. 


*HR (=4R) maker 


£<H a pitcher 


|<HR a potter. 


*H[\i (= 


4R) agrewi 


\*l colour 


Kh(\[ a dyer. 


^M (=£l<n) iw 


§d hot 


(§«il5H the hot season. 


»tttl 


quality 


■^il| sour 


"^URl sourness. 


t 


feminine* 


^ a god 


£={1 a goddess. 


>} 


abstract 


^t^ a master 


%11&>{1 lordship. 


5^1 


occupant 


Piyioi a school 


Puiltfftanl a scholar. 


ft 


belonging to 


«ilcl a caste 


«ilcft£il a caste-fellow:. 


*R 


agent 


5>iH blind 


^HiR darkness. 


Si 


, collective 


$*L ten 


S^tlsl a decade. 


(tfl 


>) 


^ two 


°ij/l an even number). 


* 


■ diminutive 


^ll"H a town 


^ll*H4 a village. 


ell 


abstract 


£M wicked 


^NJCll wickedness. 


CH 


)> 


^H a male 


^^c^ manliness. 


M^ 


state 


H\i old 


M4M^(=HR4M^)oldage. 


Mi4 


>> 


^IHcq blind 


^iH^UMi^ blindness. 


flO^ltfW) abode 


"S^t a god 


^<H<H a temple, abode 








of a god. 


h 


diminutive 


*US the moon 


^Ufcitl a spot painted 
on the forehead. 


<u 


abstract 


*IR true 


^l^m truth. [ger. 


*n 


dealer 


411^ a coin 


41^1=1^1 a money-chan- 


<HlC-l(=Mt<H) foeper 


Jjli a fort, wall ^U^l^ a police officer. 


itfll 


possessor 


£hi a horse 


^Ul^l a groom. 


& 


diminutive 


5514 a tree 


$[*,$ small tree ; o5l4«ll 
a thicket. 




Also the following of Persian ( or 


Arabic ) origin : 


^Htltf thrower 


sliciu a cannon-ball 


olloist^ a gunner. 



CHAP. X. 



*For other terminations of feminine nouns formed from masculines see § 14, 



L LO 




qujara'i ; aiiAsnuTi 


taut ri. 


*H[ 


instrument W*i the eye 




tot 


diminutive ,J \0[ a sfirden 




^li 


cr&ode "H'-ty^i a cook 




>« 


knovcr <n\g magic 




>Q 


abstract' *u£t sick 




>[R 


hold-er. oV(ii«i the world 




»na 


abdract JJStfH a slave 




=d 


ar/em£ "H&l'H a torch 






(MH a leaf 

instrument ■{■„•.,' 

(^i- 6 ^ a mosquito 




SR 


possessor |ild a shop 




-IIH 


document <|i"H a command 




Ws 


binder i'WR the waist 




'-tic/ 


addicted to l[\ liquor 




V 


doer ^i colour 


' 


IK 


keeper *[{£{ carriage 




4R 


possessor (3HS hope 



^Ml spectacles. 
"PQ^l a garden, 
u^v^ld a cook-room, 
<r>1|3R a magician. 
"Hk D ll sickness. 
ci'&H^R the world conqueror 
SeuVflfl slavery. 
■H^lH^ft a torch-bearer. 
"MHSH aboxfor(betel)leaf, &c. 
^HsRStd"! mosquito -curtains. 
£5H£R shop-keeper. 
ili'Hdl^i a decree, decision. 
i^H^fc a waist-band. 
a^lW a tippler. 
RH\tf a dyer. 

^ll^hld a driver. [date. 

(§>lr-lR "a hopeful," a candi- 

10T* Adjectival Suffixes added to a Complete Word. 

II. The following Suffixes added to a complete word are adjectival:. 



*Hi(k 


characterised 


by «-H"H a name 


•iWiQrfl renowned. 


*H\(J[ 


full of _ 


*R"H shame 


*R"Hl<A bashful. 


»HtfJj 


possessing 


i*\[ mercy 


S^tc/} merciful. 


8Hl(Q 


>> 


=:H form 


\\[<^ beautiful. 


W& 


belonging to 


"Hl^ a month 


m$l!t monthly. ,. 


Wcl 


having • 


l:^i pain 


|:fact. pained. 


W^ 


full of 


Z[ r \ pride 


°lPt\i proud. 


4 (=WH ) having 


|:>H pain 


%:v{\ pained. 


•u 


possessing 


^ family 


£C-Q<i of good family. 


mh 


making 


HUl destruction 


«iRliR4 destructive. 


W 


made by 


^"H^S. Ramcandr 


\ RWH^ct composed by 
Ramcandra. 


<w 


bom 


fc ( $ ) two 


(IcV twice-born. 


SIM4 


giving 


^"4 happiness 


S^iSMi giving hap- 
piness. 


H 


2>osition 


"HM middle 


H^H'H contral,moderat8. 


"HCl 


2wssessing 


3(1 prosperity 


*Mcl wealthy. 


lid 


i> 


flGfcl power ' 


^iGfcfMld powerful. 



THE. DVANIiVJ PAWSA. 



] 11. 



net 

*u<fft 
4 



ordinal 
possessi :ij 



devoid of 
knorving 



MR n\'e "MPi-v, fifth* 

■^i«i riches H^tMcl rich. . 

Vt'-IH rich. . 
city/ (=cWy) lustre cWvfl shining. 
(HUH hick <HWU''ft fortunate. 

<Hn»-| luck W-{(Cl«i luckless. 

^t4 all 3.-W-1 all-knowing. 



CHAP. X. 



Of the suffixes that are Persian (or Arabic) in origin 
the following are adjectival : 

^VW possessing «*t} strength 
tf| full of k\??i shame 
^R eating fe^R unlawful 
H[\ having JJ41& a fault 



<ry Rl c R stong. 
*RfH| ashamed. 
<^l"H^HR ungrateful. 
fyi'km guilty. 



$l<i knowing b$\ appreciation ££R£H capable of discerning. 
^K possessing "H^?, grace, favour >t^ u it«i kind, gracious. 
MS „ ^l<Hcl wealth ^l<HcVH£ wealthy. 

108. The Dvaiidva Samitsa* 

Two or (more) distinct Gujarat! words may be joined together 
to form a single Compound-word. The union of words is 
termed Samasa, ^Hl^H. 

I. The Dvandva Samasa, {^ Wlli, is the compound formed 
by two (or more) co-ordinate members, connected by *>&, and. 
implied but not expressed. Cf. the name Buda-Pest to indicate 
Buda and Pest. 

1. Each being a substantive 

"Hl'^llH mother and father ; parents. 
MHMl'i meat awl drink. 

2. Each being an adjective 

"*H^~Hli mixture of truth and falsehood, 
«iHl>ll(il all, both big and little. 

3. Each being a verbal root 
3HK**t coming and going. 

Words closely allied in meaning are occasionally associated in 
this Dvandva Samasa, in order to indicate by the compound-word 
aa entire class of objects, or their aggregate. 



Copulative 
Compounds. 



i 12 



'GUJAIiATl GRAMMAR. 



T> UJT n. 



Determina- 
tive Com- 
pounds. 



1. Depend- 
ent. 



2. Apposi- 
tional. 



3. Numeral 



4. Elliptic. 



Thus >ti<H <700(fe and (>Ut*rCt property, hence "Hiypt^tiCl #oocfe 
cmd chattels. 
*PU relatives and liilSii friends, hence ^ii«l&l<Hi i/te 
circZe o/ one's relatives and friends, 

109» Tatpurusa Samasa* 

II. The Tatpurum Samdsa, CtOi^ ^MW, is the compound 
formed by two distinct words, of which the first stands in a- 
subordinate relation to the second. 

1 . The constituent words may be nouns of which the first is, 

a) in the Subjective Case ; cf, Eng. man-eater • 

il^lsral book-maker, author. 

b) in the Objective Case ; cf. Eng. hand-rail ; 

Ml^lMl place for lessons, school. 

c) in the Agential Case ; cf Eng. typewriter ; 

^Vtsi"^ writing by the hand, manuscript. 

d) in the Ablative Case ; cf. Eng. fever-heat ; 

Qi^MUl pain from hunger, hunger-pangs. 

e) in the Genitive Case ; cf. Eng. house-top ; 

fcRfy^fl master of the house, head of the house. 

f) in the Locative Case ; cf. Eng. wall-paper. 

a Ml5UR'H r t departure towards heaven, ascension. 

The constituent words may be a noun ( second member ) 
qualified by an adjective or another noun ( first member ) ; 
cf. Eng. Moonstone, Highlands ; 

%l't&<^ for =H<1 + Q% true quality, virtue. 
2-i^^H moon-face, face like a moon.. 
This is known as the Karmadhdraya Samdsa i^HRM : H'Hl^. 

3, The constituent words may be a noun qualified by a 
preceding numeral ; cf. Eng. fortnight ; 

("HsUi the three worlds (Heaven, Earth, and Hell), 
li^oioq the five products of the cow. 
This is known as the JDvigu Samdsa, Q& *fHl*t. 

4. The constituent words may be two substantives from 
which the meaning of the Compound word has to be inferred, 






a 



TfiE BAHUVIUHI SAMASA. 



113 



the relation between the two members not being formally ex- 
pressed ; cf. Eng. wolf-child, a child (suclded by) a \oolf ; 

Sl'^Mlcl rice (mixed tvith) pidse, 

£H<HlW a brother (nursed with) the same milk, tt foster- 
brother. 

This is known as the Madhyamapadalop% Samasa, "H^M'HMsiilMl 

mm. 

110. The Bahuvrilii Samasa. 

III. The Bahuvflhi Samasa, "i^sftfe ^fHiy, is the designation 
given to any compound used attributively, that is, as an adjective, 
though the words qualified by it remain unexpressed ; cf. Eng. 
■a gray-beard. 

A Bahuvrihi-compound *' generally attributes that which is 
expressed by its second member, determined or qualified by 
what is denoted by its first member, to something denoted by 
neither of its members " (Kielhorn : Sanskrit Grammar : 2nd Ed., 
page 251 ). 

Thus -^ctHR ( from %t + ^PW ) clothed in white garments 
( a sect of the Jains ). 

Bahuvrihi-compounds, the first member of which is a cardinal, 
lesemble in form, but differ in meaning from, the Dvigu-tatpurusha- 
compounds. This difference is seen in the following examples : 
Dvigu : ^t^t^l the four months (of the monsoon). 

„ ft$ll£ tlie three tvorlds. 

Bahuvrihi : ^^"4 he of the four faces (Brahma). 
)> •H3 < ?i (! V he of the four arms (Visnu), 

„ ^sU^M he of the three eyes (S'iva), 

„ ^(^ttl^ he of the thousand eyes (Indr a). 

When ^id first is suffixed to a Gujarat! word it has the implied 
meaning and others, et cetera. Strictly regarded, however, the 
compound-word of which this ^Mife forms the second element is 
a Bahuvrihi-compound. 

Thus a>m Mt^jl ^-llfe I^^U food, water, clothes and other 
things but, lit. things ( of which ) the first are food, 

water, clothes ; 
15 



CHAP. X. 



Attributive 
Compounds. 



114 

PART II. 



Adverbial 
Compounds. 



Reduplicat- 
ed Com- 
pounds. 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 

^ V\l£l flowers, fruits, &c, but lit. (things of which) flowers, 
fruits are the first ; 

tfclfe Indra and the others, but lit. ( the gods ) beginning 
with Indra. 

111. The Avyaylbhava Samasa. 

IV. The AvyayibMva Samdsa, ^He^^lH *t>u*i, is the 
compound formed by the union of an indeclinable particle 
with a substantive; cf. Eng. afternoon, an 'at home.' 

Compound words of this class are generally adverbial, 

*t*itflQcl according to one's power, so far as one can afford. 

112. Other Compound Words. 

In order to express intensity of meaning, a compound word 
may be formed by the repetition of a verbal stem ( often 
onomatopoetic ), or of a word. 

These compounds are technically called Amredit, 3TT%i%cf, 
repeated. 

Thus ^U^U murmurs, mutterings ; 
h^b^ tittle-tattle, wrangling ; 
^m"Sl£l hurried running about. 
A word may be made to chime with itself, the compound 
jingle serving to express a class of objects (compare § 94). 
^U"H«i "tl^H Furniture in general, things ; 

^Mfl 3 lHd Playing and trifling ; 

^HSSll °\1&\ A quid pro quo, an exchange ; 

^Pictl VWKtl Come and welcome, hospitality j 
yj=.ad £2.ad Children, little ones ; 

^ V irestures • 

*HW4W Reciprocally. 



CHAPTER XI. 



TRANSLITERATION. 

" Resolved that the Council of the Royal Asiatic Society, 
having given the most careful consideration to the Report 
on Transliteration prepared by the representative Com- 
mission appointed by the Oriental Congress at Geneva, 
while not entirely agreeing in all the details, gives the 
entire scheme its general approval ; and earnestly recom- 
mends all connected with this country who are engaged in 
Oriental studies to set aside their own individual 
feelings and predilections, and, as far as possible, to 
employ this method of transliteration, in order that the 
very great benefit of a unifom system may be gradually 
adopted, and Oriental studies may thereby be facilitated." 
Such are the precise terms of the resolution on the vexed 
subject of the transliteration of the Sanskrit and allied alphabets, 
adopted by the Council of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great 
Britain and Ireland, and published in that Society's Journal for 
( October ) 1896. While not assuming that a perfectly scienti- 
fic system of transliteration has at last been discovered, we 
shall not be far wrong in accepting a scheme recommended on 
such high authority. According to this system the translitera- 
tion equivalents for the letters of the Gujarat! alphabet are as 
follow : — (see also the third and fourth columns of pages 2 and 3). 



Vowels : a a i 


I u 


u 


r e 


ai 


o au. 


Consonants : Mutes : 


ka 


kha 


ga 


gha 


na 




ca 


cha 


J a 


jha 


na 




ta 


tha 


^a 


dha 


na 




ta 


tha 


da 


dha 


na 




pa 


pha 


ba 


bha 


ma 


Non-mutes : 


y a 


ra 


la 


va 






s'a 


sa 


sa 








ha 


la 









Conjuncts : ksa jfia 



Anusvara 
Visarga ; 



m 



CHAP. XI. 

Resolution 
adopted by 
the R. A. S. 



Translitera- 
tion equi- 
valents. 



116 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 

Omitted 

'inherent a ; 

not to be 

translitera- 
ted. 



Matthew 
VI : 26-33. 



Now in employing these equivalents in the transliteration 
of Gujarat! words, we must be especially careful to bear in mind 
when the " inherent a " should be retained and when omitted.. 
Indeed the only difficulty will be found to be in just this 
connexion. Hence at this stage the student should again read 
over and thoroughly master § 6 and § 9 with its Note. Further, 
inasmuch as the omission of " inherent a " is in largo measure 
conditioned by the presence of an inflexion or of a suffix or of 
the second element in a compound word, it becomes necessary, 
in order to accurate transliteration, to have made acquaintance 
with the various Gujarat! inflexions and with the principles of 
word-formation. The student familiar with the details of these 
subjects will with ease be able to verify the transliteration 
subscribed beneath each word in the following Gujarat! passages.. 

113, Transliterated Passages, 

aMlMSHl M#lM ff^SU, d*U dt cu^cti *\% ^ ilMdi 
Akas'nam paksione juo, teo to vavtarh nathi ne kaptarh 
*i% d ^iWl <HVU <i% ell M^ CfHl^l ^liRRHt 
nathi, ne vakharomam bhartam nathi, to pan tamaro akas'mamno 
<HIM d*lld WJ 4} & ; ell ct^l Hcti cl^. *tfH4 d'-U 
bap teonum palan kare ce • to teo kartam tame adhik nathi 
4 ? 3>M ftctl H r -U«U CWlRRftl Sl^ Mldldl 4£d *Ur 
s'uiii ? ane cinta karvathi tamaramamno kon potana kadne ek 
6l*l«K ^Hlfl *l$ d? ^Hd &m *°iHl c& ftdl 
hathbhar vadharl s'ake ce ? ane lugdam sambandhi tame cinta 
lH b\l Si? McRdi ^CH^lldl pRR i\[ \ d*U 

kem karo cho ? khetarnam phuljhadono vicar karo ke, teo 
M <& &, ci»ll ^dfl SVti <i% d^l iictcli M^ 
kevam vadhe ce, teo mahenat kartam nathi, teo kantatam pan 
d*U; dl M<3J § cRd *& $ \ S«RH M<$ Mldldl 
nathi • to pan hum tamne kahum chum ke, Suleman pan potana 
%W<ni M&>lRi dSlRidl *lidl <£3l M^«ll d 6dl. ^ 
saghala mahimamam teomamna ekna jevo paherelo na hato. e 
*\1 ^<ttd HIH <£ ^W & d~ k& <Hfl>U \M 

mate khetarnum ghas je aj ce ne kale bhatthimam phenkay 
&, eft «l ^ 5*£ V&\lk $, dl, 511 ^KMprtKQSU, cP& 
ce, tene jo Dev evum paherave ce, to, o alpavis'vasio, tamne 



TRANSLITERATED PASSAGE, 



117 



s'urn vis'ese nahi paheraWe ? mate ame s'um khale, athva sum 

pie, athva s'um paherle, em kahetam cinta na karo. karan ke 

e saghlam vanam vides'io s'odhe che ; kemke tamaro akas'mamno 

bap jane che ke e badhamni tamne agatya che. pan. tame 
*4<k-ti &M t \\o»& cl«U ckt eHl*(lM^l^ $1% ^ ^ 

pahelam Devna rajyane.tatha tena nyaylpanane s'odho, ne e 

badham vanaih pan tamne apas'e. 

" Behold the birds of the heaven, that they sow not neither 
do they reap, nor gather into barns ; and your heavenly Father 
feedeth them. Are not ye of much more value than they ? And 
which of you by being anxious can add one cubit unto his 
stature ? And why are ye anxious concerning raiment ? Con- 
sider the lilies of the field, how they grow ; they toil not, neither 
do they spin : yet I say unto you, that even Solomon in all his 
glory was not arrayed like one of these. But if Gcd doth so 
clothe the grass of the field, which to-day is, and to-morrow is 
cast into the oven, shall he not much more clothe you, ye of 
little faith ? Be not therefore anxious saying, What shall we eat ? 
or, What shall we drink ? or, Wherewithal shall we be clothed ? 
For after all these things do the Gentiles seek ; for your heavenly 
Father knoweth that ye have need of all these things. But seek 
ye first the kingdom of God and his righteousness ; and all these 
things shall be added unto you." 

The Gospel of Matthew, VI: 26-33. 

Firanglona ek chatra nice saghlum Gujarat avi rahyum 

ce, ane paramkrpalu Is'varna, hukamthi e pardes'i lokona 

hath nice a prant paco moto thas'e ; pachum koi judij ritnum 



CHAP. XL 



* This word being a corruption of Frank, the Q should, of course, be trans- 
literated not as Phi but as Fi. See § 2, Note. Q\>(1 ( or 4*Xl ), however, is 
not a polite term form for designating Europeans, 



Concluding 
sentence of 
' Karan 
Ghelo.' 



318 



GU.TARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 



•ilH ftli$; *H foil 4«U *M %Hl\{ Wfo M*Rl& *U 
nam kadhs'e; ane vidyakala ane sudha.ro saghle pathraine a 

*(«IHR§|1 ^icl tfovft Hid, <H^Hli Hl>t, Cl«il 

raliyamano prant Js'varul vadi, laksminum dham, tatha 

sadgunanum sthan thai pads'e, Amin. 

The whole of Gujarat has come under the protection of the 
Europeans, and by the permission of a most gracious God this 
province under the hand of these foreigners will again grow great* 
will yet make for itself a name of quite a different kind, and„ 
knowledge, arts, and culture being everywhere diffused, this 
charming province will become the garden of God, the abode of 
wealth, and the home of virtue. Amen. 

Koran Ghelo, 2nd Ed., pages 355, 366 . 



PART III. 

SYNTAX, OR THE GRAMMAR OF SENTENCES. 

( cu$t&r*ifti ). 



CHAPTER I. 

THE ORDER OF THE WORDS IN A SENTENCE, 
Though the order of words in a Gujarat! sentence admits of 
considerable variation, none the less certain rules as to order 
can be laid down as being generally observed in Gujarat I prose. 
It should, however, be borne in mind that Gujarat! poetry is 
marked by great licence in the matter of the arrangement of 
words, and that, even in prose, any particular word may with a 
view to emphasis be shifted from the position it would ordinarily 
occupy, 

114* General Rules* 

1. In a simple sentence the usual order is : 

1st. Subject, whether in the Subjective Case or in the 
Agential ; 

2nd. Object, an indirect object, if present, preceding 
the direct ; 

3rd. Verb, " as it were locking the whole up into a 
compact frame." (Palmer's Hindustani Gram- 
mar, page 27). 
E. g. cl§) *£{ MSS-ifl He gave vie help. 

2. A governed precedes its governing word, whence English 
Repositions become in Gujarat! postpositions. 

4 cWlfl "Ml^l ^*i 5*lK-{& <Wh<A\ Having sent the 
man to you, I ivent away. 

3. A qualifying word precedes the qualified word. 

4 'Mil MH vftVW hfai I shall do my work properly 

4. A relative precedes its (English) antecedent. 

£> "HVSjfri % wftl cl auetfi The man ivhom T saw 
will come. 



CHAP. I. 



General 
Rules re- 
garding 
the order 
of words. 



120 

part m. 



Adverb 

before verb 

Or object of 

verb. 



•■HI before 
predicate. 



CJUJAkATI GRAMMAft. 

5. A subordinate clause precedes ihe principal. 
tt"*£l *ll| Slpl cl*i b\[ Do as seems good to you. 

6. A amse precedes its effect. 
&/WdM *$l cl*fl H^[ Hi* 01 mi Many people were 
drowned because of the deluge. 

7„ A reason precedes an inference^ 

4 *tftl ^ "Hl^ ^Kl Sticlt H*ft 7 ccmttitf come because 
I am ill. 

8. If object A be likened to, or compared with, object B, 
then B precedes A. 

%.M frv^l ^l<A5li *UM & A brightness comes such as the 
sun's. 

>W Hni &ti^t §t^l & 27ie 602/ * s tatter than the 
table. 

9. The order of words in an imperative or interrogative sen- 
tence is the same as the order in an affirmative sentence. 

E» g. d>l 41H £^U may mean a) Do you the work, or 
b) Will you do the work ? or c) You will do the work. 

1 15* Position of Adjective* 

A qualificative adjective precedes, and a predicative adjective 
follows, its noun. 

*Hl H\X\ *U^ § This is a good man ; 
*Ml tl 1 ^ *U^l & This man is good. 
On a qualificative adjective following its noun see § 119 Note. 

116, Position of Adverb. 

An adverb generally stands immediately before either the verb 
it modifies or the object of the verb : 

ci§| *>i\ ilM dcU^^U h^i 1 He ought to do this Work 
or cl§j §clW«l*fl am iR h\i j quicJdy. 

111. Position of Infinitive of Purpose. 

The Infinitive of Purpose, ending in -^ or -% immediately 
precedes the verb that it modifies adverbially ; 

*Hl £IH H'Hl ^1°^ ^ I h ave C01nG t° d° this iccrk. 



POSITION OF SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 



121 



118. Position of Subordinate Sentences* 

In complex sentences a subordinate sentence introduced by 
the correlative pronoun <£ ( or any of its derivatives <rJ ,, H, ov^'l, 
V-U^, &c) precedes the principal sentence, and this order is 
maintained even though, as is very frequently the case, the 
relative word itself be omitted ; 

■[<£] ctH «lt$il &l cl ^ <wl^fla»l &\v{ We know what you say; 
^ *{ £>lQ <^4 mw cl^ 7{ cli^ One gets such and so much 
c$ "*tot as is suitable for one. 

A subordinate sentence summed up by 51, wQ, 5}H, or 
under the government of ml, 5} *ll2, SUeil'Hi, ^ tscll "4^, &c 
precedes the principal sentence ; 

eld *M "WlQ & ^3, cl u^l^cU feed #/ie knew his mind ivas 

injured ; 
4 "hRi ^ 'Ml^ ^lll ^b^l / have come late, because I am ill ; 
<| §m\ ^Hik cl «fl3ttrMl He went away immediately I rose up. 
A subordinate sentence introduced by §, 5} "*\Q. $, hiVQ Is, &c. 
jollows the principal sentence ; 

£l «t^c(l fe<fl $ ciri *M "W^ & iSAe 7enei« to mind was 

injured ; 

% clR 5U*$l Si *tl2 $ cl>A "wt"!^ M^ I se%« a telegram, in 

order that you might get the news ■ 

4 *U^l ^Hl^Ml Ullf ^ ^l ^ -*" ^ ave come ^ e > because I am ill. 

Eeported speech is with very few exceptions expressed in 

direct narration, and introduced by ^ (or <fj> ) immediately 

following the principal sentence, 

cl§j W &Q S § -m%l ^ He told me he was ill, lit,, He said 

to me (that) ' I am ill' 
<H[\ cl§| &% % &«(l clH^t 3A<$1 8ilM cl 4 <Hdl<fl« 2%ero fa said, 

J wi^ sAott? w/ia£ will profit you. 
Direct narration is, of course, not employed when ambiguity 
would be occasioned thereby. For example 

fcl&H 4&d $ 4 =Hl^l 3li* g The Saheb says that I am a good 

servant. 
Here the Saheb's direct words were probably cj ^i Pji^ & 
or ct>l ^Rl 4l*R &l, but, in order to avoid the ambiguity that 
would otherwise arise, these words of the direct narration are 
changed to the above indirect form, s| -Ml^t «-tl£3 *Q. 
16 



CHAP. I. 



Subordinate 
sentence 
generally 
precedes 
principal, 



but follows 
if introduc- 
ed by |, S| 
*llS $, &c. 



Oratio recta. 



CHAPTER II. 

CONCORD, (aHrew), 

119. Agreement between an Adjective 
and a Single Noun. 

An adjective agrees with its Noun in gender, number and 
case, but takes no case-ending, 

Should, however, the Noun be in the S} - Locative case, its 
adjective, if declinable, is attracted to the same termination ; 
though this attraction does not necessarily take place if the Noun 
be in the 3}- Agential Case, See §27, Note. 

Thus cl>M h»i<r? Under their control, 
cMt €lHl3l By his son. 

Note : An adjective, or participle, qualifying a noun in the 
Objective Case, generally precedes the noun (see § 1 1 5), 
but occasionally follows it. When preceding the noun 
the adjective agrees with it in gender, number, and case, 
but when following it in gender and number only, the 
adjective, as being now in a measure independent, taking 
its Absolute (subjective) form. 

Thus ^ «tlt«li M} ttfkt 3& >tli^M <*fti 
I saio a man seated on the clouds ; 
but *i d 'mgtoi "£H MUcll «ftl cl c& cM ^ ? 

Are not you the man whom I saw shouting ? 

120» Plural ( Masc. or Neut* ) of Respect 
for Adjectives* 

To indicate respect a noun masc. sing, is conventionally 
regarded as masc. plur., and a noun fern. sing, as neut. plur., so 
that an adjective in agreement with them stands in the masc. plur. 
or neut. plur. respectively ; 

*tRt (Vtl£> My father ; 
£Rii \\^[ The aged queen. 



PART III. 



Attraction 

of adjective 

before 

St - Loc. 



Generally 

-ani,..-*, 

but 
sometimes 



Honorific 
plural in 

- 5HI (masc.) 
or 

-s^i (fern.) 



AGREEMENT BETWEEN AN ADJECTIVE AND TWO OR MORE NOUNS. 123 



121, Agreement between an Adjective 
and two or more Nouns* 

A» If the nouns be (a) each of the same gender, (b) each 
singular, and (c) connected by some such conjunctive as 

*>ti or am, 

then the adjective predicated of them agrees with them 
in gender, but is plural in number. 

Thus <HlW (\m {\k\[ ^Rl § The brother and son are well. 
If the nouns be as above, but of different genders, then the 
adjctive predicated of them is in the neut. plur. 

Thus <HUJ cisil £14$ *llVl S The brother and daughter 

are well. 
B» If the nouns be (a) of different genders and (b) separated 
by some such disjunctive as a or *>m% then the adjective 
predicated of them agrees in gender and number with 
the nearest. 
Thus §141 \ \\£[ C-pl{\ t|lM ell ...\ If the horse or the 
or §l£l % §141 c-Pill ^im £ji ...J mare be lame, ... 

But the adjective qualifying them either may be repeated 
before each, taking then the gender and number of each, or may 
stand before the first alone, taking its gender and number. 

I An aged father or mother. 
or H\U »UM I Ml J 

C» If the nouns be (a) of different genders and (6) connected 
by some such conjunctive as a>M, ct^l, then the adjective 
qualifying them either may be repeated before each, 
taking the gender and number of each ; or may stand 
before the first alone, taking its gender and number ; or 
may stand before the first alone, in the neut. plur. 

Thus Ml^l «ttM cl«il Mlfl Ml y 
or "Hl^i «ilM Ct§U Ml Y My father and mother. 

or MlVl "ilM cim Ml J 

Should these nouns of different genders be united so as to 
form a compound word (Dvandva Samasa, see § 108), the adjective 
in agreement is in the neut. plural. 
Thus MRl MIMlM My parents. 



CHAP. II- 



Agreement 
when adjec- 
tive is 
a. predica- 
tive. 



b. qualita- 
tive. 



124 



GU JAR ATI GRAMMAR. 



PART III. 



Apposi- 
tional S{ as 
neut. sing. 



«• and rl 

forms alike 
as to gender 
and number. 



Varying 
agreement 
of declina- 
ble adjecti- 
val adverbs. 



12& Agreement between an Adjective and 
Appositional % 

5} or ci or aJl^ may be used appositionally for the purpose of 
summarizing an entire phrase or sentence. When so used, it is 
regarded as neut. sing., and accordingly any adjective in agree* 
ment with it is also neut. sing. 

Thus «M>1 34$ ^HloHl 5i %H$ & It is well that we came 

here. 
When 5} or ci stands for two or more co-ordinated nouns, the 
gender and number of its predicative adj. is determined in 
accordance with the rules given in § 121. 

Thus «ilM, <HlW *>& ^H »l »Uii atwSl Father, brother 
and sister (these) will come late* 

123* Agreement between Correlated Pronouns. 

Correlated pronouns agree in gender and number, but not, 
in case. 

Thus <v4 (& ffJ&l cl 2M^1' =^1^1 § He, whom you saw > 

has come here. 

1%&. Agreement of Adjectival Adverbs* 

Some adjectives are not unfrequently employed as adverbs, and 
when so used, they immediately precede the word they modify. 

A declinable adjectival adverb, when modifying an adjective, 
agrees in gender and number with the noun that the adjective 
qualifies. 

Thus fci§jl fcftl dli^l A- very good boy. 
A declinable adjectival adverb, when modifying a verb, agrees 
in gender and number with the object if the verb be transitive, 
and with the subject if the verb be intransitive. 

4 'HI | itH %U^ hfltl I skall do my work well, 

5Hl Ht^l *=(ftt &H^ & Such men improve slowly. 

125* Agreement between Verb and single Subject* 

Pres. Indef. and Fut. Indef. verbal forms and, in the Com- 
pound Tenses, all g, &<§, &&1, &fel forms agree with the 
Subject in number, and person. 



AGREEMENT BETWEEN VERB AND TWO OR MORE SUBJECTS. 



125. 



— clt and — <HWl (or — r[\\\) verbal forms agree with the Subject 
in gender and number. 

— ct verbal forms remain unchanged, whatever be the gender,, 
number, or person of the Subject. 

In the Past Indef. Indie, and in all Perfects 

1) an Intransitive Verb agrees in gender and number with 
its Subjective. 

Thus &l£^l a^l The boy rose, 

&IHI *l<i*U &ct'l The children had risen. 

2) a Transitive Verb agrees in gender and number with its 
logical Object, i. e. with its Subjective, or in the absence 
of a Subjective with its Objective (See § 53). 

Thus &l(\aA ^\h\VK H*cte ^H^ The girl gave the boy a book, 
$t£\a>l &IHH <MHl &cll The girl had seen the boy. 

126» Plural (Masc* or Neut.) of Respect for Verbs* 

The rule given in § 120 applies to Verbs as well as to Adjectives. 
Thus (MctlS? ^Ml^Hl Father has come, 

Rl^d yil^i MMWH'l & The queen is about to arrive. 

127. Agreement between Verb and two or more 

Subjects. 

A. If the subjects be (a) each of the same gender, (b) each 
singular, and (c) connected by some such conjunctive as 
^4 or cl^ll, then the verbal form, if permitting of such 
inflexion, agrees with them in gender, but is plural in 
number. 
<Hl\J cl^l {[&\[ ^HlcMl^ The brother and the son hove come. 

If the subjects be as above, but of different genders, the 

verbal form is in the neut. plur. 

<HlW Ciail Clift ^Ml & The brother and the daughter 
have come. Compare § 121, A» 
£U& flSU StHl ^Ultft ^>lHi Lallu (masc.) and Lalchi [fern.) 
went to school. 

B» If the subjects be (a) each singular and (&) separated by 
some such disjunctive as Is or ^H^l, then the co-ordinated 
subjects are usually summarized by 1lU or jfcl or an 



CHAP. II. 



-*U and 

-SH&l forms 
as affected 
by subjec- 
tive or ob- 
jective case.. 



Subjects 
connected 
by a con- 
junctive. 



Subjects 
separated 
by a dia 
junctiveJ 



12G 



G WAR ATI GRAMMAR. 



PART III. 



Precedence 

of 1st Pers. 

over the 

2nd. 



and of 2nd 

Pers. over 

the 3rd. 



Agreement 

a. of Infin. 

in -&. 



equivalent word, with which the verbal foim agrees ia 
gender, its number however being always singular. 

&U^l "£ &li£l "£tfeJ stt^ <\m Neither boy nor girl 

has come. 

[In this sentence ^l^ appears in the common (neuter) gender, 
because the %\\J refers back to words of different genders]. 

If the subjects be as above, but of different numbers, the 
verbal form agrees as to gender and number with the nearest 
subject. 

$Ul<$ 4(6 MQJ aiuftl ftl »!Mi &$l 

Not the mistress but the servants may have come. 

128. Agreement between Verb and Subjects of 
different Persons* 

If of two or more subjects, connected by some such conjunctive 
as a>$ or ct^l, one at least be in the First Person, the verb will 
be in the First Person Plural. 

Thus j| cRl m\\ (Vl ^l^l &\S\ I and my friend have come. 
If of such subjects one at least be of the Second Person and the 
rest of the Third, the verb will be in the Second Person Plural. 

Thus cj ct^l cll^ ^«i <w£il Thou and thy sister will go. 
If two or more subjects of different persons be separated by a 
disjunctive particle, the verb may agree as to person with the 
last j but, as a rule, it is better to repeat the verb after each 
subject, placing it in agreement with each. 

Thus ^ § ft <*$l I or h e w ^ 9°, Dut better <| <*Wy % ci <X$\ r 
and ci % <| «/W« He or I shall go, but better cl <j*$1 $ | ovWSl. 

129. Infinitival Forms as affected by Agreement. 

An Indef. Infin. (in-<Hl, -"fl, -jj) agrees in gender and number 
(a) with its own Subjective ; (6) in the absence of a Subjective 
with its own Objective ; and (c) in the absence of both Subjective 
and Objective ( i. e. when the Infinitive is absolute), it stands- 
in the neut. sing. 



PARTICIPLES AS AFFEf" EH BY AGREEMENT. 



127 



Thus ci^l im r -lW=il ^W^A He ought to read the look, 

cl§) &{&{ %1<H10HI "MW^ /ie owgAi to tale care of the girl, 
cl<^ ^H&T." ^Hl^ <MW^ #e owgr/ii to come here. 

The Continuous Infin. (in - ell ), whether locatival or neut. 
plur., is in no way affected by agreement. 

The Inten. Infin. (in -<u3l, -*ft, -«i) generally appears in the 
form -clt^i; but, when the -verb is Transitive, this infinitive 
occasionally agrees in gender and number with the object of the 
verb. 

Thus cl§i ~*\A aM(£l" "iWld h%> Be told me to come here ; 

cl^ MlclHl <HlW^t *{[£[£{ ^U^ld *Wl<*£ Be gave 

orders to seat his brother on the throne, 

ci«i SlQJl <HW ff^Hl & He has to remove the grain. 

The Per. Inf. (in -% -W ■% ) is used as a tense-form in the 
Past Indef. Indie, and in all Perfects of transitive verbs. Its 
agreement, when so used, has been already indicated in § 125. 
When not used as a tense-form the Perf. Inf. appears either in 
some oblique case of the Singular, or in the Neut. Plur. (the 
frequentative in -Ml ), but it is then in no way affected by 
agreement. 

130. Participles as affected !>y agreement. 

The rules for the agreement of adjectives (§§119-121) apply 
to Participles when used adjectively, and those for the agree- 
ment of verbs (§§ 125-127) to Participles when used as part of 
(compound) verbal forms. The Connective Participle (in y*, or 
-tM ) is not affected by agreement . 



CHAP. II. 



Inf. in 
-Hid- 



c. Inf. in-jj. 



Participle 
in -{J or -$n 
indeclinable 



PART III. 



Subjective 
Case em- 
ployed for 
a. Subject 
of Intrans. 
Verb. 



b. Object of 

Transitive 

Verb. 



c. Subject 
of Trans. 

Verb except 

in Past 
Indef. and 

Perf. Tenses. 



CHAPTER llh 

ON THE SIGNIFICATION OF THE CASES. 

131. The Subjective Case as Subject or as 

Object of a Verb* 

In all tenses of the Intransitive verb, the action of the verb 
is presented to the mind in connexion with a doer or subject, to 
whom (or which) alone the verbal action is regarded as intimately 
pertaining. This intimacy of connexion is represented in Gujarat! 
by placing the subject in the Subjective Case. 
Thus §1^1 "£i! & The horse runs 5 

&lb\[ §£$1 The boy will rise up ; 
H\ Md^i & The house has fallen. 

On the other hand, in all tenses of Transitive verbs the action 
of the verb, as the very name ' Transitive ' implies, passes over to 
the object, on whom (or which) accordingly the verbal action is 
regarded as impressed. This intimacy of connexion is represented 
in Gujarat! by placing the object of a Transitive Verb in the 
Subjective Case. 

Thus § *ifti MIM 4^C-t i|^ I confess my sins. 

In this sentence, through the passing over of the verbal action — 
that of confession — to the sins, the latter become definitely sins 
confessed, and are no longer merely sins absolute and unqualified. 
The sins have become, so far at least, subjectively modified. This 
subjective modification induced in the object of the verb is 
indicated by putting the object in the Subjective Case. Further, 
however, in all tenses of the Transitive verb, except the Past 
Indefinite and the Perfects, the action of the verb is seen in close 
and still maintained connexion with the subject as well as with 
the object, for the subject stands out vividly before the mind, either 
as effecting in the present, or as about to effect in the future, 
the action represented by the verb. This intimacy of connexion 
between the subject and the verb, as well as that between the 
object and the verb, is accordingly represented in Gujarati by 
putting both the subject and the object fi in the Subjective Case. 
Thus <| >iRi MtM i^CH hfyl I shall confess my sins. 



THE SUBJECTIVE CASE AS OBJECT 'OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. 



129 



Here, as before, tihe sins are, through the verbal action ( of 
confessing) passing over to them so far subjectively modified as 
to become definitely sins confessed, wherefore the »ilVl "HIM is in 
the Subjective Case .; and also the ' I ' stands out vividly as a 
<loer, whose verbal action — that of confessing — is imminent, 
wherefore the <| too is in the Subjective Case, 

But in tihe Past Indefinite (Indicative) and in all Perfects of a 
Transitive Verb, the action of the verb no longer appears in still 
maintained connexion with the subject, for the action is complete 
-and finished, and has already -quite passed over to the object. 
Hence the subject, or doer of the action, is no longer vividly 
present to the mind, and accordingly for these tenses, while the 
object is still intimately connected with the verbal action, the 
subject is mnch less intimately connected, being, in fact, no longer 
the doer of the action, but merely the agent by whom (or 
which) the action was once upon a time done. The greater 
intimacy of connexion is indicated in Gujarat! by putting the 
Object in the Subjective Case, and the lesser intimacy of con- 
nexion by putting the subject in the Agential Case. 
Thus ?l >ilVl "M1M 4^<st 3AHi i" confessed my sins. 

Here again, for the same reason as before, the m\[ MIM is in 
the Subjective Case, but the 'I' stands out no longer as the 
doer but merely as the agent who at some past time did the 
work of confession, wherefore the ^ is in the Agential Case. 

132. The Subjective Case as Object of a 
Transitive Verb* 

'The special signification of the Subjective Case as being the 
case appropriate for the Object of a Transitive Verb may with 
advantage be regarded from another point of view. 

The subject-matter (or substance) by which as its rneHium the 
action of the verb becomes possible, or on which the verbal action 
depends , is put in the Subjective Case. 

Thus 4 MlM^ti Ml^ <H\ ^ I Jill water in the cask. 

Here the verbal action of filling postulates some substance, 
which had to be brought into requisition in order to the work of 
filling being at all possible. Without the water the action of 
17 



CHAP. III. 



Agential 
Case em- 
ployed for 
Subject of 
TranB. Verb 

in Past 

Indef. and 

Perf. Tenses 



Subjeotlve 
Case express- 
es subject- 
matter of 
verbal 
action. 



130 



GUJARAT! GRAMMAR. 



PART III. 



Subjective 
Case for 
Cognate 

Accusative. 



Subjective 
Case for 

direct ob- 
ject, 

Objective 
Case for 
indirect 
object. 



filling had not taken place. This intimacy of connexion is re- 
presented in Gujarat! by putting the object "Ml^fl in the Subjective 
Case after the verb <a\ ^. 

Similarly >t aU>*£\ qi^A d I have read the book. 

Here the reading was definitely ' book-reading ' — the book wag 
the medium by which the action of reading was carried on. 
Without the book there had not been this reading. Hence SuM^l 
is governed in the Subjective Case by qiafl &. Moreover the 
intimate connexion thus subsisting between a Transitive Verb 
and its Subjective Is well brought cut in Gujarat! by the 
verbal-form ( if admitting of inflexion for gender and number ) 
taking the gender and number of its Subjective. 

What in English is termed a ' Cognate accusative ' expresses 
in a marked degree the subject-matter of some verbal action, 
that in which the action of the verb essentially consists. Hence 
Cognate Accusatives are rendered in Gujarat! by the Subjective 
Case. 

Thus <| "H.[\ "Hl^l I shall strike a stroke. 
Here the stroke is the very subject-matter itself of the action 
of striking, and accordingly >U^ stands in the Subjective Case. 
Similarly <| SfH i|^ I am doing the (deed) work. 
^ ilH 4§ I did the (deed) work. 

In English certain verbs are said to take two objects, of which 
one (the indirect object) represents the person, or thing, in whom, 
or which, the verbal action terminates, and this, as we shall see in 
§134, answers to the Objective Case in Gujarat!; but the other 
(the direct object) is rendered in Gujarat! by the Subjective Case. 
Thus 4 SllMlSUl MW ^MNl =^1^ ^ I give Gopdl Jive rupees. 

Here the act of giving terminates in the indirect object, ' Gopal,' 
wherefore SllMlH'} in the Objective Case ; but the subject-matter 
of the gift, that in which the giving actually consists, is the 
' five rupees,' which accordingly is put in the Subjective Case, 
Mfa Ofl*Hl not ^ V^t*}. 

Similarly cl§) SllMie$ ?il<Q tl^ He struck Gopdl a cane-hloio. 

Here the 'striking ' was definitely ' cane-blow striking,' accord- 
ingly ' cane-blow,' as being the subject-matter of the verbal action. 



THE OBJECTIVE CASE AS OBJECT OF A TRANSITIVE VERB. 



131 



stands in the Subjective Case, hence ^.[£\ The completed ' 
action terminated in ' Gopal ' as its final object, wherefore Sll x U<Jt«} 
in the Objective Case. The agent concerned in the past action 
was ' he,' wherefore cIq} in the Agential Case. 



13C. Other uses of the Subjective Case. 

The Subjective Case is used after verbs of motion in answer 
to the question Hoiv far ? (in distance), and after verbs of rest 
or motion in answer to the question How long ? (in time). 

Thus § $ft 3U<§ *Ue*U / went ten gau (twenty miles) ; 
^ &A fe'W ^$1 / went ten days ; 
4 S^ fe^ ^§U I remained ten days. 
cl =*U^t £&L*l lUH^Ul h\ & He keeps running 

about the wlwle day. 
Amount, measured or weighed, is put in the Subjective Case, 
Thus %£1 £i§}i a^iH^ Give a handful of grain. 

"When a preposition governs two or more nouns all of which 
are summarized under some such word as £}£u claJU ^Hl 
then this word will duly stand in the case governed by the 
preposition, but the preceding nouns are generally regarded as 
standing aloof from the rest of the sentence, and are accordingly 
put in the Sub. Case (casus rectus). 

Thus *Utf i £j^t*^i SHlSU<u %U«l W\H *U$t A wicked 

person, a knave, a cheat, with such one ought not to 

have doings. 

Perhaps, however, the best explanation of this construction is 

found in regarding it as elliptical. The above sentence, for 

example, may be but a shortened from of «i|i^i £•£=% &>i [<£> $] 

a^t^M *tl*i *WH 4 4^1, [who is] a wicked man, a knave, 

a cheat, with such one ought to have no doings. 

134, The Objective Case as Object of a 
Transitive Verb, 

The object (person or, less frequently, thing) in which the action 

of the verb finds its goal and terminates — the final Objective is 

put in the Objective Case. 

Thus § ^ H°d$ I worship God. 



Subj. Case 
in answer to 
How far? <fc 
How long ? 

and How 
much ! 



Subj. Case 
as casus 
reotus. 



Objeotlve 
Case ex- 
presses goal 
of verbal 
action. 



132 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART III. 



Generally 
inanimate 
object in 
Subj. Case, 
but animate 
object in 
Obj, Case. 



Indirect 
Object in 
Obj. Case. 



Obj. Case 

after 
a. verbs of 
incomplete 
predication, 



b. imper- 
sonal 

verbs. 



The difference between the Subjective and Objective Case is 
illustrated in the following sentences. 

4 "Hl^l ^HM^tk "Mli *Q J ackncnvledge my transgression. 
4 ^^ *tlri ^ / acknowledge ( believe in ) God. 

In the former sentence the subject-matter of the acknowledging 
is my transgression, hence "H[\[ SHM^fa iu the Subjective Case. 
But in the latter sentence the action of acknowledgment, or 
belief, terminates in God, finds its goal in Him, hence %*£{ in 
the Objective Case. 

Notk : — Naturally the subject-matter of a verbal action will; 

nearly always be inanimate — a thing ; whereas the final 

object of such action will more frequently than not be 

animate — a being ; hence, as a tolerably general rule, 

we find that inanimate things, when the object of a 

Transitive Verb, stand in the Subjective Case, but animate 

beings in the Objective. The personal pronouns, 4, g, <\ r 

when the object of a Transitive Verb, invariably, whether 

singular or plural, stand in the Objective,, never in the 

Subjective, Case. 

When a verb in English takes two objects, the ' indirect 

object ' represents the object in which the verbal aetion terminates. 

It is accordingly rendered in Gujarat! by the Objective Case. 

Thus 4 ^WUUl VR ^Ml^Hl *HL?i g I give Gopdl Jive rupees. 

Here the act of giving finds its goal in the * indirect object r 

Gopdl, wherefore 5ll"4l<rl^ in the Objective Case ( see § 132 ). 

Verbs of ' incomplete predication ' are construed in GujaratT 
with both the Subjective and the Objective Cases in conformity 
with the distinctive meanings of these cases. 

4 5llMl<H^l iR^rt 1^ ^ J appoint Gopdl (to be) clerk ; 

$U<11 PlU'i^ °Mt%l ^ SU<11 A great scholar is called a Vyds, 

h{k*i il^UlH 4tfc d and a great poet a Kdlidas. 

Note here especially the impersonal verbs of incomplete 

predication such as £l*t^, <Hl^, <Hl°l<|, to seem, %#§ to seem, to 

suggest itself to, also ^Ml^i^ to knoiu (how). 

Thus ^ »1^ 6\*l & $ ••• I seems to me that ••• 

H«-l *tl QMW H$l This device occurred to me. 
"H^l €f»Mcli aJtHl d I know (hoto) to write. 



OTHER USES OF THE OBJECTIVE CASE. 



iss 



Here also may be included impersonal verbal constructions such CHAP. Iir. 
as >$ ^1*1 & or "Vl <Hl^ & is pleasing to me, "H^. \&& is suitable] 
for vie, *$[ Hi & is befitting me, ^ "*${ § / meet with, "ty\ 9/1 & 
I light upon, find, >$ ^.[9i\ & i" remember. 



135. Other uses of the Objective Case. 

The verb ^l^ when construed with the objective ease indicates 
possession, and, should the Compound Tenses of ^l^ be employed, 
the possession is generally thereby indicated as either organic or 
natural. 

*tim*t*} "I &l*i &M d Man has ( by nature ) two hands ; 
*il >iim*$ "l ££l«i & This man has two shops. 

More usually, however, the genitive in -<{[ followed by MRl is 
employed to indicate possession acquired, not organic. 

cM Mttl w*S "HIM ^Ml'Hl d He has a lac (100,000) of rupees. 

The impersonal verb <r*iW5l when employed without an infini- 
tive has the signification of ' need,' • want.' The person who 
stands in need, in whom the need terminates, is put in the Objec- 
tive Case ; the subject-matter constituting the need, that which 
is needed, being of course in the Subjective Case (see § 67 ). 

Thus MRt CH'H') *Um£1 ^W^l a book is due to my friend, i. e. 

my friend has need of a book. 

For examples of the objective employed in various infinitival 
expressions see § 91. 

The purpose, or object, of a verbal action is expressed by the 
Objective Case of the Indefinite Infinitive. 

Thus ^ ^^ < M c U«-l ^Hl&^l ^ I have come to see you. 
In this construction the case termination - «} is very often 
omitted, hence instead of the above one would commonly say 

In accordance with the analogy of other languages this «*fa£l 
may well claim to be regarded as an ' infinitive of purpose,' and 
thus merely a contraction for the fuller form <^H£l eiftcl or wtal*! 
"*i\1 in order to see. Precisely analogous is the English "for 
to see" of Matthew XI. 8, where the for is, of course, pleo- 
nastic, 



Objective- 
Case 
a. after &r3„ 



i. after 



e. as inf. of 
purpose. 



134 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART III. 



Adjectives indicating fitness, affection, conformity, are construed 
d. after adjj. with the Objective Case. Such are the following i 



of fitness &c. 



Agential 

Case 
o. as subj- 
ect of Trans. 

Verb in 
Past Indef. 
& Perf. Ten- 
ses. 

b. as cause 
or instru- 
ment. 



c. before 
h$£{, and 
after tpft 
and fam. 



d. for de- 
scriptive 
adjuncts. 



e. with 



*lp4 suitable ; HiRct befitting - r 

<H&l$i dear ; (V*t beloved ; 

:y i^i'H^i conforming to. 

136» The Agential Case# 

When the Past Indef. Indie, or any Perfect tense of a transi- 
tive verb is employed, the agent concerned in the verbal action- 
is put in the Agential Case : see § 131. 

cl§j 3{«i <st u *U He wrote a book. 

The instrument, or whatever may even with some laxity be= 
regarded as a cause, is put in the Agential Case: see § 137. 
Thus a>UM$) &£{ ^i<H^fl^ &l*>\ We hear with the ear ; 

cl cllH *lRl Mi*ll S He has fallen ill of fever.. 

The preposition i^l^ by means of governs the Agential Case t 
soe § 98. 

The prepositions <H^ft and fk«tt may be prefixed to a noun, 
which will then stand in the Agential Case, the whole compound 
acquiring an adverbial force. 

Thus cptf pRl^ thoughtlessly; 
pHl 4R§j causelessly. 
Descriptive adjuncts such as by name f by caste, &c, are put i» 
the Agential Case. Compare § 139. 

SllMl<H «il>l a>\4 Sli^t &cU There was a boy, Gopdl by name. 

»tt *tl«^l <"l(h»l «U6uqd, *& *>i(kh[\ "WiMtM &, This 
man is as to caste a Brahman and as to position ( authority ) a 
magistrate. 

The impersonal verb avJySl when employed with an infinitive 
has the signification of ' duty,' and the person by whom the duty 
should be discharged is put in the Agential Case : see § 67. 

Thus cl^j £ilM£l efReQ <J*iW3l The reading a booh is due- 

by him, i. e. he ought to read a booh. 

In this construction the <ntWSl is frequently omitted without, 
however, any change in the meaning. 



THE ABLATIVE CASE. 



135 



Thus the above sentence might be written simply 
cl§l alnft W-(l ; see § 91. 

13T, The Ablative Case. 

The ' time from when} ' the place from where' and ' the cause 
from which' are put in the Ablative Case. See also § 139. 

Thus £ &l<H*ft >tl£l ^ / have been ill since yesterday, 

cla>U *j°tWSft 'MlcMl They came from Bombay, 
"MlM^l £5"*H *11H & From sin suffering arises. 

The place-idea associated with the Ablative Case is sometimes 
expressed more definitely by adding the ablatival termination 
-Ml to the Locative Case, or to a preposition indicating place. 

Thus ^ ^"H*^ *fUcr*U I came out from (in) the house, 

WQ C^UU&lMl ^1=% Lallu came from (at) school. 
Similarly *{\aWl from under; dM^ft from above, ,J \Vt^?^\. 
from (at) the side of; "4Rl*(l from beside ; &c, &c. 
See also § 99. 

The Instrument is often put in the Ablative instead of in the 
Agential Case. Compare § 136. 

Thus ^HlMS} 4l«iMl *U<Htffl^\ ^l^l We hear with the ear; 
*t c$ eilifUft "*\\A\ I struck him ivith a stick. 

With the passive voice, especially when indicating potentiality, 
and occasionally also with intransitive verbs, the agent is put in 
the Ablative Case. 

3*11 3rl"H MUl^ft Hl*i This work was done by me, hence 

I did this work ; 

ii ^ 4l"H fl"HRlMl i^tM ? What, can such work be done by 

you? Can you do such tvork ? 

cl MRlMl *J*i That occurred through me, or I caused that ; 

51^ "HttlMl "i^ Such came to pass through me. 

So far as pronouns are concerned, a personal agent is usually 
indicated by the longer Ablatival form in -«Hl*ft, but an imper- 
sonal cause or instrument by the shorter in -2ft (See § 36). 

Thus cMtMl by him, or by that (person) ; ci?ft by that 
(cause), thereby ; 
SMlMl by this (person) ; ^\ by this (thing), hereby. 



CHAP. in. 



Ablative 

a. of time, 

b. of place, 

c. of cause, 



d. of instru- 
ment. 



e. in passival 
construc- 
tion. 



"U*ft as 
distinguish- 
ed from 



136 



GUJARAT* GRAMMAR* 



PART in. 

The Abla- 
tive in 

expressing 
degree 

-a. compara- 
tive, 

■b. superla- 
tive. 



Ablative 

with 
«. certain 
adjectives, 



i, certain 
verbs. 



A. Si - Loc. 
to express 
1. place on, 
near, in, 
which, 



The Comparative Degree is expressed by a simple adjective 
preceded by the ablative of the object with which the comparison 
is instituted. See § 28, A. 

Thus »tt &l^l «{H«Q *ltfl & This boy is better than 

tlie other. 

The Superlative Degree is expressed by a simple adjective 
preceded by ^SQ or by any other equivalent for than all. 
See § 28, B. 

Thus »il dl&\l *£«U *lftl & This boy is the best, lit. This 

boy is better than all (others). 
Many adjectives in which the idea of comparison is implied 
are construed with the Ablative Case. Such are 
^•Huj contrary to, 

*M«-M other than, 

**£% different from, 

«H*U2| twice as much, 
1^114 three times as much, &c. t &c. 
Verbs expressing certain emotions, such as 

tn| } tofm - 

y^Hlcj to be ashamed, 

fcMHl'l ^ to beware, 
t^V^l^ to rejoice, 

are construed with the Ablative. 

138* The Locative Case. 

The Locative Case has three terminations -zo\, -"*{{, and -*Mi, 
each of which will be treated separately. 
A, S\ - Locative. 

' Place on which, near ichich, in which,' is put in the 
5}- Locative Case, 
cl MtiSl Mi^il £ He has fallen ill, lit. on the cot ; 
cl "H^ ^l$U & He is seated at the banyan tree ; 

cl ^ll{\a5\ «V££U & He is seated in the carriage. 
Also, with a less distinctively local meaning, 

2* hVH. *t >tft &$ =U u *i & This work I have kept in my 
own hands. 



THE LOCATIVE CASE. 



137 



Af ler verbs of motion * place to which, towards which ' is put in 
the »l- Locative. 

£ ?U stloSh I came (home) to the house ,• 
cl ^ll 3 l% He tuent to Khedcl. 
This a>\- Loc. termination, however, is not unfrequently omitted. 
Thus «H^l \k\ *l**ft 61*1 *m**(i ( for *l»*l»tl»l <fe$ ) The 
whole country came into the king's hand, 
cl ^lelft ^U"H h\[ ( for ^icll«it»l au>l ) He went to his 
own town, 

cl=*>U UW mi ( for ^*cl ) They went to Sural. 
If however the noun denoting the place end in »il or §, the 
3}- Loc. suffix, so far from being omitted, itself supplants the 
»U or r §. 

Thus el Sl& M^i^l He reached Gogha. 
' Time at which, or in which ' is put in the ail— Loc. See also 
^Hl- Loc. and § 139. 

4 Mfafll H^ ^(Cl* SMt^t / came here in tJteJifth year. 
So also «ici M<Hlcl <3£**i Rise at break of day, lit. rise at 

the becoming daion. 
To express time that has elapsed since a past action, the 
Perfect Infinitive of the verb indicating that action is employed 
In the »l- Loc. or in the 3 Loc. -Gen. Case. Any noun or 
pronoun in agreement with this infinitive is put in the ^l Loc.- 
Gen. Case, 

I eft S 5 * ^ ^ *wi d ( for «l*ll»l H^ ) 

[ Tioo years have elapsed since lie died ; 

. [ ift **& *il**l MR TOl «iMl $ ( for >iRlSl *HloMlSl ) 
J Five years kave elapsed since I came here ; 
( <3MC-{1 C-oM «KlHl "i-Mft *Hl<W =>MU few <*& HH\ &. 
<c< To-day eight days have elapsed since the above-written 
V event took place. 
In this construction the 3}- Locatival form (sentences a and b) 
is not improbably a mere abbreviation of the longer form 
in 5\*ft ( see § 137 ), so that 
in sentence a ) eft *ja>l equals eft ^*tt, 
and in sentence b ) m\ *n& *H[<% equals ^ »l& »U**Wl. 
18 



CHAP. Ill 



2. Place to, 
towards, 
which. 



3. Time at, 
in which. 



4. Time 

since 
which. 



13S 

PART III. 



5. Price. 



Preposi- 
tional go- 
vernment 
in Si - Loc. 
and in 7{ 
Loc.-Gen. 



Adverbial 
Si - Loo. 



B. Hi -Loc, 

to express 

1. place in, 

within, 

which, 



GUJAItATI GRAfoMAE. 

On the other hand the form we have termed •} Locntival- 
Genitive ( sentence c ) is regarded by some grammarians as the 
simple Objective Case. Analogy, however, points rather to 
its being a Locative, and, if so, it must be the Locative of a 
Genitive in adjectival agreement with some such word as ^Wl^ft 
'from the time' understood. Thus 

in sentence c ) <§M<-ft <-i^H<<u °{l«il °t-M$ equals (§M«{1 C-OHC-ft oft^u 

1 Price at which ' is occasionally put in the S\- Locative. 
See also *ti- Loc. and § 139. 

>t *Hl §& M^W ^Mlwl eQQl I tool this horse at Rs. 50, 

The preposition 8lW3, or its variant \£fo, can govern its noun 
in the 5l - Loc. Case. See § 9 8. 

WH'pft *i& ffi'W^l / sJiall go vid Bhavnagar ; 
or with loss of the Locatival Case ending ©tl c l«i^i^, *l£} <tfWy ; 
cl all* \& *itft *uft *lRfl »&l The thief ran off ly that road. 

Many prepositions ( *#, 4l£, «*ft, 1h\% t °i&, ^ &c, &c.) 
are relics of old masc. or neut. nouns in the a»l- Loc. Case, though 
their Locatival meaning may have quite passed away. Such 
prepositions for the most part govern their nouns in the «} 
Loc.-Gen. Case. See § 95. 

Many adverbs also are formed from nouns in the aJl-Loc, 
Thus ct*l <H$l MHtMl You are welcome ( well-come ). 
So too #i\\ ? when ? <*Hl^ ... cMl^ when ... then • 

&<& or §<& at last ; »tP»& at last. 
15. H\ - Locative. 

1 Place in tvhich, within which ' is put in the >li 
Loc. Case. 
3HI lt"*i"*ii l^i ^ I dwell in this town, 

cl MlclHt HWl R^ & He lives in his own house ■ 
and, with a less distinctively local meaning, 

H\M &l*Pii Si 4 Pi ^liM^i & This work is entrusted into 

my hands. 
Sometimes, but not often, Hi has the force of ' on/ ' upon/ 
"4'Wi <r*Ut H^'Hl -8vtW«l One ought to wear shoes on the feet ; 



THE LOCATIVE CASE. 



ISO 



Sli^l "WSiPii ^SU S The boy is lying on the cot ; 
"Ml^Ri "Hl^l«i <HW*l / shall take (it) by force, lit. having 

struck on the head. 
' Time at which, or daring which' is put in the "HI- Loc. See also 
£*- Loc. and § 139. 

W^ft *M ^iJH tsll *lil"Hi ^1 =0(ct ^K-fl r/iis custom obtained 
in the sixth century before the Christian era. 

'Price at which' is put in the 'Ml- Loc. See also aJj-Loc.and § 139. 
cl ^llt o£i ^Ml^Rl «M § The horse is going for Bs. 200. 

When a comparison is instituted between the qualities of two 
objects, each may be put in the -"Hi Loc. 

*tRi ^ clMi £ll "%R & ? What is the difference betiveen this 

and that ? 

a M«/ c U<Al'Hi *& ^HRVHi III *t°i^ S ? What is the con- 
nexion between light and darkness ? 

Note also such Superlatives as M^Rt Hi^ the most, the greatest, 
in § 28. 

The preposition ^WW, or its variant \^\, can govern its noun 
in the "Hi- Loc. Case. See § 9 8. 

WH'PlVH'l ^tiM otf'eKl / sfozK r/o w'4 Bhavnagar ; or simply 
Oil'H'W stlfcl <tftfel with loss of the locative termination. 

5>U^ Zess than and £H £ess fo/ are very frequently construed 
with the *ti- Locative Case. 

Thus eld H\ *MOT ^4 ailS^ii iiW^i a»\i^ »ug § fiw 
house is somewhat less than a gau from here ; 
1<$Ri MR RpU i"H § It is five minutes to three, 
or it is three less by five minutes. 

C» ^Hl - Locative. 

The Sanskrit Locative ( feminine ) ending *h\ } surviving in 
Gujarat! in the Continuous Infinitive form, indicates ' time during 
which,' i while.' 

Thus 3tR*ii*(l ^HlHcli 4 M£\ a&l I fell down while coming 
from the toivn, lit. in coming from the town ; 
*i& =^1^*1 %ltf\ =IR <HPQ ? How much time ivas 
taken in coming here ? 



chap, in: 



2. Time at, 
during, 
which, 



3. Price, 



4. Compari- 
son, 



5. Superla- 
tive deg- 
ree. 
Preposi- 
tional gov- 
ernment in 
Hi- Loc. 



C.^i-Loo.' 
of Cont. 
Infin. 



140 



GUJARAT! GRAMMAR. 



PART III. I 



[ Also HI - 
Loc.ofCont. 
Infin.J 



Preposi- 
tional gov- 
ernment in 
a*ti - Loc. 



Adverbial 
**i-Loc. 



Genitive to 
express 

1. Origin, 



iiQitct «lcli *H>1 @SHl We rose at ureal of day:, lit. 
at the becoming dawn. 
This Continuous Infinitive in -cli would seem to have beer* 
mistaken for the Continuous Partiefple in -clfc-cft -$j, from which 
have arisen such forms as 'HlHctl'Hi in coming, a/dPii in going- 
Quite possibly, however, this -cU -eft -Q form should be regarded! 
not only as a Continuous Participle but also as a Continuous 
Infinitive, and if so, then aHl<HcU"Hi, <WCtRi, and the like forms 
are simply the regular >li- Locative of the Continuous Infinitive. 
See §150,/. 

The prepositions siift ( \{£\ ), eRig, SPfl, &H1 govern <§u, <**fr„ 
cMi, and JHl in the =»ii - Loc. 

Sli *lvA ( for SVMt *uA ) by here ; &\ *iyi} by there ; m Ifeft * 
by where ? a*«U HvA ... <*i\ «IW<1 by what way ... by that xmy» 
See § 98. 

The Sfi - Locative termination is present in a few adverbs. 

3li here ; i*\\ where ? 8*4*1 ... <<U where ... there ; H&Hl cs£ 
./srrf ; "M^$l^«Hi /irsi of aW. 

139* The Genitive Case. 

A noun in the Genitive Case is irn reality of adjectival meaning 
(cf. in English ' a ship of »/ood ' and ' a wooden ship r ), and 
accordingly all genitives admit of adjectival inflexion as to gender, 
number and case. Of the various, and numerous relations that 
can be expressed by the Genitive in GujaratJ the following are 
the most common. 

1. Origin, source, or cause : 

^fcrtl fil^tlHm Buddha's teaching, i. e. the teaching 

that originated with Buddha, 
HlM^l llH. The guilt of sin, i. &. due to sin, 

caused by sin. 



2. Posses- 
sion, 



Possession : 

a) natural, 

b) acquired, 



the wisdom of maw, human wisdom ; 

the father's house, the house belonging 
to the father. 



THE SENSITIVE CARE. 

3. Partition or portion : 

\l(iHt'U MR^UgIPI a fifth fart of the board, 

4. Material : 

^Kl«{l cfl/l a ring of gold, a ring made of gold. 

5. Subjectiveness, 'in whom or -which' (from a source 

internal ) : 
■HI«{1 Ulfh a moiliers love, the love a mother bears. 

6. Objectiveness, 'on whom or which' (from a source ex- 

ternal ) : 
^IM'fl °{U tlie fear of the Icing, the fear a king 
excites in others. 

7. Price (see § 138 A and B ) : 

MR ^Ml^Hl'd Mm£\ a turban costing five rupees. 

8. Place : 

a) at or in which, 

e l«i'li %Q trees in the forest ; 

b) from which , 

(HSUHcMi ^Ul European dothes, dothesfrom Europe. 
9 Contents : 

Ml^ti Xi * l ^i a CU P containing zvater. 

10. Purpose: 

^MlHl %l£\ a large earthen vessel for (holding) grain. 

11. Age: 

a»l4 ^t^Ml "HUs^t a one-year-old heifer. 

12. Descriptive adjuncts : Compare § 136. 

^llfafi «il"H^l ^li §14^1 a boy of the name Govind, 
ytl&QJ n*t(c£U Sli >ll^ a man of the Brahman caste. 

In many cases a simple definite verb may have as its 
equivalent an allied noun coupled with some appropriate verb. 
Thus $U^ = *UH 4^1 ; %i<Ht^ = *<H[V\ iVd. When such equi- 
valent is employed, the Objective of the definite verb is changed 
to a Genitive in agreement with the allied noun. 

Thus a»& $11^1 = 5£h 3UH i\[ Seek this, make search for 

this ; 
c& HW^\ = clK\ *i<HM 4^1 Guard him, take care of 

him. 



141 

CHAP. III. 



$. Portion 

(parti- 
tive Gen.),. 
4. Material, 

5. Subjec- 
tiveness, 



6. Objec- 
tiveness, 



7. Price, 
8. Place, 



9. Contents,. 

10. Purpose, 

11. Age, 



^.Descrip- 
tive ad- 
juncts. 



142 



GU.TARATI GRAMMAR. 



PART III. 

Genitive 
with a. cer- 
tain adjec- 
tives, 



b. certain 
verba. 



Genitive of 
Time from, 
at, or dur- 
ing, which. 



Preposi- 
tional gov- 
ernment in 

oblique 

Gen. 



Some adjectives expressing 'desire,' ' wish ' are construed with 
the Gen. Case. Such are (he following. 

cR**U thirsty ; SJ^MI hungry ; $U<Kl covetous ; 

€H<H^£ grasping; <Hl&4 zealous. 

Thus cl *t?£U QJ^l *>& Ml^l cR^l S 

He is hungry for food (grain) and thirsty for water ; 
ty«i«}l iU^ft covetous of wealth ; 
fce-^l Q[<H% grasping after treasure ; 
*kM«}l <HlPl& zealous for the truth. 
A few verbs also, among which are ^tiiH^ to hear f and ^iK^ to 
regard, believe, obey, are sometimes construed with the Genitive Case. 
Thus a»lti *U<H&U Hear this one ; >ll| "H$t Believe me ; 
§ cUll ^14} ^ «} clri *ll r tl^l I am his servant and 

shall obey him. 
Probably, however, in these sentences some neuter word such 
as hQ, or 4^, is understood after the Genitive. 

' Time from when * is put in the Genitive (See § 137). 

^Ml il"H ^1 fe^i H*i & This work was over two days ago. 
Also ' time at which or during which ' stands in the Genitive. 
See also § 138. 

cl ^ivfly fcl^l <& u Ml fecit He had fasted for forty days ; 
*Hl H^H S&Ul«-ll &=>l& This foolish person sleeps in the day 

(by day) ; 

or, in accordance with § 138. A., the a>V- Loc. may take the 
place of this Gen., thus »Ml \}A t<kQ> &=A &. 

Prepositions were originally nouns in an oblique case, and the 
words they govern were regarded as in adjectival agreement with 
them. Hence the governed words, even to the present day, are 
put in the oblique genitive -'tl or —-ft or -3. See § 95. 



CHAPTER IV. 

ON THE SIGNIFICATION OF THE TENSES. 
HO. The Present Indefinite Tense. 

efc. The same verbal form is used for the Pres. Indef. 
Indicativo and for the Pres. Indef. Subjunctive, but the 
Jndicatival meaning has almost entirely yielded to the 
Subjunctival or Conditional. 

*5lW Hl^y «HtM<^l &h[\l $X clt cl ^i&W Wft %(M i^l 
If any man make a mock of us, we should bear it patiently t 
51=11 i*RHl tt«£l clt &S141 '*U l ^t'U<tf ^M $t£t Such words 
of mockery may indeed grace the lips of mean persons. 

b. The Conditional and Interrogatival meanings being 
closely allied, this Pres. Indef. Tense is frequently 
employed when asking a question, especially with the 
implied ideas of permission and potentiality. 

4 ^HS^ *Hl^ • May I come in ? Can I come in ? 

"WllS (=141 Is'H Mils ? How can the crops ripen without rain ? 

c. An implied wish can also be indicated by the Pres. 
Indef. Tense, and accordingly this tense is of frequent 
occurrence in prayer. 

aJ&i $U1 *rtwfft M*u1 »te 1R «*l@ May I, by the favour 
of Sarasvatl, some day see such a dictionary ; 

5U*"tSU ctrtl = w it^t'l *MR<n ^IdKl y W arift •>$ May kings 
lay their crowns before Thy throne; 
fcJ^ Cl"Hl% <H|i h\ May God prosper you ! 
Note here the allied Precative form in -v{\, § 63. 

d. A frequentative meaning, ' used to,'* cm attach to the 
Pres. Indef. 

W -H4 §\\ <3M^lMi4 *P>{& il«vuh W*RU\ h\ The king, 
keeping authority over all, used to dispense justice to his 
subjects ; 

ci •*& H[\ 3 "H-HitoMt i^ "H -*iQ. £ riili He used to beat me 
and keep scolding me, so I ran off. 



CHAP. IV; 

Pres. Indef. 
Tense to 
express 
1. Condi- 
tional state- 
ment, 



2. Interro* 
gation, 



3. Desire, 



4. Custom, 



144 



PART ITT. | 

I 

fi. Future 
action (po- 
tential ), 



6. Present 
■action (po- 
tential), 



7. General 
truths. 



GUJAKATT GRAMMAR. 



Fut. Indef. 
Tense to 
express 
1.. Future 
action, 

2. Courte- 
ous com- 
mand. 

a. of 
Narration, 



6. of 
Doubt. 



Past Indef. 
Tense to ex- 
press 






A The Pres. Indef, is occasionally employed as a rotentt.il 
Future Indefinite. 

s^UtS 9M\ MtS 5*3 iCl «t& *ttM It can ( will ) never be that 
ilie crops can ( will ) ripen without rain, 

f. In Potential Passives the Pres. Indef. is frequently used 
with the present signification. 

•HI 4R *tRt*U HW | This work can be done by me, or 
•HI *l"H m\\$[ 4=0 a*W J I can do this work. 

g. The Present Indef. may be employed for stating general 
truths. See § 143. 

m*\\ (IS*£U •H'i'HH cil m<f/ <M$} A mother alone knows 

( can know ) the feelings of a mother's heart. 

Compare «*§} cl <M§| Who brings forth knows. 

Hence this tense is of very frequent occurrence in proverbs, 

maxims, &c., ^Ut cl "H^ " Whose diggeth (a pit ) 

shall fall ( therein )." 

141. The Future Indefinite Tense. 

a. The Future Indef. indicates action in the future, 
whether real or supposed. 

Rl^Jl ^l^^i 41& "H^lR^l The queen will arrive to-morrow. 
"*{[([ "Hlcl h(& IH^ll ell... If you will not heed my words ... 

b. Regarding the use of the Fut. Indef. as a 'polite 
imperative' See § 63. 

c. The Future Indef. of the verb ' to be/ <t?l, may be 
used in narration as a Past Indefinite ( with implied 
contingency ). 

$lW»Ur hA *it^l &l*^l &3l ( Once upon a time ) there was 
a foolish little boy. 

d. &}\, as equivalent to the Subjunctive jfclM, is frequently 
employed to express doubt or contingency. 

»W 6$l MQJ cl P& 4 i^i *4^cll «i*(l It may be so, but I 
know nothing about it. 

143. The Past Indefinite Tense. 

a. The Past Indef. Indie, denotes action performed in 
past time ; thus £ *i4*H / rose. 



J 



THE PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE. 



Ii5 



h. The Past Indef. Indie, is sometimes used colloquially 
to express actioD to be done in the immediate future. 

<Sw 4n4 SU<Hl', '^tl^l, ^Ul"!.' 'Bring the dinner;' ' I shall 
bring ( it at once ), Sir' lit. ' Brought, Sir.' 
*/'<[ i S. £*, §cU<W h ^ 4 a>u anioMt Stop there a little, 
don't hurry, I am just coining. 

c. In the protasis or conditional clause a verb may stand 
in the Past Indef. Indie, to express an action which, 
1 hough yet in the future, is of past time when considered 
in relation to the verb of the apodosisor principal clause. 

^ M^l <Jvl "llC-Ml ell "HR >Hl$U -After this if you speak, you 

will be beaten. 
Here the speaking, though as yet a future action, will by 
the time of the prospective beating have become a past action ; 
wherefore "llRl in the Past Indefinite, 

d. The Past Indef. Subjunctive in the protasis or con- 
ditional clause is nearly always followed by the same 
verbal form in the apodosis or principal clause. 

These correlated Past Indefinite Subjunctives are equivalent 
to the English Conditional * had ' followed by ' would have.' 

<*l cl§j Steely 4^1 &lct ch *mAi Wcl ^MlclcW «i& Bad he 
made careful enquiry, such a time would not at all have come. 

143. The Present Continuous Tense* 

a. The Pres. Indef. Indie, being for the most part employed 
in a subjunctival sense, the Pres. Cont. Indie, serves not 
only as a Continuous but also as an Indef. Indie. 

^ "HRl <HlW«} ^l^ ^ I l° ve m V brother ; 

s^Sl hPVhi SOHl^l &\™{ We are writing letters, 

b. The Pres. Cont. Indie, is employed to express custom- 
ary action or general truths. See also § 140. 

■«! Pwil^t <M<3 ^ I go to school ; 

^RUS "tS^l^U cM^cft Wfl ^ & By changing one's 

garments one's health keeps good. 

c. In vivid narration the Pres. Cont. Indie, serves as an 
' Historic Present ' to express past action. 

19 



CHAP. IV. 



1. past ac- 
tion, 

2. action 
imminent 



3. action 
relatively 
past. 



4. had 

would nave. 



Pres. Cont t 

Indic.serves 

I; as Indef. 

Indie., 



2. for gene- 
ral truths, 



3. for His- 
toric Pre- 
sent, 



146 



GUJAIUTI GRAMMAR, 



PAKT III. 



4. for immi- 
nent future. 



Past Cont. 
Iudic. for 
3. past time, 



2. ' used to. 



Tense forms 
in -={WU and 



also in -*U 
and -S{£ll. 



M&l WW \^ «*>ll M^«U *4H d, ?a cl (it«i<rv uflc-^ oV^l rife 
ZViai gentleman also goes to put on his robe, hut it was not 
to be found anywhere. 

d. The Pres. Cont. Iridic, can express action to be done 

in the immediate future. 
Thus 4 <r*i(3 ^ %n^«i / am going, Sir. 

144» The Past Continuous Tense* 

a. The Past. Cont. Indie expresses definite action going 
on during past time. 

4 *HI & *11 <.H[\ ci «U<HcU &cil He was speaking when I came, 

b. The Past Cont. Indie, has often an implied frequentative 
meaning, ' used to,' which can be rendered still more 
emphatic by the omission of the auxiliary element 
6cU, -ctt, -£. 

ci ^IQJ cfRclt &cil He xvas reading the Purdn, or he 

used to read the Purdn ; 

RIM \br{ RPiH £&5l McU He (alivays) used to look ivith equal 

regard on rich and/ poor. 

145. Other Tenses. 

The Intentional Tenses contain either of the two Intentional 
Participles, though the -ll^l forms are more frequently used 
than the -«il^l. Whichever form be employed, the meaning is 
not appreciably affected. 

The Perfect Tenses contain either of the two declinable Perfect 
Participles in -Ml (-W, -*£) or 5&i ( -C-G, -t& ). With the latter 
the completeness of the verbal action seems to be somewhat more 
prominent than with the former. 

$1 ilH 4§ & I have done the lUorlc, 
^t il"H i^^j & I have done (and finished) the work. 
Note that while either the m or the 5^1 forms may be 
used for the Compound Perfect Tenses, only the -«h, and not the 
aH?U, forms are employed in the Simple Past Indefinite Tense. 

Hence >{ MM J§ I did the ivork, whereas expressions such as 
^ bVH. b\Q must be regarded as having §, or some other part 
of the auxiliary, understood. 



CHAPTER V. 

ON THE SIGNIFICATION OF THE INFINITIVES, 

Infinitives are called verbal nouns because partaking of the 
nature both of a veib and of a noun. Like verbs, an infinitive 
if transitive can govern an object. Like nouns, an infinitive 
admits of case government and can itself be either the subject or 
the object of a verb. 

146. The Indefinite Infinitive* 

a. The Indef. Infinitive in -=ti, -<fl, -^ is a verbal noun 
declined like any other noun save that the' -5\ 
termination, whether Locatival or Agential, is wanting. 
Instead of the 51 Loc. the Mi Loc. is used, and instead 
of the -Si Agential the Ablative in -*fl. Sometimes 
indeed the agential case of the Perf. Inf. is substituted 
for the same case of the Indef. Inf. thus »UM ( for 
aUMl^l ), or its contracted form *i& } instead of at<£eu5l 
or *\&\ 

b. Regarding the Infin. of purpose in -<Ht^ or -<Hl see § 135. 

c. Regarding the Infin. with avtW^l, expressing duty, 
'ought,' see § 67, a). 

The ovtW^l is itself often omitted, but even then it is regarded 
as understood, and consequently the meaning and construction of 
the sentence remain unaltered, see § 91, sentence 1. 

d. Regarding the Infin. with (Sl^ expressing necessity or 
wish, see § 81, sentence 2. 

c. Regarding the Infinitive with "Mi^ expressing obliga- 
tion, necessity, " have to" see the Obligative Compound 
Verb, § 87, a). 

/. Regarding the Oblique Infin. in -^l with "£^, expressing 
permission, ' let,' see the Permissive Compound Verb, 
$88. 



CHAP. V. 

Infinitive a 
verbal noun 



Indef. Inf. 
1. as decli- 
ned, 



2. of par- 
pose, 

3. of duty, 



4. of wish, 



of obli- 
gation, 



6. of permis- 
sion. 



148 



GUJARAT! GRAMMAR. 



PART III. 

7. of incep- 
tion. 



Cont. Infin. 
1. Locatival 

to express 

time, 



2. Neut. 
Plur. when 
associated 
with a>ue[_ 

i&, w\& 

and Str^Wa- 



g. Regarding the Oblique Infinitive in -<Hl with <JiR^, M-i^ 
or "HiiQ, to indicate an action as beginning, see the. 
Inceptive Compound Verb, § 89. 

147» The Continuous Infinitives* 

There are two continuous Infinitives, which are, however, iden- 
tical in form. One bears the Sanskrit loc. fern, termination i» 
^Hi, and the other the GujaratI neut. pL termination, also in *hL 

a. The Locativat Continuous Infinitive in -fli is used as an 
adverbial adjunet t® indicate time during which, while, 
also occasionally by means of. See § 138 c).. 

H^l" SMWcti H^fl <HK ^Ptt It took a long time to come here, 

lit. in the coming t here-.. 

<H<^cli Mfid »{lM<n>, <H"»Hcti StRiMt «iW O-ne becomes a scholar 

by studying, a scribe by writing. 
This Infinitival form can be repeated in order to emphasize- 
the continuance of the verbal action. 

ci ItiCli "£ucti M{1 HMl He fell while running, lit. in the 

running ( and ) running. 
Regarding allied forms such as ^Hl'Hcll'Hl in coming, oyctRfc 
in going, see | 138 c).. 

b. The Neut. Plur. Continuous Infinitive in -cli occurs only 
in the Subjective Case, and only in connexion with the 
verb, *n\<i^ to know ( how to ), *u"»H$ to learn, and 
tfl"**^ to teach. With *Ml<Hi^ invariably, and with; 
tfl"^ and *ft"*H<H$ generally, this -cli Infinitive is sub- 
stituted for the Inf. in -^. 

Thus "H^l «Hil»Ji ^l<Hcti *HHl S I know how to speak 

English ; 
*U<acti atttsu MfcA^HlMl £&Ql After having learnt to 






walk he keeps run- 
ning about the whole 
day ; 

I am learning to write 
GujaratI ; 

I teach arithmetic, lit. 
the doing sums. 



** 



THE PERFECT INFINITIVE, 

These verbs however, can be employed absolutely, "without an 
infinitive. 

•^^ «il"Hl ^\ C&HW. ^HMl & cl He who knows his 

tables and sums ; 

<| a>{i(25 ^(1^4 |j I amleaming English. 

148. The Intentional Infinitive* 

Tbe Intentional Infinitive in -qkll, -^iK), -41^ of a Transitive 
Verb can be so used that it shall agree in gender and number 
with its object, as c& Sl^Jt %Vi\ StW «^4H.l d He is to remove 
the grain into a hole ; 

*U*UW/l <\<\*1\ <{& M^tlSl <HIH§}1 KWU'tf S Under the 
auspices of the Society the following lectures ivill be delivered, 
but the more frequent construction with this Infinitive is to 
employ it in the neut. sing., as. 

afcll ^lXl3 Mmi-i clH^l ^l$«H «tR$t You will find it 

difficult to catch such thieves. 

a. The Int. Inf. scarcely differs in meaning from the Indef. 
Inf., though perhaps more of the idea of futurity enters 
into the former. The Int. Inf. in commonly employed 
in dependence on the verbs *r^ to tell, ^Twi<J to hear, 
WmMQ to command, and others. 

cl§} cl=uU«} <H$ y'Hld 4^ He told them to lie on the floor ; 

cl 'U'Hllcnid Mlctl'd cR* ^Wld *1 $ Ee tells the one of 

that name to come to his side ; 

M S\«i ^U^ld ^ii<H<r*i I heard what he said ; 

cl§j clSU^ M'Httft %<\\i \\^X<^ He bade them keep on 

their guard ; 
>£l ^Hl tt W>ti M^l-i >lc4 I managed to enter by this door ; 
ckl 'H'i'Hi Mitel <r/=ll«i =^1^ He bethought himself of going 

back, 

b. On the Int. Inf. with ^l^ expressing necessity or wish, 
see § 91, sentences 3 and 4. 



1 4 f > 
CHAP. V. 



Inten. Inf. 

serves 

1. as Indef. 

Inf. 



2. to express 
wish. 



150 
PART III. 

Pe r f. Inf. 

1. as fcense- 

fortn, 

2. as noun, 



3. in Freq. 
Comp. 
Verbs. 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 

140. The Perfect Infinitive. 

a. The Perf. Inf. in -%, -W, -*i is employed as a tense form 
in the Pasr, Indef. Indie, and in all Perfects of Trans. 
Verbs. See §§ 52 b, 58, 62. 

6. The Perf. Inf. is frequently used as a noun in one or 
other of the oblique cases. 

4 5*3 *4& €$ <l»U H^. iU£[ ell H& *& ? Will they not 

cast me out for having done so ? 

•*&% MlHl M^i Before having died. 

H§j ^ ell *tfe MQJ %lft Mia& cI^hRJ 1W & Z%« body is 

nourished not by eating much but by digesting well. 
MC-fl MIH£1 £lMl<ft <Hlcl Sitf »l «\«^l rife jy owe fcnew o/ 27*0 
fai?*oan having been cut, lit. iVo one knew that matter 
of the having cut the turban. 
For Locatival forms such as 

c$ Tj5l Since its death, see § 138, A. 
c. Regarding the Neut. Plur. of the Perf. Inf. in -Ml 
as the first element of Frequentative Compound Verbs, 
see § 84. 



L_ 



CHAPTER VI. 

ON THE SIGNIFICATION OF THE PARTICIPLES- 

The Participles are verbal adjectives, inasmuch as like verbs 
they can govern, and like adjectives they can qualify, nouns. 

150. The Continuous Participle. 

a. The Cont. Part in —ell, -cfl, -cj is used as an adjective 
in adjectival agreement With the noun it qualifies. 

^UStclt l^ct the present time) 
(§ 3 13 3Jli a groining tree. 

This Cont. Part., if repeated, indicates more emphatically the 
Continuance of the verbal action. 

Rolling and rolling it came before the mouth of the grave* 

b. Regarding the Cont. Part, as the first element of 
all Continuous Tenses except the Pies. Cont. Indie, 
see §§ 54, 55, 60, 61, 62. 

c. Regarding the Cont. Part, when employed in the Past 
Cont. Indie, without the auxiliary £cll,-cfl,-c3, in order 
to express frequent or customary action, see § 144. 

d. Regarding the use of the Cont. Part, for the Negative 
Imperative, see § 71. 

e. Regarding the use of the Cont. Part, with w^, ^Ml^, 
and ^^, in Continuative Compound Verbs, see § 85. 

/, This Cont. Part, occasionally does duty for a Cont. 
Infinitival form, and is then treated as a noun. 

He heard a noise as of persons coming and going ; 

<Ml ^ »tfl «tt$J <MW $ SMCll &H1 "H^ *li<*R$l 

There I saw such things as I shall remember as long as Hive. 

See also § 138, C. 



CHAP. Vt 

Participle 
a verbal ad- 
jective. 



Cont. Part. 
1, as adjec- 
tive) 



2. as tense- 
form, 



3. for ' used 
to,' 



4. as Neg. 
Imperative, 

5. in Cont, 
Comp. Verbs 

6. as Cont. 
Infin. 



152 



GUJAUATl GRAMMAR, 



PAET VI. 

Int. Part. 
1. as adjec- 
tive, 



2. as tense- 
form, 



Perf. Part. 

in -*t, . 

1. as adjec- 
tive, 



2. as tense- 
form, 



3. In Cont. 
Oomp. 
Verbs. 



151. The Intentional Participles* 

The Intentional participle in -«ii^l may be used with adjectival 
meaning. 

"it ^U-Ml^l "Ht^y A man who talks much. 

When -=U«il forms are adjectival, it will be found that they are 
nearly always the genitive of the Indef. Infin. 

VH^l 'H'^icl play-time, lit. time of playing. 
cy^Ml <=iPl opportunity of going. 

b. In all the Inten. Tenses either the -=IWU or the -«il^l 
Inten. Part is employed. The foimer ( -«tMl ) is more 
frequently met with, but the latter can be substituted 
for it without appreciably affecting -the meaning. 
See § § 56, 61. 
<| ff/HHl ^§ I am about to go. 

<M 4 «**il^l ^Kl"« Had I been about to go 

%\M °{l^t ^l *lPl MQJ atmuW Some other good opportu- 
nity indeed ivill assuredly come. 
The auxiliary in the Pres. Int. Ind. is sometimes, though 
rarely, omitted. 

Thus <| cU oV^tdl, / indeed am going {am about to gc) ; 

<£ *Hld ^ 1$, what wil1 he , will be. 



152* The Perfect Participles. 



A. 



a. The Perfect Part, in -*£ ( neuter ) is occasionally 

used with adjectival meaning. 

fctSl t<k\1 "H^cli ^cli M<$J H\Hl *iPl ^mMlotf After striving on 
hard for many a day, the loolced-for juncture %vill 
assuredly come ; 

<HMl \i. M* "^iU "H^J ^it^l On a fidl stomach sugar even 

(tastes) salty. 

b. Regarding the Perf. Part, in -m as a tense form in 

the Past. Indef. Indie, and in all Perfect Tenses of 
Intransitive Verbs, see § § 52, 57, and 61. 

c. Regarding the use of the Perf. Part, in -*U with 

MQ in Continuative Compound Verbs, see § 85. 



THE CONNECTIVE PARTICIfLE. 



153 



B, a. The Perf. Part, in -5*$U, -<fl, -&, is frequently 
used with adjectival meaning, as 
iXQ hVH. the work that has been done; 

V^l&l §15^1 « boy that has strayed. 
This form is sometimes employed without any gendral 
termination, thus 

ci ck =>li VH&i &l^t d He is a boy given to straying. 
Note that in Trans. Verbs this Perf. Part, in -anill has often 
the passival signification, 

fil^liU il^ a luritten letter, i, e» a letter tlvat has been written. 
This Perf. Part, is often used absolutely in the neut. sirjg., 
when, of course, it becomes practically a noun. 

aJ^^i Sl^Hfcj "Hi^it Read what has been written by him. 
h. Regarding the Perf. Part, in -3$l as the first element 
of all Perfect Tenses, see § § 57, 58, 61, 62, 

153* The Connective Participle. 

«. When two or more verbs are employed in connexion 
with the same subject, all the verbs except the last 
usually appear in Gujarat! as Connective Participles 
in -i or -4*{. 

Thus <^ a»Rtfl HlS «HK# 5^ 4f£ ^ 

He came to us and said 

crsj ^tctKi %«i^ ^ hm<[ S%% 

He called his officers near and said 

b. To express the attendant circumstances under which 

an action takes place the Connective Participle may 
be employed, the noun associated with the Participle 
being in the Subjective Case. 
^Wl "^^ *iW fliSl MiMl 4cll The douds having cleared, the 

sun shone forth. 

The door will be opened, (lit. having opened the door) at £ 
o'clock; and the play will begin precisely at half past nine. 

c. Regarding the use of the Connective Participle in -y 

in Intensive, Completive and Potential Compound 
Verbs, see § § 81-83. 
20 



CHAP. VI. 



Perf. part. 
in-S^j, 
1. as adjec- 
tive, 



2. as tense- 
form. 



Connect. 

Part. 
1. associated 
with a verb, 



2. in 'Abso- 
lute' con- 
struction, 



3. in Com- 
pound 
Verbs. 



APPENDIX 



On the Ancestry of the Gnjarati Language* 



APPENDIX 
I. 



Early 
migrations 

of the 

Arj'aus into 

a) Persia, 

5) India. 



The 'Mid- 

land' and 

its ' Outer 

Band.' 



-^HIH JsM — M^d §c|« <HlHl*UKl *P(l ! eft Sl^ b£i 
Taylor's Larger Gujaratl Grammar, 4th Edn,, 



*m hi 2 -" 
page 232. 

From the common borderland of Europe and Asia, that 
steppe country of Southern Russia which was probably the early 
" Home " of the Indo-Europeans, some pastoral tribes in remote 
prehistoric times wandered eastwards by a route that led them, 
it would seem, north of the Caspian Sea. In the highlands of 
Khokand and Badakhshan this offshoot divided into two 
sections — one, the Eranian, migrating eastwards beyond the 
Pamirs and westwards towards Merv and the confines of Persia, 
the other crossing the Hindu Kush and pushing on through the 
valley of the Kabul River into the plains of Northern India. Id 
the course, it may be, of several centuries these earliest Aryan 
immigrants were themselves diiven to the east and west and 
south by successive hordes of intruders from the north. Though 
members of the same Aryan stoek, the late-comers spoke a 
dialect different from that of the earlier invaders. 

The first immigrants, after lingering for a time in the Upper 
Doab and on (he banks of the river Saraswatl, had made their 
heme in the Madhya-Des'a— .that Midland consisting of the 
entire Gangetic Doab and of the districts to its north and south. 
The later arrivals, however, dispossessed their predecessors of 
this tract of country, forcing them ever outwards. Thus was 
formed on *' Outer Band," which, fencing round, as it were, the 
inner Midland, comprised the Panjab, Sind, Gujarat, Rajputana, 
Oudh, and Bihar. But in process of years the Aryans inhabiting 
the Midland so increased in numbers that some expansion of 
their territory became imperative, and ere long both their armies 



* This Appendix, treating of the origin of Gujaratl and of its relationship 
to other Indo-Aryan Vernaculars, is taken for the most part from the admi- 
rable chapter on " Languages " contributed by Dr. Geo. A. Giierson, C. I. E. r 
to the New Edition (1907) of the Imperial Gazetteer of India. 



... 



0N T THE ANCESTRY OF THE GUJAItATI LANGUAGE. 



155 



and their language penetrated the Outer Band, where, as a 
consequence, mixed forms of speech now arose. "While of each 
of these the linguistic substratum remained that of the Outer 
Band, the speech of the Midland more or less dominated them 
all. As was natural, the Midland sway was strongest in the 
districts contiguous to its own borders, but it became feebler in 
regions more remote. For example, " the language of North- 
eastern Rajputana is very similar to that of Ag ra , but as we go 
south and west we see more and more of the original language 
of the Outer Band, until it is quite prominent in Gujarat." The 
mixed, or intermediate, languages that thus originated were 
spoken in Eastern Panjab, Gujarat, Rajputana, and Oudh. 

Then [again beyond these language-areas lay the districts 
held by the erewhile inhabitants of the Outer Band, who, 
yielding to the^pressure from* the Midland, had forsaken their 
former seats. Their subsequent occupation of the South Country 
is evidenced by the Marathi of the Central Provinces and Berar 
and Bombay, and their settlement still further east by Oriya, 
Bangall, and Assamese, all of them true Outer Languages, 
unaffected in their essence by the speech of the Midland. 

Now already some three thousand years ago this Midland or 
its Upper Doab posssssed a body of lyric poetry — the earlier 
Hymns of the Vedas. Centuries later Brahman grammarians, 
pre-eminent amongst whom was Panini ( fl. 4th cent. b. c. ), 
availed to reduce to rigid rule the elements of this Vedic tongue, 
polishing, purifying, and stiffening it into the Classical Sanskrit 
(Samskrt) or ' lingua confeda.' Before, however, this elaboration 
of literary Sanskrit had commenced, the archaic Vedic speech 
of the Upper Doab had already developed local plebeian dialects. 
The language that then was being spoken in the homes of the 
Midland Ayans ranks as the earliest Prakrt.* This and with it 
the ( unknown ) contemporary vernaculars of the Outer Band 
are designated the Primary Prakrts of India. 

From their decay arose the Secondary Prakrts, originating 
about 550 b. C. and continuing till about 1000 A. d. Of these 



* Prakrfc has been aptly rendered as the <( lingua vulgata, rustica, eerrao 
cottidianus, plebeius." 



AFPENDIX 
I, 



Interme - 
diate Lan- 
guages. 



Outer 
Languages. 



Language 

of the Rig- 

veda 

Hymns. 



Its 'purified' 

form — 

Sanskrit 

Primary 
Prakrts. 



Secondary 

Prakrts: 

a") Earliest, 

or Pali. 



156 



QUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



APPENDIX 
I. 

b) Early, 
or the 
Prakrts. 



c) Late, 
01 Literary 
Apabhram- 
s'as. 



Tertiary 

Prakrts, or 

the Modern 

IAVs. 



IAVs not 

derived from 

Sanskrit. 



Secondary Prakrts the earliest is Pali, which, being employe*! 
as the language of the Buddhist Scriptures, became as though 
enshrined in them and left no descendant. The later and still 
more decayed Secondary Prakrts have been sometimes termed 
collectively, The Prakrt par excellence. At this stage the 
vernacular of the aggressive Midland was the S'aurasenl, so- 
called from S'urasena, the country round Mathura. Bihar at 
this same period had its Magadhi, Oudh and Baghelkhand their 
Ardhamagadhi ( or Ardhas'auraseni )> and Berar its Maharasjiri.. 

" It is important to remember that Maharastn ( under the 
" name of Sauras$ri ) was once the language of Gujarat before 
"that country was overwhelmed by the invasion from the 
" Midland." 

When these Prakrts began to receive literary culture — even as 
the Vedic tongue had received before them — the true vernacular,, 
the simple speech spoken in the home of the untutored peasant, 
was dubbed Apabhrams'a, ' corrupt ' or ' decayed.' But as the 
centuries wore on these several Apabhrams'as themselves became 
the vehicle for popular literature — a literature scanty indeed 
yet invaluable since supplying a fairly accurate record of the 
spoken language of the time. 

Of these Apabhrams'as the modern vernaculars are the 
immediate descendants. Thus, traeed backwards, the different 
stages in the linguistic development are as follow : — 

1. The modern Indo-Aryan Vernaculars or Tertiary Prakrts. 

2. The Literary Apabhrams'as, or later Secondary Prakrts. 

3. The earlier Secondary Prakrts. 

4. The Primary Prakrts of the Vedic period. 

It should be borne in mind that Sanskrit does not find place as 
a link in the above chain. " It is thus a mistake to say that any 
" modern Indian language is derived from Sanskrit." The truth 
is that Sanskrit can claim rank merely as a collateral branch of 
those " earlier Secondary Prakrts " which are true progenitors 
of the Indo-Aryan vernaoulars of to-day. 



J 



157 











OS » 










« ° S 


oS M 

S cu 


<v 

— 9 

eS 
ca 

CO 
Ir-i 










" Pw 


<J 


73 
too 

a 






^ 












T3 








» 




a 


a 








PQ 






5 
PQ 








l S* 




■< 










>•» 











"C Hi 




M. 

o 






a 




%\ o 








i 


O 
o 

09 






cS 

is -a 
— +=. g 

to- 03 

'2 ft 


■a 

13 




«j 


•S3 os 






-*J 






OS Cu ioJ 




B 


o 




>»S 


&< J 







1 

"3 


CO* 

Jri. 


§1 


3 




53 

P5 


o 

a 


H 

Ph 




_A *o '=»* 
co H S 




-1 


a 

S3 


OS 

a 


8 «.'§ 






o 

o 


-a 




CQ £0 


9 CQ 




H 


"TO 






<8 




F 


§ 


J5* 


--»■* 


^^ 




53 


T3 

.2 

O-r 


> 

o 
a> 

!=! 
o 


— a ^ to 


icS OS 

* - 


-u a 

- co • — 

os nj 






oS j3 

^a "os 




w 


.2 


c3 lj« rt 


T3 Ou 




fc-i 

M 




60 

.9 


3 -3 m 

T3 ie3 _ 

<5 Pm g 


a 




w 

M 


-a 
o 

5-1 

o 

a 


CO 

CI 
O 
« 


0) 

0? © a 
ca w ej 

.* ^? 3 


1 § 

■ — s « 

SI 


© T3 

~ * .9 
7§ 






co a. 
*«5 




583 

s 


o 




«>£ 


OS 




13 






Ph 




a 










o 


OS 

3 




© *» — 




HO 


Eel 


3 




-S -2 9 


ft B os -tJ 


1 
3" 


W 
H 


(D 

.a 




■•-■a 9 
— °3 & 


2 a 9 9 




H 




73 M *g 


05 








P-t 02 


if* 










■4-3 
M. 

CD 

CO 


"- .9 
o 


6 

01 

OS 





158 



QUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



APPENDIX 
I. 

The blend- 
ing in Guja- 
rat! of 

1) theSau- 
rastri of the 
Outer Band. 



2) and the 

S'auraseni 

Midland. 



Traces of 
the early 
Saura«*:ri. 



In those early d »ys when Gujarat was peopled by members of 
the Outer Band and had not yet felt the impact of immigrants 
from the Midland, the language spoken in Gujarat was a Prakrt 
known as Saurastri, a Prakrt closely akin to Mahaxasfrl. But 
within the first six centuries of the Christian era, the Huns and 
the half-Scythian Ksatrapas, the Guptas and the Gurjaras, leaving 
their homes in the north and east, were attracted to the fertile 
fields of Mainland Gujarat and to the fair province of Sauras$ra, 
' the Goodly Land ' of Kathlawad. Aryans from the north-east 
also came as settlers, and these as well as others of the immigrants 
brought with them a language of the Midland, the S'auraseni 
Prakrt. The earlier Saurasjr! gradually gave way before this 
dialect of the conquerors, and of the resultant language, called 
Gujarat! from the invading Gurjar tribe, the Midland S'auraseni 
ultimately became the distinctly dominant element. Nevertheless 
Gujarat! retains even to the present day a substratum of its 
original Saurastri. Interesting survivals of this old Outer Band 
language are still to be found 

1) in the so frequently incorrect pronunciation of *l and 

^ and 6. 

2) in the oblique, or basal, form in a in the declension of 

nouns, 

3) in the synthetic ( not analytic ) formation of the genitive 

and dative cases, 

4) in the — S$l, -S^-fl, -5\^i participial forms, 

5) in the y> forms of the verb " to be." 



- 



APPENDIX II. 
The Language-area of Gujarat!* 

The district which may be regarded as the present home of 
the Gujarat! Languago bears in its outline a rough resemblance 
to a shirt of which one sleeve lies extended due south and the 
other due west. To trace the body of this " shirt " join succes- 
sively Roho (some thirty miles south of Mount Abu ), Lunawad.a, 
Dlv Island, and Dwarka, For the southern sleeve, starting 
from the shoulder at Lunawadii, draw a line to Peint (some thirty 
miles north-west of Nasik), then to Daman and then to Cam bay : 
and for the western sleeve, starting from the other shoulder at 
Roho, pass to Islamko$ in the Thar and Parkar district of Sind, 
then due south to Bundra Lus on the Ran of Kacch, and thence 
to Radhanpur* 

As to language, the tract in which GujaratI is a vernacular 
is bounded at the neck and shoulders by Bhill dialects, round 
the southern sleeve by Khandes'l and MarathI, and round the 
Western sleeve by MarwadJ, Sindhl, and Kacchi. 

The total number of persons who at the 1901 Census returned 
GujaratI as their parent tongue was 9,439,925. In this figure are 
included the descendants of the original silk-weaver immigrants 
from Gujarat into the Deccan and Madras, who call their dialect 
Pa$null or Saurasfrl. GujaratI stands now ninth in rank of the 
vernaculars of India. 

Though spoken through the whole of the peninsula of 
Kathiawad., GujaratI does not extend as a vernacular into Kacch. 
It is, however, employed there for official and literary purposes 
and for commercial correspondence. Indeed it can fairly claim 
to be regarded as the chief commercial language for all 
Western India. 

Probably one-third of the inhabitants of the City of Bombay 
are GujaratI speakers, these including not only the numerous 
GujaratI residents there but also many immigrants from Kacch 
( S'ethlas, Bhatlas, and Muhammadans ) and from the Konkan 
as well as nearly all the Marwadls, Voras (Borahs), and Parsis. ' 



APPENDIX 
II. 



Extent of 
language- 
area of 
GujaratI, 



and its 

linguistic 

boundaries. 



Number of 
GujaratI 
speakers. 



GujaratI 
in Kacch 



and in 
Bombay. 



APPENDIX 
III. 



Breath 

through 

glottal 

chink 

(a) when 

open, 



<(b) when 
closed. 



APPENDIX UN 
The Grammar of Gujarat! Soituds. 

" In this respect Philology is really but a subdivision of applied 

Anatomy and Physiology." Prof. Macalister. 

In Part I. we treated of the Grammar of Gujarat! letter?^ 
these letters being the alphabetic signs or symbols adopted to 
represent to the eye the various sounds heard in Gujaratl 
speech. In this Appendix we purpose treating of the Gujaratl 
alphabetic sounds themselves, their classification and method of 
production. As the first step towards estimating their phonetic 
properties, it is necessary to understand clearly the difference 

A. between sonants and surds, 

B. between vowels, semivowels and consonants, and 

C. between nasals and non-nasals. 

A* On the Difference between Sonants 
and Surds. 

The material of speech is breath, which on its expulsion from 
the lungs passes through the glottal chink foimed between the 
vocal ligaments of the larynx, and thereafter issues through the 
mouth or nose or both as a current of expired air. 

a) The breath from the lungs may stream through the 
larynx when its glottal chink is open, but after passing the 
open chink may meet with some obstruction or ecnstiic- 
tion in the mouth or nose. When this is the case oral 
or nasal noise of a more or less consonantal character will 
be produced, 

b) Ihe breath may in its passage upwards from the lungs 
strike against the vocal ligaments while they are so 
drawn together as to completely close the glottal chink. 
These vocal ligaments, however, being elastic, yield with 
a vibratory movement to the upward current of breath 
sufficiently to allow of its passage past them in a series 
of short and feebte puffs. Hence the breath, unvocal till 
reaching the glottal chink, becomes there changed to 



CONSONANTS, VOWELS, AND SEMI- VOWELS. 



161 



those sonorous undulations which constitute tone 

more or less vocalic character. Breath on which laryngeal 

tone has been thus impressed is commonly termed 'voice,' 

in order to distinguish it from unvocalized toneless 

breath. After issuing from the larynx ' voice,' or toned 

breath, may, equally with the toneless breath, meet with 

some obstruction or constriction in the mouth or nose. 

When this is the case the ' voice ' receives an added 

element of oral or nasal noise, more or less consonantal 

in character. 

Those alphabetic sounds which are characterised by the presence 

of laryngeal tone are called Sonants.. In order to their utterance 

the breath from the lungs is in its passage through the larynx 

converted to ' voice ' by reason of vibrations induced in the vocal 

ligaments. 

Those alphabetic sounds which are characterized by the absence 
of laryngeal tone are called Surds. In order to their utterance 
the breath from the lungs in its passage through the larynx does 
not undergo conversion to ' voice ' but remains toneless breath. 

In Gujarat! the surds are fourteen, i^lteiJctlM^, 
^ H %t and visarga : h ; while all the remaining alphabetical 
sounds are, of course, sonants. 

B» On the Difference between Consonants, 
Vowels, and Semi-vowels* 

We have already seen that in order to the production of the 
alphabetic sounds laryngeal tone may be present ( as in the 
sonants ) or may be absent ( as in the surds ). We have also 
seen that whether laryngeal tone be present or absent, the 
element of noise may be produced by reason of the issuing 
4 voice* or 'breath' meeting with some obstruction or constriction 
in the nose or mouth. 

a) Now when the issuing breath is marked by the predom- 
inance of laryngeal tone over oral or nasal noise, the 
resulting sound is called a Voivd, 
b) When, on the other hand, there may or may not be any 
laryngeal tone, but there is a distinct predominance of oral 

or nasal noise, the resulting sound is called a Consonant. 
21 



f a | APPENDIX 
III. 



Sonants, 



Surds. 



Vowel. 



Consonant. 



162 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



APPENDIX 
III. 

Semi- vowel. 



Non-nasals. 



Nasals. 



c) When, yet again, both laryngeal tone and oral noise are 
present and each is so distinctly present that neither can 
be regarded as subordinate to the other, the resulting 
sound is called a Semi-vowel. Semi-vowels might, of 
course, with equal correctness have been designated 
' Semi-consonats ; ' and, as a matter of convenience, 
they are usually included by grammarians in the class 
of consonants. 
In Gujarat! the vowels are eleven, namely »h, a*u, W, 4, §, <3l, 
*, *\, A, 5ll, Ai ; 

the consonants, exclusive of semi-vowels, are twenty-nine, 
namely the twenty-five alphabetic sounds from h to H, and also 

«, A*, *; 

and the semi-vowels are five, namely *J, \, €1, <H, <f\. 

C* On the Difference between Nasals 
and Non-nasals* 

The ' soft palate,' or ' veil of the palate/ being moveable, it 
may be raised so as to close the orifice connecting the pharynx 
(or termination of the throat-canal) with the nasal cavities. When 
this is the case, breath issuing from the lungs passes below the 
soft palate into the mouth, and thence to the outer air. 

But the ' veil of the palate ' may be lowered, so as to open 
the orifice connecting the pharynx with the nasal cavities. In 
this case the breath issuing from the lungs, or part of it at least, 
passes behind and above the soft palate, and becomes modified 
by the resonance due to the nasal cavities. 

Sounds that have received this added element of nasal reson- 
ance are called Nasals, and sounds free from nasal resonance are 
called Non-nasals. 

In Gujarat! the nasals are six namely 

& na, -H ftit, ^ na, «i na, H ma, and anusvara m, 
while all other alphabetical sounds are non-nasals. 

Before proceeding to the Tables of the Gujarat! letters, 
phonetically considered, we shall indicate yet one more method 
frequently adopted for the classification of alphabetic sounds. In 
the utterance of nearly all elemental sounds the continuous 
outflow of breath is obstructed or constricted at some part or other 
of the vocal organs. 



CLASSIFICATION ACCORDING TO VOCAL ORGANS. 



Now if this contact, or strait, be" formed 

between the two vocal ligaments, the sound is 

between the back of the tongue and the 

soft palate, the sound is 

between the middle ( and blade ) of the 

tongue and the hard palate, the sound is 

between the point ( or blade ) of the tongue 

reversed and the dome of the palate, the 

sound is ... ... ••• ••• ••• 

between the point of the tongue and the 

teeth or upper gums, the sound is 
between the upper teeth and the lower lip, 
the sound is ... ... 

between the upper and the lower lips, the 
sound is ... ... ... ... »•• 

In Gujaratl 

the glottals are : h & 

the gutturals & M *{ H * 
the palatals *t to <r/ ti H 

the cerebrals I & & & *Q 
the dentals <t «i t M. -i 

the denti-labial 
and the labials 



glottal, 

guttural, 

palatal, 

cerebral, 
dental, 
denti-labial, 
labial. 



163 

I APPENDIX 
III. 

Alphabetic 

sounds 
arranged 
according 

to the 

organs 
employed 

in then- 
production. 



SI 



VJ 



M X °i <H H 



4 



S\ 



Sit 



The two vowels =*H and a>il, being formed without any localized 
obstruction or constriction, do not fall in any of the above classes. 

Also the diphthongal vowels *>{ and =*Hl cannot be assigned to 
any one class in the above Table,- inasmuch as each of these 
diphthongs is essentially a glide, the vocal organs changing in 
the case of a*t from the *H[ to the W position, and in the case 
of ^l from the ^Hl to the (§ position. 



The two following Tables of Surds and Sonants and of Vowels 
and Consonants are sufficiently explicit to stand in need of no 
detailed explanation. 

The third Table, that of Nasals and Non-nasals, will be under- 
stood on reading the explanatory remarks following it. 



164 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 





i 


hi"*"* h, 




















Uppe 

ip an 

Lowe 

Lip. 


jo- : : : 

?" 1 : : 




<y : : : 
•S" : : 1 


X 


OS 










H 










h5 










Upper 
Teeth 

and 
Lower 

Lip. 






r : V • 




■a 
1 

(3 

CD 


hi 








sr • • • 


no • 
















tr : * : 




V 


"3 










«*H (0 








~ 


a 




■ 






® a hi m 










CD 








; 


Point 
Tong 
and 
Uppe 
Gum 


;Si: 




r ! : : 




Q 


CD 


i 




CO 

a 

c3 
Ct 

o 

CO 

a 
o 

o 

to 

p 






CQ 
■+» 

a 

c3 

a 
o 

g 

o 

CO 

H 








■1 






Point of 
Tongue 
reversed 
and Dom< 
of Palate 


*o : : : 
»o : r : 


"\9 : 




"3- 

1 hi 

^3 
CD 
M 
CD 

o 


2 


■ 


If 


lade of 

ongue 

versed 

dDome 

Palate 


: * • : 


: f I l 


W 




3 




" W oj o 




g 

a 

CO 










■ 


o 

CO 

« 


CQ 


Middle 
and Blade 
of Tongue 
and Hare 

Palate. 


: ^ : r 




7? 


•a 

03 
0+ 




. 


Q 

3 


le of 
gue 
Hard 
ate. 


3 : : : 


W__ : : 






CO 




Midd 
Ton 

and 
Pal 


y : : ■ : 




fc^:: 








, 


♦ 

*>3 


ack of 
ongue 
dSoft 
alate. 


JH • •' * 


af : : : 


*? 


"3 
32- 


i 






WH go, 














-■ 






















Voca 
Liga- 
ments 


:>*•': : 




1 *» : i 




3 
o 

3 












*o ': : • 






, 



















co : 












£ 


mpletely check 
sues centrally 
3ues laterally 
ues trilled 




13 

j3 -a r-a . 


'a, 

a . 


.. 










< 

M 
BQ £ 

§ o 




pletely c 
es centra 
es latera 
es trilled 


mouth) 
eked 


r 


: 








8.2.3 « 

C? **•* •■"■ 'H 




com 
issn 
issu 
issu 


« <0 














^J j3pC]^ 




•C O 


z 


•• 








+3 .+» .+3 +3 

eft' o3 c8 o3 
o> a) a> a> 




CD CD CD CD 


CD >» 

.2 "of 




• 








i-i m i_ ■_, 




.O O O O 


> 












S5 
o 


W-pqoqpq. 




>»> 




: 













1 


















o 1 








78 




s 


03 




o I 
















n 










o 




© 


el 

ft 




at 

° 1 










1 






W 


^ 1 





SURDS AND SONANTS, 



1G, 






a* 

< 

t3 





oi 


& : : 


«b 


"c* 


Oh 


(a> : : 


XB> 








-o 








a 








^ 


M 










ft \ I 


>f 




« 










3 



,5 



9 
Oh 






a. 
O 



a 



* § a 



^ 



-*3> 



«r 



-SB 



T 



T 



in' * °3 

,2*° -»» 



r 



>1 








>> 




cS 


"3 


TS 




a> 


J3 


o 


s 


M 

-» 


00 




w 


» 


0) 


Ol 


a 


a 


a 



f> t> > 



£ 



c5 



O 5 

I g 






bfi 



bo 
.9 

a 



-a 

T3 

CJ 



s? -a 



.5 a 
° § 

»— i CO 
•+i CS 

■§ ►> 
-1 



^ . 

» §■ 

"So -a 



ba 



J3 -2 •** 

| 8 -S 



o <£ 
be » 

S "? 



J .2 



B .2 



o £ 



03 -C 



w 



a 

to 



S ,£ .» © 






•B .© 



.2 a 1 " 5 



a 
60 „ g g> « 

* >>.§. 

•° B o 



03 



3 S 



E 2 



bo B 
eS B jjj 

Sf." 



T3 i— i 



S S 



e8 



•b •- "2 " 
^ Sb 

B * S ^ 

"§■3 § * 
ji a x <■> 

a 
•n •- o 

a J ~ 
o S 2 

03 £ B 

a 2 

2 C-l *H 

.2 o -» 

-2 * c3 



Is 

a 2 

03 



e8 a 



.3 u 

60O 

2 -3- » 

a> -S a 



o ^3 
bo ^ 



o3 -a ° £; 

3 a SP b- 



a> 



>-' a 

03 CD 



CO 4= 



03 S 

.2 J 

../ 0J 

•J* u 



O 



, a 

-«•« 2 

•• a ? 

o3 © J2 
o 



& o £ ° 

- 5 05 o 

"3 .2 

?3 WJ 



te a 

^ ej 



© 

03 
J* 



03 



(M 



16G 



QITJARATI GRAMMAR. 



«) -3 -t> 

o « a> 5 £-53 

U« a, r* w -C 3 

p [ *l ■ 
o £ tic = 8.3 



"SI 

-a 

-; b ~ t- 



c 
> 

a 

CO 

.g 

*3 
a 



TO 

523 

-si 

5zj 
O 

TO 

o 
o 



-s 



bo 

a 

o 



to 

B 






o-jj^-' 



_&> » •" _• 

= ioo>^» 

.««;'* 

--S » Si. . 

T ij tS * O 

v a. o, «s ^ 

- too » » 

.S a § o- 

5 S.- i 

° °J3 



w 



. ... » 

S i« a o 
a,o g 



12 


a> 




a 


f 


s 














ea 


c« 


OJ 


*a 



w-a 



SB 



tro'S 



o 
o> 

- s 

.2 -S 

M B 

" O 

13 fcH 

o Oh 



i «i 5 m « 
g ca O— o 

° * o, 



So 

fc o 



5 -a 

^ b 



O H 



r— i CO g 
Cfl Cfl rt 

is -^ 

^-r 

o --S 

.S ™ fl 
?38 

-» o bo 

•2 B m 

6 £ 2 
W 



O oJ 

o o, 



o ® 



J3_ 

■S d 

CD -ta 
0,0 

ffl bo 



-B _ 
cc »B -m cd 



- -e— . -b co 

-•<- "&-* s « g 

rO O 



« £ 



J= 3 d 



PQ fj bO 



CO TO 

o 2 

•g ° « 

O ^ B 

5 3 

Oi 

.s « 

o 



■" bO* 5 B eS 60-° 
oo 



« 



B-P4S fl 

pq - bo« 



B 
cs 

B 
O 
VI 



a 

CO 



3 



a 

C8 

B 

o 



pq js m* J * S 513 



■5 o 3 cs 

« ^ -^ B 
o 



S°^3 O _ 

pq ^ to-* 3 



B 
7D 



3 



■5 >> 



a 



CONSONANTS. 



167 



sr # 



* X 



sT x 



•0 



»\» 3f 



3? 



+9 V) 



- aj 

re 5 0) 

a M as 






-u> 



3 o o 



4) t3 

19 . 

•ops 

3 3 
s o w 



o 



CL, 



03 ^J 






.— v CD _ra 

M "- o 
n £ 
2.2 S 

a g M 



s o 

60 ~- -A 

9 " 

<B 

H^ ft. 

■3 gp 

0-i 



T3 

a 
03 



•T3 

a 

03 



* S u * 

a> ? a> ? 

ftofco 



k g a fc- 

o3 



t» g 3 M 

-H -£ ft « 
-fc3 CI 



■353 



u > * S 

.5 .- r d 

oj a> o3 O 

SB9 



S S 



03 

'3. 

re 
03 






a 

oS 

a 
o 

m 

a 
o 
U 



3 

S 



-2 5 * 



Sn 



1GS 



<3UJARATI GRAMMAR. 



U c3 

Oh 

« ." 

rrt CO 

o.S 



3 

O 



<N 



PQ 



o 



fe 



M 



*»"' 



• t? 



KO 



•3" 



tf 



a 



-3) # fe- 



<S 



» # & 



& 



rt . 



CD 
1° 

c c 

D c« 

^ a 

.. » 

cd:S 

'£■ 9 



a 

CO 

a 

c3 

H 



CD 



C5 © s 



a 

60 



.5 a 

.— CB 

»- S 4 

CB O 

O g 



S m 

? CB 

o a 

*• fl 

CB <U 

S O' 

.3 o 

fc."c8 

CB H 

ra CB 

t- a 

O CD gS 

Ed 



c« 

a 

Cm 



0,3 



2 



JCB CLi cd 



VOWELS. 



169 



CO 


interme- diphth 
diate. ongal. 


to 

1 ' 


"3 

3 

a 


o 

> 


oo 


J2 

ft 

a 

'S3 


t- 


"ft 

1 

"53 


4a 

M 

O 

OS 


XD 


T3 

S 
1 


\a 


:§7s 

^3 60 
ftH 


60 

a 
o 


ft 


■* 


interme- 
diate. 


CO 


"ft 

a 

'55 


IN 


a! 

"Sc 

a 

'oi 


43 
M 

O 

02 


•^H 


13 
09 

B 

"3 













5 7 

09 JJ 
° J2 

» ^J 

> 60 

^ *» 

&. 00 

a - 

'55 *y 
a> 

a is 

o o 



■a a 

CO « 
>>""■ 
S o 

C« 4* 



'53 

« a 



ci "~ 
11 

H l- 

2 .5 «» 

.3 *° 

+5 o 

<a 4» 

a 8 - 
§ * E 

3 '-3 - 
•S -* # 

«- o — 

o « * 

.•a S rt 

aft.- 
<u _ 

i * 

u a 

^ « o 



o 



© 
13 



**.§** 



"J 



lfl> 



CJ I* 

w (-. _ 
60 g 

C to o 

c n t, 
■tt * - 

■as '* 




I 

w 

o 



22 



C. 1. Non-u as a Is. 




C.2.Na$ct/ls 




, 



REMARKS ON THE TABLE OF NASALS AND NON -NASALS. 



171 



Remarks on the Table of Nasals and Non-nasals. 

The vowel =^l, which has been well called " the fundamental 
vowel-tone of the human voice," is the natural utterance of the 
mouth when wide open, and is free from any distinctively guttural, 
palatal, cerebral, dental, or labial, quality. But, on the other hand, 
each of the five consonants £ =H I cl and M possesses a distinctive 
quality of its own, and each requires for its utterance complete 
closure at some point or other of the mouth. Hence all the simple 
alphabetic sounds must admit of localization between the central 
*Hl ( completely open ) and the circumferential H i (1 ^1 
( completely closed ). The Table represents these sounds duly 
localized. 

Circle 2 is assigned to the " dimmed vowel " a>i. It is an ^Hi 
sound uttered with the mouth less widely open, but it, equally 
with a>U, is independent of any guttural, palatal, &c., modification. 
The clear distinct *>\l sound being represented by the definite 
central point, the dimmed indistinct ^ may appropriately be 
assigned a small area round the a*U centre. 

Circle 3 represents the " intermediate vowels " 5} and 5U. 
For the utterance of aH the tongue assumes a definite place 
intermediate detween the positions required for »>U and t'. 
Hence 51 stands in the diagram midway between those vowels. 
For a similar reason anl is placed midway between ^tl and <§. 

Circle 4 is the circle for the simple vowels, W being on the 
palatal arc, ^K on the cerebral, ( 3; ) on the dental, and (3 on the 
labial. As all these vowels when long differ from their corres- 
ponding shorts in quantity alone (or prolonged time of utterance), 
and not at all in quality, one and the same point in the diagram 
serves to represent either a long vowel or its short. 

Circle 5 is the circle for the semi-vowels, of which H is on the 
palatal, \ on the cerebral, and 61 on the dental arcs. <H, as being 
a denti-labial, stands on the border-line between the denial aud 
the labial arcs. The remaining semi-vowel, <0, is a true cerebral, 
and is hence placed on the cerebral arc but towards the d position 
because of its affinity in some respects to that consonant. 

Circle 6 is assigned to the aspirate &. This letter is itself 
glottal ( see Note on Table A )♦ The breath, after issuing as 



appendix 
in. 



Fundamen- 
tal vowel- 
tone *Hl. 



=fcltct, or 
dimmed,' 



Inter- 
mediate 
5{ and SU. 



Simple 
vowels 



Semi-vowels 



Aspirate <£, 



172 



GUJARAT! GRAMMAR. 



APPENDIX 
III. 



Sibilants 
Visarga. 



Mutes 
(non-nasal) 



Oral 

passage 

a.) open, 



^contrac- 
ted, 



c.) closed. 



Diphthongs, 



Conjunct 
consonants, 



'voice' from the glottis, may undergo some super-glottal 
modification according as the vocal organs are in their guttural, 
palatal, &c, positions. Still the change of quality thus produced 
is so slight that it may be, and in Gujarat! is, disregarded, and 
consequently the single symbol & represents the glottal aspirate,, 
whatever quality be subsequently impressed upon it by the upper 
resonance cavities. 

Circle 7 is the circle for the sibilants, Si standing on the 
palatal, H on the cerebral, and ^t on the dental arcs. 

Circle 8 is assigned to the spirant : ( h ). It is a feebler 
sound than the aspirate &, and is moreover non-vocal, a ' breath ' 
and not a ' voice,' thus an essentially glottal spirant ( see Note 
on Table A )» 

Circles 9-12 are all assigned to the non-nasal mutes. On 
circle 9 are the five asper (or M&tHl'^) and on circle 10 the five 
lenis ( or ^H^MMl^P ) sonants ; while on circle 1 1 stand the five 
asper ( or "H^l'Hl'^l ) and on circle 1 2 the five lenis ( or SHf4^l<^(l ) 
surds. 

No Closure : All the sounds represented from the centre 

up to and including circle 4 are vowels, 
and in their utterance the oral passage is 
open. ( The Greek phoneenta ). 

Partial Closure : All the sounds on or between circles 5 and 
8 require for their utterance either an oral 
strait or very slight contact of the vocal 
organs. ( The Greek hemiphona ). 
Complete Closure : All the sounds on or between circles 9 and 
12 require for their utterance complete 
contact at some point or other of the mouth. 
(The Greek aphona). 
The two dotted lines denote the two diphthongs *>{ and ^i, j 
the former ( =A ) being a glide from the ^41 to the \J positions, 
and the latter ( =% ) a glide from the a*U to the § positions. 

A dotted line passing from s to ^1 would represent the con- 
junct letter $1 ( = ^ 4- H ), and any other non-nasal conjunct can 
be indicated in a similar manner. Naturally no single point in 
the diagram would suffice to represent either a diphthongal vowel 



REMARKS ON THE TABLE OF NASALS AND NON-NASALS. 



173 



or a conjunct consonant. For the graphic representation of these 
a line with arrow-head becomes necessary.. 

In the table of Nasals the sounds represented frcm the centre 
"U up to and including circle 4 are "nasal vowels," which 
differ from the corresponding "pure vowels" in the Table of 
non-nasals merely by the addition of nasal resonance. This 
difference is indicated to the eye by the added anusvara poiiit. 

On the outermost circle in the Table of Nasals stand the five 
" nasal mutes," i- on the guttuial, *S on the palatal, <£i on the 
cerebral, «i on the dental, and "*i on the labial arcs.. In order to 
the utterance of each of these, while nasal resonance is secured 
by reason of the nasal passage being open, the mouth at some 
point or other must be completely closed.. 

It is well to keep clearly in mind that 

1) non-nasal ( " pure " ) vowels require an open oral but 
a closed nasal passage : 

2) nasal vowels an open oral and an open nasal passage : 

3) non-nssal mutes a closed oral and a closed nasal passage : 

4) nasal mutes a closed oral and an open nasal passage.. 



APPENDIX 
III. 



Nasal 
vowels. 



Nasal! 
mates- 



174 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



03 


00 


rfl 


CO 


43 


> 


B 


so 






43 




* 


o 


j: 


43 


43 


a 






c 




0J 






^ 




60 


V 


3 


•JU 


O 




M 


7^J 


r^ 


*e 






>> 


4» 

HH 


a 








o 




0) 


eo 

O 


Cu 


J3 


CO 


O 


3 


•"j 


43 

cS 




J3 


•"9 


•*> 




CO 




a 


Q 


a 


>i 


o 

43 


.a 


to 


T3 


-a 


C 








Cu 

cu 


"3 


S3 
CO 


a 




u 


>, 


d 


tJ 


cu 


a 




M 


a 

00 


a 






ta 


*-> 


T3 


tn 


© 


a 


J3 


J3 


+3 


ai 




a 


+3 


rt 


a? 


a 
o 
m 
a 
o 


a 1 
« 


eo 


o 




M 






s 


1> 

> 


cfl 


c3 


"5" 


J3 


o 


a 


V 


o 


J3 




43 






> 






O 


13 


fl 


a 


o 






?! -S 


cS 


8 a 


eo 


w c« 


ta 


a) a 


SO 
CD 

CS 


a 

T3 o 


o 


o> eo 


*o 


-*3 ^-< 

a « 

00 Is 


0) 

1 


M 4) 
Q) (» 

Ph to 


H 


<0 <B 




M ,H 


fcn 


CO -.-> 


a 


a ho 






ft 
1 


*=> a 
a -a 

§1 


.S 


11 


H 






a-4? 


| 






™3 4> 
h- 1 a) 






+3 








to 








SBSS 




•^v 




3- £; •*■ c3 






p. 














H-1 


o 








Cu 
S 




7? 












EQ 






C9 












# 




M 










_r3 -U— * 05 






-a" 




of 


eg 


*£-§£ 






■+3 
43 














a 


a> 














O 

Oh 


G 

"flQ 


1 


V 


43 




; j 


a 












o 




i 


Oh 




1 


43 

a 
o 


5 .§:*! 


r 


Cu 






a 


aj 




o 

M 


Cu 

a 

'go 


a" 


"0 












3§2s 






* _ 

43 


'££-§! 




3 


a 
o 














■h 


V 








CU 

B 


•V 


(T 












00 








-a a cb a 








g t4 ja ca 




?* 




?,a oca 






























c8 








ffl 


o 








Cu 

a 




jo 












OQ 






43 




1 j 


■8 






o 




| 


14 






.a 






H 




1 




• I T3 




^3 CO 




S 1 a* 








.£ o 




5h 02 


ja 




43 




05 1 




a> 




14 1 






u 


^ | 



.a, 








B* 






is 

4> ^ 
03 

i-5 


J33rf 

•r c 3 


1 


h 




^0) 

a 




* 


X 




T3 

s 














43 

a 
oo 

P 


1 

43 

a 
'o 


J3 ^ N 

43 *» N 

"~* z£ 3 

cm 


- 


— , 


« 




X 


a5 

a 

"ffl 


43 

a 
o 

Oh 






<v 








"ol 

M 

rQ 

CO 

14 

co 


4* 

'3 

Cu 

43 

a 
o 
u 


-3^ 

."S 43 M 

> o a 








A> 




CO 

■ft 

a 






S" 


^ 3^ 


• 

a 
o 
u 
F=i 


43 +3 N 

■go a 








7? 


"5 

43 

03 

Oh 


aj 

Cu 

a 

*03 


sc 






fc 


X 




j3n 

43 43 N 

•go a 








ar 




"3 

a 

43 
43 

a 
O 


4) 

a 








o" 


~> 


43 

C3 
O 

J3 

H 




^> 








1 


43 

43 

3 




H3 
CO 
N 
CO 
CO 

a 

CT 1 

03 


'u 
H 


00 

V 

S 


s> 

CU 

Cu 

o 

43 

02 


00 

in 

1 
03 








1 







43 


43 


O 


c9 














a 




<L> 




o 




a! 


a 


' ' : 


O 






cS 


-V 


4> 








09 


0) 


a_a 


d 


+3 


1 


a 


0> 


ojf 

_a 


ja 


49J 


si 




H 


00 

ja 




43 




=4 






43 








M 


w 


9 


a 


4) 


o 


ja 


4-> 


+3 


c> 


n3 
0) 


43 


T1 




M 


o 


O 





3?. 





-3 


-a 

43 


cq 


t>- 




a 




-i 


G> 


n 


-3 


rl 




o 


en 


tl 




a 


+3 


o 
.a 
m 


Q0 

■a 




43 


43 


aj 


a 


oS 


(8 


Cu 


a 
o 


4) 

-a 




43 


-n 




a 


o 


c« 


i) 


-a 




a 


03 




s 


43 


a 


o 


^ 




T3 






V] 




43 

a 
"3 


a 

4) 
CO 
4) 

Cu 




(1> 


V 


rt 


J3*a 








ki 


X& 



— 1 c(5 « 



I-. 


J3 




O 4» 




00 






a 


4) 




43 


a 




J3 

or 


o 
f 




3 






O 


m 




ja 


ifl 


. 


H 


2 


"2 


• 


a 

43 


TO 










3 
O 


3 



CONSONANTS CLASSIFIEB. 



17i 



Stl bounded 

as English 

awe. 



Note 1 : It should be mentioned that in a considerable number I APPENDIX 
of Gujarat! words *Hl is generally sounded not as the o 
of note but as the aiv of Imu, or as the ' broad a ' of all* 
It is then a true intermediate between the ' neutral a ' 
of far and the 'long o' of note. The following are 
a few examples of words in which 5U takes this 
' broad a ' sound. 

SiftMlW /. a step-mother, 

IslSlH /. cuckoo, 

$l2H&t m. a coal. 

"§l 5 l(<A*i n. cholera. 

%[$, n. a wood-apple, 

i^td /. a byre. 

ll£l/. a score (20), also a shell 

^l^ pro. who ? 

Isltttffl /. a small hoe. 

istfrl^t on. a mouthful. 

^iltfl m. oil-cake ; /. a search. 

Sll^HsU m. a recess in a wall. 

5lR in. a family priest. 

3ll<A in. treacle. 

=Ht£ in. a quadrangle. 

211^1/. a police-station. 

^ImCiii n. a period of 90 minutes. 

allele adv, on all sides. 

aU^l /. a tribute of one-fourth of the revenue ; 
also the fourth day of the lunar fortnight. 

auHl| adj. four-edged. 

^l^t n. a square. 

§1 inter, a fig for ! 

"§ld num. one and a half. 

§1<Q adj. white. 

^U^i adj. separate. 

3lH/. a memorandum. 

MR/, last year, aZso next year. 

Ml^ adj. wide. 

Sll^ adj. dear. 

>U^ or >li<| n. the face. 



* The Nagar Brahmans of Bhavnagar but seldom, and those of Surat 
never, give this ' broad a ' sound to the vowel 3*1. 



176 



'GUJA.11A.TI GRAMMAR. 



APPENDIX 
III. 



■Si sounded 
as 'short e.' 



% in vowel 
stream. 



MR wj. tree-blossoms. 

*UWl m. maternal grandfather's house. 

$U£l /. a slave- girl. 

?iu /. the side. 

?Uct prep. with. 

^lltA ( or ^{R ) m. a weal, 

A very full list is given on page (s\ of the Narmakos', where 
also will be found a list of the Gujarat! words in which Si takes 
the sound of ' short e ' in met., a sound intermediate between the 
'neutral a' of far and the 'long e' of pique. 

That in Gujarat! the vowels a^ and a>U are thus of variable 

quality is probably due to the fact that already in Prakrt these 

vowels were no longer diphthongs, and, as to quality, might be 

either long or short. See Cowell's edition (1868) of Vararuci's 

Prakrta Prakas'a, page xvm. A different explanation, however, 

has been suggested by Narasimha Rav Bholanath on page 35-39 

of his scholarly &<*Rltfl WHtKl &KH«{1 <M^flKl M^fa fa$ ft^R. 

Note 2 : When a vowel (non-initial) immediately precedes the 

aspirate <k., and the same or another vowel immediately 

follows it, the former vowel is almost entirely lost to 

sound. 

Thus H&Rl^P mriftarani = mharani ; T\<k-<?\ mahattva - 

m'hattva ; ^•ict mahenat = m'henat ; h\\ Icaho = k'ho. 

If, however, the preceding vowel be *M and the succeeding (3, 
the two combine in sound so as to form diphthongal au ( Eng. 
ow of how ) ; and in like manner »H and W combine to form 
diphthongal ai ( Eng. y of my ). 

Thus ^ balm = b'hau ; <H<| vaJiu = v'hau ; 'Hslii mahuddm= 
m'hauddm • <h(&*U lahiyo - l'haiyo r 



APPENDIX III B,* 
The Dialects of Gujaratu 

' c< The only true dialectic variation of Gujaratl consists in' 
'the difference between the speech of the uneducated and that of the 
-educated." Dr. Geo. A. Giierson. 

Throughout the whole province of Gujarat, both in the 
Mainland and in the Peninsula of Kathlawad, the speech of all 
the educated is, save for slight modifications in pronunciation 
and vocabulary, that form of Gujaratl which by common consent 
is held to b9 the Standard. The Nagari Bfahmans, a literary 
Caste, do, it is true, affect a frequent use of Sanskrit words and 
in their writings employ by preference the Nagarl character, a 
character, so called, in the opinion of some, from the name 
of this very tribe. It is also true that, beyond the boundaries 
of the province, both the commercial Gujaratl of Bombay and 
the speech of the silk- weaving descendants of early immigrants in 
Tanjor and Madura partake of the linguistic peculiarities of the 
neighbouring tribes and have admitted a considerable infusion of 
local terms. But these varieties of Gujaratl, the Nagarl and the 
Bombay, and the Patnuli, approximate so closely to the 
Standard that none of the three ineed be termed a dialect. 

Further the Gujaratl spoken by uneducated Musalmans and 
Parsis, though containing quite a large number of words of 
Hindostani or Persian or Arabic origin, differs in other respects 
only Very slightly from the colloquial Gujaratl of their immediate 
■neighbours. The speech of the Muhammadan Kharwas, or sailors, 
of Gogha, descendants of those bold pirates who in olden times 
made the Island of Piram their stronghold, does indeed rank as a 
definite dialect, bu*t its currency is very limited. Barring this 



* Any value this Appendix may possess is due to the resarches conducted 
by Dr. G. A. Grierson in csnnexion with his " Linguistic Survey." From 
advance proofs of the Gujaratl section of that monumental work have heen 
culled most of the dialectic variations here mentioned. Many of the examples 
illustrative of those variations have been kindly supplied me by friends long 
resident in the Charotar. The translations of p&rt of the parable of the 
Prodigal son into the four dialects have been taken, with Dr. Grierson's kind 
permission, from the "Lingu istic Survey." 
23 



APPENDIX 
IIIB. 



Th3 Stand- 
ard Gujafati 
and three of 
its variants 

1. Nagari, 

2. Bombay, 

3. Patnuli, 



MusalnvTnf 

and Par£I 

sub-dialects 



178 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



APPENDIX 
IIIB. 



Gamarlia 
GujaratI 
and its 
four chief 
constituents 



Distinctive 
phonetic 
features of 
the Surati 
Dialect. 



single exception, it seems unrecefsary to reckon either the 
Pars! or the MusalmanI GujaratI as other than sub-dialects of 
the more general dialects of the district. 

Though the educated Gujaratls all employ the Standard form 
of the language, of the uneducated, and these constitute by far 
the majority of the people, very few indeed speak it in its purity. 
The Gamadla, or Gramya, is a general name for the dialect 
spoken by the uneducated village folk in any part of the 
province. But this form of speech is by no means unvarying 
in even closely neighbouring places. Indeed a GujaratI proverb 
runs, o\R iil(3»l »\[$\ ^ " the language changes every twenty 
miles," and perhaps the most satisfactory classification of the 
different dialects is, as suggested by this proverb, one based 
upon geographical distinctions. The dialect of the Peninsula 
differs from that of the Mainland, and in the latter district the 
dialect of the south from that of the north. Just as the South 
Country, the Midland, the North Country, and Kathlawad, these 
four, roughly suffice to denote geographically the whole province 
of Gujarat, so also in broad outline they avail to indicate linguis- 
tically the entire range of dialectic variation. Accordingly we now 
proceed to describe each of these dialects, merely premising 
that, so far from being amongst themselves sharply defined, they 
frequently, and especially on the borderlands, so interblend as to 
pass one into another by almost imperceptible gradations. 

I. Surati (^cft), or the Southern, GujaratI is the name given 
to the dialect spoken in the rural districts of the collectorates of 
Surat and Broach. It is to this dialect that ParsI GujaratI bears 
special affinity. 

A Phonetic Peculiarities. 

1. Dental mutes (cl, *l, €, ty) frequently change to the 
corresponding cerebrals ( ^, &, d, d ). Thus 

a) cl to i. The Standard d^d, want, becomes th Q 

Surati i^W ; similarly we have "in, so, for eft ; 
|, thou, for £ ; sy&\, living, for 2S>HcU ; *Wt, 
diversion, for aRct. 

b) ** to L The Standard qui, few, becomes the 

Surati lui ; similarly Hit, with, for *U«l; MX\{\, 
again, for vft*A« 



THE SUBATl DIALECT OF GUJARATI. 



179 



3. 



4. 



c) i to 4. The Standard £l"£l, saw, becomes SuratI 

Q.1\ ; similarly i&Ul, days, for £&lil ; fl£> 
gave, for £1^ 

d) H to <j, The Standard ^1£, consciousness, becomes 

the ' SuratI ^& ; similarly £[&, gave, for {\Q ; 
"tdl, or «ui, ott, for <n% 

The converse passage of a cerebral mute to a dental 
occasionally occurs, 

a) ^ to ct. The Standard 2lMl, a fta^, become ctiHl ; 
similarly tf\^, a drop, for <A^ ; CtctR, straight 
up, for i£R, 

6) & to *i. The Standard 3}4 j, together, becomes 
the SuratI a^i?^ ; similarly *j81, wp to the end, 
for li. 

c) £ to £. The Standard &{$[, shoes, becomes the 
SuratI Gvfel ; similarly fciuj, the left, for il^. 

c?) 4 to *4. The Standard £[Q, loose, becomes t(l^ ; 
similarly ^Pi, hypocrisy, for <£r ; £}R, caWZi?, 
for 2ft. 
Cerebral «$J and c/i change to dental «i and <H respec- 
tively, and conversely «i may pass over to <$l — also to <Ji . 

a) m to «i. The Standard 4fti$lls, because, becomes 

SuratI 4ft«i5 ; similarly we have >tl«it&l, men, 
for "Hl^l ; ( Pars! ) \*\,\but, for MQJ. 

b) <S\ to <H. The Standard^ltfPfl, having embraced, 

becomes^the SuratI ^"H^tl ; similarly W\.Q, all, 
for =HHc£ ; ( Parsij ^MRSi, before, for ^MPM. 

c) r\ to Q{. The Standard 5«ild, a tent-curtain, 

becomes t the SuratI &<3ilS ; similarly eQ^W,, 
dampness, for »{Mftl. 

d) «i to <ct. The'Standard «il^l, cast ye, becomes 

the Suratlg'C-U^U ; similarly -il&U or •il'-ill, 
young, for *i[r[[. 

The cerebral'mute i may pass over to R, the cerebral 
semivowel. Thus the Standard MVSl, curtain becomes the 



APPENDIX 
IIIB. 



18$ 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR.. 



APPENDIX 
IIIB. 



Surati M^lli; similarly H}&l*h, a shadoiv, for 'Hifesl^r^ 
1vG& r a pice, for 1l£[Q. 

5. The palatal to aud k\* are often pronounced as %l, and: 
& as £, while & may be elided. With Parsls, however,, 
the & sound is a favourite, and hence it seldom, iff 
ever, posses over into &. 

The to, even when pronounced! as y„ is generally, 
retained in writing,. 

«) *l to H. The Standard &5Ul, ahvays- becomes the* 
Suratl~&>>tel ; similarly %& f consciousness,, for 
$££;. (Pars!) £ t what ! for %•; (ParsI) &&„ 
will do,, for £^$L 

h) 3* to &. The Standard <H33it, years, becomes the 
Surati ^(§1 ; similarly &lff*l&>U, safe and sound' 
for ■fcpvfeiSU.;. &t3, for, for =Hl-^ - *iH&,. wie»„ 
for *tl<^U>, (Cl^ivfl^, a porcupine-quill, for 
(&yM*i, The Standard ^, w/ia<? passes; 
through the intermediate form ^ to§ ^similarly 
5R§1, mif db i through H& to &%. 

c) Elision 0/ &. The Standard <|, I, becomes the 
Surati @, similarly VtR„ a dweller,, for 3t§«iR ^ 
£*i or 1*1, said, for $^. 

6. H. following a consonant attaches itself to the preceding? 
vowel. Thus corresponding to the Standard forms 
MU^t, caused to fall, \&[,.fell, ^l, nut,. >ll£$t, sent* 
9t§, filled, Ml^t or ^$1, a son, the Surati forms are 
"HlWlt,. MWll, *tfc$l„ SltiWiU^ <HWi ^l^t,. respectively. 
Of the Standard ^Hl^l, came, the SuratL modification, 
may be either a>UW<Hl or ^iW^t. 

7. Medial consonants, are occasionally doubled. Thus 
the Standard ^Mct, diversion, becomes the Surati 
z&m ; similarly we have d^y, always, for &>Ul ; 
H;tibV a servant, for ^ilH ; «il<$l or *i\^\,.young for «i$l;. 
This doubling occurs especially when an immediately 



Narmakos' page <S» . . 



THE SURATl DIALECT OF GU.TARATI. 



ism 



Distinctive 
grammati-H. 

cal forms of 

the Sural* 

Dialect.. 



preceding % is elided. Thus M«S*& for Standard M^, I APPENDIX 
to wed similarly €U for H^L, old ; Hh for *ftll, 
dysentery., 
!?♦ GramatieaL Peculiarities.. 

1. Of the verb " to be." 

a) The Present Tense may be conjugated regularly ,, 
or for the 1st pers. plur.. the form &WM can be 
used, and for all the other parts of the tense 
& or to can do duty.. 

ty The Past Tense, &clt, becomes |<U or Sell, and, 
when used as an auxiliary, simply clt or H\. 
Thus Mtf *Mh cit for the Standard *if{ *lv&[ 
&cll, had died; and Well *ll for the Standard 
Well &cll, were playing* 

2. The Present Continuous Tense of any verb can be 
conjugated by adding to ( but in Pars! Gujarat! a/ or 
perhaps at ) to the regular form of the simple Present, 
Thus Sing. 1. *{&, 2. hi®, 3. s\& ; Plur. 1. iflwte, 

2. i^lto, 3. &\&. 

3. The simple Future Tense is conjugated as follows : — 
Sing. 1. iflfc, 2. «fc, 3. aftfe; Plur. 1. &&, 2. i^l,. 

3. i^ ; but Parsls adopt the following forms : — 
Sing. 1. iW, 2. i^, 3. «$; Plur. 1. &% 2. £}*U, 

Note also the ParsI tf<V& for «/&l. ( I ) shall go., 

4. A form worthy of special note is the simple Future 
in — a. Thus (3 §£t, / s/iaK arise. 

5. In Pars! Gujarat! especially, but also in Surati, 

a) the Past Indefin. Subjunct. ends in — cl rather 

than in — ct ; thus <£| (3 ^dcl, ijf / ^ac? risew ; 

also &cl for ^ld. 
h) the Past Tense of e^ to go, is ^Qmi rather 

than- o&t ; and of ^l^, to bring, is <H$| 

rather than <HloMl. 
e) the forms cl-HQl, Sl^t^ ( for cl, 3* ), and the 

feminine cl^[l are of frequent occurrence. 



182 



GUJAItATI GRAMMAR. 



APPENDIX 
IIIB 

Specimen 

of the 

SuratI 

Dialect. 



The following version of a poition of the Parable of the 
Prodigal Son is in SuratI Gujarat!. 

»IA ***£{ ^ VWW <3dt. cTHHt «il«-U^ ^[\7{ $£ "$ f oi[\[ t £> 
fH<Hicl H[\ <HlSl »u3 cl Vt *uMl At^U. "UM fat-UcMl «) OtlH 
HlWil. *llAl (2ui) itttRi cll&l \l*Al Wig sa^ (^*4) 4#l 
£} H<-t>H *Ufc&l 3 Cli ^Wtrfl "SlC-lcMl «til^t ^IfcHl. ^ cl§| %o^ 
SsKl €l| (£[&) cl ^phc! cl &€i»Mi ^\1i %bW MW^i ^ eft cp(l 
(i^tl) M^i <-ipn. »l^.«l cl cl yc-t»Mt \<i[?.?. *tv>Ht <£§) clKl 
cVHl'fHi $** flwi 5U*«li. a$j Mictisi >U ££* »iieu ci $*ii*tt 

<HW| &ct MQJ cl 1lW^ eft WilfcCm <$. *>ft ci <Ht} ^cft ^4 &l^ 

3Mi=n cl ^liwilt $ >u*i "tr^ft cti <i^<-ti "$tm «tdt *iHlft ^ 2>t 
( to ) *ti<=ud i«l & 3 i«fl §t*i &S d »& <3 ch 9J^ h| g. @ <§£t 
^ *IRI <tlM &$ <*cll ^ "Hftl $, "ilMt, ^ ^Mlfl ( cWlfl ) *HRtft 
fovlt lit ifcftl & »& cWtfl &li}t ^«tiWl >ft <Hl«VH -l«fl. *ft 
cfHRl 3lH Ml ^l. cl <§W$l 3 ctol "11M &1 *iiy3l. M<SJ &«£ 
tl^l ^i&l Sell cl itf cftl "tlM" eft £&"( fi|l ). cl^l SMI 3Mt«a 3 cl 
llWlt 3 oiil cK-pQ MWil *>ft "t^afj tftffl. MIM^S* hi, "ilMl, $t 

^*ufl \^i ( ^^i ) tfevh tfti jy^t § a>ft e^ t ^}i $ Wl *ft 

€tl<tf* 1«n. Mm «HIM* 3l«3ft clfft ( 2£ft ) $g $ %m»ti *4W ^t 
€ll3l 3 ^ft M^l. ^Ml &WHI <fl<n Sll*U a Vl «Ul ( ff^Jl ) M^t 

Hil »tWill ell cl vflfl ( X^1«H ) 55^1 H&[ d ^ ^wy o t wHi ell c\ 
41^1 «/W^l d. 3 cl^l 3i»lcl i^l «HWdU. 



THE CHAROTARI DIALECT OF GUJARATI. 



i83 



li. Charotari ( aftutfl = Carotari ), or the Midland, Gujarat! APPENDIX 

is so designated from the tract of land called ^ICR, which; _^ 

name may perhaps be but a variant of *{^ItR, ' the superior) 
pasturage.' Spoken in the villages of the Kaira ( Kheda, ) 
and the northern part of the Broach Cullectorates, this dialect 
obtains over an area considerably larger than the Charotar proper 
(See § 20, Note 1 ). 

A. Phonetic Peculiarities. 

The phonetic changes noticeable in the Charotari 
dialect may be summarized as follows : — 

1. Vocalic : 

1). The Standard a may become the Charotari e or aw ( sutf ). 

2 ). 
8). 
4). 



Distinctive 

phonetic 

features 

of the 

Charotari 
dialect, 



a 

i 

u 

e 

ai 

o 






„ oro (aJU) or aw. 

„ a or e. 

„ a or om or aw. 

„ a or i. 

6 ). „ „ ai „ „ » „ «• 

7). „ „ o „ „ „ „ a or aw or u or yxi. 

8). „ „ Anusvara, especially when final, may be lost. 

2, Consonantal : 
9). Guttural mutes may in Charotari be palatalized, 
h >H ^l H thus changing to a* & 9/ tf respectively. 
10). The sibilant %i nearly always passes into the aspirate &. 
11). Of semivowels «1 may change to ^ t and ^ and <t to H. 
1 2). The conjuncts Q and 4 may become >H and ^H (or M ) 
respectively. 

The following examples serve to illustrate these phonetic 
changes. 

1) a to e or aw ( a^l ). 

a) Stand. iioft 3^ ^ ^p^ 

Char. >i'pl* ^ ^ ^i 

paddy pulse an owl sandal ivood 

b) Stand. &<a ^yoi Vpid 



a tigress. 



Char. \\<s\ j^ot. Violet 



Strict 



a plough happy foot of a cot (if) had written. 



Vocalic 
changes in 
Charotari. 



m 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



APPENDIX 
III B. 


2) a to om (a*u) or aw (^Hl) ; also am (^ti) to om 






a) Stand. ^UM 


iXH Hl^ll 


"iQHH 




Char. oil"H or 0U"H ^R orffH xii<^] or Mt^fl ^hH or «$[l4 




foruw 


Ram water 


unconscious. 




6) Stand. *u3h 


hQi mH 


M<-tiSl 




Char. %«U 


S& Ml>H 


M%& 




a mango tree 


a coast a wing 


cross-legged. 




3) i to a or e. 








a) Standi fa(«l 


fc^m frmft. 


PlM 




Char. d^i 


<**tt*l °ttU& 


H§1 




a lunar day 


faith a cat 


indigent. 




o) Stand. fiU 


<mi tfl'i 


^4 




Char* ^i 


^& Si 


^ 




walk 


to glean a sneeze sweet. 




4) w to a or om (%) 


or aw C^i\). 






a) Stand. &<HfH 


<§Tft $:^H 


33 




Char. oi<£tl"H 


=»{tR £>H 


RCl 




a slave 


north pain 


a season. 




o) Stand. £<MR 


6te ' ih 


& 




Char. jfi<HR 


*hu 2i£ 


SlS 




a potter 


a camel short 


aV^/ ginger* 




c) Stand. ^ 


q& 'ot^ 


H*MHR 




Char. >tf& 


%i<Q ^R^IQJ 


*u*mhr 




« onoustacJie 


salt a shouting 


^?^ torrents. 




5) e to a ox i. Note that the Charotarl a substituted for a 




final e ( as in the Agent, or Loc. Case ) is 


in utterance 




somewhat prolonged. 






a) Stand. ^l£ & 


<m\ %1 


q& 




Char. ^t^-to- 


HkR- El- 


cllH 




speaks 


more in a market 


fci/ a tiger. 




b) Stand. \l\ 


■*fti <l^i 


*tpual*l 




Char. t&\ 


•wr*4 ^^i 


atpti 3 ^ 




a turban-band 


to drag to distrifoite 


a musk-rat. 




6) ai to e. 








Stand, qfl cVH 


tgm ^wn 




Char. ^fl <*M 


^'-MIS wttKCl. 




aw enemy a Jaina Kaikubad the elephant Airavata, 











THE CHAROTARI DIALECT OF GUJARATI. 



185 



7) o to a or aw ( v\y ), and ( in plurals ) to u or yu. 

a) Stand. >lR M^l^l «&U3| &^ or ^^ 

Char. MR M^l ^l^ &l<$i 

waa; a guest a churning vessel the current year, 
•o) Stand. §ill ^"^lA 0«<fl»U4 wltclVl (or dcl^i) 

Char, tjlll ^Wfld 9K<fl*HW %CRH 

a Aorse a lyaZwtti high tide and low the lintel of a door. 
c) Stand, ou^i &t£l5fc C-U&&5U $Rll 

Char. ^ $t% C-Uifl^, fo& 

cows girls sticks she-buffaloes. 

8) Anusvara, especially when final, may be lost. 



APPENDIX 
III B. 



a) Stand. *MS iiSlM 

Char. *MS ^6il<'l 

a charter a mint 
I) Stand. g ^4 

Char. ^ ^4 

am or art what ? 



a connexion a copper-smith. 

m\ -^i v\i 

m\ 5lj >ti?j 



9) Gutturals to palatals, h to =M, "»i to to, $1 to <y/, H to *}. 



a) Stand. M 41^ 
Char. Slaii h\pH 

plantains an aunt 

b) Stand. Sfcl* -^lUl 
Char. §cR &\h 

afield a nail 

c) Stand. «ipQ ^>U<H^P 
Char. -i.15^? <M<H^fl 

naked with young 

d) Stand. ift Ifei 
Char. ^1 $Zi 

gh% a ram 

10) Sibilant *l to aspirate &. 
Stand. *U| *U& 
Char. <^l| fci§ 

good a mother-in-law all 

11) Semi- vowels u\ to ^, and ^ and =1 to H. 
a) Stand, qtffl *u<?U auofly 

Char. q^ y^l a^i^ 

also a brother'in-law forty 
24 



hoio many ? how ? 
*il"*l ^ii^H 

a j% the eye. 



knocked against 
at home 



MIS 

a row (of guests). 



ll 



611&H 

face to face. 

ivater. 



Consonantal 
changes in 
CharotarL 



186 



SUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



APPENDIX 
III B. 



Distinctive 
grammatic- 
al forma 
of the 
Charotarl. 
Dialeot. 



b) Stand. 6«3i 
Char. Gml[ 

a mouse 

c) Stand. <tw 
Char. <UM 

u step-well 



"HH^t or >ili HH^i or \^ fe*& or \l 
dysentery to marry myrobalan. 

cl€ll*t Mf^lW Ml*U (=»Hl l *U) 

a poncZ having clothed came. 



12) The conjuncts §J and *J may become >H and ^H respectively. 



a) Stand. H%% 
Char. «l>H*3i 

a characteristic 

b) Stand. *JH 
Char. JH14 

knoivledge 



Laksmi 



M$l 
MM 

^PHl 

a commewic?. 






In the Bhal and in the district south of the Charotar the 
palatal mutes seem to partake of a more or less sibilant character. 
Thus ^ comes to resemble ts, to tsh, 9/ dz and ti dzh. 

!$♦ Grammatical Peculiarities. 

1) Regarding the Agent, or Loc. Case in — aJl see 5 a), 
and regarding the Plural in — *J, instead of — a>U see 7 c). 

2) In the conjugation of verbs the Charotar!, more frequently 
than the Standard Gujarat!, employs for th 2nd pers. sing, a form 
identical with that of the 1st pers. Hence «j ^ or ^ or &, thou 
art; £ &\ ^ or i\ ^, thou makest ; ^ h\k\ or htkki or H$l, 
thou wilt make. 

3) Of the verb " to be." 

a) the Present Tense is conjugated as follows : — 

Sing. 1. ^ or tg. 2. Some as 1, or &. 3. & or $. 

Plur. 1. tflS* 2. $l or *ll 2. d or $. 

6) The past Tense &dl, when an auxiliary, nearly always 
shrinks to ell. 

Thus ^Hl^dl ell was coming ; a>U<l cfl (she) had come ; 
et§l ^Hl^ si /te 7^ eaten. ; Mlcll ell toere drinking. 

4) The Present continuous Tense of all verbs i» conjugated 
as follows : — 

Sing. 1. $4 g or *$ g or j^ 
,, 2. Same as 1, or 4^ & or 4V<s-. 
„ 3. 4^ d or iVto- or 4^ $. 



THE CHAROTARI DIALECT OF GUJARATX. 



1ST 



Plur. 1. 4=Q3l faflSl. 
„ 2. Same as 2, or k\\. §1 or h\\ %.. 
„ 3. 4^ § or 4Vto* o^ 4^ & 

5) In tha simple Future Tense the conjugation of the verb 
is regular save that forms of the type 4^*1 or 4^1 may be 
used both for the 1st and for the 2nd pers. sing. 

6 ) Of the verbs <* 3 to go and a^l^ to come, the Past Tense 
is :*U or <*>U and *m*U. Thus 4 ^Itf *USl *Hl*U ell i /jad cum* 
fate to-day. 

Note also the forms cj ff*l'c9 £/tott a?-£ going ; <j ^Hl^ i/iow art 
eating ; cj o*Ul thou ivilt go ; cj MUl i/ww wiW ea£. 

The following is a rendering in the Charotarl Dialeet of a 
portion of the parable of the Prodigal Son. 

Sl4 'Hl^l «l SlHl &Ctl. *>ti ^Hl rlHlal «|4l "ilM^ 4^ 1, 
«*i4Ml, cTHlfl £ss»U*(l <£ ^ <HlSl »ll^ d. >$ 3HIMI. =»A ^§| 
^Wt'ft MlHict ^14* q=(l =»MlMl. *>M «lut CUt £i U 4<£t »U€lPlt 
^C-U 4141 $t«l»l MlcM <4Hl ^*j> ^<ft j^ lyiq^ o**U, aH4" eft 
6il@WU °i% >HlW 4lto*i. =<M4 *\\ 641 44^ "ig ^'41*1 VQ <i\\ 
»l &€l4»tt <Hl^ C4M M^l, =H4 64~ MlHl fHHKl 6*l6i M^l >ih^t. 
^ i§t oyci 44" »l 1*141 ^4 ^1^141 «Hl%ftl RtQl. »l$} ^4" %i, 

^wi 8wi 5U4«*h. A** <£ Sui vital d *t«*il lui cli ^fufi 

Mlct, M^J S{H S& %\\}5[ *>ilMl 46l orJl"^ 5ft <Ht4 *Hl?£ clt^ 5* 

*hi^i %, "4Ri "iivu 3U«ii «hhi 414^ *U4^ft ^icti [Mdi c$ 5u^ 

& ; 3 Ht^ *t& && *R^ Ml S. ^ cil ii 4RI <4lM 44" <*<§ 4" 
*§ %, "tlMl, ^ M*>Ul=ftl 4 cWt^l ^t4t 4MI &, 4 cfHl^l ts*U 4^1^ 
C-UM4 4*ft ; >ft M^IR »tlMl =m« ^l. ^HR 4<C1^ ^ &41 «iW 4^1 
^Ht. M<^1 5\4t ^ItMlSl ^ «HlM 54MI, ^U& Ml »tlW, cl«0 
6i\4l^ 5M ^a «HUl M^ll, ^ ^i^fl ifl. &14^1»1 «ilH4 4||, 
"UMl, >l CtMl^l 4 M^>l^R4l U41 4RMI §, 4 Ct^tl^l featf t ^^Rl r -ll^ C-1^4 
^6Ml 4^1. "ilH 5J141 4t4^A 4^ ^, 6R141 61RI «t^ €llW^ ^ 
M}l3U, ^ 6l«i H=fl mill 4 M^ ^41 ^RlS5l ; 3H4 >4W Ml4 ^fl 
«iWS\ ; «lMl "^ »tl Ml^l R^l M^ H^^l C^^cll siHl S ; ^ ^Wl^l, 
cl «/«l §. ^HM 4^ «HHl ^155 «t««. 

III. Pattani ( M^d ), or the Northern, Gujarat! derives its 
name from the town of Anhilwada Pattan (or Patan), which for 
more than six centuries preceding the founding of the city of 
Ahmadabad was the capital of the kingdom of Gujarat, The 



APPENDIX 
III B. 



Specimen 

of tha 
Charotarl 
Dialect. 



188 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



APPENDIX 
IIIB. 



Distinctive 
phonetic 

features of 

the Pattapl 

Dialect. 



town lies well within the tract of country that may be regarded 
as the home of the Paftani dialect, — the quadrilateral bounded, 
by lines joining Kadi, Kadhanpur, Dlsa, and Modasa,.. 
A. Phonetic Peculiarities. 

1. Vowels. 

1). Long a takes the broad sound of " awe." 

Thus ^ivtf, small, for the Standard *{\7{\>; &<Vo{v r 
in the field for ^cR'Hi ; ^cil, in giving, for "Sell. 
2). ai may be shortened to a%, as <HW, brother, for «ilW.. 
3). i may change to e. 

Thus 3<H, a ring, for Standard eft/l ; mallet;. 
conversation, for mct&ct. 
4). Short u is in a few word* reduced to inherent a; 
as V% pain y for Standard £:>H ; and i&Rp, 
famine for %h\u\. 
5).. also e, especially when final, may change to- 
inherent a. 
Thus a*M, and, for Standard »$ ; ift*tj we do,, 
for #fl5l ; a H*Uf, because, for IMS.. 

2. Consonants. 

1). Gutturals undergo palatalization. 

a), k to *{. Thus =te$U, how many ? for Standard? 
liH\ ; \*1\\, a beggar, for \}fc ; =-Mi«fl„ 
whence ? for cfMl^. 
6). "<H to to. Thus Sct^Q,, w the field, for Stand.. 

c). si to <tf. Thus M£>, ow ffte /oof, for Stand* 

"H^l ; <Hia?, began, for <HpQ ; ev^l, tuew£, for 

^l or *i*U. 
2. *l t to, and ^t are much interchanged* 

a). *l to =H. Thus «il%t, dancing, for Stand. «1R ; 

=Hiel loatfcs, for au£t ; "ttfl, a hiss, for «i=-=fl. ; 

%UHi*tl, among the servants, for *U^l*ii. 
b). to to %. Thus %, am, for Stand. t£ • % 

is, for § ; M*fl, a/ter, for M^l ; ^U, « 8 ^, 

for ^£. • 



THE PATTA.Nl DIALECT OF GUJARAT?, 



18^ 



c). =H to to. As toi<HHl, recollected, for %tiot'Ml. 
3),. y and =U both pass to &. 

a), *L to £. Thus |, what t for Stand. ^ ; ^> 
will become, for «i^l ; ^^ happiness, for 
"^Q ; "£&>li, w ^e country, for ^Ri. 

&). % to &. Thus |l*fl &RI,. fos£ 0/ aZZ, for |u«fl 
*Rt ; (scMHl'd, ruin, for fccMWW ; tA% 
with, for %tt«l ; Vllift, to tfte dweller, for 

4). i and </l both change to ^. 

a). 4 to *. Thus *4Rl, few, for Stand. «iui ; 
^l, old, for «lll ; <3\v([, having squandered, 
for &&l{\ ; 8 a Ri| ^otftes, for §HiL 
6). 01 to *. Thus *m|, aZZ, for =UHU} ; *HPR 
6e/ore, for a>iPl«\ ; *Hl^l, harlots, for fte«il<?l I 
£4R, famine, for |il«l. 
5). Cerebrals undergo dentalization. 

a). ^ to ct. Thus *i[x\,for, for Standard >ll2 ; and 

"Sled, on the neck, for %(i. 
b). S to 81. As £$1, saw, for Standard £&l. 
c). <$J to »i. Thus c$, 6y him, for Standard 
cl§j; H^ll, much, for H%1 ; >M, 6m«, for 
M^; 3 H, reckon thou, for ^i^. 
Note also the converse change of £ to 4 in ihi\ 

famine, for Standard ££1<A. 
6). «l may be disaspirated as in &lcfl, on the hand, 

for Standard &$. 
Compare also »l4g, together, for Standard wU|. 
7). Final anusvara may be inserted, or may be 
omitted. 
a). Inserted. Thus ^HIM^, to the father, for 
Standard °\\\Z{ ; itf^t, having done, for 
£#3 ; 3, m, for d. 
6). Omitted. Thus ^^, as/ceo*, for Standard 
>ito*i ; and h%, eaid, for *§[. 



APPENDIX 
III B. 



190 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



APPENDIX 
IIIB. 

Distinctive 
grammatic- 
al forms of 
the Pattani 
Dialect. 



Specimen 
of the 
Pattani 

Dialect. 



B. Grammatical Peculiarities. 

1. In the plural of nouns, especially neuter nouns, the 
termination — ^Mi often takes the place of — aiU. 

Thus <*<&{, years, for Standard q^l ; m^[, men, for 
Hl<%?U ; %Lim, servants, for *l[h\l 

2. For tha Agential and the Locative Cases, the termination 
■ — V) may be substituted for — 5l. 

Thus fctcft, on the hand, for Standard 41*1; similarly 

^icU, on the neck, for $1^.. 
Further note >ft' or >{l by me-, for >{, and eft' or cuaH,, 

by thee, for cL 

3. Of the verb " to be." 
a) the Present Tense is conjugated as follows : 

Sing. 1. & 2. g or *, 3. & 

Plur. 1. *{$ or *W*l f 2. ?U, 3. % or ($•. 

6) the Past Tense &cU is* often contracted to ck, 

whence arise the negative forms <ck, «tcfl *iQ^ 
c) for the 1st pers. sing, of the Future Tense <^& 
may be used as a variant form of &W*l or ^iWy. 
4, The following are typical forms for the conjugation, 
of the simple Future Tense of all verbs : — 
Sing. 1. ■Mifly or »u^, 2. "Hi^l or same as 1, 3. MR*l or »U^ ; 
Plur. 1. -Hl^£ or MR^, 2. *ift$U or y\%, 3. m\$l or *iK&. 

5. In some verbs a furtive H slips in before the final — a?U of 
the Imperative plural ; thus $i, take ye, for Standard Ik. 

6. The following irregular forms are worthy of note : — 
<**k or a^t, went, for Standard atjh, and <fj>lk for *&&[ j 
*■£, became, for «i^; =*Mt^l, came, for *Hlo*k ; <Kl 
having taken, for <HW. 

The following translation of a portion of the parable of the 
Prodigal Son will serve as an illustration of the Pattanl dialect. 

SU *£N^' ^ $Rl &cll. cl*Hl>{wi ^HlS* »UH3 hi, <tlM, 
•Hl<H*iCt£l & <HR Vl *mtii &M cl ^ *HIM. eft clM ^22 qfcd 
*HlMl. ilftl .€Rl Mtfl 3$ ^ %i^ 51*3 i£ *>M ^Kl Ml «v*H 

Si Ml >U2l 4m M^l 3 eft ^Hli MVU €lia?. cl «tf\A cl Ml »& 



THE PJLTTANI DIALECT OF GUJARATI. 



191 



%li »tMi cii d Heft Mictii >te omiKl fa *rts> **w, mh ^iw^ fa 

*HlMi -161. *h3 *fa cl wttlcl atHl cfa fa 4& Wl "tlM^l =Uc-U 
1°s£ti M>4} *W*U *, ^ S cil ^ *U & $ @£ft 1W ^ ^ 
<£& ^ fa $& S, H[\ Ml* \\k<k\ UHl 3 Cttfl ^MPR MlM 5A& &' 3 
6*»t § Ctt^l tttfl 4&U«U <MM *l*(l. ^ CtRl 3l4^l>lHl 5Ur £% »H. 
cl <3$l ^HH °ilM M w^l, 3 cl &£? H^l ^iXl 6cll cl£l fa "tlM €l*U 3 

fa €\*n ^iw 3 a wi fa ^icn ^i * fa «t^n smi.? ^ fa b% 

<tlM, Ml M&tM &Pil 3 cllfl »lPrt MIM Wi &' &H clftl "Ml ftfewil 
<?*>l H*(l. "H4 "ilM MIClHl fcUrtft 4?i S, ll*ft 4UI ^ 3 Ri <Hl "^Hl^U 

^ a 2>iH >fciSU ; 3 ^ 6lcu H<n mill ; 3 m£ <m*i ^l5u, 3 =»HlMl 
""ilW^l "*HHS 4*1*1, $"H$ ^l "Hltl ?lftl ^Sll ell 3 MRU ©Hell «l*U %T; 

3 Suhih&i cli "d <*}i ?u "d cl^u ^ks 4*hi €u«*u. 

IV. Kafchiawadi ( 4l£l a HlHl£\ ) Gujarat! is the dialect of 
Gujarat! spoken by uneducated Hindus throughout the peninsula 
of Kafchiawad. 

A. Phonetic Peculiarities. 

1. Vowels, 

1). The broad sound " awe " is occasionally substituted 
for long o. 

Thus 5\l^M, formerly for the Standard >IR is pro- 
nounced maivrya. Similarly >lPi<H, Mughal, has 
the sound of Mawgal ; ©*ll, went for Standard 
oiMl, the sound of Jiyaw ; and ^llll, a horse, 
the sound of gatvdo. 
2). dl may be shortened to al, as <HW, brother, for QilW, 

and "^yd, having eaten, for "uiiyA. 
3). £ may change to e, as M"tl, a/to-, for Standard \&[. 

2. Consonants. 

1). Gutturals become palatalized. 

a). 4 to »t. Thus all, after, for Standard $1 ; also 

€l=H^l, a son, for €14^1 ; *i"H, why ? for §»t. 
6). >H to to. Thus &<H, a^eZd, for Standard vlcR 
2). to if immediately followed by the palatal y or e may 
become the palatal sibilant $i ; otherwise to and 
also ai change to the dental sibilant =U. 



APPENDIX 
III B. 



Distinctive 
phonetic 
features of 

the 
Kathiawadi 
Dialect. 



3 92 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR* 



APPENDIX 
III B. 



Distinctive 
grammatic- 
al forms 
of the 
Kathiawadi 
Dialect. 



B. 



a) to^4 to M, Thus ^% asked, for Standard ^to^» 
I) S to $. Thus }\1% from afar, for Standard S2«fl. 
c) to to *t. Thus ?U4<1, sons, for Standard durti; 

&l£\, a g'iri, for &l£l ; ^t^fl, a 7mi/e, for to^. 
a") t to ^i. Thus «il*t, dancing, for Standard «1W ; 

$R, a thief, for SlR ; ^tifl, service, for au*<l. 

3) k\ and 3*, if medial or final, may pass to &, but note 

that ^l is retained throughout the conjugation of 

the simple Future Tense. 
a) *l to &. M^&Hl, in a foreign country, for Standard 

M^*Ri ; <*<s, glory, for <tf*l. 
4) %l to &. *tl<^ft, 61/ maw, for Standard «ll^%i<fl ; 

cR&, a year, for c^y. 

4) final anusvara may be inserted. 

Thus a^liii, thereupon, for Standard ^HliJl ; 
clR, $«w, for <Mt^ ; 3, awd, for ^. 
Grammatical Peculiarities. 

1. Nouns though ending in a consonant may have 
a base-form in — ^Hl, and a plural in — *ti. 

Thus ff/^lW, to a person, for Standard <r/<3$ ; 
Hlii, raids, for Hilt ; %lii, swine, for %1\. 
Noteworthy is a plural in @ or *i ; thus *i$'Q, 
of harlots, for Standard RillKl ; H^Q, kisses, for 

2. A fleeting intrusive *i is heard at the end of some 

nouns. Thus ^tRM, green fodder, for Standard *UR ; 
also Sll&l, a pleasure-party, for 5il&; >UV1, 
formerly, for ^R. 



3. Of the verb " to be " 






a) the Present Tense is 






Sing. 1. & 


2. g 


3. $. 


Plur. 1. %tf 


2. Sll 


3. tt. 



The letter to may indeed be preserved throughout 
this tense in writing, but it is pronounced as H. 
b). The Past Tense is either &cli or ell, and the 
corresponding negative form is ^llcU nawto. 



ffiE KATHIAWADI DIALECT OF GUJARATI. 



193 



4. In the Present Continuous Tense of all verbs the 
2nd pers. sing, is of the type 4| ^ or 4^t ; but 
with this exception the conjugation is regular, thus 
Sing. 1. i\ ^ 2. i| & or 4^1 3 h\ $, 
Plur. 2. 4*1*1 ^ 2. *\\ SU 3. b\ *i- 

5. In some verbs a furtive M slips in before the final 
vowel of the Imperative. Cf. No. 2. Thus "MIVM, 
strike thou, for Standard H\\. 

6. The Past Tense of Passive Verbs ends in-§|l,-^Q, 
-12J instead of -M\-W,-*i > also a participial form 
in -$$l,-§}C-{l,-i^ may take the place of -w^U, 
~-»U(l, -2%Q. Thus aJHl§|l, he was seized, for Stan- 
dard *MV\[ ; ^l^Jl, he was plundered, for Ql\>\[ ; 
and ^l<Hl^l, one who loas lost, for vU<*l5\5ll. 

Y. Note the forms *U;J and *4lclt for Standard *i$ and 
Idl ; <M=j and Melt for <r/=[ and <tfdl ; also '£$1, 
went, for oiMl. 

A portion of the parable of the Prodigal Son has been tendered 
As follows in the Kathiawadi dialect. 

a*4 9/^ti ^ ^lli^l 6<U. cfldM dti Wdl "ilVl h% %, "tlMl, 
*HlMit dafl'tRldWl Hd dtfl <HIM ^MlMl. «4Wsl W^ "il^i "M 
W^ifl q^ £lHl *UAl €1 *& «il^l ell Mldldl Wdd «ig H=fl *tuO 
Wdl <£ M^l ^Ml W fid M^Ml £?*U, ^ Wli 4§} MlCtld ^ 3ll1 Wd 
Sil^l dU&. ^USt «Uil {\Hi ell "i% ^ f^. SteCHR'l W 1(i*li<W 
W^ 4l'd "4^1. CltX Wd ^HWldl ^kl Msm. MS W 5^4 cl \tk*\[ *aRl 

n«twi«ii. "iRudft wni <*Wd *&i*(l u*U. wm'i i^^i <hw di »uwi 
H<*{ldi $«i cpurnl ^r^i 2?m. m^ ejwi di *um •uuh, w di^^ 

>HHIH dtf ^ dl W MlW^ d<Hd. ^tfft Wd "SlM *tf ^l *Hl"4i ; ^liei 
*Hl<dHld 5ttaJ| dl <H<1>4 dlR <HW3 ^i<H^ 3 dRl °ilVl H^ dl §U«l 
SlCiHl ^ $, ci(/(l ^ v^en xQcn ^ -H'/tCH>H d<?l $, ^ *titf d# dl 
tli^ 4^ Ml & dl aiHd, 4 tel'dfcl «4W^ dRl °ilM Mli b/@, ^d 
d>£ t/Wd 4@" %, "ilMlj 4 dMl^l 4 M^dl ?lU ^ ; 4 dl IrMld^ «l»li t 
M^J 6?l %ll^ *^K ^IM, M^i "Hl^ld^ WlW *tlM d^, WH M'iQ Md 
dHl^ WMl tlCi^l Rl^Hl. Wd ^1^1 d ^I'^l ft*U 5Hd ^IdHl ««M 
Mi^ ^l. Wd «Hl^ dl ^ $12*U <Htcr^l "^ *Hd^d'l SMl^l Sd^l 
^l^l d«ft 4i\ 41^1 ft*Rldl ^l^ "iloA Mi^l ^l "taflJi ©i^l di^l!. 
Sl4^l ^l^l, "UMl, 4 ^l ddl^l ^t M*$dl ^l ad^lR f^l ^ % 
CldRl <^4ldl ^1^1 "B^d^l <^M U^l d«g. Wd «Hl^ telSflgd 4^ 
*§, «d3lt, ^'Hi^a Hrtl ^=11^1 CHl^ld W^l M^l, H fel«idi ^cft'^l d«il 
Mol MMV^i Md^l. ei«ft =^1*/ ^M^l ft *[*${ W>i^R 4^1 ct^l 
VlitflHM<a wAl. ^Ml?(l "5 =^1^ ^ y4i m^Hl €1^1 ^W?=ld V«ll, 
*ld ^1=11^1 «r/^l ^. M^ ' J tHl eflStlH^ 4^1 dlW!. 
25 



APPENDIX 
III B. 



Specimen 

of the 

Kathiawadi 

Dialect, 



APPENDIX 
IV. 

Guna and 
Vrddhi of 

1. 1; U. 



2. a. 



3, a. 



Table and 

examples of 

Guna and 

Vrddhi 

changes. 






APPENDIX IV. 
CJuna and Vrddhi* 

• 

Certain Gujarat! words, Sanskritic in origin and character, are 
liable to the vocalic changes termed by Sanskrit grammarians 
Guna (jpr = a quality ) and Vrddhi( fr% = increase ). 

The lesser, Guna, modification results from prefixing short a, 
and the greater, Vrddhi, from prefixing long a, to a given 
simple vowel. 

1. If the given simple vowel be i, or u, we have 
ft + i or I = e a + i or 1 = ai 
a ■)■ u or u = o a-f-uoru=au 

Hence the Guna of i or I is e ; and of u or u is o ■ 
also the Vrddhi of i or I is ai ; and of u or u is au. 

2. If the given simple vowel be a, we have a + a = a,a + a=S 
Hence, whether a or a, be prefixed, a changes to a. This sole 

modification is accordingly reserved for those occasions which 
demand the more emphatic or greater Vrddhi change. Thus a, 
undergoes no variation for Guna, but the Vrddhi of a is a. 

3. If the given simple vowel be a, we have a + a = a 

a, -f- a = a. 
Hence, whether a or a bejprefixed, a remains a, and accordingly 
is unaffected by either Guna or Vrddhi. 

The following Table exhibits all the Guna or Vrddhi changes. 



Simple Vowel a a i or I u or u 



Guna 
Vrddhi 



e 
ai 



o 
au 



* The " simple vowel " undergoes no modification. 



The following are examples of 
in Gujarat!. 

a vrddhied to a ^cl 


Guna or Vrdd 


hi changes 


i gunated to e 
i vrddhied to ai 


f^ 
Gil 


IN; 




ii gunated to o 
u vrddhied to au 


^ 
^H 


^IH; 





APPENDIX V. 



Sandhi* 

SaDdhi (£fo) is the term employed in Sanskrit Grammar to 
indicate the euphonic combination of the final and initial letters of 
consecutive words or of the consecutive parts of a compound word. 

In Gujarat! the rules of Sandhi apply only to its purely 
Sanskritic words. The following are most of the Sandhi rules 
that will be found helpful in Gujarati. 

1. Rules for the combination of vowels,* 

1. Any simple vowel followed by its own long or short 
coalesces with it so as to form its own long. 

a -J- a = a ; I-j-I=I; u -{- u == u. 
MVH + ^4 = MVHl^l benevolence. 
JtPt + *K* = hii^ chief poet. 
Wl + §fi = <H\-l$H sunrise. 

2. The vowel a or a followed by any dissimilar simple 
vowel blends with it so as to form an intermediate vowel, 
either e or o. 

a -f- I = e ; a + u = o 

MVH + 4*i\ = M^^ The Supreme Being. 
^M^l + (3SH = ^cllSH rising and falling. 

Note also a + r = ar, thus 'H^l _}. tftfa = »t&R a great sage 

3. When a or a, is followed by a diphthong, no Sandhi 
combination takes place in Gujarati. 

w ~ 

4. The vowels I and u followed by any dissimilar vowel 
change to their corresponding semi-vowels ^ and <^ respectively, 
to which the following dissimilar vowels is added. 



I -f a = ya 
I + u = yu 



u + a = va 

U -f- I = VI 



* In the examples of the application of Sandhi the final consonant 
of a word is regarded as maintaining its ' inherent a ' » thus V^'H = 
par&ma, »h\<\ — asta. 



APPENDIX 
V. 



I. Vowel- 

saudhi 
producing 
a) a, I, u, 



I) e, o, 



c) y, or v, 
with vowal. 



196 



GU JAR ATI GRAMMAR. 



APPENDIX 
V. 


u 

i 4- e = ye 
I 4- ai = yai 


u 4- e = ve 




u 4 ai= vaii 




i + = yo 


u 4- o = vo 




i 4- au = yau 


u 4- au = vau 



Visarga 
Sandhi. 



^—as +Son- 
nant. 



-» + Son- 
ant. 



a>Ml($ 4. a^rjct = ^•il'UHcl without beginning or end. 
MCct 4- 5l4 = Vc^4 each, every on©; 

*i<i 4- *HCft = H*4cl* a Manu-cycle. 

5. When e, o, ai, or au is followed by any vowel, no Sandhi; 
combination takes place in Gujarat!, 

II. Rules for the combination of consonants., 

A, Visarga Sandhi, or Sandhi when the first element is a 
Sibilant : 

1. Sibilant followed by a Sonant : 

a) — as before any sonant consonant changes to o t white 
the sonant consonant remains unchanged. 

*l«W + 4^ = Vlt<M captivating the mind, fascinating. 
b)-—as before a changes to o, while the following a is lost.. 

^•i^ 4- *>iA - H«"tl4. purpose of the mind, design., 
c) — os before any vowel other than a loses the s, while 
the remaining a coalesces with the following vowel in* 
accordance with the rules of Vowel Sandhi. 

>WW 4- §*Ul ( = manas 4- umahg ) = H<U"HH gladness 

of heart. 

d) — s ( but not -as) before r is lost, while the r remaina 

unchanged. Note that the vowel preceding the lost 

8 must, if short, be lengthened by way of compensation. 

Pw 4- ^PQ = -{l^ft free from disease. 

e) — s (but not -as) before any sonant letter other than r ia 
changed to r, while the following sonant letter remaina 
unchanged. 

(h\ 4- ^H^i = Gi\*ib devoid of meaning, profitless. 

C<\\ + 1lH = Pi£H faultless. 

Qi%_ + »M = Pfityl free from impurity, clean, pure, 

(h\ 4- 4*1 = fHw childless. 



SAXDHI. 



1&7 



2. Sibilant followed by a Surd. 

a) — s before y or ^ either changes to the following ^ or ^ , 
or appears as Visarga. 
Ptti + tib = Pi*<i* or OiAih unhesitating. 
0«£ + *m = Ptt*iSlH or Pt;*klH undoubted, undoubting. 
b)—s before dental mutes ( <1, «l ) appears as the dental 
sibilant 3*. 
Pt*t + cl<r/ = PftcW lustreless, 
e) — s before palatal mutes ( ^, to ) appears as the palatal 
sibilant K\. 

Pt^ + ftd = CHfatcl free from anxiety. 
<£) — s before guttural mutes ( & >H ) and labial mutes (M, \) 
appears generally as the cerebral sibilant q, but some- 
times as Visarga* 

Pi^ + 4<Hi = Pl^ieti spotless, immaculate-. 
Pw + \<A. = Gl^X ^ fruitless^ unsuccessful.. 

Note here ^clR + ^ = ^ct:^, the female apartments* 

»HcU + i^ = sHctrH^i the internal sense, the heart. 
«) — A Visarga Sandhi in which the second element is a 
cerebral surd ( £ S or H. ) seldom, if ever, occurs in 
Gujaratl. 

Note the irregular forms :— 

Pl^ + ^l*t = PwrtU ( not Pl:*iRll ) a sigh. 
Pttt.+ Vi<k = PtVi& (not Pl:Vi&) free from desire, impartial. 
£& + kM = tkM or s$l<a (not £*>k[V\) bad times, famine. 
/) — If the Visarga represent a final r, not s, (see §8), 
the original r is retained before a sonant. 

*Hct\ + Mh = ^Hcl^H inward meditation. 
U/i\ -f frAM = ^oy-M rebirth. 
Before a surd the original r either may be retained, or may 
be represented by Visarga. 

*H<1^ + *U$fl = *H<t&l$fl or *>icH*tl$a conscience. 
^Hcl^ + Mi = *>{<\Hl or *>{(l\\i a curtain. 

*Hfl^ + H<$i = »Hct:Hi^ the heart. 
*>Kt\ + >ft = *>{ct:M^ the female apartments. 
%1\ + *l«l = XM:m the early morning. 



APPENDIX 
V. 



— t + SurcL 



— r 
+ Sonant. 



— r 

+ Surd. 



19-5 

APPENDIX 
V. 

Non-sib. 

Surd. 
a. + nasal, 



6. + sonant 
(non-nasal), 



c. + surd. 



m 

a.+vowel, 

6.+ mute, 



c. + consou. 
^ion-mute), 



GUJARAT] GRAMMAR.. 

II, Sandhi when the first, clement is a non sibilant surd. 

1. A non-sibilant surd followed by a nasal changes to the 
nasal of its own class. 

H«i. -I- "*i\H - H^t^t a period of six months. 

<tf 3 Kt, + HI 8 ! = ov^Wl Jagannath, Lord of the world. 

2. A non sibilant surd followed by a non-nasal sonant changes 
to its own unaspirated sonant. 

tfH^ + ^MlcHl = ff/^iSlcHl the World-Spirit, the Supreme 

Being. 

*t<*. + 24^1 = ^Hia^i good quality, virtue. 
•HI* + ^Hcll = HP^&ctl the goddess of speech, Sarasvati. 
But note <\. + o/ becomes <wtf ( instead of £«•/ ), thus 
3*^ + •tf'i = : H'»9^ , i a good and virtuous person. 

3. A non-sibilant surd followed by a surd unites with it so as 
to form a conjunct letter. 

*t<\ + 4"A = ^AabA. a virtuous action. 
But note <1 + *t becomes =•*{, 

^,+ 8 becomes =•&, 

<\ + ^ becomes s-y*. 
*i<^ + frcl. + ^HS = *t(=-^HS the Absolute One, Brahma. 
*tt + k.i[Q = %t=-tol23l the True Scriptures. 

*fl»M. + lib?. + wiRl4 = sfl^HWtM the illustrious 

S'ankaracarya. 
Skr. (§c : H c l = Guj. Sc^iH or a5U=-to r -t, great joy, a day of rejoicing. 
C» Anusvara Sandhi, or Sandhi where the first element is m. 
1. — m before a vowel remains unchanged. 
*IH. + ^tlfcl = W\[\<H beginning. 

2. — m before a mute consonant appears either as anusvara or 
as the nasal of the same class as the following mute. 

VH. + AW = ^W or WKllM excessive heat, distress. 
%H. + WWQ = ^<HlH<3i or %f*«UHQ| conversation. 

3. — m before any consonant other than a mute appears as 
anusvara. 



SAS T Dtti. 



191) 



%H. + ^U = *Ul£ a colloquy, dialogue. 
%H. + &U = %6R destruction, extinction. 

D» &indhi when the first ehmont is a sonant other than m. 
Of this class only very few Sandhi combinations involving 
a change of letter occur in Gujaratl. 

Note however the following : — - 

^^ + *U = SH 2 -^ half a seer weight. 

§% + £U% = §«-it% delight, joy. 

Cl^ + ^iCH = cl.-'Hl'H an atom, a rudimentary element. 



APPENDIX 
V. 



Sonant 
(not m) 

+ 



Appendix 
\i. 



APPENDIX V!» 
Names of Relations, 

I» Direct Link : grandfather to grandson. 



(tl€l/0 



*U«h m, 



1 I i 



CU%ttfc/0 
I 
+ ... WHf. 



4 masc. 
or 4/ crn *" 



■St/. 






(o/HlW wi 4 ) 



Ml^w. 






■Mmes of relations. 



-201 



o 
o 



a 

-M 
&. 
a> 

a 

.9 
'5 

o 
o 



a 



a> 
c 



•ffl 



H 

'►H 
I-} 

o 
O 









s--> 



— ■ 1A? 



s 




■3) 




£ 


'3D'-. 


•30 


5=i> 


ff 


<££ 







T 

If * 




ft ■ 

— c 
-Ml 



26 



— ^ 




T 


s 


IS 


^v 


■=> 


£' T 


V 


e y 


C5 









-3 V^ 



*£ 



"2 

— TT 






•3 



13 
-§ 



§ 



CI 
eS 

& 
■IS 

•3 



<6 

fcD 

a 



c3 

P 

cr 1 






202 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



O 
< 
1-1 

M 

02 

O 

63 
P3 



f g" 

r 



'IS 'Z. 
35 



+ ■ 









13 

s 



3 

o 






g"5 

"It 



35 

+- 



IS 

1 
§ % 

r-O 

it 



a 

"S 

CD 

I 



g 

-'srsr 






«•■> 



v v 

e 






RELATIONSHIPS : INVERSE TERMS. 



203; 



If A bs related to B, either by blood or by marriage, the 
relationship in which A stands to B may be regarded as the 
Inverse of that in which B stands to A. The two terms indicating 
these two relationships may accordingly be designated ' inverse 
terms.' For example,, grandfather is inverse to grandson, also 
to granddaughter, and grandmother is inverse to the same. This 
fourfold inversion can be graphically represented thus : 



grandfather, 
grandmother- 



-grandson 
^granddaughter. 



m which diagram any two terms joined by a single straight line 
arc mutually inverse terms. 

In accordance with this method of representation the following 
diagrams indicate the inverse terms employed in Gujarati. 



Masc 
Fern. 



Wfef, 









all, 

sun- 






«tfiHlW 







[ilSl (or JSU)— — «Hlff»l 



jSl^l (or'|lW)'< i --^tHl«2 



Ml>U or (Hl?lt)-— 7 <Hl[^$l* 



Hl>a (or m^Z-i^n^* 



'&*& I /$l (or CtH?) 



<Hi<& rll*tl 'H4€ J »ll"lW / -— *i%t 



^0-^(1 



* 9lli^«/ may be used instead of either QtlG^U (<Ml^) m. or <HV$ 
( W^& ) /■ 



APPENDIX 
VI. 



Groups of 
inverse 
term?. 



204 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR.. 



APPENDIX 
VI. 



Terms for 
relations of 

wife or 
husband. 



Also the inverse of any ftw term is itself a fk^iy,. 
of any >t&MlW term is itself a "HfctMlW,, 
of any "|iWMlW term is a *U«uW,, 
of any $U2l. term is a «i$l, 
and of any «U, term is a ^11 or llfe-H termi. 

For example, the following are inverse terms : 
(VtlW <W<[ and ftotW *u3|l. or (M^liy *Utffl ;• 
»t[*Wiy ^4 and *t&HlW <HlW or >lRlHlW^«i;: 
\lWHlW 9ll«lfeJ and >ll<AlW £>£ (or &R) or 3U«UW 4^S -; ; 
$U<0 -i^'S and ^l<My ( = m«il <Hiy«ti <H|) ; 
«U %WlU and mNI «^Miy or Hi*=t <*!!, or Sl(<Hl. e/W 

or \[{<kH «!§.. 
A wife's MlH is her husband's Mist W^t, and a wife's M?A is- 
her husband's h[)fi ^ ;: and similarly for \5{[ and \[\J, for >U$U< 
and "HlHl, and for Mtttl. and *u*Q.. 

Conversely a husband's ills! is his wife's if§l *R$l,. or $U12?„ 
and a husband's &[}f[ his wife's &{}{\ yi^ or 4UASJ ; and similarly 
Xv\[& and\iy*?, MfHlSS and >ll>u2i>, , Hl*U22 and Ml*u22.. 
Hence the following inverse terms :—- 

4l$l %Kftl ( or *SU *Rt^l )« — rH^SS o/^ilW;. 



1lW' %U& (or aufl *U&)- 
MRU fclftl (or MRU *Rt}l), 






Mltfl *U& ( or *uHl %U&)^-^W§J<jV «tg. 
A husband's <Hty ( elder brother ) is his wife's <Hiy29, and' a* 
husband's <Hl*fL ( elder brother's wife ) his wife's <Hl<Kl22. Hence- 
<HiyS5 is but another name for o?$, and <Hl<Kl2? for ff^M^fl. 

A wife speaks of her father's house and family as fw, of her 
mother's as Tif&M^, and of her mother's father's as 5U%U<A ; also of 
her husband's relations as *Uft(Vu» 

A father ( «niM ) and father-in-law ( 3^1 ) are each the It^iy 
of the other, and a mother ( >U ) and mother-in-law ( %ll&.) each 
the l^l^ or eii|<l<aj of the other. 

Parents are 'Hl w tlM, or MlclfMcli or Ml^cR or MUcR ; 

children (collectively) t^U&liVl; and relations (collectively) 

m\, mrnwi, w\\wi% or *pim°-im 



STEr-RELATIONS. 



20 & 



Great-grandfather is <U€l£l, and great-grandson MMl't. 
Ancestors are q.$[ r -{\ or 'Hil'Hl, 2&, ^iMfcltt, or \<W ; and 
descendants ^ctl-i, ^clfcl, 5USUS,. 4*1 or cUlW,. or ^5vi. 



A step- 
A step- 
A step 
A step 
A half- 
A half- 
A half- 
A half- 
Of the 
of the 



STEP-RELATIONS, 

■mother is her step-child's W-Uf[ "HI.*" 

■child is its step-mother's ^l 1 ^ &l£| * 

-father is his step-child's ^ilMl ( ? ). 

-child is its step-father's ^HrC^ (or »HRtffNl<1 §14 1'). 

■brother,, by different mothers, is ^l^lsl <HlW.* 

sister, by different mothers, is ^tl^iA ^*t.* 

brother, by different fathers, is ^!l£} <HlW. 

sister, by different fathers, is ^ItR ^^H. 

same husband different wives are each the £"114,, co-wife, 

others.. 



* =MU1ltf or aHt^H may be substituted for Vn$t,-i'l,-£". 



APPENDIX, 

vr. 



Filiations 
through 

remarriage^ 
of father 

or mother,. 



APPENDIX V1T. 



APPENDIX- 
VII. 


Gujarat! Equivalents 


- 




for some of the more common Grammatical Terras;. 




Adjective fa$lH>$l. 


Degree Compa 


r- ^i^lM^i^'W 




Adverb fHlfa$H% 


ative. 






Affix aw or VH. 


Degree Superla- ^H&lM^li^-l'tL 




Alphabet e^ 1 ^ 1 or 


tive 






»M^R MltAl. 


Dental- 


£&. 




Analysis ^IS^. 


Denti-labial 


icU<*M. 




Asper M&l^fl.. 


Etymology 


y^r^-Miy.. 




Cardinal. ^ u MlC 


Fractional, 


ansi^-Hi^L 




Case pKHfdfcl. 


Gender 


<Mfct. 




Ablative ^WISH. 


Feminine 


•ilfl. 




( Accusative bA. ). 


Masculine 


<*. 




Agential &^J.. 


Neuter 


«iMcl£. 




( Dative *tMSH ).. 


Glottal 


HUk^M. 




Genitive *»\H. 


Grammar 


c-MliRQl. 




Locative ^(Hi^.. 


Guttural 


kH. 




(Nominative £<ll). 


Indeclinable 


vifahift. 




Objective i^plHMi. 


Infinitive 


wnw\\.. 




Subjective iaifa^i. 


Interjection 


%mv&p\\.. 




Vocative *i»UH*i. 


Labial 


aU^ta. 




Cerebral *iA«-H. 


Lenis 


^mi^fi. 




Collective ^^Kimi 


Letter 


=H4 or *H$t^, 




Compound Tense fa^VH iM« 


Mood 


cll^-M or a>{8L 




„ Verb *&M fklMS. 


Imperative 


^UU*!. 




„ Word WllfoiW*. 


Indicative 


PwuaL 




Conjugation ft«UM*j ^Ml u 1H 


Subjunctive 


a*l*U«l. 




Conjunct Letter oiil^i^. 


Multiplicative 


^iSfa «tWfc. 




Conjunction lUH^Q. 


Mute 


*M& 




Construction i$Pl. 


Nasal 


»l*i»ilRl*. 




„ agential 4^ ilMPl. 


Non-nasal 


»Ml&«. 




„ subjectival aaft ^Pi. 


Noun 


•UU 




Declension •il'H'i ^MIMH. 


Proper 


PtSl'MR. 




Declinable fa&l^l. 


Common 


WMW'IPL 



'GRAMMATICAL TERMS. 



20f 



Abstract «Hl«Wia& H'lH. 
dumber "H'M. 

Plural ^Sl^d. 

Singular ^Ul^M. 
Object i"A. 

.,, direct. <3M**i^. 
„ indirect ^cT^i^ 
Ordinal ^H-WM*. 

Orthography awfl-MRl. 
Palatal WW. 

Paradigm V*d lm. 

Parsing MS^&S. 

Participle \i<[. 

Prefix (§M*p\ or ^l. 

Preposition 4Wlp[L 
Pronoun ^dW. 

Correlative 1 * 
Demonstrative J 
Indefinite atfdfect. 
Interrogative M^U*!. 
Personal ^«MW*. 
Possessive ^iWHir. 
Reflexive WW*. 
Relative Cl<Msft$l4. 
Root of a verb HiQ. 
Semi-vowel ^ct:*^. 
Sibilant <§«ll.* 

Simple Tense ^^^M hV\. 
Sonant §IH. 

Subject icil. 

Suffix McHM or 3H^i. 

Surd *>&m. 



Syntax ^l^pM't^-. 

Synthesis ^MPQirt^. 
Tense M<A. 

/ Future *pM. 
I Past 0451- 

( Present ^tfHH* 

/" Continuous SHl^j,. 
) Indefinite sMfH&ct. 
^ Intentional %lUfrl&> 
( Perfect *0Hl*t. 

Verb fMlMfe 

Ancillary PlJRi. 
Auxiliary %l6lH3rft*» 
Impersonal aH^Tji. 
Intransitive ^iAh. 
Irregular wtPwfad. 
Negative P&Hl«L 
Transitive WsAh. 

Voice <HS> 

Active uta. 
Primary "I x 



rninary • a ^ 

Causative J 

] 3 tyu*. 



Ordinary 

Causative 



Double 
Causative 

Passive * ^«§l. 
Potential 
Passive 

Vowel r-R. 

Coalescent ^ict. 

Isolate Pl&M. 



} 



«M. 



Appendix 
vii. 



* The Sanskrit 3v^T^T , usman, ( heat ) includes in addition to the three 1 
sibilants \i, H, and «, the aspirate <i. See Whitney's Sanskrit Grammar, § 59* 

1 Transitive from Intransitive \ot, see § 77. 

2 Causative from Transitive >joi, see § 78. 

3 Causative from Causative, see § 79, 

4 See § 72. 

5 See § 75. 



$08 



'GUJAUATI GRAMMAR. 

PARADIGM. 

The Declension of Nouns. 



'PARADIGxM 
I. 


A* Nouns ending neither in nonradical 3U nor in non- radical It. 




Singular. 


Singular. 




Subj. &l£l a girl. 


Sub. ^Itfli a {fttfe child. 




Obj. §l££l 


Obj. W*} 




Ag. Sl£l5l 


Ag. «ii<n$ 




Ab. %[£[-$[ 


Ab. '«tltfl*-*fl 




Gen, Sl£l4l m., -.-ft f., -£ n. 


Gen. '«Hi<nA m , -rft f., -r|n. 




Loc. 1. Sl£lSl 


Loc. 1. <ni<n!s 




„ 2. ^in-"Hi 


„ 2. «Hltfl*-'Mi 




Voc. &iA 


Voc. "U'Slh 




Plural 


Plural, 




Subj. M-Sa 


Subj. wiioi^l 




Obj. &£l-5U-3 


Obj. ViicnlA 




Ag. §l£l-5U-5* 


Ag, wuoi$l»l 




Ab. Bi&-5a-*n 


Ab. <Httf\$l-«a 




Gen. Sl£l-5lMl m ,,-«{l f. ; ^ n . 


Gen, °tiai1l^lm.,-^lf. r «in. 




Loc. l.&l£\-£U-S} 


Loc. 1. wticfteial 




„ 2. M-SU->ti 


„ 2. WSl-'Mi 




Voc. &l£l-5l 


Voc. «U«ilL 




B» Nouns ending in non-radical SU. 




Singular, 




Subj. &[k\\ a boy 




Obj. &i«fl 




Ag. SlHl^l or Sli^ 




Ab. &IHI-8R 




Gen. $lHl3l m., -eft f., --j n > 




Loc. 1. &lHt£l or Sli^ 




„ 2. SlHl-"»U 




Voc. &IHI. 





Mural, 

Subj, &ti"<l 
Obj. &14^ 
Ag. dl4*l^ 

Ab. di«t-*a 

Gen. §IHUU m., -flf., -^ n. 
Loc. 1. &[k\i£{ 
„ 2. &14RRU 
Voc &14}1. 



I>A.RADK5MS* 



or 5lHl-£fo 

or \b[&\[-5\\A 

or $t4*t-a>H-^ 

or ^li^l-aJll-Ml 

or &l4Rl-*>U-'ll m., -«Q f„ -^ u, 

or SlHl-5U-Sl 

or dlKl-SU-Hl 

or &14*1-5U. 



C* Nouus ending in non-radical @. 

Singular. 

Subj. &14| a child ( boy or girl ), 

Obj. &l4*l3 

Ag. $14^ or &[h\ 

Ab. St4^t-«a 

Gen. 8l4*£U m., -*{l f., -^ n. 

Loc. 1. &li^l=Jl or Sl4^ 



209 
PARADIGM 



I, 



„ 2. $tHl-"Hi 








Voc. Sl4*l. 






Plural. 


Sub. $t4<i 






or &t4<i-5U 


Obj. Sl4*ft 






or Sl4Vl-a>U-3 


Ag. §14*1^1 






or &l4Vl-^U-:y* 


Ab. &l4Ri-*fl 






or £l4}i-SU-*U 


Gen. Sl4Rftlm., 


~- QF., 


-dn. 


or 8l4*i-*U^U m., -rft f ., -d n. 


Loc 1. §14^1^1 






or &14Vi-5hI-31 


„ 2. §l4^i-"Hl 






or Sl4Vl-^l-"Hi 


Voc. 3l4tf 






or Sl4^-£U. 



27 



210 



PARADIGM 
II. 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 

PARADIGM. II. 
The Declension of an Adjective when qualifying a Noun. 
A« Feminine Adjective in y ( indeclinable ). 



Singul 



ar. 



Subj. 


W^l &l£l a good girl. 


Obj. 


fclfl Sl£ft 


Ag. 


%utt di£\5i 


Ab. 


%ufl SiM 


Gen. 


%U=(l &l££U m., -eft f., -i n. 


Loc. 1 


. %llfl &1&51 


„ 2 


. %U<1 &lfl-*ti 


Voc. 


*u<i && 




Plural. 


Subj. 


%llfl Sl£l-5U 


Obj. 


*Ufl dl(\-5ll-^ 


A g- 


%llfl dt&-5a-5>l 


Ab. 


%u<i si&-sn-*u 


GeD. 


*ttfl St£l-»U-3t m., -Kl f., -ri n 


Loc. 1 


. fclfl dli\-»lt-5l 


„ 2 


=ttl=Cl Slil-SH-'Mi 


Voc. 


%llfl 81&-3U 


B. 


Masculine Adjective in 3>U (dec 




Singular. 









Subj. ^l &\b\\ a good boy. 

Obj. *URt SliRUl 

Ag. *lRt &l3rtl»l o?- %ift Sti^ 

Ab. fcttl St«l-*(l 

Gen. *U<1 dlH&l rn., -rfl f., -ri n. 

Loc. 1. ^Rl Slirtl»l or fcft Qu^ 

„ 2. %iRl SlHt-^i 

Voc, *Rl $l«l. 







PARADIGM'S. 






Plural 


Subj. 


fcftl 8l4*l 


or WW 3\hW-*\l 


Obj. 


*U}1 Sl4*£l 


or W\W &14RI-5U-3 


Ag. 


*iRl SlHtS* 


or W[W §14*1-^1-51 


Ab. 


%IRI Sl4}l-?fl 


or WiW Sl4*t-5U-*ft 


Geu. 


*tRt£l4*kltm.,-<{ 


If., -in. or fcRi Sl4}l-5ll-4li 



211 

PARADIGM 
IL 



Loc. 1 . *{Ri $i«ia»l 

„ 2. *{Rl dlMl-Vl 
Voc. *lRl &14*1 



or W\W $14*1-5U-»1 
or W\W &l4}l-*Hl->ii 



C* Neuter Adjectives in @ (declinable). 



Subj 
Obj. 

Ag. 
Ab. 
Gen. 



Singular. 
^tl| &li| a good child (boy or girl). 



w\w SihW^. 

*IRI &lHlS* or w\ &[h\ 

W\W &IHI-41 

*lRt Bt4*£Um., -«{l f., -d n- 
Loc. 1. *Rl &IH15* or *U^ Sl4^ 

„ 2. fcfti Sl4*l-"Hi 
Voc. *IRI Sl4}t. 



Plural. 



Sub. 
Obj. 
Ag. 



WiW &\bW 

*tRi Si4Vi»l 



or =WRi §l4*i-5U 
or W\W 8t4Ri-3U-3 

or WXW SliVt-^U-^l 
or WiW Sl4*i-5U-*(l 



Ab. 

Gen. =aui dl4Vl^lm.,-rflf. r dn. or W\W' dl4Vl-»ll-'tim.,-rflf. r in. 
Loc. 1. ^tt<i $[&w3[ or W\W Sl4*i-»U-5l 

„ 2. ^iRi ^tHi-'Hi or %uVi SiaVi-Su-Vi 



Voc, ^Ri &14U 



or WW &\hW-£{\. 



212 



6UJARATI GRAMMAR, 















5? 














4D -0 

t-» © J- ^ 


'Sfi 5- O 




' 


i— < 


© 






**3> O _ 






O 


4-3 
S3 

to 






_ _. © © 


Ml —^ 






^3 




, 


§ f& ££>££> 


**3> 21 






i-s 


1=1' 






.""* S- 5» £. 






W 


I— l 






^ © O O 






GQ 
























'W&rc 


5^ C/r 










•3J7 
















rr • 












4-3 


6C 




to 










o 

JO 


.9 


a 

• H 






<sS 




fit 


*-3 

a 
a 




+3 «c •» 

a ~ - 

S3 


** •* •*■ 












^^ 
























r-S 


•X9 
i 


T»T 








63 




a 
o 


i 


T ' 


fl° 




>- 1 


> 




a 


?*■ 


■» — r 


4-3 _ 




1— 1 

I— 1 

3 






1 

t— i 


re 








o 


rf 


w 












1— 1 


t-4 


?>■ 












o 


p 


l-H 












*1 
P3 

«3 


<1 


^ 


«f 








/^ 


m 


o 

1— 1 


o 








S 


P4 


O 

o 
i— f 

H 

-«1 


i—i 


3 

a 
o 

o 


M 

O 












<«> 3 


c3) 


■w'^'ts/x; 




O 
















•-5 




























& 






1 










o 
















O 




-4— » 


•r 


bo 










; 


© 

a 


<5= 

i 


.9 
a 

es 










! 


1 






^•-op'Tdrc 




j 




s a * 


o » 


a 












O 3 


1^> 


52 


• • • 










•» o 


- T3 


flH o CO 


r— t a>j OQ 










>£ 


•§ ^ 
,£*,_ 




ti 










'.S 'a 


'3 03 


-k3 












a -a 


'.3 -g 


a 












to ** 


n Jj 


Q> 












1 tS 


03 JO 

fit > 


03 

O 
l-c 

P4 





PARADIGMS. 



21! 



« j-jf 










s» 








■*> a 










H) «"~s 








hould 
Presei 












- 


~ 


~ £ £ 





















co 


















03 










*^"*s v — ' 








^1 












W ere 


















510 










bfl 








a 










a 












































a 


£ 


£ 


•* £ 


jj 


a 


^ 


£ 


£ £ ** 


OS 










OS 








£ 










.* 









60 








to 






a 








.9 




















'■§ 5 


■t 


•* •*. «k 




*4J 


^ 


*'«<•* 


*\ 


•*•*•% 




3 •» 




-\ #* ^ 


<3 








OS 






£ 








* 






bo 








bO 






.9 








a 




















*-t-3 ^ 


■t 


^ «t ^ 




-♦-3 


^ 


•% % •» 


c •> 




^ n ^ 




(3 «» 






03 








OS 






£ 








► 










•^_ 










5? 


**> ■& ■& 




"t?) ; 


•V 


V * - 


.3 ■& -e> 


-*2> 


£ cS 




^ 




\x •V A 


K 1: 5- s. 

•§ ° ° s 




I 


«5 5 

1 


** 


■ 

-*2> 


"^f&f£>f& 




H 


•^> ~ 


** 


G/xin 


^>-&>"Orc 




•100x9/1? 


a ere 



a> 

to . • • 

flH(M W 
O 

H 



<M CO 



CQ 



s 



CD • • ._' 

to rl IM 09 

a 

<o 
H m 

A3 
CQ 

Ph 



H MM 



&) 



a 




a> 




Sh 




<-i 




3. 




O 




a 




OS 




ja 




■u 


<a 


u 


s 


CD 

,3 


a 


-u 


<a 


(^ 


iO 


M 









CQ 


10 


a 


<tT' 


J- 


i-O 







t+-. 


O 


ns 


"*° 


a 


•V9 





55" 





^a 


fc- 


CO 


CS 


l>- 


>-, 


©. 





XI 


-3. 


■*-* 


-4-3 


li* 


•u 





3 


CO 




J-l 




OS 


T3 


e* 


OS 
CD 


bo 


J3 





t*> 









03 


&t 


U 


CQ 


O 


CD 




t-i 


CIS 


M 


OS 


O 





O 


O 




O 


CD 




XX 






,£> 






>-, 


OS 

9 


^ 


CD 












a< 


<3 


3 


«, 


CQ 






re 


O 


~a> 


03 






re 


"BV 


rw 


/'•ty 


^ 


^ 


'Sf) 


CD 


_. 


t> 


/-r 


CD 


rr 


^3 






fil) 






a 


CQ 


*^H 


03 


60 


O 

3 

CQ 


.9 

a 

03 


CQ 


& 


a 


CQ 


H 




O 


H 


fe 


OS 

04 




CD 




-a 




H 



21 ■& 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



«3 




•<?> 




5» 


• 


O 


T3 


n^» 


O 


„ 


o 


"59 
19 


3 


FT 


CD 




> 




-4-3 


w 


o 


t> 


H3 


63 


a 


> 


i—i 



o 

t-H 

Q 
P3 
Ph 



CO 


cS 


<1 




« 


03 


H 




S5 


o. 


— H 


o 




4-3 

03 


H 


Ph 


fc 




O 




55 


> 


O 


-u 


H 


a 
ca 


cs 


a 



•-5 

o 



1 


-u 


T3 


>> 




o 


• CO /-• 

P* -Tj -V9 S 


— a. .? c ^:3 = <u — 

= S o* a ' -*? ^: ju .2 3 = -v9 5 
.S - 22 5 ** 53 ~* **" 5-.t; nT £ 




^ 


E G I— l 
1—1 !— 1 








t——\ 






IX && 




00 




'39<S>/S> 


S 




f-l 




^— ^ 


^.^ 


4J 
O 


© 

Y5j 


S* Ss Y 
-— (7? fSS 

S5 -v9 /"\9 

ir s* y 


g 19 

S3 1 
CO 


19 

i 


o 

Oh 




-\9 


1 5 = 
3- 

19 

sr _ 






C^ 


rzncfc 




v > 




v— "20T9A? 


X VCV 










(IS && 








•I 'S!9/S> ^> 


% 










i 


"3 

a 
.2 
a 


I 


•T^.nv 

I I 






a? 

■4J 


— 


i i 


grr 


5 s 


a 


re 

19 


rc<5 

? r 

19 19 




19 

rT 




sr 


sr sr 


■^>-&!>'T»fV 


% vrc 


to 

P 

o 
3 

.9 

*-3 
a 
o 

o 


o 


i 


CO 

g 'Sf)f3>f3> 


IX 
% 

CX&™ 

^ s 1 * _. 




•\9 -\9 


re 

19 


^->.^ rT ST 

w-fi9 - T9A? 


**/*(% 




sr ar 


sr 


S -C/T? 




"179 








a>" 


1 








•4J 

'a 


«? 


bo 

.B 


CO 


^ *<• 




1 


q 




c— • — f& 


n3 


re? 

19 


Cj 


^^-v39/i9 /19 


t— 1 


£ 


k«, <T rT* rf 


s*/X(X 




nT 




■'-'•122-C9/T? 


s r/r? 




.8* 


'.2 o "Si 


<D . . . 

» ri N M 


i-I (N CO 




o3 


■3 ^D 
(-1 c 


M 






^ St 


55 <o 


03 






a <u 


Ph !> 


Ph 








(PAUADKMS. 



215 



be 

.9 

■g £ 5 £ 5 ~ 

es 


'V > 


bo 

.S 

P ~ ~ K S S 

es 


"^ re « 

e . > s s = 
<» y ,>, 

*■> IT ? 

-ai xs)rc % x; re 


to 

.9 

'-e ^ ~ ~ ~ ~ 

1 


CO ' _T .* „ 

■eft'xfirc 3 -crc 


5i 

00 





p 

CD 
H 



3 



(N CO 



tH <N CO 



PL, 



CM CO 



a 
© 
H 

01 

ft 08 



be 

.9 

"5a 



CD 

PL| 

T5 
P 

© 



H3 

CD 



•§ 



CD 



c3 



ba 
P 



o 

PL, 



CD 

.8 
a 

o 

.a 



p 

CD 



rH CM CO 



PL, 



eS 



216 



'GUJARAT1 GRAMMAR* 



Ph 



t— i 
Ph 



o 

so 

«T 

Ph 

03 
W 

H 



<J 

P3 

H 

I— I 

w 

m 

H 

fa 
O 

o 

H 

-aj 
O 



O 



O 
O 

© 

o 

a 

S3 
IS 5 

3 
CO 






■g e&F&fia ^ 



f&>f& 






§><£ 



3T 

A9 



R <? 






<\9 «• •» 



CO 


• 


5- 


a 


to 


<x> 


J-S 


CO 


W 


<u 


-c: 


Ph 


'■« 




r^i 


t/J 


^ 


as 


MS 

CO 


a 




S3 


H 


t/j 


s? 









fi? 


CO 






w"^9 2 2 


"2 =r 


5- 






"g t£>-{& s3> 


t® ease) 






k 


O 

a 

<X> 

a 


^ 1 
■*■* - 

rO 1 


*-? 
i 

r 


o a 
e p-i 

r^ si « ~ 

S 2 


•»*'■» 


•— i 


^v? - ~ 


? r ~ 


J S 






kl « ' " 


«V9 •» 


"§ S 








sr 


J 03 














# 








'<&> V V 


~25 — 2 


I 3 






tSsf&f5)f&l 


£&£&?& 


•3 a 




83 

S3 
O 




'V 






S3 

.3 

"-4-J 




S 5 R 




~ 5 ~ 


a 


^— ^ v ' 




o 




o 




<\9 ~ ^ 








^nT 


S" 


K^ CO 






"Q»'T>lrV 




^ 










to" 4J 






to* 




•3 9 




. 


CO 


^ 






*9 


8- 


^ /CS^ 9 


S 2 




"3 


«** on 

8 •'V99A9 A9 


>^^ 


S Ph 




en 

(D 


g «r <r sr 


tncfo 


go c3 


£ ** & 


T3 

a 


Q-S0T9/T' 
fe 


n -crc 


Si 






S ' •" ■ • 


• • • 


A3 • • • 






g i-l CM «, 

<x> 

tH oa 


si 


art NM 

a 

H 00 


i-t CN CO 

Ph 




CO 

2 










Ph 




Pm 








'PARADIGMS. 



21? 



•s E 


tfc 


-^ 


rtv 




C /a> 


** 


* 


^ 




1? 






'zr 

1 




%<? 


** 


* 


s 


** «V 


•§* *— ' 






jg. 




i ^= 






ft 




* rzr 


^ 


^ 


"\9 


«• •» 




*s 


•* 


iT 


^ 


Wrc? 


a crc 


**—* 










u 










oo 






t? 


•fc *»> 


"£ s 


„ 


„ 


fib 


** ** 


-2^ 






<^ 




s'? 






'r 






~ 


= 


¥ 




5 ^^ 






*^ 




Jsrc 






f 




5 "v» 


= 


t 


5 s 

\9 


£ " 


•^ar 






fT 














^ ~wrc 


/£/X 


^ 






jf 


crc 


. ^w- 








. . 



•wxdrc 



2 « - 



ST 



*w 





a crc 


m • • • 

m r-t CM W 

Eh- * 

•*» 
oo 

Ph 


i-H* SN* CO 



28 



J- 

O 

A3 






T3 
O 
O 

© 

1 

<D 

Cm 



J- 

O 



-IP 

CO 






53 

fc4 



o 






ra 



© 

o . S-i 

Jv^ — * a> 

a tr p, 

<o 22 a 

■& FT cn 

* ° J3 

i o- - 

«S ? S 



«8 

P O 









a 
si 

a 



M 



fcfi -53? 

Bi O 
o 

I ^ . 

-iJ" oo 

© vV 

OD © 

c2 ■© ^3 

•2 o 

-P ••> c; 

■« -*2> a 

p 

o 

g ^S -3 

n tn <D 

^ I s 

T? © 



M o 



/^ 



s»* 



re * 
as q 

Pi 

o 



11$ 






I 



ca 

> 



Son 

a © 
. ca w 

■; l 

:1 o 



<D © 



*o © 



1 



a 

. is *-> 

© j? 
^ o 

j 3 

a .S 

i g 

2 © 

Ph *j 

co T3 



TO 



U2 



^ a 



.2 a 

© 'C 

s a 

•s i 

bo "S 

.9 * 

+j © 

© ^a 

© bfl 

+= C3 

© «, 

3 & 



t3 *§* 

§<§ 

to J. 
P o 

o •£* 
© ^3 

2 i£ 

s ^ 

CO 1j 

13 



© 



© 

-a 



© 



3 © 



*<=: .= ~ 

© rS 



© >> 

•5 a 

8 *© 






TOJJAlUTl QlUMMAlt. 



CO 



l-J 
> 

Q 

« 

PL, 



3 
CO 



a 



o 
-a 

© 
.© 

© 

Ph 

a 

OS 



a 



© 

1—1 

ca 

e8 

P-l 



a 
© 







$S 








/s?/s? s r 


•l '■* ^k 






•a -a 








Is cs 




£ 




» fe * J5 S 

<0 © o © 


<N «« «% 






cS Is & 


5Z3 


.© 


I 2 Z 




•-3 


© 

Oh 




g 












- r s 






ft 

sf/xHi 






Wr iC/c 


y crc 






/S> S Z 








**•*•* 






^s 








*? 








1 <M ** 


^ I* ** 














? 








^_ 1 ^ 








^rf 








^* 








rs 






*3 

© 

© 


13 IS IS 


Is fe & 




•s 


^•/5 






© 


g ^^ 






Ph 


|-»9 








00 1 -. •>• 


C ^ •* 






03 ~ 


"* 


• 




5> JO 




>- 








t— i 




■^^ /J5* •* M 




1 




!^<T 


ft 


i— t 
a 

53 




z^ 1 


W xzrc 




JX :vrc 










• 

© 








■u 
















1 


* • 






© 


• • • 






■T3 


• • • 






a 








H-l 










©' 








ca 








• • • 


• • 






<» i— 1 WW 


i-l <M 






. 00 


A 






CO 








£. 








PARADIGMS. 



{*!»■ 





•c 
















Fa> 


~ ~ 






















T 






g*" 


J 






V 




r ~ 


* * 5 


00 +J 

*> a 


i =»* 








«rg 






^S CD 








s °* 


5 ° 




5s J. 5- 

© o © 


3 CO 

.2 * " ~ £ ~ ■* 

"to © 




•s £ 


•*•*•* 


o a 


g-^ 






^ 


*=r? 








fe^ 


■* 


•» ~ ~ 

fir 




'S 


t& 






«*• 


ivrc 







e. 








© ~ 








VX Z 2 


- . ~ 


CO 

a 

M*« 

+3 






©- & ©- 


; I "■ 


«V « M 


OS .~.0 


•K *S ^ 






*§:©:» z = 


^ ^ •* 






•~^\ \1*S Vi' 










m 






*?<£ /^ 


<Z/xft 

W vrc 






^ it?A7 






^i- 
















*P 


•"*»•>■ 






>i^ 








sr 








*T 




• * • 




«- &• 


5r ** s- 


• •> • 




5; O © 


o o o 


• • • 




O 




» • • 




*—* 




. 1 . 












js ? s ~ 


•» «\ £ 






CO .J^ 








£~n/5* 


rr- ft 








& rX ~ 






w 


re 


ID • * • 

b h eq n 


,-,* ©^ CO 


g r4 OT Cvj* 


r-i <N CO* 


a 




a 






• 


J® 00 


d, 


3 




a 




£ 




P4 





*2 
1% 






CO 

1 

O 

>* 

C5 



s 



.2 



o 



e 

CB 

H 



a 



EXERCISES 

AND 

VOCABULARY. 



222 GUJARAT! GRAMMAR: 

N. B. — The numbers in the margin refer to the paragraphs 0/ 
the grammar. 

The numbers in the body of the text refer to the notes 
appended to the translation. 

d. 22;% b 54 • V C 36 7 " ^ ""^ H ^° ^^ *"* &' ^ * l £ «"t«* 
g. 50;' 100, 3b); h36. Wl* M^ »tl<^l ^ $,. } &«ft* 9|U^. ^ $. 

k. 94,4); 118; 1. 11. <»m\ k ^1 ^fatf ep lR; i^SSr c*JlV »U>^ ov«il^ 

p. 13. d 2 $ ct»a •iwldi«tt* Mfij;^ 5. 

*• 38 » 8 ^IW Slil <UH % 8 $IV* Slut &4 S. -Ml: Hurt i-4 

r. 134, 143. ^ d r 

»• 93. *6TostU ta$ m^i* 5iui. feliii d. asto 5ii4i am m s 

^48, 146 ^ & * ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ *'* ^ fcW 3 ** 

x.' 27! SiaimP «h§' <*^s d. &*ife*H* $iai «ugi *«i 0» 

z - 7l »)• "IVfl $141 M<*J «M§ ttftl d. clwll m^ll' ^1 W* 

*' 13. ^' °tfM &. clwll ^lilW'r *<Ht MQJ &, a^wfl, 

c. 97. 3t& MlCtHl" Hw <3^ H^ 7 fcct ^ d, } fyflMl &l«Ml 

d. 143 b> a>ti ^ R i w^ 3|Ul 3 ^ -^ ^ SiC-Uate oflsvt 

e. 34; f. 25. ^Mi 5^,. 4R>1 { § UI ^^ ^ ^^, ^^ ^ 

h! 90; k. 58; 1. 97. "^ ^ &** ^ lil ** ^ ^ •''IMVtl *# *W 
m. 146 0); 67 a). &. >ll<^ *i\1 ff ci^l <HVli : %l* 4^1 d 4 . to «{& 
n. 34; 36. ^^ ^, ^ g^ ^HV. ^fl d» v/Am *Hi\<$ 

q. 67 a. 'il*^ 4^ & to "t^t'-H^ H^tAl^ <*W*l«. cl^l »i^ 

4:M ^S m -tfe. 

Fir*/ .Boo^; (Mission Press) ;.' 
■ Lessons 17, IS, 



I 






*EX£itci;-"E 1. 223 

3V. B."^- These translations have been made very literal in order 
4o help beginners and to indicate the Gujardti idiom. 

I, THE HORSE. 

The horse comes into much use for us. Although it is a big animal, 
yet it obeys man, and does his service. 

When we put a bit into its mouth, then we lead it wherever 
we like. Some horses are so gentle that they obey even little children. 

Some horses are small and some big, A small horse is called 
a $a$tu. 

In the country of England there are very large horses. One yokes 
them in large carts. They can draw heavy loads. Some others are very 
swift in running. The horses of England are very good, because the people 
there take care of them well. 

Arab horses too are very good. They are not very big. They 
are gentle. They are also swift in running. The Arab people love their 
horses much, and take care of them like their own children. 

In this country oxen draw carts and ploughs. In some other 
countries horses are used for such work. In a light carriage horses run 
quickly. Man is the master of the horse and of all other animals. They 
have all been created for man. For that we ought to acknowledge God's 
great kindness. Moreover the animals that do our service, them we 
ought to feed well. We ought not to give them useless pain. 

Note — 1 : tscti does not, but 5}*t tocti does, require a preceding finite verb. 

2: S{ej 1s = so that, or such that. 

3: $iy §iy = some others, or some some. 

4 : £[°<JlU £*l = the country of England. 

5 : t<li«ti £U«s = the people there. 

6 : *j\$\ ijfl = well (adv.) j see § 94. 

7 : £tol M3 Hct *PH$i = on him to keep love, to love him. 

8 : $ui n tHUi ufl»«t w-ilHVU VKSfl is more idiomatic than §\i${\ 

^ <HUi oflo-t <w*iw£u fei^p. 

9: %i\ i^«u is here equivalent to ^Sl HlS*«U (passive). See §152 B £ 



224 titLJARlii GRAMMAS. 

R - 10i - 3 >- *HI<^1 e& *§ &\ &. MHll H ^M ell" *UM^) Q Ml*l ? k 

o* 92; b d! MO g } ' ^^ **** ] «l«tt ? Mimi <PR •& W& *A Mfo 

e. 67 b). tfUMl<Hkl MQJ Ml^Q «vlWwl*. ^tf 8 ^i^ «M$ Ml^ 

f. 122; g. 49; h. 54. ^i?a ani^ ^ ? ^ flt^ rlCl^t, <n\ W *H«U 
k. 99; 1. 67 b); m. 34. Ml^l*fl n\i[\ g &M &\ cM*Q* ^IM^ <^W^ <Ug"* 
n - 28 - MSI. $<U i<cli" ctoiWMl Ml^fl H<4» 3 cMl=l «cti HCM 

<tm* &m S. cicam. 3 -icid mi^Q cii c Mli &q &, m>^ 

SlW ^ld Mimi 5U<3 llM, 3 Slfeli Ml^S* ^im. SlW SlW 
P- 9 7. £<lHi ell SlHi >HlVl ^IM &, $ cl =ll p Ml| Mi^ d. 

Gujarati Second Booh (Hope Series); 
Lesson 67. 



II. B. &l^l ^ «UU. 

a. 38; b. 144; c. 136. ^ ^a % [h \ { ^fr^tf e^i att^i <£[[ b . %fy> ^ 

d. 101, 1); e. 103, 6). mil tfftN *H>l*a «J?U Mlfl & d , ^l e <UH *tl^t, Sit 

f. 63; g. 101, 2). qm aHlo^t, Iqftf \ Hl^. 5UW ? atRlMRl ^Cl^l«\l 

h. 141 c); k. 49. &$l\"cl Xwi* »IMl, ^ ^ ? clt c*U 4tf «UH ell' »tfP -ife, 

1. 92; m. 134. ^ ^ g ^ ^ ^^ Ql ^„ ^^ ^^ ^ 9 .^^ 

n. 97; p. 153; q. 89. ^ _ * . . • . 

r . si. M€ll "llMll «WlW 3 lMl r , 3 dVl Hl$ ^l^ t\m*. MWl 

B- 134. iwfl^ m <»H[\ M^MV «UH WilcSll n*i\\ «*UlT &[& 

t. 94; v. 27 Note. ^^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 

^i SlclVli Ml^l^ 5^'tl "Hlct ^ll^fl •HlKl fife, ci«(l cl «wl| 
r. 3S;y.81,7);z.63*^' li ^-jlS*** "iiVl »ll<l Hl^tK <^^l z , ^ 
a. 140 a); b. 34. ^l^l^fl 3 ^^^ 5 «i*HW *l&. 

Gujarati Second Boole (Hope Series); 
Lesson 69. 






EXERCISE 2 A, 2 B. 2-2-5 

II. A. WATEK. 

By means of water- all live. If there were no water, wihat would 
We drink ? with what would we bathe and wash ? Without water indeed 
one would not get on at all. For plants also water is needed. Then 
from where may so much water be coming / Wells, ponds, rivers, 
step-wells, these all are filled with water. 

From these we fetch as much as is needed. There is more water 
in ponds than in wells, and more in rivers than in ponds. The water 
of ponds and rivers is sweet, but the water of some wells may be insipid, 
and of some may be even salt. The waters of some wells indeed are so 
fcraekish that people prepare salt from them. 

Note — 1 : *U*fl=&y what 1§37, placed last injitssentence forsakeof emphasis. 
2 : In <w^iSt and Hl^^l the final 5i ia an intensive particle. See §101* 
3.- '5U«£ <H*| = $o much. 



II, B» THE BOY AND THE TIGER, 

A boy used to pasture goats in the fields. One day in fun he raised 
» false cry, " Oh ! a tiger has come I Oh I a tiger has come 1 Help I 
Oh! Help!" Forthwith the owners of the field who happened to be 
about came running, «.nd, when they looked, no tiger was to be found 
there, and that boy on the other hand looked at them and began 
to laugh. These poor folk felt ashamed, and were exceedingly displeased. 
Afterwards another time when a real tiger came, that boy in alarm 
raised the cry, "Oh! a tiger has come! Oh! a tiger has come ! " But 
those men on the field did not believe his words (to be) true, and so that 
tiger killed several of his goats. See how much haim arose from saying 
( what was ) false. 

Note — 1: Point of time can be expressed by the Subjective Case, thus 
£}& £<4l^l, one day^ &fls2> <U^, at another time. 
2: ffitjj ell is here equivalent to sit^ t^l^, 

3 : 1H $1^ for >Uu §13^, See § 27, Note. 
29 



226 GUJAHATI GRAilMAK. 

Ill* i^l^l ^l H«i» 

a. 135; b. 36. ^4 4<$jWft° 1<$J SlHl <Ml, cl 6 ^dld 4R 'cM *A 

c. Cf. 89; d. 27 Note. ^ 4^ 5^ &cll. >tffo i^ ^Vtt Mi^l" &\\ »1>WI* 

e> 38 ' Aft*«tfc£l *ltf(ft \»Hr "11% Wtfl H25 $ Vl # iW 9 

«§IM, cl ^ wp£l «it cil *tl|, S*t£> cfHl^t «Hfltttfl MRl 

f. 134; g. 27 Note, cm oft ^ct k \ ell 3l>fl 2 ^l W. M#l S M^ ll$ 
814*13 4^, «&$, *tl| %fl *H ^HlM^l ^IctWi &. W 
h. 68. &IHI 5*4 =a>toHl A <£, SiCR-Hi *=M Sl^€ &$*. cl @>R*Q* 

m*. 9V; Vl52 B. SWU *tfl °Wl W ^ cl «fcg" *W 5 4U«Ulr{l p 
p * 101 a 3 } j- r 92 *ll*R*ll ^ ^ §4 ^ ^1 ^ ? H<1 cir iw 

s. 72,73.' «fl i<r £ ctf^. -4^1 S} &fa ^ifl vllglW, cl«ft <Kl 6 €l<^t 

*U*«U <M^ cM 7 »te«Q elf KlM^ «iW >$ SlHH C&l 

*• 64 a ). H^l 2 M*U 5M«*ll*. »Ml <3M\*U >Uu dl*%l Wi<»H[ h <£, 

x'67 8 b)-y 92 ^ *^ ^ ^' ^ ^^ ^ ^^ ^ W 

a. 101, 3). ^CR*ii<tf y &, 3 "H^-iCl 4<l»l cil 3 cl MlHl^. 

Gujardti Third Book ( Hope Series) ; 
Lesson 15, 



EXERCISE' 3. 227 

I IF, THE KANBf AND THE TREASURE. 

A Kanbi had three sons. They were such as would not do the 
work of the field energeticalby. When that Kanbi fell ill unto death, his 
sons together enquired : *• Father, it would be well if you would tell us now 
whatever capital or treasure you may have, for your last moment has 
come near." The father thought: "These boys are lazy, therefore if they 
labour energetically, then (only) will they get money." Then that old 
man said to his sons : "Friends, all my wealth is in our field." The sons 
understood thus that some treasure might be buried in the fields Therefore,, 
after the old man died,, through desire of the buried treasure coming to 
light, they dug deep the whole field in search ( for it ), nevertheless no 
treasure at all came to light. But the land was well dug, therefore, when, 
they had sown grain in it, its produce became so great that [its] much, 
money accrued to those sons. 

Therefore those sons understood : " What father said is true, for if 
real treasure be needed, it is certainly in this field, and if we labour we 
shall get it." 



Note — 1 : cM t^ = energetically r lit. having given(one's)lody. On €y«l see §4.9 

2 : "4$il= a pice, a copper coin, the sixty-fourth part of a rupee. Houca 

\^U, or more usually M^l (plur.), money. 

3: On ^Si ^Ri see Note 3 of preceding Exercise. 

4 : ^Rlt HJ\ 3RI £$ an abbreviated and idiomatic form for ^l^U "H^L 

5 : tin KhtfwKl «ur*A = tin «fU«i %(l euett^ft. 

6 : Sltgtt = grain (collect) ) \ gligU = a single grain. 

1'. SUStl % ■» to much that. 



2 28 CUJA11ATI GRAMMAR, 

b 97 5 "c 91 ^ 8M41 ^ *' ^ ^ W ^ ^ Cll ^ a ^ M ^ Hl ^^ 

hr ^ & ddi Min ^ta h^ h& s hi>i c sua s >iidi. 

^ 81. |ar ^ «U «iy m\h &*:, ^ §>« MtsQ >HQJ^ *H[H?{e 

t 90$ g.' 136. ^S. tffl'Hroi 3Hi 4=11 *>U 6t$l H^\ ^Sl «iM &C 

k. 152 a>. ciaf) ^ItfU^t'll <M**ft *l»ieil* MtfgUll qfoetl I^IM &» 

1, 64, 149 b>. *& ^ s^ mai 2{Hc4R €UWi' *M& &*.. 

m. 74, 1). 

6<l*Hld Ml^Q *«cCl <H<iQ =H«d s =H<£d $^-ft IK «l 5 l^ 
n. 85 a). ^ £ Mfe fj ^ ^g § d ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ q W ^ $. 

f." 27Note * I34 * 3ft <HRdlSlU p 4^ & 1 . & ^%l Stt^ ill &M &, 

e^W S, cl"Hl 52^1 ^ &. 31 3VH4i ^<tt«iT H* 
t. 27 Notejv.Cf. 99. ^W-U. £} &Vi«l 3 tffil SQ^ft' CU^^* %[§& 
x. 97; y. 72, 73. ^ 6»WttA* *& »Ml^ $. ^ $fl*HRt 3^ M^l 
z. Ill; a. 12, 4). ^ ^ & $ d *(ft & <MlV cMW >M* «(U* &„ 
b. 71. m«^ 6<l»»Ri «H§ »Wl tfftl *i<fl ci2Q 5 . W *ltf 

Gujardti Fourth Boole (Hope Sevies); 
Lesson 123. 



EXERCISE 4'. 229 

IV* THE MARVELS OF THE SEA. 

There are many marvels in the- sea. In it are the fine coral insects,, 
which build houses like honey-combs for themselves to dwell in. ( These ) 
having increased and increased, of them gradually afterwards become 
very large hills and islands. Upon them afterwards men come and dwell? 
In the sea such new islands are being formed now in large numbers.. 
There is an article called sponge, like the frame of a honey-comb, that 
too insects of a certain kind make. These inscets also live in the sea. 
In the sea in some places eddies or whirlpools arise. Also pillars of 
water are seen, formed by the force of whirlwinds,, and many such like 
wonders are to be seen. 

The water of the sea comes rising and rising towards the land, 
for a certain time, then it all goes decreasing. Such happens twice every 
day. This is called the flow and ebb. Those countries which are situated: 
on the coast of the sea are called maritime.. Shells and bivalves are 
seen lying on the sea-coast ; insects live in them. You must understand! 
these (to be) their dwelling-houses. Shells and bivalves, having been driven- 
by the force of the waves from the bottom of the sea, come to the shorn 
Moreover in the sea there grow shells also of-such-a-kind that, when one- 
opens them, pearls come out of them ; but such shells are not produced 
everywhere in the sea. They are met with only in some few places. 

Note — -1 : 3<|<su ?5 lit. have remained, hence are. 

2 : *UflWl *H=U«lf^U3 may be construed in two possible ways. Either 
<{Rcl may be understood after >U<tl3,§ 97, and *<|e{£l *U^ would 
then be an infinitive of purpose, § 135 ; or >U<1l»l ( = ^WWfcSl, 
§ 27 Note) may he regarded as in adjectival agreement with 
the (verbal) noun *& e U»l. The translation in the former case 
would be for themselves to divell in, and in the latter case for 
their own abode. 

3; Note the continuative and intensive force of the reduplicated 

forms =&l qHft, IftSi tQ5l, *Ua 5llil, Sfcl %U, &c. 
4 : ^iS^ft *U*l lit. Sponge by name, hence called sponge. 
5 : iQrHi 4 te for S^au^l ill. Cf.Mahi Kantha for the lanh of the Mahi, 



23:0; gujarati grammar.. 

a. 149 b); b. 28 A). 9MtMHU(l *m Vi*HV ftVt'l 5 <H<-(1 ^tt aUf«ll?(l 8 wtlMl^- 

4R %U| «lt4 &. 2 ci'i 4l<^ »l 1 <*Hl^ »UM§| ^IM^I 
c. 108, l)f d. 78. <Wi:Q*Hl *Ui^H Mitt ^il| ftPt fffa*JSm*(l e 1 "iC-tlcftl^ 

e. 97; f. 146 a. w%° *wft / aft %HIM^ ftW W PIU«U*{1 / cM fc/^l. 

g. 87 a); h. 91, 3, 4). «UM &. <|4>t *tH^l M^ S ? tftf «UV4*(l«fl tM d,. *»& 
k. 71; 1,49. £> 4^^'' | M § ft ^ €v ft j,^, ^2ft* f :y|8Ht §4H 

"». 135 - ft ww 1 <§m* 3* <utfw&™ ci»ii »i«fl flci 4^ § $ ci«a 

n. 134; p. 147 a). ^ Mlj <HR\ M^J ^ «i ftWi*<^ ^IM^ <HC-U 
<§M14 4=0^ ell cl*fl <KM ttRld "HH ^ d, eft "Hli| 

r. 118; s. 138 B). (k«fl 4^ &, cl«Q cl 4R «vtW»l c^ r «IW &. >U ft^RL* 
t. 92; v. 44; x. 92. ^ ^^ ^ ^^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^^ ^^ ^ 

cR<W* 4 cklct<W ««3l3 !|i , H'll ^M*ii SUi'ftSi *& cl 

fa-tfcMl ^Pli 5lli«ft5l ^l *rtl cl*/* ^, M^l *H*R 

z.' 3^ B) ' <&& 5<5 ^^ *W &• aH^l* *S*Ht «U5l ell* MlctHfc* »ttft? 

§M* "4^ <|4M 4WI *t*R. d 4R <|l4 ci «iVHltt*(l 

b. S 4). "_4^t a " 5 " <rW ftM«" 4^ 6 4^ &. <£ 4R 

<3*R«fl 4^ <l ftR %U| ««M &• ^ ^ "Mtcftft 
o. 149 b); d. 72, 73. *\{<&[ ri«fl. >iUi ^4 ^l^«(l c ^iRld ^ 1*1 W &*» 

Gujarati Fifth Book ( ilope *Se?'ies ) ; 
Lesson 3£. 



SXEuciBE 5» 231 

Y. KINDNESS. 

Generally our work is better done by proceeding in a kindly way 
than by harsh or haughty speech or by keeping the practice of giving 
threats. The reason of it is this, that when we cause persons who are our 
equals to do a certain work by oppression or force, then they get a dislike 
to it, so that they have a wish to oppose us and spoil our work. When 
they have to obey an order, then they obey it unwillingly, and what has 
to be done they do not do heartily, or else, in order to spite him who 
gives the order, they do it in such a way that he may be annoyed 
by it. But if, not doing so, we take kindly measures, then theieby 
the respect of the other party remains, he is not annoyed, and he does 
whole-heartedly what we have to get done, and so the work is done as is 
required. There is a difference between saying "Mother" and saying 
<( Father's wife," though the meaning indeed of both is just the same. 

In the same way if we arrange identical words in the form of a 
command and if we arrange them in the form of a request, the meaning 
remains quite the same, but the effect is entirely different. The people 
of civilized countries, indeed, do not command even their servants. What 
work there may be, they indicate it, saying politely ''kindly do it," or 
" work a little at it." What work one does with a will, that work turns 
out well. But the will does not come through force. By having spoken 
bad words the mind of the opposite party is hurt, therefore one should 
act kindly towards all, and speak gently. 

Note — 1 : ^t^W^l ^[\~ at most limes, hence generally. 
2 : ct«j ilVSl *H with idiomatic omission of <d. 
3: H< t$*{ = heartily, lit. having given (one's) mind. Cf. cM €y«l in 

Note 1 of Exercise III. 
•4 : cl*lUl«/ == the very same. 

5: The reduplicated form «£<l *$£[ is intensive. See Note 3 of 
preceding Exercise. 



2 S 2 'GUJARATI grammar. 

vi. tict. 

b. 149 b); c. 75, 76. ^S ,„ ^^ ^ ^ ^ ^^ ^^ ^ 



e. 



132, <dct ^wmi &-, 



*wjl 4wi "tiftMi 5iuH o^s* Jit ski 3*um 

f. r2,73;g.Cf.51b).ci?(l/ |^ 3 & "» $ |W ^ ^ vufcft ^ 
h.J53. ^Q a^* -vntcn £cft ^^ M^mt^ cl^Ml <r/ivtf 

k. 81,; 1.43. ^i'Oi ,i«fl f M Qj ancn^i ^IctH4 ^ **U W-fl *0*tt 0*. 

to. 94, 4). *4l«&l & oy>t <£*i w ^ttfli >ll£ ajcj ffvlH $•» *$ 

q. 89 ; r. 138 C ). ^Hi M 6K«fa «16R ^4^1 ^ft d*. M^C-l^C-U'* ftMWC-U 
s. 99} 1. 138 A);v.45.Sict <§3l &, M#l «itq£ MW ^ &&' ^41" del, SuH 

X. 54 ; y. 34. €ld &M &*, cl »tHt *»& ay^Wi &W w}^clt 2 »4& 

z - 38 ' ^S* f &M & r . ^tlcU* <RH«i dl&$ «4l*4 &, cMt^ cl 

a. 81, 1). ^ M ^ ^ £. ^ ^ ^^ ^ ^ ^^ 

b. Cf. 99. ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ yfefl ^ & . ^.^ ^ MitoJ(i 
C ^ 92< ^R cU c <H^=tl^l>li(^ c «Mi^ &. 

d. 139,4); e. 97. jfa Uih[r[V i & a^OMi (§M* cl ^U 4R <£<ft* 

f 99 

^ov^ft &s\5m $. sict *uls(K ^ichi s, *& foi su 

•i«fl 5 cl §4 SKt<{l o/A ^-fl &, w£ 3 c m*1 *tM«l cftl 
*l4 Sll ^(-«U § to'l illd-fl «i?ll d«tl 514 *lH*»«*i 
^, cl €lct-a ^4 4 «iaalW«i SiaiQJ ^IH^t §. ^ ^1^^^ 
wHl^ ^ d, cHl^ dcl^ii m% &t H\H d. 

Gujarati Sixth Book ( //ope Series ) ; 
Lesson 15. 



EXERCISE 6-. 233 

VI, THE TEETH, 

There is need of grain to give support to life. This grain cannot he 
eaten without our having chewed it., therefore for this reason God has 
given us teeth. 

If we look into the mouths of very small children, then teeth are 
not seen, because they live by drinking milk or eating something very 
soft ; moreover there is not strength in their stomach to digest such 
things as are chewed and eaten, but in the gums two rows of teeth are 
fixed. Of these each single tooth is placed tjuite separate in, as it were, 
a tiny hag. The bigger a child grows and the more varied the kinds of 
things it requires to eat, the more do those teeth begin to come outside 
( the gums ) in rows. 

First of all the front teeth grow, then those at the side, and lastly 
grow the double teeth ox molars. 

In the first set of teeth that comes to a child, there are twenty teeth. 
They are small, and just as big as may fit in to the jaw. When a child 
is about seven years old, then those teeth fall out, and in their places 
come thirty-two other large teeth, which last for many years. Of these, 
however, the four quite at the back come only in early manhood. 

Teeth are (made) of bone. Above the gums they are covered with 
a. thing like glass. The teeth are hollow within, and in them is a tube, 
which goes [is] quite to the root of the tooth, and at its point one end 
of it is open, in which are veins of blood and a nerve that reaches [has come] 
right up to the very middle of the tootb. When this nerve swells, there 
is much pain in tbe tooth. 

Note— 1 : »urQ ^yufl. s small-like, as it were small. 

2 : ->U 5ftl4 vumi = to fi l in t0 - 

3 : c*ti :»Hl3l«l = cl«fl a Hl 3 l tf l,= "»/» m * of it, hence at its front, at its point. 
1 ; •t'-aUH 5 - 2 !. = the very middle. 



30 



234 'GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 

a. 138 A). (&lh%\ H^« a <WCll «i*tt, Cl«il «{M ^lKl <lcl*lW\ 

b. 108, ); c. 0. 'fcofoo ^ofti timtli 4^1, ft*ft vft «i^ & 5 w&tf^ 
d. 31,92; e. 152 B).^i ii^t 3 <H§|C-{l a tf\S\, cl«tl ^THlfl^ flcWlct |n«ft 
f. 28 B ). *lW d. M^J »>U 5U/1 9J«H $ ; HKtt^l*' Ct*ll NRil'Q 
h'67*a);k 92. tUWM ft»M$l>Ucl *t<Ml*Kl ^Wwl\ tflV* ^"H Ml 

-I i^>ti«a Hlfl 4W & «Nl flcl Hill ClMl^l Hell rl«(l, 

3 Miction «S*(l •& *Hl$l Mft^WUtfR \&S\ti <W>tl 

L 81, 3); m. 132. ^ &. ^ \£i^\[ m *(N %Hl ^14 «H$ l^lS d. ^ 

*iUl Mft<ay*Ml ^lcl>ti C-iM^fl ^eftSl* ^ ft* pRft 

p. hoc). *fl 5v\ Smi nig* cti^il »id^ Si «ii*ti ^itfii^ 

q.'78ir.l46a);s.l22.^^l^ ? - ^4' ^ C ^ W^l'Pwi ^di" BlA 

x 121 aJ V ' 38 " ^ § - ^ l ^ §l ^ ^ UCl 5 ^ 4 ' r mM < M ' 1 ^ ^ 

y. 98, 3). ' M^mi* -I efoivL m =IR *1<H eft *W I "U* ««?l* 

a'.67a);b.il8;c.54,71.^mi^ & ; M^J a* qvtH* cl^R'l £fe|»l» &Q 5 %L^i«r. 

f; ^os/i 6 ); f. 43. ^ lcn ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ Uct ^^ h ^ [Hd ^ 

*»fl«t £H^U ^Pi'l 3d[$\H e 5li^i4l f $J^ ft«tt *Mftl 
g.94;h.l2IC);k.92.3 ¥WW*fl Wfl M> «t<3(lcli* 2tW3 Ct*U ^i*^ M* 
1. 44; m. 146 a). H^rt 7 ' (|cl *lv{Q I^H. $ Ct*U cl "}(§* M^ltW* ^>M\ «i?l 

n. 122 ; p. 134; q. 94. ^i' 1 <Hl?l S p tffttf* M<§] &. 5M H^ ifl^ *ft*yUVl a 
r. Cf. 134. ^<4 "l3 & r , 3 41W *tt& Mft^R WaV SilH $. civil 

^Hl^l 9« ^"Ht <*1H S. 

Gujardtl Seventh Book (Hope Series) - } 
Lesson 70, 



EXERCISE T. 225 

Ylh MARRIAGE CUSTOMS AMONG THE HINDUS.. 

The Hindus do not go abroad, and they do not know about tho 
customs, learning, &c ,. of other countries, so they think thus : We alone are 
very wise and learned, and our customs are the best. But this is a great 
mistake. When we impartially compare our own customs with those of 
foreigners, then only is it known which of the two is the better. People do 
not inquire in such a way, and ihey cling to their own old customs, which 
are fraught with evil consequences. The people of other countries speak 
very badly of these customs. In illustration of these evil consequences let 
us consider some of the wedding customs.. First of all amongst these 
this is wrong that parents give in marriage quite young children. Many a 
girl becomes a widow without understanding what (it means) to be a widow. 
Until the boy and girl become of mature age, ( parents ) should not give 
them in marriage. If they keep them a long time, then at ten or twelve 
years (of age) they give them in marriage; but at this age they have not 
as much understanding as is needed, therefore at so many years they cannot 
be called of mature age. In other civilized countries men and women,, 
having become well acquainted with each other's qualities, attainments,, 
means and disposition, marry only when they see very much mutual love 
(has) arisen, and when it appears that both cf them will be happy by 
marrying.. Thus husband and wife generally agree well, and seldom do any 
evil consequences ensue. Their whole life is spent [gGes] in happiness.. 

Note — 1 :: 5}>U2fl m$[ &fcj S? = ivhich of the two is the better- 

2: mu here qualifies MftiSUH, and the suffix =uf[l is appended to 

the entire phrase >UM "M,f^ll>U 
3 : ^U^ ct Q for *U«j cl ^ &?l = to be a widow ichat that may be. 
4-1 Sy J «Hl* q?^l is seemingly an Anglicism, " at ten or twelve y:art,'* 
for fiaft $ (Hl^-; cfl$i. 



236 GUJARAT! GRAMMAR* 

VIII. hiQhH MMl ^ ^*Hf>MR* 

a. 138 B) ; b. 133 A). ^Plfo *ife*lRi a 5*4 *Wi* 6 M y^VHi H§}1 VH^'4 
c. 135; d„81, 3). ct*U e^Hl <HIM4 C "MW "Ml *3tl 4clt d . cl t^ll 6 [Ml: 

«fo «H6K ^4 4lfrl4l HWld «|| 6<3„ c&l \U <3<*W. 

fccil, ciait *ieuQ<M Mt«ll&-tt <Ut *lte«t€l PH«/V«U»ft 
e. 122 ^ f. 44.. fcUPfcfl &cQ, cl*n f4^ Cl«U y*l<-WH W «uK Sll$£lfe 

flfclR 6cil. «Sft <£ <*>Hci «iU«{l *m«R IHS&wWl 
g. 74. M^Hl HMl^ ^Rcl <tR Ml4l*tPii ^t«fl^ cl efHci (4| 

*^ 94^ illll 2l<tel<n'l A »l4it «W tt& «**« 4lf«l4l »UCtl*li s|l4 

k. 135. 4VU* «/Ctl &Cll. cl %Wtf 21U± H^flff/ H& &ti, ci*ft 

1. 57. «;fft Putfiai &clt*, cl«lt »tfl»i to faaiRl Well Well™ 

m. 150 a>. sitf 444 well 3 aH£*>l 4# ^K-Hl Well Wl n . M»l4 £* 

n. 85: p. 149 bY .. 

oimi p M*fl d5u ji^PfiR ^pm «Hi<fl y&m\. si 
(Vttfi s<s«ail*t fa-<£ki Mleii ^c-thm Mi^tufc «ilfewi 

q. 89, B. 3 a). »IU*U &l q c\ *t«tH« Ml««Us«tl *1<*HI M^l *1>U. ct 

r. 104. H^W ypQ&f & J cftt aHliR fH4Rl <£*=U ct«U cl SU* 

& . 133, S<Ufl »W* Sftl d. »IMR kVAi-M •MM* cftl |iHl- 

t. 81, 1), »U <HR Mi\ atH^I &', <U M^ cl-il 4 d&l §laU C^t'tl^t 

v. 101,3). |PtMMI Ml<M Slfcf H«fl. cMl MRl 5l& »!&$ w&z 

S. ci "llHHP. <wt $UW»li (Igtll'lli »fl» SlW M«Jt 

x r 137 vmiw«a* §<tvn *i*n. a §m* <^ ^ lcl ^ t a. ci 

y. 99 j z. 72, 73. §MR«fty ^^11 & 5 «6U&<l*i ^'ll ^loVHl «*U«U - "HlA 

a. 89 ; B. 1). ^cU*. »l ^tn^(<{l >&ttl»U 4l(«l4ld *i| *d- <^d 48 

'lid &&, <t*« «H6R«ft 4'lW tll<HlM-HH 'I (fed, MQJ cftt M^cil 

b> 34. Sli^ll 6 &cU ^ cl £4ll cMl 7 ^Hl^Hl f8ftCl «lR Ct^ll \ll%Hl 

c 99 yo aH^^ii Mo Ski ^Hl*ti c a u^i <t«ii «^^i«(l I41 ^1^1 

8lH 4Wl d ^HMl &CU. o^i\ <%€[ ^iclrll ajlSl agSl \^^« 
cini £ ^l'^^Q MlH$\5ll«fl cfHl?ll H^l ^€^ filPlcil t^cll* ; 
.. I06. Mt^ cM*l hl\ Rl^lH ^{1^ ^l €HM4 / ^d- 

4^ kh ; 1H fc* f (i3. 



EXERCISE 8. 23 1 

VIII. KALIKA MATA AND THE KUTUB M1NAR. 

One morning in the month of Mags'er there was a very interesting; 
sight and ( one ) worth seeing in the city of Delhi. That day there was 
a festival in commemoration of the placing of the idol in the temple of 
Kalika the ( goddess- ) mother outside the city, and it was the birthday of 
Khijar Khan, the eldest son of the emperor Ala-ud-din. and thus it was a 
holiday for both Hindus and Musalmans. In the morning, at the time 
when from every mosque in the city the mu'azzin-call had been sounded 
for the first prayer, the Hindus were going in crowds out of the city to 
visit ( the idol ) Mother Kalika, There was very great cold that morning, 
and consequently all had wrapped themselves in shawls, rugs, blankets,. 
or other woollen coverings, and needy folk, poor wretches, were going 
along, shivering away, with their teeth chattering and their arms folded. 
After having gone some little distance, they reached the Kutub Minar. 

This pillar Kutub-ud-din, the first Musalman Emperor of Delhi, had 
begun to build, and it was finished in the reign of the Emperor Altamsh, 

It is most beautiful ; its shape is pillar-like, and on its. galleries* 
exceedingly fine carving has been cut. it is 121 sutari gaz (242 feet) 
high. Though through an earthquake some part of it once fell, still there 
is no other pillar in the world as high as it. 

Near it is an unfinished mosque, which for its proportions and beauty 
is second to no other building in Hindustan. From the inscriptions 
engraven on it we learn that it began to be built in the reign of 

Shahab-ud-din Ghorl. 

Kalika's temple was in the neighbourhood of this mosque. In size 
it was small, and not beautiful in its exterior, but so great was its fame 
that on the day in question all the Hindus of Delhi, and those of the 
towns and cities within forty to fifty kos around, had come there to visit it. 
The spectacle was rendered very pretty by the different customes of the 
different race3 and by the many coloured turbans ; but besides the people 
'there was something else worth seeing there. 

Karan Ghelo, pages 92-93. 

Note — 1: >iwtt Hf&4l=^« month of Mdgs'er. This month falls iq 
November-December 

2 : i&U M^ 5 = it is cold. 

3 : angtH fc^tt or sHgot ^Vh^. = to keep the arms folded. 

4 : cl«ll &IQ <§(^ = as high as that. 

5 : «fl«l Siy «i*fl = there is no other. 

6: %y\ lld^ll 5 with passival signification, as though it were 

7 : SJU^ fi*t£l Sl<|* = the whole city of Delhi. 
8 ; ^l^^fl = many-coloured. 



23;S: QUJALIATI GRAMMAR'. 

t.97.. ' ' ^tfl ^ d «ir «»H& $*Kt & %Vd *&&#& &{>/ 

IM ^m ii^ ml *um§| »tlM<qi ^tt^ ^iK-flSi 

f 3 2 4 g - ^ ^^ *U4 ntf a^i «Wl* *HIM§ *& d <*fc'S} ^1 

*H£ *tH w-itii %w* ^,. 5»a *i^ra cud -^ $ # 

I' 135 -- ttPtHOi -il^ct %W h »l«Wl cl a&%a£l cM*/ <*<Hkl ? Stfl 

»n© ^m &w fc at a^ ^ ^^ ^ suhmi? 

r.. 136; s.. 48.. "H%tf r ©V^ ai€U<^l* £*Kt &. «{1«4 Ml^'ft; 

*•■ 9 7. *u<*a' iiH &ti c cUi. »teMRi B 4ifc/ andi. »w«l *w*ih 

v. 146; x. 72, 73. CU* "3ft *«# ^cl 3 v^W* a*UW >H%R " ^ ^efcfe 
y. 64 ^ 153 a). ^ ^, ^ ^ ^^ ^ ^ 

b. 81, 9). *Kfa $ ^r-ll ^anURi ^Htfl Mill 6 ft%clt SlW ilH; 

a. 92. s a^ «{i«i«£i a «iw« rf 4(^ t ^ s^, *& m *na 

e, 81, 1); f. 61. frfai ^ w^ «=llcl 4VU*fl **i5tf ^W «tii«fl MM S\. 

gs . 134. ^ $ it >i oi*ii ^ys/ a>ii *a& *i\ §?.. 

MlVtlpHi. »hH; Tk \\ \\. 



EXERCISE 9-. 233 

IX. ON DOING IMPORTANT WORK ONESELF. 

It is much better as far as possible to do important work oneself than 
Entrust it to another. If we ourselves go to a gentleman's house upon some 
special business, it is likely that we shall receive more attention than would 
be given to any man we may send, because a personal interview is a different 
matter. Likewise the man we send cannot make known exactly [ as we 
should ] the thoughts that we wish to make known to that gentleman,, 
However if our health be not good, or if there be any other such incovenience 
in our going to that gentleman's house, then, in such a case, instead of 
sending someone else, it is better to transact the business by means of a 
letter. If in work done through an intermediary, a wrong meaning be 
gathered from what he says, then we have to suffer harm instead of gaining 
any advantage, according to the saying " She went to get her son, and 
lost her hnsband,'' In a word, rather than fall into such a muddle, it is 
better to do one's work oneself, because our work is never done by another 
with the same care with which we would do it. And a matter is easily 
understood after conversing in person with anyone for a few minutes. 
And we are successful in the business on which we may have gone. 

Elementary Instruction , page 61, 62. 

Note — 1 ; cil is understood after Sil$s<5{l5i. 

2; £ui is Hindustani for £te£i, Infinitive of Purpose, § 135; and aHUf 

is Hindustani for ^Kl, Past Indefinite Feminine, §52. 
3 ; ^ is here equivalent to cKl a«l2i>*fl. 



^40 'GUJARAT! GRAMMAR. 

*. 139,8). 'HfcVUW MlKUHl" *UclMt* ^« *&4«& ftifl ^ 

b - 98,9). fou^l S<HRl% <£§} H<W *V\SM *ft cl 6 W4 &WI 

c. 109, 1 e). iw *§ ^ ^| &fl. *tlu ft^<HcfCt c fccll Pi clrii H<-Hi 

^<$Hl 5514 £« iR icfi, ^ ft *mita«{l \*4 h\fod 3 
^. 144 b); e 108, l).*icRU*£u e %PIPR ^l^Hcil^, 2«HNi MV MUld C^tTl 
f. 27 Note ; g, 78. ^^Oct^ii M^Mtg. fl4<Ml fcf*tol tSH^Sl «HI>1 IllMMtU^ 
b. 122 j k, 121 . tH^ HUH \V$l«fl*. ShU^l *l% Ct«U SMI tft 5U foc^ 

i cf. 134, *u$t m^i vncn* a*a A to *W& 4 ^ 3 cl <&€! 

*5l. «H^T ell cl§} *t<$Hl *1>H<1 Mil 3\5>Cll 1§mBl4 3 
tt.89B.3a.). ^ ^^ ^^t^ldl W |3 W ^v^ ^S^w } 

n. 79. *l«lft M*| q^t «Ml3t hM *l«44loSli n . ^i «t§ 

p. 72, 73. Ml WU P Pi ««H^ §fi ^^ t ^ ^ ^Vi^ 5% H 

* 81 » J '• m^Ofd ^ Sucfl ^ w z Ml q ^ 5^ 0lfc|2 3 xfa q ^^ Hl 

r. 122; s. 1R3. ^ ^ * ^3 5 ^ r ^ «V *&<$ <§M* 5fc0« 3J«/*M»d 

t. 139, 8 ). "Ufl. MfcQ ^R4l Cl*U S^a^Ml' Mil *0* Mlfesa 

v, 81,3). yWPd a ^ifl ^ ^fl*. »Ml mctti-wtfl* Mfafe 

4^1% VrHI »U3(tI ; ^i Y3. 



r. 97 



EXERCISE 10. t4i 

X. M1RABAI. 

Mirabai was the daughter of the Rafthod Jenial of Medata, in Marwad, 
and the wife of Kumbha Rani sf Mevad. who reigned from Samvat 1475 to 
1525. The Rabhod was a worshipper of Visnu, and in his house was a 
beautiful idol of KTsna, which he had been in the habit of worshipping 
•with much ceremony, and he used to keep company with holy men and 
ascetics. The mind of Mlra, through seeing her father's mode of life, 
became attached to the worship of Krsna. The father, contrary to his 
■daughter's wish, gave her in marriage, through fear of people talking. The 
Rana, of Mevad and his mother were worshippers of Siva, and Mlra was a 
Vaisnava ; for this reason, or because Mlra used to be so often with holy 
men and ascetics, she did not get on well with the Rana, and lived apart. 
Thereupon, notwithstanding the Rana's strict prohibition, she began to 
keep company more and more, and quite openly, with ascetics and 
devotees, and got them to instruct the Rs^na even, with a view to his 
becoming a Vaisnava. The Rana was greatly offended, and did not the 
courtiers seek some device to compass the death of Mlra ? But Mlra got 
warning, and, after making a vow not to drink water in the country of the 
Sana, she went off on a dromedary to Gujarat. 

Afterwards sh3 went on pilgrimage to Dwarka and Gokul Mathura, 
and finally took up her abode in Dwarka. Her fame as a religious devotee 
feas spread over the whole of Hindustan. 

Narmagadya, 5th Edition, page 43. 

Note — I; Samvat era { of Vrkramaditya) is reckoned from 56-57 B.C., 
and accordingly Samvat 1175 — 1525 corresponds to 1418— 
1468 A. D, 

3; Regarding fescti see Note 1, of Exercise I, 
4: @Ht§ \$ik = qidte openly^ 

•5^ |*i in this sentence has much the same fore as the interrogatival 
'4 of § 70. 



SI 



2.42 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



a. 98, 9;. 

b. 99; c. 150 a;. 
d. 72, 73. 



e. 92. 

f. 41;g.74,l);h.l01,3> 

k. 81,1); I. 34. 

m. 122. 

d. 83; p. 150 a). 

•q. 28. A). 



r. 104. 

s. 81/9. 

t. 67 a); v. 122. 

ar. 135. 
•v. 148. 



«pmci ^1 <hw ^dcti c ^t -i«n, a M*«a 6 ^ ^w & rf 

VflCl 'cftM^ ^t %2l nnfti MAV*^ cl -vHUl^l 

^ S^; cllM^ &ic-hi Qri^h'i iW^R «IW 3 »U«A 
&&U W* M^ 0^ <ritM^ cU »l v\U ~$#fl tfyft & ■#& 
-*?l, cid W ^WH SlfcJ MQJ Act ~*iW *l4g n 4«n, ^ 

■t&utii ^9Wcfl p ^ 43u*fl ^hu Hcti ? m^j <=m\\ ^.u *iw$. 

^MlM^l cH^Ull^fl *R $fti «HlV»i~l *U "tRcTO'l H^l 
^UPti M^l &3l 3 <MW5}, ^ cl*U ~*Hl «tl<HcMl *i»l"H~Hi 
cl§] 5}4 Ml M^l &C-iU*fi C-l^i &, <$ Ml &2? am 1«hI 
M»U *$l n«a, M^J cl Ml \&U stHt^ft »!l >U<fl ^U4l 
^"faHi MP* iW ~*H«/<UC3 M cil Ml MQl ^1. %R*ft 

«Uii r h^i 5iui a^uml cli anrti m£1 $ s , 3 *»u<tt 

^1'* Vtt Mil* ^«ft* c£T >i£ cl <^t 5ltel wm\ MM 
6$. ^H^i ly i<£i anwi ^H«ai 4R§}l*fl Mi4 w^^H* 
"^ fed M^t3 ^l^MM* «tW Mi<t£U y ^^t m 
■El"«i e ll^l y § 5\>ii iW M^ 94 4*fl. 



3J«/~UcR.; Cil. *< >fl ^Pl^ *M Vfe*. 



Exercise 11.. 243 

XI, THE LOSS BY EXCHANGE". 

Accordingly at no time since April 1st until to-day has the rate- 
of exchange risen, hence it is clearly evident that there will be a great 
deficit in the Indian treasury, and although the rough estimate of that 
deficit at the present time and at the present value (of the rupee) can be 
reckoned at perhaps two crores, yet, should there be any fluctuation in the 
present value, and should the rate fall much lower than even to-day's, then 
no conjecture can be made in any way as to what further limits this deficit, 
may reach, and there will be a still greater deficit than the two crores at 
present probable.. Our Minister of Finance, Sir David Barbour, must be 
greatly perplexed in the matter, and he has accordingly written a letter, 
(published) in England, with reference to this subject. That letter has not 
yet been published in this country, but by its publication just possibly 
some light may perhaps be thrown on this subject of the large deficit. The 
Government have beyond a doubt come to a position of very great 
perplexity, and must be in very great anxiety as to how to make up such 
a deficit. For all these reasons there is no doubt that the gravest fears 
must be entertained that the next Budget will be a very startling one, and 
one to be deplored, by the inhabitants of India. 

" The Giijardti " Neivspaper ; August 28 } 1892, 

Note — 1 : cftwiCl a corrupt form of the English word treasury. Similarly 
iHo*M stands for Budget. 

2 : 5} s^u = 51 s^u&l 5H^y2l or 5} s,^u ^»ttil wu^Sl. One 
crore (b\u) equals 10,000,000. 

3:; This construction with wiySi is quite idiomatic. It may perhaps 
be best explained by regarding the whole of the sentence 
preceding o*iySi as the subject, in which case the literal 
translation would be as follows: Our Minister of Finance 
Sir David Barbour's being in. this matter one fallen into great 
perplexity, this must be. 

4 : M^ dl "H^ Mm "°i\ is literally true indeed, if it falls it falls x and 
hence may possibly fall. 



OUJARATl GRAMMAR. 



SHU* *>A Ml&iU 

*Wl«fl *WHH ^t, rife ^i aHiJiy^Hi rt>lWl y^sfl ^ 

m m-M ri«fl. si ^ a# { \ d sw ^, rt cMl ^ £ H 

MTOftft 4^ &, clH d *U<M *HR«l ^Rfa^ ^ VUi . § 
ctVl >H=nct 4<| g $ ^l Shciid \«l ML>1 d. ^ £ 
Ml} «HH^ **&tfft <3 c*%<rrfH% ^i«t ^ cll^l it^t 
*l*l rl *4% 51 ^ $ ^i a^ ^ K>l i ^^ . 3 yw . ; 
"hi* cttfl 'HIM =Hia ^w ctrl ^q <H<1 »U\?L 

»& <*^ rj iu ^ rll ^ ^ ^ ^' P n5, Hl ^ ^ m , 

$»l3 Ml^l clSlrt <sv^ ^ ^i ^<Hl^lr]Ri d«l|.. 
WlSlWl riuiSli ^ <§ w *fcd- Ml&lt «««. *£ d.; & 
fl^ >H=flct i| ^ ^ clSli Mldld *<q -m>l &. M<SJ **H[\ jf 

ill^rll ^ $ tf^ ^Idlrft 3}R{Wi >&, 7{ CHI e^ ^ ' 
4<fl ^K^tirll ClUl «iWrn Ml^-il 4* J 3 ^j £fofl flfog ' 

«UM clr] iiawiUtfl <H^l *UM$. *& eft H&fl 4W 

fr^a*urn mi ^-h^i c-tcn^t H i^ . ^i ^ Hl ^ d ^ 

Ml?t cfHRl riiPHi *>Wl(3 cWtfl »UM «l§} &. ml ct>l 5* 
flci Ml«hl i\[ I ; 5ll »Mt4UrHhl WRfti H[\ cll| HR 
Mpll »Ml5n ; ctl| ^1<tvM »u3l ; ^ a^URl ^ \««0 
M} cll^l W^tol ^ «il»ll. feifcrfl ^^^| ^ W€ Q a4 l(r/ 

^HHr] 3>ilM. «Mr] ^ »t>| ^^^ ^flSUrl Hi\ $#$>[ 

"H^l^i^i ri eiii, m^j ^ii«a shmi^i ^i^i 4^. "^^ Riv-i 
ci«ii M^ti>i mi vTmi %i44ioi am ntVi &. «Hi>lri. 
^^ «l ct>i >ii^^irii vi\\m, cisii^ >ttx 4^t, cit 

cfHl^l ^Mliiynirll ^IM cfHrl M^J >ll^ 4^. MQJ <^ cl>| 
^il^Hl aHM^Vi dSllr] >nx ri2Q i^cll, clt cfHl^l H[H 
rRRl "HM^lH M^l >ll\ *lfe 4*$l. 



EXTRACT FROM THE HOLY BIBLE. 24 5 

ALMS-GIVING. AND PRAYER. 

Take heed that ye do not your alms before men to be seen of them j 
otherwise ye have no reward of your Father which is in heaven. 

Therefore when thou doest thine alms,, do not sound a trumpet before- 
thee, as the hypocrites do in the synagogues and in the streets, that they 
may have glory of men. Verily I say unto you, They have their reward.. 
But when thou doest alms, let not thy left hand know what thy right hand 
doeth : that thine alms may be in secret : and thy Father, which seeth in- 
secret, shall reword thee openly. 

And when thou prayest, thou shalt not be as the hypocrites are : for 
they love to pray standing in the synagogues and in the corners of the 
streets, that they may be seen of men. Verily I say unto you, They 
have their reward. But thou, when thou prayest, enter into thy closet, and 
when thou hast shut thy door, pray to thy Father which is in secret ; and 
thy Father, which seeth in secret, shall reward thee openly. But when 
ye pray, use not vain repetitions as the heathen do ; for they think that 
they shall be heard for their much speaking. Be not ye therefore like 
unto them : for your Father knoweth what things ye have need of, before 
ye ask him. 

After this manner therefore pray ye : Our Father which art in heaven, 
Hallowed be thy name. Thy kingdom come. Thy will be done in earth 
as it is in heaven. Give us this day our daily bread. And forgive us 
our debts, as we forgive our debtors. And lead us not into temptation, 
but deliver us from evil. For thine is the kingdom, and the power, and 
the glory, for ever. Amen. 

For if ye forgive men their trespasses, your heavenly Father will also 
forgive you. 

But if ye forgive not men their trespasses, neither will your Father 
forgive your trespasses. 

The Gospel according to Matthew, 6 ; 1-1 5 J 



PROVERBS. 

The following Proverbs, while serving as an exercise for translation, 
'will be found of special interest either from their accordance with familiar 
English equivalents or from their distinctive Oriental colouring. 

1. a). *H^t Hll &<-iitH H^l, 

From a vessel but partly full much spills over. 
*). MlW *jUfc Ml<H, 

Showy, yet empty within, 
Cf. Empty vessels make most noise. 

2. *HOi ^H 5^(cl &IQJ, 

A little knowledge does much harm. 
Cf. A little knowledge is a dangerous thing. 

3. a). 5HIM ^Hl pMl :fl3i «i c^lM, 

Unless one dies one cannot get to heaven. 
•6). «HIM ^"Hl-i H<*i <&, >m WHH <*<n nfe, 

There is no strength like one's own, no water like that 

from the clouds. 
Cf. If you want a thing well done, do it yourself. 

4. »UH«lWi il ^ 1 *M* §*** ^IR'HI S&U IfoH, 

Amongst the blind a one-eyed man is king, and in a desert 
place the castor-oil plant is chief, 
Cf. A heron is king among a hundred crows. 

5. <3«*<a 5U£i £H rife. 

Not all that is white is milk. 
Cf. All is not gold that glitters. 

6. §cU1tffla»U %llct clR Midi k\ 

Who hastes has to turn back seven times. 
Cf. The more haste the worse speed. 

7. *&$ a<a i^n, 

As word so deed. 
Cf. Practise what you preach. 
8. 3<tPlI ^i»i ell &HUl"Hi »Hl^, 

What is in the well that (only) comes into the trough. 
Cf, What is in the pot will come on the plate. 



2 i8 Ct\JAlUTl GRAMMAR. 

9. a). tStte ^ M% 

"Whoso diggeth (a pit) shall full (therein)," Prov. 26 : 2?* 

The work of our hands will assail our heart. 

10. *[sA MMlSl >H*ai &%\, <*lfcA A%Hi H% 

Sipend accotding to your means, step on with your eyes open; 
Cf. Cut your coat according to your cloth ; 

also Look before you leap. 

What Govinda (Krsna) desires will take place, your (doings) 
and mine are ineffectual. 

h ). >il^*t ttt> 3 1$E't MR <3«rt, 

Man plans, but it is God who carries through. 
Cf. Man proposes, God disposes. 

12. a). HVfl §H ^HHi MW cit <WHl t-tPQ <-M> 

Leaving the house she went into the forest, and there a fire 
broke out. 
b). »\h\ ildcti M£ §U, 

While driving out a goat, a camel entered* 

c). &€U*ti*(l HUafft ^fHi Mas, 

To fall from the hob into the stove, 
Cf. Out of the frying-pan into the fire. 

13. a). =H-Hi"l r& MSJ Pi£l •! ^, 

His skin may go broken, but not a farthing will he let pass, 

b). ST-l &IA" M<3J <tf*t -i %\\ 

He will let his life go but not one pice. 
[Spoken of a miser]. 

14. atlifl 4} ell <HI^H<1 *tfl, 

Who does the service gets the cake. 
Cf, No pains, no gains. 

15. alivti M*iai ^R 5u<t«i, 

A thief knows the footprints of a thief. 
Cf. Set a thief to catch a thief. 

lo. afovl MU& H«l'ft Hja, 

A thief's bag yields only dust. 
Contrast Honesty is the best policy. 



PROVERBS.. 2-49 

W tei^i jAIi MM h\ 

An ant that feeds on cow-dung will die in gin. 
Cf. One man's meat is another man's poison. 

18. <*§) cl <M% 

Who has been in travail knows (what pain is). 
Cf. "The -heart knoweth its own bitterness," Prov. 14: 10. 

1 9, a> SJ^cllKl ^HU JJ»l **% 

A living man's failings pass away (only) at his death. 
■6). \i\& "tft M^i <W H H$ f 

A string though it burns keeps coiled. 
Cf. Naturam expellas furca, tamen usque recufret. 

There are as many opinions as there are sages. 
Cf. Quot homines, tot sententi^e,- suus cuique mos. 
Many men, many minds. 

21. di 4Pi ckl*U «UM, *>tift h\ ell llH -"ilM, 

Oneself ( alone ) can do one's work : should another set to it 
he will blunder. 
Cf. Ne supra crepidam sutor judicaret. 
A cobbler should stick to his last. 

22. $afc £}*U ^PaMR^I, ^1$ <M5U ell fa&W, 

Hills look charming from a distance, go near and they are terrible. 
Cf. Distance lends enchantment to the view. 

23. i^ctM ct<$lM<HWl »U*ftt, 

To a drowning man a straw seems a protection. 
Cf. A drowning man will catch at a straw. 

24. £"H£l Wft <MiCll ^Ml^ll «UH, 

Adding pie to pie you will make a rupee. 
Cf. Take care of the pence, and the pounds will take care of 
themselves. 

■25. tlriMl <§M* St"H 3 MWl <§M* "41|, 

Branding for the burnt, and for the fallen a kick, 
Cf. To add insult to injury. 

26. £*Hl \\m\ toRl i*\ £?A MISl, 

Who has been burnt by milk will keep blowing his whey befor© 
drinking it. 
Cf. A burnt bairn dreads the fire, 
32 



250 GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 

27. tk\ ciV3«, 

As country so garb. 
Cf. In Rome be a Roman. 
•2&. H>1<{1 ou^rii ^ lc t ^ ^ ? 

Why look at the teeth of a cow given as charity ? 
Cf. Never look a gift-horse in the mouth. 
29.. T^cni 1\\ 3 «VttW5U H^fl, 

The cattle weak and the gadflies many. 
Cf. MisfoTtunes seldom come single. 
30. ^ mm j^cli ji^i ^i ^ 

A one-eyed uncle is better than no uncle at all. 
Cf. Half a loaf is better than no bread. 

si. <C<& \mm <w %% 

In the not having spoken there are nine virtues. 
Cf. Silence is golden. 

32. a.) \3i *u te etf m\ 3 ^ an Miitf, 

With his foot he crushes fish, and with his mouth cries "Rama.'* 
b). &l&t>ti -moil 3 |w C-UC-tl, 

In his hand a rosary and at heart a fop, 
Cf. Cod on his tongue, and the devil in his heart. 

33. to 4^ ft M*^, 

What the " panch " says is what God says. 
Cf. Vox populi, vox Dei. 

34. \Hh S\hH[ M&afl *4% >H<h* «-R*0 nfe \\m 9 

Evil tidings arrives in a trice, it cannot be stopped. 
Cf. Ill news travels apace. 

3 5. a). M6U SUSll tf£ $l\ UH *H\A\, 3 w P$l >ttf t &[\ VPH m *H\<d f 
He dug through a mountain, and got a rat ; he struck a 
stork, and got its wing. 

b. >H^l $*R % m\Hi §*5*, 

To dig a mountain and kill a rat. 
Cf. Parturiunt montes, nascetur ridiculus mus. 

36. •«%} &&a m^i^i, »a^ te& miw, *a<a> s^a ^ ci-n *nm *&•, 

The first day a guest, the second day a " pie " 
Who stays a third day his wits must be awry. 
[Spoken of one who overstays his welcome]. 



PROVERBS,. 251: 

37. Mufi M^ £Mi %iHAr, 

To fix on a ritn after the jar has been made. 
[With reference to attempting the impossible!.. 

38.. ^(tflMHl ^ MPl, 

The strong man has two shares.. 
Cf. Might is right.. 

39. "UM cHl »Ut, 3 Hi cht 1i\ t 

As the father so his sons, and as the banyan so its berries;. 
Cf. Like father like son. 

40. »iR<$ii <3HUi 3 "Wl^l 4^1, 

The doors open and the gutter plugged. 
Cf. Penny wise pound foolish.. 

41. ^ fiti&i M^jl Q$ >£,. 

Who frequents as a guest two Houses will die of hunger. 
Cf. To fall between two stools. 

42. «Ml <H4UM ^4 «*&. 

While two are fighting, the work of the third party (prospers); 
Cf. When rogues fall out, honest men come by their own. 

43. <H^cU ^kct «{IM<£, ! <H>Hdi afe*lfc «tW f . 

One becomes a scholar by studying,., a scribe by writing. 
Cf. Practice makes perfect. 

44. Qi4[ Mi M* "«iU MQJ Mltf,. 

On a fulL stomach sugar even (tastes) salty.. 
Contrast Hunger is the best sauce.. 

45.. <H*Ml >IL ^PM (HtW, 

The Bhagavata (Purana placed) before the face of a she-buffalo. 
Cf.. " Give not that which is holy unto the dogs, neither cast 
ye your pearls before swine,''' Matthew, 7 ; 6\ 

46 . ^>\l M^l %l| ePH^M,. 

All are: praised after they are dead* 
Cf. De mortuis nil. nisi bonum.. 

47. \<XA\ *W b\kl r 

To make an elephant of an atom; 
Cf. To make a mountain of a molehill.. 

48. <H$>ft ^K-Hl avu *tl^ &l\ 5U §Wfe *l °*i, 

When Laksmi (the goddess of wealth) comes to set a mark on 
one's forehead,., one should not go to wash one's face. 



252 GUJARATI GRAMMAR, 

C£ " There is a tide in the affairs of men, 

Which, taken at the flood^ leads on to fortune.!' 
49. (ifSHt <*& jjl «MM, "H^ H& M<$J >lRl *UM. 

The short man, striding with the tall,. 
May not die, but ill will fall. 
Contrast Birds of a feather flock together. 
50., &6U <*{% SlM ^*Kl, 

To sell needles h>the blacksmiths' quarter,,. 
Cf. To carry coals to Newcastle. 
51.. faHlfcl h\\ CHM^lcl $fe,. 

One's reason goes and then comes ruin. 
Cf. Quos Deus vult perdere,, prius dementat.. 

52. **{*<${ c*m«(l vlltffl &,. 

The intemperate seek out for themselves the intemperate* 
Cf. Birds of a feather flock together,. 

53. % MSI %U«£»l %fS{ cltSl *(M <HlW 4l«U 3 hm t . 

Though a negro wash with a hundred maunds of soap- hi 
remains black as ever., 
Cf. You cannot wash a blackamoor white. 

54. && «H6« cl %U «H6« r 

What (passes) beyond the lips (passes) beyond; the ramparfc. 
Cf* Walls have ears.. 




VOCABULARY 



a>Rl<§ prep.. Before. -Kl *H^ll§. 
*H 3 k*i/. Need, importance.. 

s'PlcM'ti itH Necessary works. 
*H<jV=UU} n. Light.. 

'Hi^l or ^Hi^l m. Rough estimate. 
»i<^>l>U m. Dislike. 

cl*$ *tftppll *i\H S They get a 

dislike to it.. 
"liCMl*ll(dfct/. Exaggeration. 

^(cl^tpfcl <HJ^ adj. Exaggerated. 
*Hcliltfl m. Last moment,hour of death. 
*>mm conj. Or ; 
*>iW\ f. Respect, folding one's arms 

respectfully.. 

sHS^t bl\ With arms crossed.. 
^H\ adj. Unfinished, incomplete. 
^HHsl m. A wrong meaning, a calamity. 
^H'i'iH n. A conjecture, conclusion. 
%>& conj. And. 
*Hv[ n. Corn, grain. 
*H"*RlH m. A trespass. 
^i"H^ adj. Vain, false, useless. 
*H>1 £W"« We : see § 31. 

**W\\ pron. Our. 
*H&{[ adj. Arab. 
*H«i m. Meaning. 

*UU€<M m. Ala-ud-din, the third 
king of the House of Khaljl. Reign 
1295-1315 A.D. 
fMKl^l m. Shamsh-ud-din Altamsh,the 
fourth king of the Slave ( TurkI ) 
Dynasty. Reign 1210-1235 a. d. 
^1$ n. The gums, 



a>Rt^/. Influence, effect.. 
aH<£l' adv. Here, (thereupon)., 

*tl pron> This, these (close at hand), 

^Ht <§M**(l Therefore. 

*Hl MHl^} Accordingly 
*Hlil* m. Shape. 
aMlitft n. Heaven. 

^HliWHirU In heaven, heavenly, 
^Ml-wj adj. Whole, the whole, all. 
SHRUJ (or ^Pl^j) adj. Front. 
aMR0\ #rep. Before, in front of. -Kl 

^Htotai a>ii<l M^W^ To reach.. 
^Hlir/ adv. To-day, this day. 

^KW fe*i &ft*i\ Until to-day, 
^Hlty* m. Support. 
»HIM§1 £>nm. We : see § 31. 
^l^ v. i. To come. 
*Hl%lMl%t prep. Around, about. -rfj 

am«l& adj. Lazy. 

& 

U^Hsl/. A wish, will. 
fcftlRct /. A building. 

if. 

$*k\ m, God, the Supreme Lord, 

<§♦ 

§H$, v. i. To grow. 
§mi adj. Open. 

§Hll&tir adv. Quite openly,'' 
§'i «cfy'. Deep, 



2 54 



GUJARA'J'I GRAMMAR; 



§cR3 v. i. To descend, decrease. 
S-I^cj adj. Inferior. 
-*{l dcRcj Less than, second to. 

§^1 m. A feast. 

Wl Q^-i m. Festival in commemora- 
tion, of the placing of. an idol in a. 
temple. 

§M4R m. Kindness. 

SMd/^, v. i. To be produced, to accrue. 

<3\\ prep. Above , on, upon., -41. dH^. 

§\\[<\prep. Besides, beyond, contrary 
to. -41 <§MVlct.. 

(§MR w. Means, measures. 

(§4^1 m. Will, zeal. 

<3>K or (§>R./. Age.. 

>lt<A <§4VU When grown up. 

% 

^% {or $%) adj. High.. 
<§H n. Wool., 

§\<?i (or(§<?i) adj*_ Standing^ upright 
§1% \^i v. i. To stand up. 

st^ (or ^) n. A debt., 
sfti^Q (or |^fl) m. A debtor. 

5l pron. This, these. , 
a>!4 adj. One. 

»li=A44t Each other's. 

aJUHft adv. Once. 

Slis/ 2>row. J us k ^ e same •■• 
ate| adj. Together. 
5\4li adj. A certain. 
a>VJs& pron. Each single, one by one. 
wU<Hl>U adv. Forthwith. 
5U£i adj. So great. 

SUli ^ So much. 

3U& ^ At so many years. 



a>Usl adv. To wit, that is to say,, or.. 

£ifk<ct m. April. 

Sl=[_ a<ty'. So, such, of such a kind.. 

a>U. infer?, 0, Oh !: 
*Hli/. Tide,, low-tide.. 
aKl^H /. A room, closet. 

*» 

ifcfp'ow.. Anything,, any, at all.. 

ff? 1 irW pron.. Whatever.. 
&5Jl1c| v. caus,. to make sound. 

fcict iiil'H'Hlto make the teeth chatter^. 
hU^ adj. Pertaining to the sea-coast*. 

maritime.. 
bl\\ adj. Harsh.. 
4^ w u l m..A Kanbi, a cultivator. 
4*14- n. An account,. a stoiy. . 
hi..n. Size. 

cld'4S «itd.^d I n size it was smalls 
JfSR acfc. Perhaps, 
i^cli cory. Than.. 
«3 t>.»*. To do.. 
4^l c l=| f. caits.To cause to do. 
iftd* ( = h£& ) Called, having said ;. : 

See §.98, 4).. 
43ld~l v.. impv,_ Please do : see § 63.. 
4^U adj.. A crore, ten million. 
4^<Hcl /• A proverb, saying. . 
4(fc«| v. t. To say, tell., 
iifcl pron. Something.. 

iiy 4f& Nothing at all, not at alii. 
4R m. Glass.. 
41&1 w. A shore, bank.. 
4lV8i n. A reason. 

5Jl 4lR<$i*R For this reason. 
4MS2 /. Care. 
4lfrl4l/. Kalika.The Goddess Kali, th& 



VOCABULARY. 



'black and bloody consert of S'iva. 

ilfrui "Hldl Kalika the Mother. 
Vlll m. An insect. 
VlcH n. A hymn of praise. 
£<U m. A well. 
^3'jj£M m.Kutnb-ud-dln (Qutb-ud--din) 

the second king of the Slave 

Dynasty. Reign 1205-1210 a.d. 
Isi^l^te pron. Several,. 
1<i^ adj. How much ? 
$i&:w\£ £^ (At) some little distance* 
Isi&l^li Some, a certain. 
1& prep. After, -rft tsl, 
Is>l1s conj. Because. 
IslW pron. Any. 

^iW^li pron. Some one., a 'certain, 

a (indef. art.) 

SlW M<$J Wcl at any time. 
Islft^J v. t. To cut out, engrave. 
3l1«fl /. A bag, 
IsUl or Isi^t m. A kos, distance of about 

two miles. 
;$Hi adv. Where ? 

JHim adv. Whence t 
iMl^ ( = iW <tt\) adv. W T hen ? At what 

time ? 

^Hl^fi ( or ^i'-ft ) odw. From what 

time ? 

""HpHct acfo>. Verily, certainly. 
>H| adj. True. 

"^ttl fe^ Whole-heartedly. 

""i^M^ adj. Real. 
* u i c lil c l3, v. caus. To feed. 
"^•Ht^ v. pass. To be eaten. 
"^HICH m. A husband. 
MUll m. A pit, deficit. 



""•11^ w. t. To eat. 

"^IW^I ^<j v. t. To live upon. 
»it| adj. Brackish, salty. 
•wil^ adj. Special. 

'fWftfV^U m. Khijar Khan (Khizr Khan). 
"^iloVHl^ v. pass-. To be annoyed, 
■"i'-t^ct a dj. Beautiful. 
vd,f£j adj. Open, clear. 

^(■Q ff/^lM § it is clearly evident. 
■^^ v„ t. To draw. 
%R •n. A field. 

^IcWl^lt «*■ An owner of a field. 
vhcCI /. Agriculture. 

^cUd 51*1 The work of the field. 
^llW =^1^ v. t. To lose, 
vil^ n. A frame. 
^Hi| adj. Wrong > bad. 

-3 ^t| Stt 3 l«i To feel displeased,, 
vll^ To dig. 

^l€l <^t:j To dig in search of. 
^Utfl<£ v. i. To seek. 

at. 

^W «*. A measure of two feet. 

^ictl^ 5 W A carpenter's measure* 

of two feet. 
5 1<HRI^ v. i. To be frightened. 
z\X*\ adj. Warm. 
itfH adj. Poor, gentle. 

3 lfl u l &llsl Needy folk. 
3 ltffl <r/^ «. i. To melt away, fall below. 
on"H n. Village, town. 

^ll>U ciail 31^1 Towns and cities, 
oil^ v. t. To sing. 
^"Hllt m. Confusion, muddle, 
y^i wi. Quality. 
yH acZj. Secret. 
$m m. A book. 



256 



CUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



^l&tU m. A householder, a gentleman. 
^lliH^ v. t. To arrange. 

H^fli adj. Many a ...... 

*{^[llR adv. Many a time, often, 
m^ adj. Much, many. 
H^'Hl adj. Most. 

H^(N£l 4R On most occasions, 

generally. 
%ft w. A house. 

H*U13 f. pass.To be dragged, driven. 
*tli tn. A contrivance, plot. 

«4^ HSi «il > H c ll To compass a per- 

"son's death. 
*U<H3 v. t. To put, place. 

HlC-ft H>si v. t. To fix. 

au<j v. i. To rise. 

*{&£ ^i v. i. To rise. 

2i"Hc4R m. A marvel, miracle. 

'i&li ( or =m&3, ) v. t. To love, to like. 

»U5R m. A servant. 

'Uift/. Service. 

^Wi v. t. To feed (cattle). 

SUCH/. Conduct: see § 18. 

aueW'H^ n. Conduct. 
«11<H^ v, i. To walk, act, proceed, get on, 

*lUHt rt§v. i. to go on. 
aU'Hsj v. t. To chew, 
frtt to. The mind. 
a{W /. A thing. 
=fl^ v. t. To split. 
Slct^ v. ■£. To be warned. 

%fl <r/<j, v. i. Te get warning. 

y>cti conj. Notwithstanding. 
tf[V /. A shell, bivalve. 



Ql$[ m. Escape, deliverance. 

-3l Qlhl i\H[ To deliver. 
&!l m. An end, extremity. 
&<=§j adj. Last. 

&<$ adv. At last, lastly. 
&li^t m. A boy, son. 
&t«l / A wave. 

(W^ll or o^it or «Y3Hl /. A place. 

oVS^, to. The stomach. 

otfi/. The root (of a tree). 

«/i^ to. The jaw^, 

«V<3^i /. A thing, an article. 

oyQjl^ v. pass. To be known, seen*, 

oV^lM & it is known > we learn, 
sy^l m. A cluster, row. 
W'-'Hl^l m. Life, period of existence,, 
ir/H^l adj. Right (opp. to left)* 
&\[ adv. A little, at all. 

«*y5l At all. 

tf\\f. Need, necessity,, 
fr^&^lcl /• Necessity. 
v/'Hi adj. Swift. 
<r/<H<£[f. Speed, quickness. 
<M<3|«| v. t. To know, suppose, think. 
•M^IM 3 ! Worthy of being known, 
remarkable. 

Mti£lcll adj.. Acquainted. 
Met /. Kind, race, people. 
avici pron. Self, ourselves. 

Mtctl«{l Mel Oneself. 
M^l /. A pilgrimage, 
25<Hll w. An insect. 
35^ v. i. To live. 
5vj,3i[a /. A device. 
*4i acl J- False. 

s. to, A falsehood, lie. 



VOOABULABY. 



257 



'«£,£ adj. Distinct, separate. 

c^| or^l adj. Entirely different, quite 

separate, 
e^ adj. Old, 
o*i c U'{l/. Youth. 
a? conj. That. 
£? pron. Who. 

<£ jW prow. Whatever, 
^i^j adj. Equal to, as much as. 

cMl >dl&[ "Stall As high as it. 

^^..cU^i As much as... so much. 
cv'H. adv. As. 

^"H ^ ci"H As far as possible. 
'^I . . . cI<h4 As large as ... so large. 
<$>§ adj. Like, as. 

<MWSlv.de/ect Is needed: see §§6 6,6 7. 
cvj-i^ v. £. To join., compose, yoke. 
<r»te w. Strength, violence. 

rfo^Ct'H m. Oppression. 
ovHl <HIM£ adj. Worth-seeing. 
'<rtt«| v. t. To soe, to look at. 
<**U adv. Where. 
ctH[\ conj. When. 

"3JUMl<Hl m. Plants, vegetation, 
ofti^ adj. Fine, minute. 

4* 

£i m. A pony. 
' l\& f. Cold, 
^l^l^li adv. In crowds. 

I* 
^411^ w. A place. 
IS adv. As far as, quite up to. 

3l*ll adj^ Left. 

illll adj. Wise. 

^R m. A mountain. 
33 



inilf. A hill. 

3l^U m. An old man. 

<£$t<| v. pass. To be covered. 
^'Pfl adj. Hypocritical 

cl«in. The body. 

<M StM Energetically. 
dMW/. Enquiry. 
clMW H<1 To enquire, 
d^fla^d /. Constitution, state of health, 
d"Hllll m. A spectacle, show, entertain- 
ment. 
cl>l pron. You. 

cV»tl^ m. Your. 
cti^R m. A holiday. 
fltfUq -n. A pond. 

cttfft^i w. The bottom, lowest part, 
cftsvi^/. The treasury, 
cl pron. He, she, it, that, they. 

cl t<&[1 On the day in question. 

cl "H^fl or cl <§M**Q Hence, therefore. 

cW Quite the same. 

c$lcl Identical, 
cte^i adj. So much, 
ell?/ adv. In the same way. 
ell conj. Then, indeed. 
cllH or cU=yl conj. Nevertheless. : sea 

§ 101, 
^H[ adv. There. 
cHl aHRCJl In front of it. 
cHR £t°Q Until then. 
&{\ conj. Then. 

cHl^sY Then only. 
^ «um, Three. 

&i^ s^ v. i. To become. 



258 



GUJARAT! Git AM A~R. 



-Si^ v. i. To be, become, happen, arise, 

be found. 

clS\H 5Vh silM g) It is the same with 
them. 
2U<H$ll m. A pillar. 

$\l n. Pain. 

tWlft adj. Belonging to the court 

or palace. 
i^ywii &l£ Courtiers. 
fQ£\.\ m. The sea. 
S^l^Hl ill On the sea-coast. 
£<:H n. Seeing, sight, visiting an idol. 
fc£l«i i^i To visit an idol. 
tkMQ v - caus. To cause to be seen, 

make known. 
tH ( or W\ ) Ten. 

V& Is "tR ^W At ten or twelve years. 
$<k&[ m. A day. 
€^| n. A temple. 
£l"*H^t prep, in the character of, as. 

tUg w. *. To bury. 
fcU /. A molar tooth. 
£1^1 m. A grain, grain, 
sicl m. A tooth. 

tict ii-LWlTo make the teeth chatter 
fcl«iH'A n. Alms-giving, alms. 
fed m. Day. 
($<& /. Delhi ( Dghli ). 
fe^Kl ^U$fl Daily bread. 
£:"»H -n. Misery. 
&(HhI /. The world. 
£^ct adj. Right, good, suitable. 

1^ fcttrt Much better. 
£*ll5U m. A double shawl, rug. 
&H n. Milk, 



t^lcl w. An instance, illustration, 

parable. 
"S^Hl ! w. A sight. 

^"*Hl^, v. £>ass. To be seen, to appear, 
1e| v. t. To give. 
"£y m. A country, 
t\lQ v. i. To run. 

H. 

H^Q w. A master. 
HH w. Treasure, wealth. 
H"H?A /. A threat, 
feftcfl •/. The earth. 

H^cUiH m. An earthquake. 
Vi^tffl /. A blanket, 
HR;4, v. £. To think, imagine, 
m^ v. i. To run (to one's help). 
Hl>l acfa;. Slowly, gradually. 
%rt§ v. i. see W^. 
$R<^ n. Standard, standard-value. 
§[§ v. t. To wash. 
Wj| v. i. To tremble, quiver. 
Well Well cont. part. Shivering away. 

■i adv. Not, no. 

*tt*ft (or •iitfl) /. Carved work. 

«i<r/R /. Sight, glance, favourable regard. 

*{<[[ f. A river. 

«fHl<r//. Prayer. 

«-l^."Hl^l /. Politeness, gentleness. 

•iVHW^U Politely, gently. 
«H^ adj. New. 
«i*l /. A vein, 
•ife adv. Not. 
Heft /. A tube. 
«il£ -n. A corner, the point whero 

cross-roads meet, 
•il^d /. Displeasure, unwillingness, 

«il"^R*fl Unwillingly. 



VOCABULARY, 



259' 



rii^iyi'2?iT m. A Minister of Finance.. 
«tti adj. Small. 

Hid avd « (? i. Tin y- 

«il"H n. A name, 

«il>l By name,, called^ 
•ili^^ v, i. To bathe. 
Gi^M^lMlcl m. Impartiality, 
*{l£ai^ v. i,To come out, come to light. 
rftMoV/. Produce, 
ti£*tt«i n. Harm, loss.. 
^> adj. And, 

Mi^ v. t.To ripen, prepare (food&c.) 
M^l^ v. cause. To digest. 
M&Q acfo. Afterwards, then, 
■44.3, w. *. To fall. 

Mil <*i v, i. To fall, fall out. 
Vl'Rl (or M^Rl) /, Neighbourhood. 
M*?J adv. Also. 
M^l conj. But. 
"4t?l s, n. Oath, vow, 
M"^ m. n. A letter : see § 19. 

M^U^ By means of a letter, 
MS n. A verse. 
MR^jJ v. t. To marry r wed. 
MR^l ^.. v, caus. To give in marriage. 
\\<£ conj.. But, however, 
M^cll m, Fame, honour. 
"*R^t m. A foreign country, 
Wl<3 w. Coral. 
M^llsH w. Power, might, 
"Mftojl'H m. A consequence. 

Mill MR^WUUJ Fraught with evil 

consequences. 
"H$<yi /. Examination. 
\X\ c i'i v.t. To be absorbed in, devoted to. 
\fiiH adj. Holy. 



M<|vtel m. Costume. 

M^ adj. First. 

•4^<H<Ht£eti adv. First of all 

MUcj, v. i. To grow, grow ripe. 

Ml^fl/. A turban, 

H[&(£ adj. Hindmost, at the back. 

Mli/. Placing an idol in a temple. 
Mli ^cU ! in. Festival in commemo- 
ration of the placing of an idol in. 
a temple, 

"Ml^P w. Water. 

Htt«U6 ( or «Hlfc%ll& ) m. A king r an 
emperor. 

Ml"H^ v. t. To receive, to obtain : see §6 8.. 

MR^ adj. Foreign. 

HR"§1 m. A foreigner, stranger. 

MlHprep. Near. -«{1 MRl 

Ml£ v. t. To drink. 

^ u c1 adj. Ripe, mature. 

■|£? /. Capital fund, wealth. 

^| adj. Full, finished, complete. 
^3 adj. Perfect. 

^4 m. A male, a man. 

■*i&3 v. £. To ask, question. 

\**l /. Worship, adoration. 

t^ u. £. To make up (a deficiency), 

^fa<fl (or \*4\)f. The earth. 

"HCl ^^, v. i. To be formed, produced. 

"HSU prow. That (at some distance). 

^U m. A pice ; money. 

MISR^ v. t. To shout out, sound.. 

\\% adj. Soft. 

Mlci prow. Self. 
MK11«-Q «i^ Oneself, 

^l^ adj. Hollow. 

Mil See iRU. 

MiR m. Way, method, 

iRli adj. Open, revealed. 
M«lill Openly. 



26 C 



GUJARITI GRAMMAR.. 



M«vt/. Nation, people.. 

il**il^ prep. According to,. -«il U"Hl^. 

M^il m. A juncture,, occasion., 

MlQi m. Life. 

Ml^Ml/. Prayer. 

ll'HtHpct Loving devotion. 

%cl& /, Success,, victory.. 

\<s\ n. Fruit, reward. 

\\Hi[ m.. Advantage,, benefit,, gain.. 

3^3 v. i. To swell.. 

\^ m. Difference.. 

\Vttt w. Change,, fluctuation.. 

*>ib\ n. A goat.. 
*H 3 IU^ v. t. To spoil.. 
^cl n. Budget.. 
"i'flU nttm. Thirty- two*.. 
«HH 4^, v. if. To shut. 
<t^ aa!j. All, every. 

^i^ adu. Everywhere. 
^Mjj, v. i. To happen, to agree. 

"iKl ^ To be. 

-«} m^ °"l*^ & Agrees well. 

c& ... *u«l «i «i^ She did not get 

on well with. 
"iWH^ (or °l^l y l}) adv. Exactly. 

°i\[ ,J \\ ftcl Exactly. 
^I'-Hfl® adj. Equal. 

^"tft^l "Hl^H Persons who are 

equals, 
wtitt prep. Outside. -Kl °\&\?.. 

°\U\y\ From without. 
«H^ adv. Much, very. 

"l^R A long time, many times. 
«i^cR adj. Better. 
^t^lS m, An ox, bullock. 



°16U<51S. m.. Force, violence: 

"iPl./. The mu'azzin's call to prayer^ 

the azan. 
'-tWd /. Matter, affair.. 
<Hl<x*4/,The side. 

witavj M^4l Tbose on the side, 
wibl^d/. Construction, style of build- 
ing, proportions. 
"liH^j, e.v. To build.. 
H[H m. A father. 

uu^ 5vl^ Seeing her father's mods- 

of. life.. 
"tlMt m.. Father (familiar term). 
u llMlt adj.. Poor. 
°tRi4 n. Door, gate. 
^1=04 adj. Fine, minute. 
"11014 to. A child, an infant.. 
(*H*U| adj. Wretched, poverty-stricken^, 
«{lov£ acfy*. Another; 

s. n. Something else.. 
-fljH /. A shout, cry. 

•^H MUcft To raise a cry, to shout.. 
^ num. Two. 

^\^[ *u| The better of the twcv 

«kl* Twice. 
'j}(§ adj. Both. 
«U tw. An island. 
"Hi adj. Double. 

"Ul4 adv. Beyond a doubt, doubtless 
^i v. i. To sit. 

«te<J =^14$ To fit. 
vtf[ /. A woman. 
"lloV m. A load, burden. 
"llH m. Instruction. 
"}lH 4^41^1 To cause to instruct, 
"}l£t=i v } i. To speak, say. 

<H. 

HM m. A devotee. 






vocabulary; 



201 



Gt^ v. t. To learn, 

<H§)£lt 2 )er f' P ar t- Learned, 
<H^[l prep^ Towards, at. -41 <H<^fl.. 
<H"H^l m.. An eddy.. 
<HH n. Fear.. 

<HM \WU To entertain fears. 
eR Full (in comp.) 

<H^ovi c U«{l Early manhood. 
<H^«f*i c ll r tlHi<W Just in early man- 
hood, 
•ttcll /. Tide> high-tide. 
<nWR or better <HWR w*. A husband.. 
W(& v. t. To fill. 

9i([ aHlM^ v. t. To pay back, re- 
compense. 
<HC-UW/. Kindness., 

... %U*l <H«UW ^""Hll To treat kindly. 
(H£i ac7j. Kind, kindly, genial. 
W-{ vi. Birth, lifetime.. 
<HlW m. A brother, friend. 
<HPl m. A portion, part, share. 
OiPMoV adv. Seldom, hardly. 
Qi\X adj. Heavy. 
^1<H m. Rate, price. 
<HW^ v. impers. To seem, appear, 
^i adj. Evil, wicked ; s. n. Evil. 
QJ$t/. A mistake. 
^ilM (or <H'm) /. Land. 

*!♦ 

^itfl to. An assembly. 

H&£ or *t{\ «/4 v - *« To be § ir3, 
^i^ll m. A honey-comb, 
•*\*i to. Mind. 

*l«i Vcfci Heartily. 
»Ml/. Prohibition, order to the contrary. 
W{§ v. pass. To be honoured, hallowed. 
-*\\§ or >vfl <*3 «. *• To die. 



*R125S/. A mosque.. 
"hG^HI w. Glory, honour-.. 
"H<£1^1 m. A month. 
"H^Hct /. Labour, exertion. 
"^•Hfl H=ft To labour. 
"H^ v. i. To meet,, to be gained'. 

H«fi?l Together. 
"Hl 5 ^ -u. £. To ask. 
"HPl^U (or >ll?ftR) m. Tha month off 

Mags'er, November-December. 
~n(l conj. Therefore ;.prep. for the sake 

of. -^ *[&. 
"Hl^ adj. Bad. 

c& 'HI,! <HPl He may feel hurt,, 
annoyed. 
"Hl^U to. A man, person. 
■HU^ v. £.. To begin. 
"HH n. Respect, attention. 
>il«i^ v. t To obey, acknowledge,, 

believe in,, adore. 
"H\\ adj. Forgiven^ 

"H[\ h\$, v. t. To forgive. 
"Hl^l m. Meaning. 

"HRVl prep. By means of. -«{1 MR\cL 
o^ivl *us£i<tl mi^i Through an 
intermediary. 

"Hlfl *Vy\i v. t. To kill. 

?\\\ prow. My. 

Ml'H'H or "Hl^H adj. Known. 

"Hltl prep. Inside, within. -rfl, *u^. 

"Ht^^fl From within : see § 99. 
Pttl^l m. A minaret, pillar. 
fHPli /. A minute. 
Ml| a<3j. Sweet, also salty. 

s. to. Salt. 
^i[cl /. An idol. 
^UM^l to. Majority, full age, 



2G2 



GUJARATI GRAMMAR 



■HttilW/. Greatness, haughtiness. 
$U<llW3l "llC-i Haughty speech. 
SUiH J3»lVil Grown up, of age.. 
>U^ adj Great, largo.. 
SUi adj. Late. 

>U| n. The countenance, face, mouth. 
>UcR ?i. A pearl : see § 12. 
>Ucq adj. Insipid,, tasteless.. 

Vl^fl adj. Many-coloured.. 

^l <^Pl adj. Deplorable. 

^(wig n. A trumpet. 

VH^fli adj. Interesting.. 

tHct /. Fun, a game. 

^h^I m. A gallery. 

^cll m. Road, street. 

^cl v - i' To dwell, remain, last, be, 

^1<*H n. Kingdom, reign. 

Rl<*4 £}=j v. i. To reign. 
^U<£ v. *. To be a widow, become a 

widow. 
=0d (or ftfcl) /. Way, manner. 

^ctfHtct/. Gustom, manners. 
5<£l /. A custom, an idiom. 
%m (or 5HQl) n. A debt. 
mfl (or ^h^fj) w. A debtor. 
\\ n. Form, shape. 
\[<tf adv. Daily. 
Xu&f. Bread. 

GPiQJ prep. Up to, until. -it c-pn^i 

SPlfH/. A bit, bridle, rein. 

<ct3«i or CPH ??. A wedding. 

Gt^l wi. Vain repetitions. 

<Hl^l^ v. imprs. To be in contact with, 

to touch, to seem. 

-3 *U$ W\i To feel displeased. 



«M*t-/. Greed, desire. 

C-tr-13 ? '- '• To bring: see § 68. 

C^fl^ -prep. For, on accoui.t of. -^ <*{lQ„. 

& 3 Lifc w. p/. Glothes. 

Q^i m. An inscription.. 

&IMMCUS m. People's talk, common. 

scandal. 
M w.. Blood : see § 12.. 

H, 

Wcl 7??. & £ Time : see §19. 
«t>Him n. Praise. 

a^HU^ w. t to speak badly of, to blame,, 
^lli^ v. caus. To cause to strike, 

to sound. 
cpR p-ep. Without, except. -41 q^. 
q^ (or qai) prep. In the middle of.. 

»I?%<W At the very middle, 
^l^ C-PH2J Up to the very middle. 

^ItfflSU m. A whirlwind. 

q.1 prep. By means of, from, -rfl q^„ 

=L*l adj. Elder, eldest. 

°Ql *U<W£l w..The eldest son of a king.. 

"H^ v. i. To grow, increase.. 

^H[\ adv. More. 

Wl m. A whirlpool. 

WPti MM 6?l Must be in very 
great anxiety. 
"H^i'-Ml n. Boys and girls : see § 108, 
=1^ (or ei4) to. A year. 
^3 v. i. To dwell. 
<W>I3 or m>[\ \H v. t. To cling to. 
*ift\ or f{ik\ adj. Acquainted with> 

knowing. 
<Hm m. A tiger. 
°U<1/. A word, matter. 
•Hl^d /. A sponge. 
«U* /. Time. 



VOCABULARY. 



26'3 



mq, f. A step -well.. 
"Hl^ci v. t. To sow. 
(VhR to. Thought. 

(ci^lR H=U To think, consider, 
P-WR^, v. t. To think. 
-PuM^ or Riltf^j, v. t. To wind round. 
W&X Pui<fai &ti Had wrapped 
themselves in •••. 
Pl^fl m. A stranger, foreigner. 
PlSU y. Learning, attainments. 
PWlfe Learning &c. 
■Pi'tcft /. A request, petition. 
Pi«ii ^rep. Without, except. -HI (Vu. 
(Vi^<HKt m. A worshipper of Vishnu. 
«Q^lt /. A lyre. 

cft^l <HW ^11^ To sing to the accom- 
paniment of the lyre. 
^y num. Twenty. 
=U=J. v. t. To suffer, endure, bear. 
«fa n. Spite, malice. 

...'II §M* ^* 1{<J\i To avenge. 
^l*Q (or PrRQ) m. A devotee. 
e-HH&R (or 4<HR) m. Business. 
^H^&R ^l^l To transact business. 

*li m. Doubt. 

*lRcl/. Power. 

^i^sU /. A conch-shell, a shell. 

W«S m. A word. 

*R"HlW <r/^ t>. i. To feel ashamed. 

«j^ n. A city. 

*ll&"l§l to. A prince. 

*l&l^(i«i m. Shihab-ud-din. 

y&l<3,[|«i ^Ufl Shihab-ud-din Ghor 

( or Muhammad Ghorl ) 

1193-1205 A. D. 
yi<Ji /. A shawl. 



Reign 



£i pron. What ? 
~ *ll*(l WiLh what ? How 1 
f*K<HM TO A worshipper of Siva, 
?U<Hl/. Beauty. 
£il<HlH'HM adj* Beautiful 

*04<t adj. Strict, hard. 

HHQ adj. AIL 

=Hfl to, A saint, a holy man. 

Wl "Hi^l n. A gathering of devotees l 

see § 109. 
^t^A&fcl to. A gentleman. 
^.mCtI /. Prosperity, wealth. 
=Hu{H to. Connexion, reference, relation. 
^WHl prep. About, concerning. - 41 

WH'H to. A probability. 

RA<H<^ S. It is probable. 

^(H'Hsj cont. part. Probable. 
y<Hl /. An assembly. 
WHtt^H w. A place of assembly, a 

synagogue : see § 10 9. 
^fH<W /. Understanding. 

*CW *t^<* Hli^l 'MM &. The matter 

is easily understood. 
^MoVci v. t. To understand : see § 68. 
^"HPl"H to. Company, companionship. 
^Ml^H to. Ceremony, pomp. 

ttHl^fl with pomp. 
*R4R /. The Government. 
^V^l^or ^Ml^l ^v.t. To compare, 
*IW adj. Good. 

&l*a «« Best. 
^1<H pron. All. 

^i4l<n to. All time, eternity. 
*mi<n &^fl. For ever. 
^R/. n. Morning : see § 19, 



2Gi 



OUJARA'fi ftRAMMAE. 



: ^tt§<jV adv. Easily. 

^tl^ adj True. 

^U^Jl /. A dromedary. 

^ii^fl §M^ «l%fl Mounted on a drome- 
dary. 

^U^i wum. About seven : see .§ 38. 

^rll^ m. A. Companion. 

^\% m. a saint, an ascetic. 

*ti<H^ v.t To hear. 

^U>1 prep. Against, opposed to. 

• - Ml %ll5l Hi To oppose. 
^tl>ll adj. Opposite, on the other hand. 

,w Cl^ =Hl>U The other party, the 

opposite party. 

'W\R\ m. The essence, abstract, sum- 
mary. 

adv. In a word. 
: ^U$ adj. Good. 

%llfl ^1 adv. Well, thoroughly. 
1AI\ prep. For, in order to. -d ^\\. 
^lUiPlfl/. a birthday, the anniversary 

of the day of one's birth. 
*il^ld adj. Watchful. 

^l^td ^ To take heed. 
(^114 prep. Besides, except, -«i[ $mm 
HftH f. The border of a field, a field, 

the country. 
^"41 adj. Happy. 
^iclR m. a carpenter. 

^cli^l ^Istf m. a carpenter's measure 

of two feet. 



QH-L'i v. i. Tu improve. 

^^§i perf. part. Improved, reform^ 

ed, civilized. 
&U prep. Until, up to -dl ^fefl. 
^ adj. Pretty, beautiful. 
&tM3 v.t. To entrust. 
*tl (or y|) pron. All. 

%\^X WM Best. 
3?fl /. a woman, wife. 
WH.VK m. Disposition. 

&%f. A limit. 

mk adj. Light, of little weight. 

t^ adv. Now. 

&*$ v. i. To laugh, v.*> to laugh at> 

to ridfcule. 
%v\ n. A plough. 
&U,| n. A bone, 
&R /. A row, set. 
^XVAH. adv. In rows. 
&1<H acZy. Now, at present. 

&\<H<i adj. Of the present time, 
&i hh on. The Hindus. 
^i"H jm. An order, command. 

<4£"H 4^=11 To give an order. 
<|£l /. a bill of exchange, a hxtndk 
\<\ n. Love, affection. 
(§3 m. A motive, purpose, object. 
^1^ v. aux. To be. 

5JH^«v^/. A nerve. 



INDEX. 



[ The numbers refer to the pages ] 

*A,> (*0 inherent: 4/7, 11, 116. 

Ablative Case, its significations 



135, 136. 
Absolute Construction, 153. 
Accent, 9-11. 
Adjectival Prepositions, 99. 

Suffixes, 110, 111. 
Adjectives, 26 ff. 

,, Declension of: 210., 

211. 
Adverbs, 88-91. 
Adverbial Compounds, 114. 

„ Phrase*, 89-91. 
Adversative Conjunctions, 101, 
Agential Case, 134. 
Agreement between 

Adjective and Nouns, 122, 123. 

Predicate and Subjects, 124-126, 

Agreement of Infinitival Forms, 

126, 127. 
„ ,, Participles, 127. 

Allied Pronominal Forms, 31, 32. 
Alphabet, 2, 3. 
Alphabetical List of Prepositions, 

94-97. 
'Already,' rendering of': 79. 
* Always,' rendering of; 81. 

Amredita Compounds, 114. 
Anusvara, 8, 9, 

Sandhi, 198, 199. 



Apabhrams'a, 
Aphona, 172, 

34 



156, 157. 



Appositional Determinative Com- 
pounds, 112. 

Aryans, Migrations of early: 154. 
Aspirate, 3, 165, 17 1, 172, 
Attraction of — ^Hl ( adjectival ) to 

— S\, 28, 
Attributive Compounds, 113, 114. 
Auxiliary Verb, 

Conjugation: 53, 54, 212, 213. 

Infinitives and Participles: 51,52. 

Past Indefinite : 54. 

Present Continuous: 57. 

Present Indefinite : 54. 
Avyayibhava Samasa : 114. 

Bahuvrlhi Samasa, 113, 114, 
Balbodh Character, 1, 
Barakhadi, 5. 

Basal 2>U ( in declension of adjec- 
tives), 27. 
'Base' of Nouns, 24. 
Bases in declension of §, 29. 
Beames J„, 13. 
Bodia writing, 5. 
Bombay Cfujaratl, 177. 
Broad sound of a>U, 175, 176, 

Cardinals, 37-39. 
Cases, their significations : 1 2 8 ff„ 

„ of Nouns, 23. 
Case-endings, 23-2 5. 

,, added to Prepositions, 100, 
Causative Verbs, 75-77, 



266 



'GUJARATI GRAMMAR. 



Cerebrals, 3, 163. 
Characters, Balbodh : 1. 

,, Devanagari : 1-3. 

„ Gujarat! : 1-3. 

„ Nagari: 1^ 

Charotar, District of the :21, 22, 183. 
Charotar! Dialect, 1 83-187. 
Classes of Prepositions, 92, 93. 
Cognate Accusative, 130. 
Collectives, 41. 
Comparative Degree, 28, 136. 
Completive Compound Verbs, 79. 
Compound Tenses, 56 ff. 
Compound Verbs, classified : 77. 

„ „ Completive, 79. 

„ ,, Continuative,81, 

8"2. 

.,, „ Frequentative, 

80, 81. 

7 , „ Inceptive,83,84. 

„ „ Intensive,77-79. 

.„ „ Obiigative, 82, 

83. 

7 , „ Permissive, 83. 

„ „ Potential, 7 9,80. 

Compound Verbal Phrases, 84, 85. 
Compound Words, 111-114. 
Compounded Prepositions, 100. 
Concord, 122 ff. 

Conjugation of Auxiliary Verb,212 J 

213. 

„ „ Intransitive Verb, 

214-217. 
„ Passive Voice, 7 1,72. 
„ Transitive Verb, 2 18, 
219. 

;, „ «iysi, 66. 



a 

5) 



Conjunct Consonants, 3, 5, 6, T7H 

173. 
Conjunctions, 101-103. 
Connective Participle, 50, 153. 
Consonants, 161, 162, 166, 16 7-, 
Construction, Subjectival : 67-69. 
„ Agontial: 5 5,67-69. 

„ -with ^W^t, 67, 133, 

134. 
Continuative Compound Verbs, 8 1, 
82. 

Continuous Infinitive in — cl], 50, 

51, 139, 140, 148. 
Continuous Participle, 50,5 1,1 5 \ 
Contraction of — *Mla>l to 31 

(Nouns), 24. 
Co-ordinate Conjunctions, 101. 
Correlated Adverbs, 90. 
Correspondent Nouns in-aJU,-^ and 

-S, 14. 
Cowell, E. B } 176. 

Dates, Methods of expressing:; 40, 
41. 

Declension of Adjectives, 26-28, 

210, 211. 
Nouns, 24, 208, 
aMl, 33. [209. 

*>i\\ 30. 
^IM^, 30. 
31, £>, ^, 33, 34. 
iW, 35. 
$li$J, 34. 
d, 30. 
^icl, 31. 
&34. 
i29. 
Degrees of Comparison, 28, 136.' 












a 
a 
a 
a 
a 



>1 

u 
a 
if 






INDEX. 



267- 



Dentate, 3, 163. 
Denti-labials, 163, 171. 
.Demonstrative Pronouns, 31-34. 
Dependent Determinative Com- 
pounds,. 112. 
Devanagari Character,. 1-3. 
Dialocts of Gujara, I, 177 ff. 
'Dimmed ' Vowel, 171. 
Diphthongs, 163., 169 Note,. 172. 
Direct Narration, 121". 
Disjunctive Conjunctions, 101. 
Distributives (Numeral), 41. 
Double Causative Verbs, 76, 77. 
Doubled Conjunctions, 102> 103. 
D vand va Samasa, 111, 112. 
Dvigu Samasa, 112.. 

Elliptic Determinative Compounds, 

112, 113. 
Enclitic j^, 100, 

„ a, 99. 

„ Si, 88.. 
Euphonic Changes, 5 2, 53.. 
Exclamatory Precative, : 64. 

Feminines in a>U, 12, 13, 
Feminine Suffixes, 15. 

„. Terminations, 16, 17. 
Figures, names of : 37. 
First Personal Pronoun,, 29. 
Fractionate, 44-48.. 
Frequentative Compound Verbs, 

49, 80, 81. 
Frequentatives in — Hi, 65, 8'1. 
Future Indefinite Subjunctive, 61. 

„. „ Tense, 52-54,144. 

CJamadia Gujarat!, 178. 
Gaurjarl, 157.. 



Gender, 12 ff.'. 

Gender of Adjectives, 26. 

,, variable of Nouns, 20, 21.. 
Gendral Terminations, 12-14, 16, 

17. 

,, j, of Genitive, 2 5. 

Genitive Case, its significations :. 

140-142. 
Genitives declined, 27.. 
GkoseJ. J.: 174. 
Glottals,.163, 165. 
Government of Prepositions, 92,93. 
Grierson r .Geo. A, ; 154, 177. 
Groups of Inverse Terms, 203, 204. 
Gubernatis, Count Angelo de : 9.. 
GujaratI Character. 1 . 
Guria, 194.. 
Gutturals, 2, 163. 

* II' (&) between two vowel?, 5, 176,. 
Hal, 4 

'Have to,' rendering of:. 82.. 
Hemiphona, 172. 
Historic Present, 145. 146. 
Hoernle, A. F. R., 9, 48. 
Homonyms distinguished by gend- 
er, 17-20.. 
Honorific Plural, 122, 125. 
„ Pronoun, 30. 

Illative Conjunctions, 101.. 
Imperative Mood, 63, 64. 

„ Negative, 70. 

Impersonal Verbs, 74,132,133, 

134. 
Inceptive Compound Verbs, 83, 84. 
Indefinite Infinitive, 49, 51, 147, 
148. 
„ Pronouns, 35. 



2CS 



QUJAPvATI QBAMMAR. 



Indc-Aryan Vernaculars (lAVs), 

156, 157., 
Infinitives, 49, 50,. 147 ft. 
Infinitival Expressions, 85-87. 
Inherent Vowel (v\), 4, : 7, 11. 
„ „ omission of : 7^11, 

116.. 
Intensive Compound Verbs, 77-79.. 
^ or wfl, 102. 
„ •/, 88.. 
Intentional Infinitive, 51,., 149. 
,. Participle, 50, 51, 152. 

„ Past Tense, 5,7, 58. 

„ Present Tense, 67, 58. 

Interjections, 104, 105. 
Intermediate Languages, 155... 
Intermediate Vowels, 171. 
Interrogative Pronouns, 31,32, 34, 
35. 

Verb,. 69, 70.. 

Intransitive Verb, Conjugation of : 

214-217. 

„ „ Compound Tenses, 

(Subjunctive); 62. 

„ „ PastPerfect,58,59. 

„ „ Present Perfect,.58,59. 

Inverse Terms (Relationships), 203, 

204. 

Irregular Feminines, 16. 
„ Verbs. 64-66. 

Kacchi, 159. 
Karmadharaya Samasa, 112. 
Katihlawadi, Dialect, 191-193. 
Kharwas of Gogha, 177. 
Khodo, 4. 
Riclhorn, F. t 113. 



Labials, 3, 163. 
Language-area of Gujarat!, 159. 
'Linguistic Survey of India,' 177.. 
List of Grammatical Terms, 206, 
207,; 
„ „ Prepositions, 94-97; 
Locative Case, significations of : : 

136-140. 
Lunar Days and. Months, 40. 

Macalister, A. t 160; 
Madhya-Des'a, 154. 
Madhyamapadalopi Samasa, II Si. 
Masculine in d. 14. 
Masculines in tl, 1 3. 
Masculine Terminations, 16.. 
'Midland,' 154 ff. 
Montgomery, R. ; 79.. 
Month, days of Lunar: 40.. 
Months, Lunar: 40. 
Mood, Imperative : 63, 64; 

„. Subjunctive: 60-63. 
Multiples of Ten, Names of : 38,, 
Multiplicational Forms, 42-44. 
Multiplicatiyes, 42. 
MusalmanI Gujarat),. 177,^ 178». 
Mutes, 2, 3. 

„ nasal: 173. 

„ non-nasal :, 172. 

Nagarl Character, 1. 
Nagarl Gujarat!, 177. 
Names of Relations, 200 ff. 
Narasimha Rav Bholdnath, 176;. 
Nasal mutes, 173. 
„ vowels, 173. 
Nasals and non-nasals, 162. 
Negative Imperative, 70, 
Verb, 70. 



INDEX, 



269; 



Neuter in $, 13. 

„ ,,^1,12,13. 

„ Terminations, 17. 
Notes on Prepositions, 97-99. 
Noun, 12 ff. 
Nouns, Declension of: 208, 209. 

,, fem. and neut : 21. 

„ masc. and fern, : 20;. 

,, masc. and neut. : 20., 
Number of Gujarat! speakers, 159. 

„ (of Nouns), 21, 22.. 
Number?, Secret: 39.. 
Numeral Determinative Compounds, 

112. 
Numerals, 37 ff.. 
Numerical Symbols, 37". 

Object, directs 130, 132. 
Object, indirect: 130, 132, 
Objective Case, its significations, 

131-134. 
Obligative Compound Verbs, 82,83. 
Origin of *{{[■, 48, 

,,, „ H> 48 - 

„ *14, 48. 
Order of words in a sentence, 119, 
Ordinals, 39. [120. 

Oriental Congress (Geneva), 2, 115. 
Original Case -endings, 25. 
« Outer Band,' 154, 15 5. 
Outer Languages, 155. 

Palatals, 2, 163, 
Pali, 156, 157. 
Palmer, E. H., 119. 
ParsI Gujarat!, 177, 178, 179, 
180, 181. 
,, „ Tense-forms, 53,56. 

Participles, 50, 51, 151-153. 



Passive Voice, 71-74. 
Past Continuous Tense, 57, 14*6., 
Past indefinite Subjunctive, 6 1,1.4 5, 
„. Tense, 52, 54, 5 5, 
144, 145. 
,, Intentional, 57, 5 8. 
„ Perfect (Intrans.), 58, 59. 
„. „ (Trans.), 59, 60, 
Patnull Gujarat!, 177. 
Paftan! Dialect, 187-191. 
Perfect Infinitive, .4.9, 5.1, 150. 

„ Participles, 5 0,5 1,1 5 2, 15 3. 
Permissive Compound Verbs, 83. 
Personal Pronouns, 29, 30. 

„ „ Exclusive, 30.. 

,, ,, Inclusive, 30v 

Phrases, adverbial : 89-91. 

„. compound verbal : 84^85* 

Phoneantn, 172. 
Place at which, 141. 
,, from which, 141. 
„ in which, 136, 138,, 14 2;. 
„ near which, 136. 
,, on which, 136. 
,, within which, 138. 
Plural of Adjectives, 26. 

,, ,, Nouns, 21. 
Plurals without a singular, 22. 
Position of Adjective, 120. 
„ „ Adverb, 120. 
„ „ Infinitive of Purpose^ 

120. 
„ „ Object, 119. 
,, ,, Subject, 119. 
,, „ Subordinate Sentence, 

121. 
„ ,, Verb, 119. 
Potential Compound Verbs, 79,80,] 



270; 



GUJARATI; GRAAEMAR. 



Participles, Hsusivea^ 73, 74.. 
Tower of ^{[, 47. 

.. „ ^4* 4 6, 47. 
Powers of ^ll^, 4 5, 4G. 

» „ *% 46 - 
„ „ *Ul,.47,.48.. 
Prakrts,. 155-158. 
Precative Forms, 6 4. 
Precedence of Persons, 12 6.. 
Prefixes, 106,. 107.. 
Prepositions, 92 ff. 
Prepositional Phrases, 99. 
Present Continuous Tense, 56, 57, 
145,46. 
,, Indefinite Subjunctive, 60, 61. 
„ „ Tense,52-54,1 43,144. 
„ Intentional Tense, 57*, 58. 
,, Perfect (Intrans.), 58, 59. 
„ (Trans.). 59, 60. 
Price, 138, 139,. 141. 
Primary Accent, 9, 10. 
Pronominal Adjectives, 32, 36.. 

„ Adverb?, 32.. 

Pronouns, 29 ff.. 

Correlative: 31, 32,. 34. 
Demonstrative, 31—34. 
Indefinite : 35. 
Interrogative: 31,32,34, 

35. 
Personal: 29, 30. 
Possessive : 35, 36. 
Reflexive: 31, 36. 
Relative: 31-34. 
Proverbs, 247 ff. 



>> 
■?• 
>> 
it 

>> 

n 



Rarer homonyms distinguished by 
Gender, 19, 20. 
Reduplicated Adverbs, 90. 

M Compounds. 114. 



Reflexive Pronouns, 31', 36; 
Relations, by Marriage :. 202. 

„ Col'lataral Branches : 201!.. 

,, Direct Line : 200. 
Reported Speech, 121. 
Royal Asudic Society, 115» 

Samasa, 111 ff. 

Samvrta Vowel a*"., 171.. 

Sandhi, 195-196. 

Sanskrit, 15 5, 15 6, 157. 

Sarrafl writing, 5. 

S'aurasenl Prakrt, .156, 1 5 7, . 1 5 8. . 

Saurastra, 158. 

Saurastrl Prakrt, 156, 157, 158.. 

Secondary. Accent, 10, LI. 

Secret Numbers, 39. 

Semivowels, 3, 161, 162, 166; 
167, 171. 

Sibilants, 3, 172. 

Sign, nasal (Anusvara) : 2,8,9,162. 

Sigriy spirant (Visarga) : 2,165,172. 

Simple Tenses, 52-5 5. 
,, Vowels, 171. 

Singulars treated as Plurals, 22. 

Sonants and Surds, 160,161,164. 
165.. 

Squares, multiplicational forms for:: 
42, 43. 

Steele, J. F. : 45. 

Stem of Passive Voice, 71. 

Step-relations, 203. 

Subjective Case, its significations : 
128-131. 

Subjectival Construction with Tran- 
sitive Verbs, 67, 68. 

Subjunctive Mood ( Compound 
Tenses), 61-63. 



INDEX. 



271 



Subjunctive Mood ^Simple Tenses), 

60-61. 
Subordinate Conjunctions, 102. 
Substantival Suffixes, 109, 110. 
Substitutes for Passive Voice, 7 2,7 3, 
: Suffixed Prepositions, 99-. 
„ 514, 35, 39. 
„ <*, 88. 
•Suffixes, 108-111, 

of Feminine Gender, 1 5, 
Superlative Degree, 28, 136, 
SuratI Dialect, 178-182. 
Sweet, H. : 165, 

Tatpurusa Samasa, 11 2-, 113. 
Taylor, J. v. S. : 154. 
Tenses, their significations : 143 ff, 
,, Compound : 5 6 ff. 
„ „ (Subjunctive):62,63. 

„ Simple : 52-55. 
„ ,., (Subjunctive): 6 0,61. 

Terminations for Gender, 12,14,16, 

17. 
'Time at which, 137, 139. 
„ during whicb, 139, 142. 
„ in which, 137. 
.„ since which, 137, 142. 
"Transitive Verbs, Conjugation : 

218, 219. 
Transitive Verbs construed as 

Intransitives, 67, 68. 
Transitive Verbs with Subjectival 
construction. 67, 68. 

Transitive Verbs, Past Perfect: 59, 

60. 



rransiiive Verbs Perf. Subjunct : 63. 
.,., „ Present Perfect : 59. 

Transitives derived from Intransi- 
tives, 74, 75. 
Transliterated Passages, 116-118, 
Transliteration Equivalents, 2,3„ 

115. 
Triple Consonants, 6 V 

Vanlai writing. 5. 
Variable Gender of Nouns, 20, 2 1, 
Verb, 49 ff, 
,,, Interrogative: 69, 70. 
,, Negative : 70. 
Verbs, Causative : 75-77. 
„ Compound : 77-84. 
,, Double Causative : 76, 77- 
„ of Incomplete Predication, 
132. 

Verbal Phrases, Compound : 84,85, 
Virama, 4, 5. 
Visarga, 9, 165, 172. 
Visarga-Sandhi, 196, 197. 
Vocative Case, 23, 24. 
Vowel, inherent : 4. 
Vowels, 2, 161, 162| 171. 
„ coalescent : 4, 5. 

Vowel-finish (visarga), 9, 165, 172. 
Vowel-Sandhi, 195, 126. 
Vrddhi, 194. 

Word-formation, 106 ff. 
Whitney, W. D. : 24, 207. 






ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA. 



J Paee 4 line 7 after farman add the Persian ^>l>;3 
„ ,, ■„ 14 before ^H^W insert *>\. 

>, 6 ,, 18 for rs'a read rsa. 

„ 7 „ 20 Vj Krisria „ Krsna. 

,, 17 „ 23 •„ o „ o( 

,, 22 ,-, 2 insert Selection from Records of Bombay GoVt. 

No. CXLVII, New Series, p. 35. 
„ 39 ,, 32 for 1006th read 10006tb. 

40 „ 18 ,, *i\m „ %*. 

62 „ 17 ,, rr „ or. 

69 ., 19 ,, lavguge ,, language. 

25 ,-, Gnerally „ Generally. 

110 „ 25 ,, haviny „ having. 

„ 113 „ 21 f , Dvigu-tatpurusha „ Dvigu-tatpurusa. 

„ „ „ 27 „ ?&i*H „ fa&aH. 

Pages 116, 117. transliterate & not by ce but by che. 
Page 117 line 35 „ Midi not by paco but by pacho. 

155 ,, 31 for Ayans read Aryans. 

156 lines 9, 10 „ Maharastri „ Maharastr!. 



» 






„ 157 line 3 „ Saurastrl „ SaurastrT. 



„ „ „ •„ Maghadbi ,> MagadK 

166 „ 19 ,, Bpeath „ Breath. 

168 „ 12 insert tf - in the blank space. 

ISO „ 3 5 after <i[\\ add d. 

194 }J 15 from a, delete the comma. 

195 „ 25 for vowels read vowel. 
204 „ 22 „ or »u?U „ or *u5U. 
208 „ 19 „ M-5* „ &l£l-»U. 
213 „ 5 >, *|M „ ^\ 



In the transliteration of Gujarat! words a diacritical mark has in a few 
instances dropped out or suffered displacement; but in all such cases 
the reader will have no difficulty in making the necessary correction. 

SURAT : 

PRINTED AT THE IRISH PRESBYTERIAN MISSION TRESS, 









,o s ■ 



'J- y 



^ C^ 



% 






a- 






\ 



^ '^ 



> 












A* 



















6 






■? ■ 









V .-ft 6 o 

-^ A^ 






\° <2* 



,1 



'"* ,<£ 






cfr. 






<lV 






^ -nj 



1 














V>^ 



$° on •. - ' «>° v\ A v.. %- 



^ V* 



\° °<, 



^o< 







.0^' " « 












A 

Oeacidified using the Bookkeeper process 

Treatment Date: July 2007 















Treatment Date: July 2007 

PreservationTechnoloqies 

AW0RL0L "°" ""-M PRESERVATION 

"1 Thomson Park Drive 



"1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, pa 16066 
(724)779-2111 




"v-. 



^°v; 



\< 






W 

A -r, 






a." ~>- 

'- tv ^P 1* x 




A 












V ^ 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



019 359 445 1 



